Alarm Monitoring User Guide - Access Control and Physical Security

Alarm Monitoring

User Guide

Alarm Monitoring User Guide

Table of Contents

Introduction .......................................................................29

Chapter 1: Introduction .............................................................31

Conventions Used in this Documentation ..................................................... 31

How this Document is Organized .................................................................. 31

Getting Started .............................................................................................. 32

Passwords ....................................................................................................................... 32

Enable/Disable Strong Password Enforcement .............................................................. 32

Error Messages ............................................................................................................... 33

Accounts ......................................................................................................................... 33

Log In .............................................................................................................................. 34

Single Sign-On .............................................................................................. 36

Directory Accounts .......................................................................................................... 36

Automatic and Manual Single Sign-On ........................................................................... 37

Configure Single Sign-On ............................................................................................... 37

Log In Using Automatic Single Sign-On .......................................................................... 37

Log In Using Manual Single Sign-On .............................................................................. 39

Troubleshoot Logging In ............................................................................... 40

Assigning Directory and Internal Accounts to the User ................................. 41

Switch Log On ................................................................................................................. 41

Log Out of the Application ............................................................................................... 42

Exit the Application .......................................................................................................... 42

revision 1

— 3

Table of Contents

Chapter 2: Main Alarm Monitoring Window ............................43

Menus and Toolbars ..................................................................................... 43

Toolbar Procedures ....................................................................................... 56

How to Use the Toolbars ................................................................................................. 56

Alarm Monitoring Status Bar ........................................................................................... 56

System Administrator Procedures ....................................57

Chapter 3: System Administrator Procedures ........................59

Administrative Procedures Checklist ............................................................. 59

Access Control Procedures Checklist ........................................................... 60

Intrusion Detection Alarm Definitions ............................................................ 61

Alarm Monitoring Operator Procedures ........................................................ 61

Intrusion Detection Device Statuses ............................................................. 62

Monitoring Procedures Checklist .................................................................. 62

Video Procedures Checklist .......................................................................... 62

Operator Procedures ..........................................................65

Chapter 4: Set Alarm Monitoring Display Options .................67

System Status Options Window .................................................................... 67

Display Option Procedures ........................................................................... 69

Select Event Types to Monitor ........................................................................................ 69

Select Column Configuration .......................................................................................... 70

Set Automatic Display Options ........................................................................................ 71

Display Multiple Windows ............................................................................................... 72

4 —

revision 1


Select Hardware View Options ....................................................................................... 72

Chapter 5: Monitor Devices ......................................................73

System Status Window ................................................................................. 73

Device Groups Window ................................................................................. 74

Device Group Test Mode Window ................................................................ 76

Device Group Icons ....................................................................................... 76

Hardware Device Icons ................................................................................. 77

Device Status ................................................................................................ 78

Offline Hardware Devices ............................................................................................... 79

Procedures for Monitoring Devices ............................................................... 80

Update the Hardware Status ........................................................................................... 80

Perform a Device Test .................................................................................................... 81

Locate or Search for a Device ......................................................................................... 82

View the Last Connection Time for Dialup Panels .......................................................... 82

Download the B.A.S.I.S. Database or Firmware ............................................................. 82

View the Controller Properties ........................................................................................ 83

Chapter 6: Trace Alarms and Events .......................................85

Trace Configuration Window Overview ......................................................... 85

Trace Configuration Window ......................................................................... 86

Procedure for Tracing ................................................................................... 87

Trace Alarms and Events ................................................................................................ 87

Chapter 7: Video Monitoring .....................................................89

Video Monitoring Window ............................................................................. 89

Video Monitoring Window Procedures .......................................................... 90

revision 1

— 5


View the Video Tour ........................................................................................................ 90

Video Player .................................................................................................. 90

Daylight Saving Time ...................................................................................................... 93

Customize Overlay Information Dialog ............................................................................ 94

Performance Dialog ........................................................................................................ 94

Video Monitoring Features ............................................................................ 96

Buffering Streaming Video .............................................................................................. 96

Browser-based VideoViewer ........................................................................................... 96

Camera Lookup ............................................................................................................... 97

Two-way Audio ................................................................................................................ 97

Video Monitoring Procedures ........................................................................ 99

Launch Video (Live/Recorded) From a Camera ............................................................. 99

Export Video to a File .................................................................................................... 100

Load and View a Video File .......................................................................................... 100

Monitor Video of a Specific Camera .............................................................................. 100

Switch Camera Views Displayed in Video Player ......................................................... 101

Monitor Video of Multiple Cameras (Successively) ....................................................... 101

Capture an Image ......................................................................................................... 102

Create a Video Event .................................................................................................... 102

Automatically Launch both Live and Recorded Video on Alarm ................................... 102

Event Configuration/Search Dialog ............................................................. 104

Event Configuration/Search Dialog Menu Options ........................................................ 105

Event Configuration/Search Dialog Fields .................................................................... 107

Event Configuration/Search Dialog Procedures .......................................... 109

Open the Event Configuration/Search Dialog ............................................................... 109

Configure Event Properties ........................................................................................... 110

6 —

revision 1


Set Region of Interest ................................................................................................... 111

Video Search Performance Requirements .................................................................... 113

Search Video/Audio ...................................................................................................... 113

View Search Results ..................................................................................................... 113

Video Channel Configuration Dialog ........................................................... 114

Open the Video Channel Configuration Dialog ............................................................. 115

Configure Video Channel Parameters .......................................................................... 115

Matrix View .................................................................................................. 116

Select Template Dialog ................................................................................................. 116

Save Layout Dialog ....................................................................................................... 117

Load Layout Dialog ....................................................................................................... 118

Matrix View Procedures .............................................................................. 118

Monitor Video in Matrix View ......................................................................................... 118

Create a Matrix Layout .................................................................................................. 119

Save a Matrix Layout .................................................................................................... 120

Load a Matrix Layout ..................................................................................................... 120

Pan, Tilt, and Zoom ..................................................................................... 121

Configure PTZ with LNVR or LNVS Machines .............................................................. 121

Configure PTZ with all other Digital Video Recorders ................................................... 121

Using PTZ in the Video Player ...................................................................................... 122

PTZ Options Dialog ....................................................................................................... 123

PTZ Control Adjustment Parameters ............................................................................ 125

PTZ Joystick Selection .................................................................................................. 128

Configure PTZ Locking ................................................................................................. 128

Presets .......................................................................................................................... 128

PTZ Tours ..................................................................................................................... 132

revision 1

— 7


Remote Monitor ........................................................................................... 135

LNVR Security ............................................................................................................... 135

Add Cameras to a Remote Monitor ............................................................................... 136

Remote Monitor Right-click Options .............................................................................. 136

Local Monitor Window in Alarm Monitoring ................................................................... 137

Remote Monitor Application .......................................................................................... 138

Application Profiles ........................................................................................................ 139

Chapter 8: Video Verification ..................................................143

Video Verification Configuration Dialog ....................................................... 143

Digital Video Verification ............................................................................. 144

Digital Video Verification Window ................................................................................. 144

Digital Video Verification Procedures ............................................................................ 144

Standard Video Verification ......................................................................... 145

Standard Video Verification Window ............................................................................. 145

Standard Video Verification Procedures ....................................................................... 146

Chapter 9: Control Devices and Areas ..................................149

Grant / Deny Pop-up Window ..................................................................... 149

Grant / Deny Pop-up Window Procedures .................................................. 150

Grant or Deny Access ................................................................................................... 150

Right-click Options to Control Devices and Areas ...................................... 151

General Right-click Options .......................................................................................... 151

Monitor Zone Right-click Options .................................................................................. 152

Access Panel and Alarm Panel Right-click Options ...................................................... 152

Intrusion Area Right-click Options ................................................................................. 153

Intrusion Panel Right-click Options ............................................................................... 153

8 —

revision 1


Intercom Right-click Options ......................................................................................... 153

Intrusion Door Right-click Options ................................................................................. 154

Intrusion Relay Right-click Options ............................................................................... 154

Intrusion Zone Right-click Options ................................................................................ 154

Reader Right-click Options ........................................................................................... 155

Alarm Mask Group Right-click Options ......................................................................... 155

Intrusion Mask Group Right-click Options ..................................................................... 155

Function List Right-click Options ................................................................................... 156

Action Group Right-click Options .................................................................................. 156

Anti-Passback Area Right-click Options ........................................................................ 156

Guard Tour Right-click Options ..................................................................................... 156

Remote Monitor Right-click options .............................................................................. 157

Remote Monitor Video Cell Right-click Options ............................................................ 157

Single and Double Left-click Mode .............................................................. 157

Activate Single or Double Left-click Mode ..................................................................... 158

Select a Device in Single or Double Left-click Mode ..................................................... 158

Execute a Command in Single or Double Left-click Mode ............................................ 159

Chapter 10: Monitor Alarms ....................................................161

Alarm Icons ................................................................................................. 161

Pending Alarms Window ............................................................................. 162

Procedure for Monitoring Alarms ................................................................ 163

Sort Alarms ................................................................................................................... 163

Chapter 11: Acknowledge Alarms ..........................................167

Alarm Acknowledgment Window ................................................................. 167

Alarm Acknowledgment Procedures ........................................................... 169

revision 1

— 9


Acknowledge an Alarm ................................................................................................. 169

Fast/Group Acknowledge Alarms .................................................................................. 170

Delete an Alarm ............................................................................................................ 171

Delete All Alarms ........................................................................................................... 172

Display a Map ............................................................................................................... 172

Example of a Map ........................................................................................ 173

View Linked Maps ......................................................................................................... 173

Send an E-mail .............................................................................................................. 174

Send a Page ................................................................................................................. 176

Chapter 12: Muster Mode ........................................................177

Overview of Hazardous / Safe Locations .................................................... 177

Hard APB in Hazardous Locations ................................................................................ 177

Soft APB in Safe Locations ........................................................................................... 178

Enable Global APB ....................................................................................................... 178

Mustering Inside Hazardous Locations ....................................................... 178

General Constraints of Muster Mode .......................................................... 180

Recommendations for Optimal Reliability ................................................... 180

Muster Mode in Main Alarm Monitoring Window ......................................... 182

Hazardous / Safe Locations in System Status Window .............................. 182

Muster Mode Procedures ............................................................................ 183

Initiate Muster Mode ...................................................................................................... 183

Reset Muster Mode ....................................................................................................... 183

Reports ........................................................................................................ 184

Run Muster and Occupancy Reports ............................................................................ 185

Moving Badges ........................................................................................... 185

10 —

revision 1


Move All Badges from an Area ..................................................................................... 186

Move a Single Badge from an Area .............................................................................. 186

Advanced Operator Procedures ......................................187

Chapter 13: Cardholders Folder .............................................189

Cardholders Folder Procedures .................................................................. 192

Cardholder Search Capabilities .................................................................................... 193

Search for a Cardholder Record ................................................................................... 194

Retrieve the Most Recent Search Results .................................................................... 195

Change the Cardholders Folder View Options .............................................................. 195

Keyboard Wedge Settings Window ............................................................. 197

CAC Barcodes .............................................................................................................. 198

Scanning Barcodes with a Wedge Scanner .................................................................. 198

Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Procedures ......................................... 202

Configure a Wedge Scanner ......................................................................................... 202

Verify Fingerprint(s) Dialog ......................................................................... 203

Fingerprint Verification with PIV Cards ......................................................................... 203

Verify Fingerprint(s) Dialog Procedures ...................................................... 204

Verify Fingerprints from a PIV Card .............................................................................. 204

Import Fingerprints from a PIV Card ............................................................................. 204

Overwrite Facial Image Dialog .................................................................... 205

Overwrite Facial Image Dialog Procedure .................................................. 206

Cardholder Form ......................................................................................... 206

Cardholder Form Overview ........................................................................................... 206

Import Cardholder/Visitor Data .................................................................... 207

revision 1

— 11


Prerequisites ................................................................................................................. 207

Corex Business Card Scanner ...................................................................................... 209

GSC (iCLASS) Card ...................................................................................................... 209

GSC (DESFire) Card ..................................................................................................... 209

ID Scan ......................................................................................................................... 210

ID-Check Terminal ........................................................................................................ 210

PIV Card ........................................................................................................................ 211

TWIC Card .................................................................................................................... 211

Import Cardholder Data ................................................................................................. 212

Cardholder Form Procedures ...................................................................... 212

Add a Cardholder Record ............................................................................................. 212

Modify a Cardholder Record ......................................................................................... 213

Delete a Cardholder Record ......................................................................................... 213

Delete a Selected Group of Cardholder Records .......................................................... 214

Destroy all Cardholder Data .......................................................................................... 214

Visitor Form ................................................................................................. 214

Visitor Form Procedures ............................................................................. 216

Import Visitor Data ........................................................................................................ 216

Add a Visitor Record ..................................................................................................... 216

Modify a Visitor Record ................................................................................................. 217

Delete a Visitor Record ................................................................................................. 217

Segments Form ........................................................................................... 218

Segments Form Overview ............................................................................................. 218

Segments Form Procedures ....................................................................... 219

Modify a Cardholder’s Segment Assignment ................................................................ 219

Change a Group of Cardholder's Segments ................................................................. 219

12 —

revision 1


Badge Form ................................................................................................ 221

Badge Form (View Mode) ............................................................................................. 221

Badge Form (Modify Mode) .......................................................................................... 221

Badge Form Procedures ............................................................................. 226

Add or Replace a Badge Record .................................................................................. 226

Modify a Badge Record ................................................................................................. 227

Modify Badges for a Selected Group of Cardholders .................................................... 228

Encoding Prerequisites ............................................................................... 229

Encode a Badge ............................................................................................................ 230

Delete a Badge Record ................................................................................................. 230

Access Levels Form .................................................................................... 231

Access Levels Form (View Mode) ................................................................................. 231

Access Levels Form (Modify Mode) .............................................................................. 231

Access Levels Form Procedures ................................................................ 232

Assign Access Levels to a Badge ................................................................................. 232

Assign Intrusion Authority to the Cardholder ................................................................. 234

Assign Activation and Deactivation Dates to Access

Levels ......................................................................................................................... 235

Assign Access Levels to a Selected Group of Cardholders .......................................... 236

Remove Access Levels From a Selected Group of

Cardholders ............................................................................................................... 237

Modify Access Levels Assignments .............................................................................. 238

Precision Access Form ............................................................................... 238

Precision Access Form Procedures ............................................................ 239

Assign Precision Access Groups to a Badge ................................................................ 239

Remove Precision Access Groups From a Badge ........................................................ 240

Biometrics Form .......................................................................................... 240

revision 1

— 13


Biometrics Form Procedures ....................................................................... 241

Search for a Cardholder’s Biometric Record ................................................................. 241

Visits Form .................................................................................................. 242

Visits Form (View Mode) ............................................................................................... 242

Visits Form (Modify Mode) ............................................................................................ 242

Visits Form Procedures ............................................................................... 243

Modify a Cardholder’s Permission to Have Visitors ...................................................... 243

Assets Form ................................................................................................ 244

Assets Form Procedures ............................................................................. 245

Assign an Asset to a Cardholder ................................................................................... 245

Unassign an Asset ........................................................................................................ 245

Modify the Asset Group ................................................................................................. 245

Directory Accounts Form ............................................................................. 246

Directory Accounts Form Procedures ......................................................... 246

Link a Cardholder to a Directory Account ..................................................................... 246

Unlink a Directory Account ............................................................................................ 247

Logical Access Form (ActivIdentity Sub-tab) .............................................. 248

Logical Access Form - VeriSoft Sub-tab ..................................................... 249

Guard Tours Form ....................................................................................... 251

Guard Tours Form Procedures ................................................................... 252

Assign Guard Tour Security Clearance Levels to a Cardholder ................................... 252

Reports Form .............................................................................................. 252

Reports Form Procedures ........................................................................... 253

Run a Cardholder Report .............................................................................................. 253

Offline Form ................................................................................................ 254

14 —

revision 1


Offline Form Overview .................................................................................................. 254

Offline Form Procedures ............................................................................. 255

Configure an Offline Reader ......................................................................................... 255

Download Reader Information to a PDA ....................................................................... 255

Chapter 14: Badge Print Preview Window ............................257

Badge Printing Form ................................................................................... 258

Badge Print Preview Window Procedures .................................................. 259

Preview and Print a Badge ............................................................................................ 259

Chapter 15: Visits Folder ........................................................263

Visit Right-Click Menu ................................................................................................... 264

Sign In Visit(s) Window ............................................................................... 266

Print Badge(s) Window ............................................................................... 268

Visits Folder Procedures ............................................................................. 268

Visit Search Capabilities ............................................................................................... 269

Search for All Visits to a Selected Cardholder .............................................................. 270

Search for All Visits by a Selected Visitor ..................................................................... 270

Search for Scheduled, Active or Finished Visits ........................................................... 271

Search for All Visits for a Specific Date or Time ........................................................... 271

Retrieve the Most Recent Visit Search Results ............................................................ 273

Find a Cardholder or Visitor Associated with a Visit ..................................................... 273

Add a Visit Record ........................................................................................................ 273

Modify a Visit Record .................................................................................................... 278

Delete a Visit Record .................................................................................................... 278

Print a Visitor Badge ..................................................................................................... 279

Sign in a Previously Scheduled Visit and Print a Badge ............................................... 279

revision 1

— 15


Sign Out a Visit ............................................................................................................. 280

Visit Form .................................................................................................... 281

Visit Form Overview ...................................................................................................... 281

Select Date(s) Window................................................................................. 282

Select Time Range Window ........................................................................ 284

Status Search Form ..................................................................................... 285

Status Search Form Overview ...................................................................................... 285

Details Form ................................................................................................ 287

Details Form Overview .................................................................................................. 287

E-mail Form ................................................................................................. 288

E-mail Form Overview ................................................................................................... 288

Add Recipient Window ................................................................................ 290

Reports Form .............................................................................................. 291

Reports Form Overview ................................................................................................ 291


Run a Visit Report from the Visits Folder ...................................................................... 291

Select Host Wizard: Search Form................................................................ 293

Select Host Wizard: Search Form Overview ................................................................. 293

Select Host Wizard: Select Form ................................................................. 295

Select Host Wizard: Select Form Overview .................................................................. 295

Select Visitor Wizard: Search Form ............................................................ 297

Select Visitor Wizard: Search Form Overview .............................................................. 297

Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add Form ................................................... 298

Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add Form Overview .................................................... 299

Select Visitor Wizard: Add Form ................................................................. 300

16 —

revision 1


Select Visitor Wizard: Add Form Overview ................................................................... 300

Select Visitor Wizard: Select Form .............................................................. 302

Select Visitor Wizard: Select Form Overview ................................................................ 302

Select Import Source Window ..................................................................... 303

Chapter 16: Assets Folder ......................................................305

Assets Form ................................................................................................ 306

Assets Form Procedures ............................................................................. 308

Add an Asset ................................................................................................................. 308

Modify an Asset ............................................................................................................. 309

Delete an Asset ............................................................................................................. 309

Assign a Cardholder to an Asset ................................................................................... 309

Search for an Asset Record .......................................................................................... 310

Retrieve the Most Recent Search Results .................................................................... 310

Add an Asset Type/Subtype .......................................................................................... 311

Asset Classes Form .................................................................................... 312

Asset Classes Form (View Mode) ................................................................................. 312

Asset Classes Form (Modify Mode) .............................................................................. 312

Asset Classes Form Procedures ................................................................. 314

Assign Classes to an Asset ........................................................................................... 314

Modify an Asset Classes Assignment ........................................................................... 314

Add Asset Groups and Classes .................................................................................... 315

Assignments Form ...................................................................................... 316

Assignments Form Procedures ................................................................... 317

Assign a Cardholder to an Asset ................................................................................... 317

Unassign an Asset ........................................................................................................ 318

revision 1

— 17


Search for a Cardholder Assigned to an Asset ............................................................. 318

Reports Form .............................................................................................. 319


Run an Asset Report ..................................................................................................... 321

Chapter 17: Reports Folder ....................................................323

Report Configuration Form .......................................................................... 324

Report View Filter Window .......................................................................... 325

Report Configuration Form Procedures ...................................................... 327

Add a Report ................................................................................................................. 327

Modify a Report ............................................................................................................. 328

Delete a Report ............................................................................................................. 328

Filter The Report View .................................................................................................. 329

Preview and Print a Report ........................................................................................... 329

Reader Reports Form ................................................................................. 329

Reader Reports Form Overview ................................................................................... 329

Reader Reports Form Procedures .............................................................. 332

Run a Reader Report .................................................................................................... 332

Alarm Panel Reports Form .......................................................................... 333

Alarm Panel Reports Form Overview ............................................................................ 333

Alarm Panel Reports Form Procedures ...................................................... 336

Run an Alarm Panel Report .......................................................................................... 336

Anti-Passback Reports Form ...................................................................... 337

Anti-Passback Reports Form Overview ........................................................................ 337

Anti-Passback Reports Form Procedures ................................................... 340

Run an Anti-Passback Report ....................................................................................... 340

18 —

revision 1


Date/Time Reports Form ............................................................................. 341

Date/Time Reports Form Overview ............................................................................... 341

Date/Time Reports Form Procedures ......................................................... 345

Run a Date/Time Report ............................................................................................... 345

Event Reports Form .................................................................................... 346

Event Reports Form Overview ...................................................................................... 346

Event Reports Form Procedures ................................................................. 350

Run an Event Report ..................................................................................................... 350

Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form ....................................................... 351

Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Overview ......................................................... 351

Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Procedures .................................... 354

Run an Alarm Acknowledgment Report ........................................................................ 354

Receiver Account Zone Reports Form ........................................................ 356

Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Overview .......................................................... 356

Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Procedures .................................... 359

Run a Receiver Account Zone Report .......................................................................... 359

Chapter 18: Print Report Options Window ............................361

Print Report Options Window ...................................................................... 362

Print a Report ................................................................................................................ 363

Chapter 19: Report Print Preview Window ............................365

Report Print Preview Window ..................................................................... 366

Report Print Preview Window Right-click Options ...................................... 368

Report Print Preview Window Procedures .................................................. 368

Preview and Print a Report ........................................................................................... 368

revision 1

— 19


Search a Report for Specific Information ...................................................................... 370

Chapter 20: Guard Tour ..........................................................371

Start Guard Tour Form ................................................................................ 372

Guard Tour Live Tracking Form .................................................................. 373

Guard Tour Form Procedures ..................................................................... 374

Launch a Guard Tour .................................................................................................... 375

Schedule an Automatic Guard Tour Action ................................................................... 376

Respond to an Automatic Guard Tour .......................................................................... 377

View a Guard Tour ........................................................................................................ 377

Checkpoint Status and Events Diagram ..................................................... 378

Chapter 21: Scheduler Folder .................................................379

Scheduler Form ........................................................................................... 380

Scheduler Form Procedures ....................................................................... 381

Add and Schedule an Action ......................................................................................... 381

Display the Scheduler Right-Click Menu ....................................................................... 387

Add and Schedule an Action Using the Scheduler Right-Click Menu ........................... 388

Start an Action ............................................................................................................... 388

Stop an Action ............................................................................................................... 388

View Action History ....................................................................................................... 388

View the Current Status of an Action ............................................................................ 389

Refresh an Action .......................................................................................................... 389

Refresh all Actions ........................................................................................................ 389

Delete a Scheduled Action using the Scheduler Right-Click Menu ............................... 389

Modify a Scheduled Action using the Scheduler Right-Click Menu .............................. 390

20 —

revision 1


Appendices ......................................................................391

Appendix A: Actions ...............................................................393

General Actions Procedures ....................................................................... 393

Specify the Number of Simultaneous Actions ............................................................... 393

Open an Action Properties Window .............................................................................. 393

Action Group Properties Window ................................................................ 397

Action Group Properties Window Procedures ............................................. 398

Add an Action Group ..................................................................................................... 398

Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window .................... 399

Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window Procedures 400

Add an Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Action .............................................. 400

Archive/Purge Database Properties Window .............................................. 401

Archive/Purge Database Properties Window Procedures ........................... 402

Add an Archive/Purge Database Action ........................................................................ 402

Arm/Disarm Area Properties Window ......................................................... 403

Arm/Disarm Area Properties Window Procedures ...................................... 406

Add an Arm/Disarm Area Action ................................................................................... 406

Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window .................................................. 407

Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window Procedures .............................. 408

Add an Automatic Guard Tour Action ........................................................................... 408

Change Network Video Password Properties Window ............................... 410

Change Network Video Password Properties Window Procedures ............ 411

Change the Network Video Password .......................................................................... 411

Schedule a One-Time Password Change ..................................................................... 412

revision 1

— 21


Schedule a Recurring Password Change ..................................................................... 412

Deactivate Badge Properties Window ......................................................... 413

Deactivate Badge Properties Window Procedures ..................................... 414

Add a Deactivate Badge Action .................................................................................... 414

Device Output Properties Window .............................................................. 415

Device Output Properties Window Procedures ........................................... 416

Add a Device Output Action .......................................................................................... 416

Device Output Group Properties Window ................................................... 417

Device Output Group Properties Window Procedures ................................ 418

Add a Device Output Group Action ............................................................................... 418

Download Network Video Firmware Properties Window ............................. 419

LNVR and Camera Requirements ................................................................................ 420

Download Network Video Firmware Properties Window Procedures ........................... 421

Make an Upgrade Available in B.A.S.I.S. ...................................................................... 421

Add a Download Network Video Firmware Action ........................................................ 422

Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Properties Window ................................ 423

Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Properties Window Procedures ............. 424

Add an Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Action .......................................................... 424

Elevator Terminal Mode Properties Window ............................................... 424

Elevator Terminal Mode Properties Window Procedures ........................... 425

Add an Elevator Terminal Mode Action ......................................................................... 425

Execute Function List Properties Window ................................................... 426

Execute Function List Properties Window Procedures ............................... 427

Add an Execute Function List Action ............................................................................ 427

Generate Event Properties Window ............................................................ 428

22 —

revision 1


Elevator Terminal Mode Properties Window Procedures ........................... 429

Add an Elevator Mode Action ........................................................................................ 429

Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties Window ............................ 429

Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties Window Procedures ........ 430

Add a Global APB System/Segment Reset Action ....................................................... 430

ISC Database Download Properties Window .............................................. 431

ISC Database Download Properties Window Procedures .......................... 432

Add an ISC Database Download Action ....................................................................... 432

ISC Firmware Download Properties Window .............................................. 433

ISC Firmware Download Properties Window Procedures ........................... 434

Add an ISC Firmware Download Action ........................................................................ 434

Moving Badges for APB Areas Properties Window .................................... 435

Moving Badges for APB Areas Properties Window Procedures ................. 436

Add a Moving Badges for APB Areas Action ................................................................ 436

Muster Mode Initiation Properties Window .................................................. 437

Muster Mode Initiation Properties Window Procedures .............................. 438

Add a Muster Mode Initiation Action ............................................................................. 438

Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window ........................................... 439

Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window Procedures ....................... 440

Add a Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Action ....................................................................... 440

Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties Window ........................... 441

Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties Window Procedures ....... 442

Add a Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Action ...................................................... 442

Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window ............................... 443

revision 1

— 23


Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window Procedures ............ 444

Add a Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Action ........................................................... 444

Mask/Unmask Door Properties Window ..................................................... 445

Mask/Unmask Door Properties Window Procedures .................................. 446

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Action ................................................................................. 446

Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window ............................... 447

Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window Procedures ............ 448

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Action ........................................................... 448

Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties Window .. 449

Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties Window

Procedures ............................................................................................... 450

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Action .............................. 450

Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window ................................... 451

Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window Procedures ................ 452

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Action ............................................................... 452

Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties Window ...... 453

Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties Window

Procedures ............................................................................................... 454

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Action .................................. 454

Pulse Open Door Properties Window ......................................................... 455

Pulse Open Door Properties Window Procedures ...................................... 456

Add a Pulse Open Door Action ..................................................................................... 456

Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window .............................................. 457

Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window Procedures ........................... 458

Add a Pulse Open Door Group Action .......................................................................... 458

24 —

revision 1


Reader Mode Properties Window ............................................................... 459

Reader Mode Properties Window Procedures ............................................ 460

Add a Reader Mode Action ........................................................................................... 460

Reader Mode Group Properties Window .................................................... 462

Reader Mode Group Properties Window Procedures ................................. 463

Add a Reader Mode Group Action ................................................................................ 463

Reset Use Limit Properties Window ............................................................ 464

Reset Use Limit Properties Window Procedures ........................................ 465

Add a Reset Use Limit Action ....................................................................................... 465

Run PTZ Tour Properties Window .............................................................. 466

Run PTZ Tour Properties Window Procedures ........................................... 467

Add a Run PTZ Tour Action .......................................................................................... 467

Schedule Report ......................................................................................... 468

Schedule Report Properties Window Procedures ....................................... 469

Add a Schedule Report Action ...................................................................................... 469

Request Print Action Flowchart.................................................................... 470

Select PTZ Preset Properties Window ........................................................ 471

Select PTZ Preset Properties Window Procedures .................................... 472

Add a Select PTZ Preset Action .................................................................................... 472

Select Video Wall Layout Properties Window .............................................. 472

Select Video Wall Layout Properties Window Procedures .......................... 474

Add a Select Video Wall Layout Action ......................................................................... 474

Set Forwarding Station Properties Window ................................................ 475

Set Forwarding Station Properties Window Procedures ............................. 476

revision 1

— 25


Add a Set Forwarding Station Action ............................................................................ 476

Sign Out Visitor Properties Window ............................................................ 477

Sign Out Visitor Properties Window Procedures ......................................... 478

Add a Sign Out Visitor Action ........................................................................................ 478

Silence Area Properties Window ................................................................. 479

Silence Area Properties Window Procedures ............................................. 480

Add a Silence Area Action ............................................................................................ 480

Appendix B: Alarm/Event Descriptions .................................481

Appendix C: Reports ...............................................................519

Appendix D: LNVR Network Setup .........................................527

Deliver Live Video to Alarm Monitoring Using IP Multicast Protocol ........... 527

LNVR Network Setup Window .................................................................... 528

Client Network Settings Form ....................................................................................... 528

Recorder Network Settings Form .................................................................................. 529

IVS Network Settings Form ........................................................................................... 530

LNVR Network Setup Configurations .......................................................... 530

Configure Recorder for IP Multicast .............................................................................. 530

Configure Client for IP Multicast .................................................................................... 531

Configure Router for IP Multicast .................................................................................. 531

Configure Firewall for IP Multicast ................................................................................ 531

Appendix E: Exporting Video .................................................533

Video Converter Window ............................................................................ 534

Video Export Dialog .................................................................................... 535

Customize Overlay Information Dialog ........................................................ 536

26 —

revision 1


Video Conversion Procedures .................................................................... 537

Export Video to a File .................................................................................................... 537

Convert and Export Video ............................................................................................. 538

Play Exported Video Clip Using Windows Media Player ............................................... 539

Authenticate a Video File with Watermarking ............................................................... 539

Index ...............................................................................................541

revision 1

— 27


28 —

revision 1

Introduction


Chapter 1: Introduction

The Alarm Monitoring application displays information about individual alarms and events as they occur. Operators can acknowledge alarms and manually change the status of devices as well as monitor video and launch Guard Tours.

With the correct permissions, Operators can also perform a variety of administrative tasks such as adding, modifying, deleting and tracking cardholders, visitors and assets as well as print badges.

Conventions Used in this Documentation

• Where a term is defined, the word is represented in italics.

• Field names, menus and menu choices are shown in bold.

• Keyboard keys are represented in angle brackets. For example: <Tab>.

• Keyboard key combinations are written in two ways:

<Ctrl> + <Z> means hold down the first key and press the second

<Alt>, <C> means press the first key, then press the second

• Window buttons on the screen are represented in square brackets. For example: [OK].

How this Document is Organized

The Alarm Monitoring User Guide is divided into three sections: the System

Administrator Procedures section, the Operators section and the Advanced

Operator Procedures section.

The System Administrator section outlines the steps involved in setting up an

Alarm Monitoring station. Most of the procedures in these chapters reference other manuals because they cannot be performed in the Alarm Monitoring application.

The Operator Procedures section focuses on procedures to monitor alarms, monitor video, trace devices and execute commands.

The Advanced Operator Procedures section covers the administrative procedures operators can perform in Alarm Monitoring. For example, adding cardholders or visitors, printing badges, adding assets to the database and assigning assets to cardholders.

revision 1

— 31

1: Introduction

Note:

Depending on the workflow of your company, some of the procedures covered in this section may be considered System Administrator procedures.

Getting Started

Passwords

B.A.S.I.S.

®

includes strong password enforcement, which checks the user’s password against password standards. This functionality is designed to enhance password security if single sign-on is not used. If single sign-on is used

(automatic or manual), B.A.S.I.S. does not enforce password standards. For more information on single sign-on, refer to

Single Sign-On on page 36.

The system’s strong password enforcement also checks the Stanley database user’s password when logging into applications. Database user passwords apply only to SQL databases. For information on changing your database password, refer to the Accounts and Passwords chapter in the Installation Guide.

Password Standards

When creating a strong password keep the following guidelines in mind:

• Passwords cannot be blank.

• Passwords cannot be the same as the user name (e.g. SA, SA).

• Passwords cannot be Stanley keywords.

• Although not required, your password should contain numbers, letters, and symbols. Spaces are also acceptable. (e.g. August 18, 2002).

• B.A.S.I.S. passwords are not case-sensitive.

• Database passwords conform to the rules of the specific database being used; passwords in SQL Server are case insensitive.

• The maximum value for a strong password is 127 characters. The minimum value is 1.

Enable/Disable Strong Password Enforcement

Strong password enforcement is enabled/disabled in System Administration or

ID CredentialCenter. When you install B.A.S.I.S., by default strong password enforcement is enabled. When you upgrade, by default strong password

32 —

revision 1


Note:

enforcement is disabled. To manually enable or disable strong password enforcement:

1. Select System Options from the Administration menu.

2. Select the General System Options tab.

3. Click [Modify].

4. Select or deselect the Enforce strong passwords checkbox.

If you disable the option to enforce strong passwords, you will continue to receive a message stating your password is weak every time you log into an application until you change your B.A.S.I.S. password to meet the password standards.

5. Click [OK].

Error Messages

Read weak password messages/warnings carefully to avoid confusion about whether your user password or database password is weak.

If you have a weak database password you will receive a warning every time you log into any application, until you change your database password. Although it is not recommended, you can acknowledge the warning and continue working in the application. This table describes the password-related error messages that may be generated and which password you need to correct.

• To correct the database password, refer to the Accounts and Passwords chapter in the Installation Guide.

• To correct the user password, select a password that meets the standards

specified in Password Standards on page 32.

Warning message

Database password violations: Your password is a keyword that is not allowed. It is highly recommended that you change your password to meet our minimum password standards.

Your password cannot be blank. Please enter a password.

User password violations: Passwords cannot be the same as the user name.

Your password is a keyword that is not allowed.

Password to correct

Database

User

User

User

Accounts

Anyone who wishes to use B.A.S.I.S. applications must enter a user name and password in order to access the software. The System Administrator should create a unique account for each user of the applications. The System

Administrator can also, for each user, create a list of permissions, which specifies precisely which screens, fields, and buttons the user can access.

revision 1

— 33

1: Introduction

During initial installation of the application, default accounts are created. These include:

User name

sa admin user badge

Password

sa

Type

system account sample sample sample

These are provided as samples. You may change the passwords and use the accounts, or remove them. The exception to this is the system account, SA. By definition this account has permission to do anything in the system. A user with system access has unlimited access to the application. You cannot delete or change the system account except to modify the password, which you are strongly encouraged to do as soon as possible to discourage unauthorized use.

The first time you log into B.A.S.I.S. to configure the application, you should log in as SA and your password should be SA.

Log In

This procedure describes how to log in without using single sign-on. For a description of single sign-on, refer to

Single Sign-On on page 36. To log in using

single sign-on, refer to

Configure Single Sign-On on page 37.

1. Click the Start button, then select Programs > B.A.S.I.S. ET690 > Alarm

Monitoring.

2. Your system may be configured to prompt you to select a database to log into. If it is not, proceed to the next step. If it is: a. In the Database drop-down, all ODBC system databases currently defined on your computer are listed. Select the database that you wish to use for your application.

b. Click [OK].

3. The Log On window displays.

a. In the User name field, type the user name assigned to you. When logging in for the first time, your user name is SA.

b. In the Password field, type the password assigned to you. When logging in for the first time, your password is SA. Note that the characters you type do not appear in the field. Instead, for each character you type, an “*” displays. This is intended to protect against

34 —

revision 1


Important:

unauthorized access in the event that someone else can see the screen while you type.

After logging in for the first time, you are strongly encouraged to modify the password for the system account as soon as possible to discourage unauthorized use.

Monitor zone user assignments take precedence over monitoring station user assignments.

Note:

c. In the Directory field, select the directory that you wish to log into. For user accounts not using single sign-on, the default is “<Internal>.” d. Select the Remember user name and directory checkbox if you want the values you just entered in the User name and Directory fields to automatically be selected the next time that you log in.

e. Click [OK].

4. Your system may be configured to prompt you to confirm that you are authorized to use the application. To accept the terms of the authorization warning click [Yes].

5. If you are prompted to select a monitor zone: a. Select a monitor zone from the drop-down list. If segmentation is enabled, only the monitor zones for the segment that you logged into are available.

b. Select the Save as monitoring station assignment checkbox if you wish to make the monitor zone selection the default assignment for the monitoring station. This means when any operator logs into Alarm

Monitoring at this workstation, this zone will be monitored unless the operator has monitoring zones assigned to them as a user or the operator has permission to view multiple zones. This checkbox is only enabled if the user has proper permissions.

c. Select the Save as user assignment checkbox if you if you wish to log into the same monitor zone EVERY time you log in. This is a permanent assignment. You will not be prompted to select a monitor zone during future log ins. This is checkbox is only enabled if the user has permission.

d. Click [OK].

For more information please refer to the Monitor Zones Folder chapter in the

System Administration User Guide.

6. If you are prompted that the monitoring station you are logging into is set up for event queuing: a. Select No, if you want all the queued events deleted.

b. Select Yes, if you want all queued event for the monitor zone displayed.

revision 1

— 35

1: Introduction

Single Sign-On

Single sign-on simply means logging into B.A.S.I.S. with the same user name and password that you use to log into Windows or logging into B.A.S.I.S. using an LDAP user name and password for authentication. LDAP (Lightweight

Directory Access Protocol) is a software protocol that enables you to locate businesses, people, files, and devices without knowing the domain name

(network address).

Single sign-on allows scripts using the DataConduIT API to authenticate. These scripts will be run under a Windows account. The account that is making the call to the API can be obtained easily this way, and the script can be restricted to those actions that the user is permitted to perform (using standard B.A.S.I.S. permissions).

Note:

The use of the explicit username and password for directory authentication to Windows is strongly discouraged. It is recommended that you do not store

Windows passwords in the B.A.S.I.S. system, since B.A.S.I.S. uses reversible encryption and Windows does not. If explicit authentication is required, you should use an account that has view only permission to the directory in question.

Important:

It is possible to assign both an internal account and one or more directory accounts to a single user. Assigning both types of accounts increases the flexibility of the system during the authentication process. If the directory service is down or cannot be found from the workstation where the user is logging on, that user can instead use the internal account. Using both types of accounts means that you need to manage the internal account user names and passwords in addition to managing the directory accounts.

Allowing a user to log on in multiple ways increases the probability that the user's access to the system could be compromised. It is recommended that you standardize on either internal or directory accounts, but not both.

There are cases where assigning both an internal account and a directory account to a user may make sense. In a system where directory accounts are predominantly used, you may also assign an internal account to a user who needs to access the system from locations where the directory service is unavailable. If internal accounts are predominantly used, you may want to assign a directory account to a user so that the user does not need to enter in a password to log on.

Directory Accounts

To log into B.A.S.I.S. using single sign-on, a user name, password, and directory are required. A directory is a database of network resources, such as printers, software applications, databases, and users. The following directories are supported by B.A.S.I.S.: Microsoft Active Directory, Microsoft Windows NT 4

Domain, Microsoft Windows Vista/XP Workstation, and LDAP.

36 —

revision 1


Automatic and Manual Single Sign-On

When a user account is configured for single sign-on, the user can log into

B.A.S.I.S. automatically or manually.

For example, with automatic single sign-on, users simply start B.A.S.I.S. and they are automatically logged in under their Windows account and directory.

With manual single sign-on, users must manually enter their Windows or LDAP account information (user name and password). Users also have the option of selecting a different configured directory.

If single sign-on is not used, users manually enter a user name and a password that is different from their Windows or LDAP password. The directory is hardcoded to refer to the internal B.A.S.I.S. user directory.

Notes:

Manual

single sign-on can be used with the following directories: Microsoft

Active Directory, Microsoft Windows NT 4 Domain, and LDAP.

Automatic single sign-on can be used with every directory supported by

B.A.S.I.S. except LDAP because it doesn’t provide all the account information required.

Configure Single Sign-On

By default, user accounts do not use sign-on. To configure single sign-on the

System Administrator must add a directory and link a user account to the directory.

Log In Using Automatic Single Sign-On

Automatic single sign-on is supported with Windows domain accounts.


Monitoring.

2. Your system may be configured to prompt you to select a database to log into. If it is not, proceed to step 3 . If it is: a. In the Database drop-down, all ODBC system databases currently defined on your computer are listed. Select the database that you wish to use for your application.

b. Click [OK].

3. If your Windows account is linked to a user, a message will be displayed that says, “Attempting to automatically log you on using your Windows account.

revision 1

— 37

1: Introduction


Note:

To bypass this, hold down SHIFT.” To automatically be logged in, do nothing.

4. Your system may be configured to prompt you to confirm that you are authorized to use the application. To accept the terms of the authorization warning, click [Yes].

5. If you are prompted to select a monitor zone: a. Select a monitor zone from the drop-down list. If segmentation is enabled, only the monitor zones for the segment that you logged into are available.



c. Select the Save as user assignment checkbox if you if you wish to log into the same monitor zone EVERY time you log in. This is a permanent assignment. You will not be prompted to select a monitor zone during future log ins. This is checkbox is only enabled if the user has permission.

d. Click [OK].





38 —

revision 1


Log In Using Manual Single Sign-On

Both users who want to log into B.A.S.I.S. using an LDAP user name and password for authentication and users who want to log in using a Windows domain account can do so using manual single sign-on.


Monitoring.

2. Your system may be configured to prompt you to select a database to log into. If it is not, proceed to step 3 . If it is: a. In the Database drop-down, all ODBC system databases currently defined on your computer are listed. Select the database that you wish to use for your application.

b. Click [OK].

3. If your Windows account is linked to a user, a message will be displayed that says, “Attempting to automatically log you on using your Windows account.

To bypass this, hold down SHIFT.”

To manually login or to login using a different user name and password, hold down the <Shift> key. The Log On window opens.

a. In the Directory field, select the directory that you wish to log into. The default is “<Internal>.” b. In the User name field, type the Windows user name assigned to you.

Do not enter the domain\user name just enter your user name.

c. In the Password field, type the Windows password assigned to you.

d. Select the Remember user name and directory checkbox if you want the values you just entered in the User name and Directory fields to automatically be selected the next time that you log in.

e. Click [OK].

4. Your system may be configured to prompt you to confirm that you are authorized to use the application. To accept the terms of the authorization warning, click [Yes].

5. If you are prompted to select a monitor zone:


a. Select a monitor zone from the drop-down list. If segmentation is enabled, only the monitor zones for the segment that you logged into are available.



c. Select the Save as user assignment checkbox if you if you wish to log into the same monitor zone EVERY time you log in. This is a permanent assignment. You will not be prompted to select a monitor zone during

revision 1

— 39

1: Introduction

Note:

future log ins. This is checkbox is only enabled if the user has permission.

d. Click [OK].





Troubleshoot Logging In

If you attempted to log in and were unable to do so, make sure that the following conditions have been met:

• You entered a correct user name/password and specified the correct directory.

• If your system is configured to display an authorization warning, you accepted the terms.

• A valid license is installed.

• You have permission to use the application.

• If you attempted to log into the server and the login failed, make sure that a properly coded, licensed dongle adapter is attached to your computer’s parallel port. Make sure that your dongle is securely attached.

• If you attempted to log into a client and failed, make sure the system has a valid software license. Client computers do not need a hardware dongle attached to the computer’s parallel port. Instead, the system the client is installed on must have a valid software license, which is installed in the

License Administration application.

• If you are using single sign-on, ensure that the directory you are authenticating against is operational and properly configured. When a directory is properly configured, the accounts are listed on the Select

Account form when linking a user account to a directory.

• If you are using single sign-on, ensure that the directory account is properly linked to the user account.

40 —

revision 1


Assigning Directory and Internal Accounts to the User

It is possible to assign both an internal account and one or more directory accounts to a single user. Assigning both types of accounts increases the flexibility of the system during the authentication process. Meaning, if the directory service is down or cannot be found from the workstation where the user is logging on, then the user can use the internal account instead.

However, using both types of accounts means that you need to manage the internal account user names and passwords in addition to managing the directory accounts. Allowing a user to log on in multiple ways increases the probability that the user's access could be compromised. For that reason, it is recommended that you standardize on either internal or directory accounts, but not both.

There are cases where assigning both an internal account and a directory account to a user may make sense. In a system where directory accounts are predominantly used, you may also assign an internal account to a user who needs to access the system from locations where the directory service is unavailable. If internal accounts are predominantly used, you may want to assign a directory account to a user for that user's convenience, so that the user does not need to enter in a password to log on.

Switch Log On

Switch Log On is often used when multiple operators use the same Alarm

Monitoring station. Instead of logging out of the application operators can use the switch log on feature. This simultaneously logs out the previous operator and logs in the new operator.

1. Select Switch Log On from the File menu.

2. The Log On to Alarm Monitoring window displays.

3. Enter the user name and password.

4. Select the desired directory.

5. Click [OK].

Notes:

When using switch log on, the person who’s logged into Windows can be a different person than the one logged into Alarm Monitoring.

Switch log on cannot be used if the new user has a monitor zone/user assignment different from the current user.

revision 1

— 41

1: Introduction

Log Out of the Application

When you log out of the application the entire application closes.

1. Select Log Off from the File menu.

2. The current user is logged off but the application remains open.

Exit the Application

You can close and exit the application using the following methods:

• Select Exit from the File menu.

• Double-click the icon located in the upper left corner of the title bar. When prompted to log off, click [Yes].

Close button

• Single click the icon located in the upper left corner of the title bar and select

Close. When prompted to log off, click [Yes].

• Click the close button in the window’s upper right corner. When prompted to log off, click [Yes].

42 —

revision 1


Chapter 2: Main Alarm Monitoring Window

The Main Alarm Monitoring window displays automatically when you log into the application. You can open and close additional windows but the Main Alarm

Monitoring window remains open until you log out of the entire application.

Menus and Toolbars

The menu bar is a horizontal list of options that appears at the top of the main window. Scroll over each option to view a drop-down menu. A toolbar is a strip of buttons positioned by default just below the menu bar. If you place your cursor over a toolbar button, a tool tip identifies the name of the toolbar button.

Operators can customize how the toolbar displays; they can:

• Change the toolbar from anchored to floating

Toolbars are anchored by default and are displayed in horizontal rows below the menu bar. Anchored toolbars can be changed to floating toolbars, which

allows the toolbar to be repositioned anywhere in the window. For more information, refer to How to Use the Toolbars on page 56.

• Control if the toolbar is displayed

By default the toolbar is displayed. Operators can control if the toolbar is

displayed by selecting or deselecting Toolbar from the View menu. For more information, refer to How to Use the Toolbars on page 56.

revision 1

— 43

2: Main Alarm Monitoring Window

File menu

Menu option

Print

Log On/Log Off

Toolbar button Function

Prints information displayed in the active (topmost) window. The print toolbar button does not display if the Main Alarm Monitoring window is minimized.

Logs you into or out of the application.

Switch Log On

Change Password

Exit

Displays the login window, allowing a different user to log in without the previous user manually exiting the application. When the new user is successfully logged in, the old user is simultaneously logged out.

Opens the Change Password dialog, enabling you to change your password (you must have the corresponding system level permission to do so).

Ends the session of every person logged on.

Edit menu

Menu option Toolbar button Function

Note:

The following menu options are active when an alarm window is displayed.

Acknowledge

Fast/Group

Acknowledge

Acknowledges the currently selected alarm.

Allows a user to acknowledge a group of alarms simultaneously.

Delete

Delete All

Select All

View menu

Menu option

Badge Info

Removes the selected alarm from the window.

Removes all alarms from the window.

Selects all alarms in the window.


Displays the cardholder folder/window which contains nine forms/tabs:

Cardholder, Badge, Access Level, Biometrics, Visits, Assets, Directory

Accounts, Guard Tours and Reports.

Note:

When the cardholder folder/window displays, an additional

menu option, Cardholder displays.

For more information, refer to Cardholder menu

on page 53.

44 —

revision 1


View menu (Continued)

Toolbar button Menu option

Visits

Asset Info

System Status

Device Groups

Pending Alarms

Function

Displays the Visits folder/window which contains the Status search,

Visit, Details, Email and Reports forms/tabs.

From the Visits folder/window you can:

• search visit records based on scheduled time in or out and date and time the record was last changed

• display visit records for a selected date range

• add, modify or delete

• print disposable badges

• sign in or out a visit

• send e-mail notifications

• generate reports

Displays the Asset folder/window which contains the Assets, Assets

Classes and Assignments forms/tabs.

Displays the System Status window which lists all access control devices defined in System Administration.

Displays the various device groups for a particular monitoring zone.

Bulk operations can be performed on all parts of the device group.

Types of device groups include (but are not limited to) Readers,

Cameras and Input and Output groups.

Displays the Pending Alarms window. To return to the Main Alarm

Monitoring window click the View Alarms toolbar button.

Video Verification

Video Monitoring

Map

Launches the Video Verification window where you can compare live video to a cardholder’s photograph.

Launches the Live Video window which is used to run a video tour of the cameras defined in Camera Groups.

Displays a map containing the device associated with the selected alarm

(if the Main Alarm Monitoring window is active) or the selected device

(if the System Status window is active).

• If the selected device is represented on more than one map you will be prompted to select the map of choice.

• A message displays if the selected device is not represented on any map.

• To display the View Map menu option, right-click a device in the

System Status window or select an alarm in the Main Alarm

Monitoring window.

• To print a map, select Print from the File menu. The map must be the up most window to print.

revision 1

— 45


View menu (Continued)

Toolbar button Menu option

Default Map

Map Selection

Scheduler

Reports

Function

Displays the map that is assigned to that monitoring zone. This menu option is dimmed if no map has been assigned to this zone.

This menu option is displayed through the Map icon drop-down.

Displays a window in which all available maps are listed. This menu option is dimmed if no map has been assigned to this zone.

This menu option is displayed through the Map icon drop-down.

Displays the Scheduler window which is used to add, modify and delete scheduled actions within the B.A.S.I.S. system. An action is any task that can be performed by software as a result of an event of schedule, for example; download a database, mask/unmask alarm inputs, pulse open a door and reset the use limit.

Note:

The Scheduler window is also available by selecting

Administration > Scheduler in System Administration.

For more information, refer to the Scheduler Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

Displays the Reports folder/window of data entry forms/tabs.

Sort by

Toolbar

Status Bar

Trace menu

Menu option

Monitor Zone

Area

Asset

Badge

Sorts alarms according to criteria chosen in the submenu.

Displays the toolbar when selected (checked).

Displays the status bar when selected (checked).


Monitors or traces alarms for the selected monitor zone.

Monitors or traces alarms for the selected intrusion area.

The Area menu option becomes active (not grayed out) when you highlight a device in the System Status window.

Monitors or traces alarms for the selected asset.

The Asset menu option becomes active (not grayed out) when you highlight a device in the System Status window.

Monitors or traces alarms for a specific badge.

46 —

revision 1


Trace menu (Continued)

Menu option

Controller

Device


Monitors or traces alarms for the selected access panel/controller. An access panel/controller is a device that acts as the focal point for a group of card readers.

The Controller menu option or toolbar button becomes active (not grayed out) when you highlight an access panel/controller or any device under a given access panel/controller in the System Status window.

Note:

Access panel/controller traces are recursive, meaning all events occurring on that access panel/controller are included.

Monitors or traces alarms for the selected device.

The Device menu option becomes active (not grayed out) when you highlight a device in the System Status window.

This menu option is displayed through the Trace icon drop-down.

Note:

This menu option can be used to trace all device types including alarm outputs, reader aux inputs and reader aux outputs.

Configure menu

Menu option

Alarm Filter

Columns

Hardware Status

Frequency

System Status

Options

Function

Displays a checklist of alarm types to monitor. The Alarm Filter menu option becomes active

(not grayed out) when you display an alarm window.

Displays a list of columns from which to display. The Columns menu option becomes active

(not grayed out) whey you display an alarm window.

Determines how often background updates are performed. The choices are “No Updates”, 10,

15, 20, 30 and 60 minute intervals. This is saved per user / per station and only applies to

Apollo hardware.

Displays the System Status Options window which is used to specify how the System Status window displays information and what devices are included.

Control menu

Menu option

Update All

Hardware Status

Set All Controller

Clocks


Updates the status of all controllers in the monitoring zone.

Sets the clocks in all access panels according to the machine on which the driver is running.

revision 1

— 47


Control menu (Continued)

Menu option

“Current Device”

Guard Tour


This menu option is dynamic, meaning the name of this menu option changes according to the device highlighted in the System Status window.

For example if a BAS-1300 HID reader is highlighted in the System

Status window, then BAS-1300 HID displays in the Control menu options.

Each “Current Device” menu option also has sub-menu options. For more information refer to the

Control menu - “Current Device” sub-menu

table on page 48.

Allows Operators to launch or view a guard tour. Guard tour provides a guard (a cardholder who has been specifically chosen to conduct a tour) with a defined set of tasks that must be performed within a specified period of time. Typical tasks include swiping a card at a checkpoint access reader or turning a key connected to an alarm panel input.

To use guard tour the Linkage Server must be properly configured. For more information, refer to the System Options Folder chapter in the

System Administration or ID CredentialCenter User Guide.

Control menu - “Current Device” sub-menu

Sub-menu option

Toolbar button

Function

Note:

The “Current Device” sub-menu options that are available depend on the type of device listed as the

“Current Device” in the Control menu.

The type of device listed as the “Current Device” in the Control menu depends on the device highlighted in the System Status window.

Current Status

Acknowledge

Displays current status of device.

Acknowledges the selected alarm.

Trace

Update

Hardware

Status

Properties

Open Door(s)

Traces the selected device.

Polls currently selected access panel/controller and updates the hardware status.

If a downstream device (like a reader) is selected, the update hardware status is done for the controller associated with that device.

Displays access panel/controller properties.

Pulses open any door associated with selected access panel/controller or reader.

To activate the Open Door(s) toolbar button you must select an access panel/ controller or reader, otherwise the option is grayed out.

Set Controller

Clock

Reader Access

Modes

Sets selected access panel/controller clock to current time. If a device other than an access panel/controller is selected, this option sets the clock on the access panel/controller to which the device is attached.

Updates the reader mode of every reader associated with selected access panel/ controller or reader.

48 —

revision 1


Control menu - “Current Device” sub-menu (Continued)

Sub-menu option

Reader

Biometric

Verify Mode

Toolbar button

Function

Enables/disables verify mode for access control readers with an associated biometric reader.

Reader First

Card Unlock

Mode

• When verify mode is enabled, the normal card and/or pin access is and a biometric match is required.

• When verify mode is disabled, only the card and/or pin access is required.

Enables/disables the Reader First Card Unlock Mode. The Reader First Card

Unlock Mode is a qualifier for online Reader Mode. When enabled, the online

Reader Mode is in effect until the first (qualified) access granted with entry occurs. When the first access granted with entry occurs, the online Reader Mode changes to unlocked.

Activate

Deactivate

Pulse

Mask

UnMask

Receiver account information

View Map

Launch Video

Download

Firmware

Download

Database

Reset Use Limit

Whenever a Reader enters or leaves First Card Unlock Mode, an event transaction is logged in the database and displayed in Alarm Monitoring.

Note:

The Reader First Card Unlock Mode can also be enabled/disabled via the Reader folder/window in System Administration, via local timezone control in the BAS-2000 and as part of the Reader Mode or

Reader Group Mode action used in the Scheduler and Global I/O.

Note:

Reader First Card Unlock Mode is only supported on the BAS-2000 controller. However, first style unlock behavior can be configured for use with any access controller through Stanley’s Global I/O Support.

Activates the selected alarm output.

Deactivates the selected alarm output.

Pulses an output device.

Masks an input device. The System Status window displays the selected device.

masked beside

Unmasks an input device.

A receiver is a piece of hardware used to receive events from multiple accounts in multiple formats. Downstream devices connect to receivers via phone lines, direct wire connections and LAN connections. The receiver account information displays information about a specific receiver.

Displays a map associated with the selected device (if one exists). If more than one map exists, the user is prompted to select a map.

Displays video for the selected device if a camera is associated with the device.

Downloads firmware to the following downstream devices: Dual Interface Rdr1 readers, BAS-1100 and BAS-1200 alarm panels, and RS-485 command keypads.

Note:

It is not possible to download firmware to a single reader interface.

Downloads the database to the access panel/controller.

Resets the number of times a badge can be used on a particular access panel/ controller.

revision 1

— 49


Control menu - “Current Device” sub-menu (Continued)

Sub-menu option

Connect

Disconnect

Execute

Custom

Function

Bypass

Unbypass

Toolbar button

Function

Connects the access panel/controller via a dialup/modem connection.

Disconnects the access panel/controller via a dialup/modem connection.

Executes a custom function associated with the Bosch Intrusion Controller. This menu option is only available with Bosch Intrusion Controllers.

Term used to indicate that the zone has been masked. If a zone is bypassed the controller ignores any tamper or alarm condition for the zone.

Similar to bypass, this command unmasks the zone so that any tamper or alarm will be reported.

Options menu

Menu option

Mute Sound

Font

Save Alarms on

Exit

Save Settings on

Exit

Function

Disables the audio portion of the system when selected (checked).

Selects the font used in Alarm Monitoring.

Saves all currently displayed alarms at the end of a session, when selected (checked).

Saves screen characteristics at the end of a session, when selected (checked). The following settings will be saved for the current user’s profile:

1. Window positions, sizes, and minimized states

2. Matrix or player mode

3. Window arrangement setting

4. Scale factor

5. List of live and recorded video windows

Note:

Windows playing video from a file will not be saved.

When the user logs back in, all the video windows previously saved will automatically be launched. Recorded video windows will be launched as live video, since recorded video time is typically not relevant later.

Save Settings Now Saves screen characteristics immediately.

Lists alarms in ascending order of time and date (i.e., oldest first), when selected (checked).

Ascending Time/

Date

Descending Time/

Date

Display Seconds

Lists alarms in descending order of time and date (i.e., newest first), when selected (checked).

Includes seconds in the displayed alarm times, when selected (checked).

50 —

revision 1


Options menu (Continued)

Menu option

Auto Cardholder

Display for Access

Alarms

Function

Displays the cardholder associated with an incoming alarm whenever the alarm deals with a badge id.

Automatic Map

Display

• If selected (checked), Alarm Monitoring displays the cardholder associated with access alarms.

• If not selected (unchecked), Alarm Monitoring does NOT display the cardholder associated with access alarms.

Automatically displays a map when the alarm arrives, if selected (checked) and if the associated device exists on a map. If the device exists on multiple maps, the first one found will be displayed.

Automatic

Cardholder

Display

Automatic Video

Verification

Automatic Visual

Notification

This feature must also be configured in System Administration Monitoring > Alarm

Configuration menu, Alarm Definitions tab/form.

Applies to alarms for which the Show Card Holder check box is selected in the System

Administration software. To locate this check box select the Monitoring menu and then select

Alarms. Click the Alarm Definition tab.

• If selected (checked), the corresponding cardholder view automatically displays when the alarm arrives if the alarm is related to a badge id.

• If the cardholder view is already displayed when a new alarm arrives, the new cardholder associated with the alarm is searched for and displayed.

• If not selected (unchecked), the corresponding cardholder view does not automatically display when an alarm occurs.

Applies to alarms for which the Video Verification check box is selected in the System

Administration software. To locate this check box select the Monitoring menu and then select

Alarms. Click the Alarm Definition tab.

• If selected (checked), the corresponding video verify view automatically displays when the alarm occurs.

• If not selected (unchecked), the corresponding video verify view does not automatically display when the alarm occurs.

Causes breakthrough alarms to occur. By default, this menu choice is selected (checked) in

Alarm Monitoring.

• If selected (checked), breakthrough alarms cause the Monitoring application and the

Main Alarm View to be brought to the foreground when an alarm occurs.

• If not selected (unchecked), breakthrough alarms occur in the background.

Automatic Live

Video Display

PTZ Options

Automatic visual notification must be configured for individual alarms in System

Administration. From the Monitoring menu select Alarm Configuration. Click the Alarm

Definition tab. Highlight the appropriate alarm, click the [Modify] button, select the Visual

Notification check box. Click the [OK] button. In the Alarm Monitoring application be sure to refresh the Alarm configuration through the Options menu.

Displays live video automatically when an alarm occurs, if selected (checked).

Displays the PTZ Options dialog which is used to specify the default access mode and optional locking timeout.

revision 1

— 51



Menu option

Display Status On

Maps

Function

Displays the status of all device icons on graphical maps.

• If selected (checked), the status of every device icon on a graphical map is displayed (e.g. reader mode, online/offline, occupancy number).

• If not selected (unchecked), the status will only be displayed for a given device as a tool tip when the mouse pointer is over the device icon.

Highlights the entire row of an alarm when selected (checked). Highlight Entire

Row

Disable Command

Verification

Displays “successful configuration” messages when commands to hardware, E-mail and pages are successfully sent.

• If selected (checked), Alarm Monitoring will NOT display “successful configuration” messages.

• If not selected (unchecked), Alarm Monitoring displays “successful configuration” messages.

Execute Command on Single Click of

Icon

Display Controller

Capacity

Display Device

Firmware Versions

Errors display in message boxes regardless of this setting.

Specifies commands to be executed on a single click. This setting may be configured for each user and saved along with other user settings.

• If selected (checked), then a single click executes the default command for the device configured in System Administration.

• If not selected (unchecked), then the default command executes on a double-click.

Displays available memory, free memory, the maximum number of cardholders, current cardholders stored in a controller, maximum number of biometric templates and the current number of biometric templates set in a controller. This information is displayed in the System

Status window and is mainly used for diagnostic purposes. By default, this option is unchecked.

• If selected (checked), the controller capacity information displays.

• If not selected (unchecked), the controller capacity information is NOT displayed.

Displays firmware version (major and minor) for downstream devices. The minor firmware version number displays as the last two digits. The firmware version of controllers and gateways displayed regardless of this option.

Note:

The firmware version is that of the interface board.

• If selected (checked), the current firmware version displays for devices including single interface readers, dual interface Rdr1 readers, BAS-1100 and BAS-1200 alarm panels, cameras and RS-485 command keypads.

• If not selected (unchecked), the firmware version displays as part of the status when the mouse pointer is over the device icon. However the firmware version of controllers and gateways always displays, regardless of this option.

52 —

revision 1



Menu option

Display Device

Serial Numbers

Function

Displays the serial number of most devices. The serial numbers are displayed in the System

Status Tree for all devices that report a serial number.

Refresh Alarm

Configuration

Note:

Stanley Dual Interface Rdr 2 readers and biometric readers do not report serial numbers. and biometric readers do not report serial numbers.

• If selected (checked), the serial number information displays.

• If not selected (unchecked), the serial number information is NOT displayed.

Causes alarm configuration information to be refreshed.

Window menu

Menu option Function

Cascade

Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

Places all open windows in an overlapping arrangement with the active window displayed on top.

Places all open windows in a horizontal, non-overlapping arrangement.

Places all open windows in a vertical, non-overlapping arrangement.

Arrange Icons

Close “options”

Places all minimized windows (title icons) in a row.

There are several menu options to close different windows in the Alarm Monitoring application (e.g. Close All Windows, Close System Status Windows).

Numbered choices Lists all open windows. The active (topmost) window is indicated by a checkmark.

Help menu

Menu option

Contents

Send Feedback

Index

About Alarm

Monitoring

Function

Displays online help for the currently displayed window.

Displays the Send Feedback form. From here you can launch a web feedback form and send feedback directly to Stanley.

Displays the online help table of contents.

Displays version and copyright information.

Cardholder menu


Note:

This menu is only available after you select View > Badge Info from the menu options.

Show Unassigned

Assets

If selected, both assets that currently are and assets that once were (but have since been unassigned) assigned to the selected cardholder will be displayed in the listing window on the

Assets form. If not selected, only assets that are currently assigned to the selected cardholder will be displayed.

revision 1

— 53


Cardholder menu (Continued)

Menu option

MobileVerify

Function

When selected, displays the MobileVerify Options window where the gate assigned to the current MobileVerify workstation can be changed, or the system’s Force Protection Setting can be overridden.

For this option to be available, the following conditions must be met:

Keyboard Wedge

Settings

View Options

• The user must have the MobileVerify Workstation Options permission, which is set on the

MobileVerify sub-tab of the System Permission Groups form in the Users folder.

• A recommendation label must have been added to the Cardholder form using

FormsDesigner. (The recommendation label may be on a new separate tab or on the

Cardholder form.)

• The current workstation must have a gate configuration assigned to it. This is done on the

Gate Configuration sub-tab of the Workstations form in the Workstations folder.

When selected, displays the Wedge Scanner Settings window where you can configure how the B.A.S.I.S. system interprets the information it receives from a wedge reader. You must have administrative rights to the workstation when setting these options. These settings are set per workstation.

When selected, displays the View Options window from where you can choose cardholder search attributes.

If selected, allows the selected cardholder to violate anti-passback rules one time.

One Free Pass

APB Move Badge When selected, displays the Area Move Badges window from where you can move a badge to a new area.

Display Global

APB Areas

Show Last Granted

Location

Show Last

Attempted

Location

Bulk

When selected, displays the Cardholder Global Anti Pass Back (APB) Areas window. This window lists the global APB areas that the selected cardholder is currently located in.

If selected, the Last access field will display information about the most recent valid access by the selected cardholder, including the triggered event, date, time and reader name.

If selected, the Last access field will display information about the most recent access attempt

(whether access was granted or not) by the selected cardholder, including the triggered event, date, time and reader name.

Provides a sub-menu of options that can be applied to a select group of cardholder records.

First Record

Rewind

Previous Record

Next Record

Fast Forward

Last Record

Displays the first matching cardholder record.

Jumps back 10 matching cardholder records.

Displays the previous matching cardholder record.

Displays the next matching cardholder record.

Jumps forward 10 matching cardholder records.

Displays the last matching cardholder record.

54 —

revision 1


Cardholder menu - Bulk sub-menu


Note:

The Bulk sub-menu is only available when the Cardholder menu is available.

Note:

The Bulk sub-menu options are available when a cardholder record is displayed in the Cardholders folder/ window.

Allows you to assign access levels to a select group of cardholder records.

Assign Access

Levels

Remove Access

Levels

Modify Badges

Allows you to remove access levels from a select group of cardholder records.

If selected, displays the Bulk Modify Badges window from where you can choose to update one or more of the following fields in the Cardholders folder/window: Activate Date,

Deactivate Date, Badge Status and Use Limit. You can apply a filter as to which badges you want to update, based on status and/or type. Note that when updating the Badge Status field, you must select a badge status filter.

Note:

When bulk changing the Use Limit field and enter no value it will automatically be set to 255 (unlimited).

When selected, the Bulk Segment Change window opens from where you can change a selected group of cardholder record’s segment assignment.

Change

Cardholder

Segments

Delete

Cardholders in

Search

Destroy ALL

Cardholder Data

View Log

Allows you to delete cardholders to a select group of records.

Allows you to destroy all cardholder data.

Displays the Log Viewer window from where you can view a log of bulk events.

Asset menu


Note:

This menu is only available after you select View > Asset Info from the menu options.

First Record

Rewind

Displays the first matching asset record.

Jumps back 10 matching asset records.

Previous Record

Next Record

Fast Forward

Last Record

Displays the previous matching asset record.

Displays the next matching asset record.

Jumps forward 10 matching asset records.

Displays the last matching asset record.

Displays the Asset Groups and Classes Management folder/window.

Asset Groups and

Classes

Asset Types and

Subtypes

Show Assignments

X Days Past

Displays the Asset Types and Subtypes Management folder/window.

Displays the Filter Out Assignments After X Days window, which allows you to specify the number of days you want to view.

revision 1

— 55


Asset menu (Continued)

Menu option

Bulk Add Mode

Function

Enables you to quickly enter multiple Scan IDs for the same type of asset (e.g. enter multiple

Scan ID’s for 10 portable PCs). To display the Bulk Add Mode menu option an asset record must be open in the Assets folder/window.

Toolbar Procedures

How to Use the Toolbars

Alarm Monitoring utilizes one standard Windows toolbar.

If you want to:

Display the name of a toolbar button

Use a toolbar button to perform a command or function

Change the toolbar from

“anchored” to “floating”

Change the toolbar from

“floating” to “anchored”

Hide or display the toolbar

Procedure:

Point to the toolbar button with the mouse (without clicking).

Click the toolbar button with the left mouse button.

Double-click an empty area of the toolbar.

From the View menu select Toolbar. A checkmark appears next to the toolbar if it is not hidden. Toggle the toolbar to display or hide.

Alarm Monitoring Status Bar

The Alarm Monitoring status bar, located in the lower portion of the screen provides different information, depending on what window is displayed.

The Main Alarm Monitoring window displays the following information in the status bar:

• Selected alarm: the name of the selected alarm, if any. If multiple alarms are selected simultaneously, the last one that was selected is indicated here.

• Sort criteria: the information by which the list of alarms is currently sorted.

• Pending: the number of alarms that are currently pending. Pending alarms include all existing normal or initiating alarms marked as “Active” that are still displayed in the main alarm view and have not been acknowledged.

• Total: the total number of alarms currently in the window.

•

Verified mode enabled:

an access control reader that has an associated biometric reader, is in verify mode.

56 —

revision 1

System

Administrator

Procedures


Chapter 3: System Administrator Procedures

Note:

The Alarm Monitoring application is not only designed to monitor alarms and events, but it can also be used for a variety of administrative tasks such as adding cardholders or visitors, printing badges, adding assets to the database and assigning assets to cardholders. Depending on how the System Administrator sets the cardholder and system permissions, users with access to Alarm

Monitoring can add, modify and delete cardholder, badge and asset information as well as capture images and perform bulk operations.

This chapter assumes that an Alarm Monitoring Station has been physically set up and focuses on the procedures the System Administrator should complete to enable procedures to be performed by Alarm Monitoring Operators. Refer to the

B.A.S.I.S. release notes to determine the PC requirements for an Alarm

Monitoring Station (client or server) and refer to the Digital Video Hardware

Installation Manual for physically setting up the hardware.

Additional System Administrator procedures may be included in the

Advanced Operator Procedures on page 187.

Administrative Procedures Checklist

The administrative procedures are completed via the Administration menu in the System Administration application. Instructions can be found in the

Administration section of the System Administrator User Guide.

• Create card formats - card formats (asset, magnetic, smart card, etc.) are required to configure a reader

• Create badge types - (employee, visitor, etc.)

– printing/encoding badge options

– required cardholder fields

– badge ID allocation for generating ID numbers

– guest defaults (extended strike/held times, passage mode, deadbolt override)

• Add directories - required for single sign-on

• Set system, cardholder, monitor and field/page permissions

• Add users

– user n

– internal account and password

– directory account

– segment access

– area access manager levels

• Add Alarm Monitoring workstations - workstations are required to configure hardware devices

– add dot matrix printer via workstations folder

revision 1

— 59

3: System Administrator Procedures

Precision access mode determines the readers that cardholders have access to.

List options are created using list builder.

– connect a printer locally (directly to the Alarm Monitoring workstation).

• Set general system options

– log on authorization warning

– strong password enforcement

– number of days to save queued events

– Linkage Server host

– DataExchange server host

– KnoWho server

• Set cardholder options and visits

– maximum number of badges per cardholder

– ability to create/save photo thumbnails

– badge PIN types (4, 6 or 9-digits)

– PIN code generated (random or manual)

– precision access mode

– use or lose badge feature (change badge status to lost or returned after a specified amount of time)

– visits options

– cardholder, visitor and visit search result options

• Configure global output devices

– SMTP server settings to use when sending e-mail

– GOS paging device

– recipients of e-mail and page messages

• Configure e-mail and paging notification

– fields and display order for e-mails and paging

– fields and/or directories to check when determining who to send an email notification to

• Add segments to your installation

– enable segmentation

– segment options

• Create list options

• Set up archiving parameters

Access Control Procedures Checklist

This portion of the chapter focuses on the procedures the System Administrator should complete to enable access control and monitoring procedures to be performed by Alarm Monitoring Operators.

Note:

Be sure to complete the administrative procedures listed at the beginning of this chapter before attempting any access control and monitoring procedures.

Several access control and monitoring procedures require that certain administrative procedures be completed first. For example you must configure a workstation before you can configure most hardware devices.

60 —

revision 1


All System Administrator access control procedures are completed via the

Access Control or Additional Hardware menu in the System Administration application. Instructions can be found in the Access Control section of the

System Administration User Guide, as well as the Additional Hardware section.

A separate Intrusion Detection User Guide also exists if you are going to configure intrusion detection devices.

• Configure hardware devices

– dialup modem

– access panels

– readers

– alarm panels

• Additional access control configurations

– timezones (specify holidays, assign readers and modes of operation)

– access levels

– anti-passback areas (normal, safe and hazardous areas for mustering)

– alarm mask groups (un/mask multiple alarm inputs simultaneously)

– device groups (input/output readers)

– local and/or global inputs and outputs

• Configure additional hardware

– fire panels

– intercom devices

– personal safety devices

– receivers

– intrusion detection devices

Intrusion Detection Alarm Definitions

See the Alarm Definitions appendix in the Intrusion Detection User Guide for information on alarm definitions in references to customizing intrusion detection alarms.

Alarm Monitoring Operator Procedures

These procedures are used to handle intrusion detection events in Alarm

Monitoring. For specifics see the Alarm Monitoring Operator Procedures chapter in the Intrusion Detection User Guide.

revision 1

— 61


Intrusion Detection Device Statuses

See the Intrusion Detection Device Statuses appendix in the Intrusion Detection

User Guide for more information.

Monitoring Procedures Checklist

Alarm mask groups enable you to un/mask multiple alarm inputs and readers simultaneously.

System Administrator monitoring procedures are completed via the Monitoring menu in the System Administration application. Instructions can be found in the

Monitoring section of the System Administration User Guide.

• Customize alarms, instructions, acknowledgment notes and acknowledgment actions

– alarm mask groups

– customize and configure alarms

– text instructions

– audio

– acknowledgment notes

– automatic acknowledgment actions

• Configure monitor zones

– event routing group

– monitor zones

– monitoring station assignments

• Set up guard tours

– checkpoint actions

– messages and checkpoint events

– monitoring stations

– link camera devices to the checkpoints

– special instructions

• Set Monitoring Options

– associate a command with a device or area icon (enables operators to execute a command with a single and double left-click in the system status tree and map view)

Video Procedures Checklist

All the video procedures are completed via the Video menu in the System

Administration application. Instructions can be found in the Video section of the


• Configure video

– matrix switcher

– video devices (recorders and cameras)

– link hardware devices to a camera

62 —

revision 1


– alarm-video configurations

– add a video recorder to a monitoring zone

• Configure video verification

– CCTV Controller associated with a workstation

– CCTV Command (located on Access Control > Readers > Control tab)

revision 1

— 63


64 —

revision 1

Operator

Procedures


Chapter 4: Set Alarm Monitoring Display Options

Note:

Several windows in Alarm Monitoring can be configured to display according to user preference. These views are recreated every time the user logs into the application.

The following is a list of user-defined display options that are set from the

Configure or Options menu.

•

Select Event Types to Monitor

•

Select Column Configuration

•

Set Automatic Display Options

•

Select Hardware View Options

The Select Hardware View procedure displays the System Status Options

Window.

System Status Options Window

The System

Status

Options window is displayed from the System Status window.

Verify you are in the System Status window, then select Configure > System

Status Options from the menu.

You can also display the System Status Options window by clicking the System

Status icon that displays to the left of the File menu (when you open the System

Status window).

revision 1

— 67

4: Set Alarm Monitoring Display Options

Button/field

All devices

Specified devices

Description

Displays all the devices (active, offline) in the System

Status

window.

Displays specific types of devices including:

Active devices

Displays only active devices in the System Status window.

Offline devices

Displays only offline devices in the System Status window.

Masked devices

Displays only masked devices in the System Status window.

Armed areas

Displays only armed areas in the System Status window. An area is a separately configured section of an Intrusion Detection Panel, sometimes referred to as a partition. To arm an area means to “turn on” the protection for an area.

Disarmed areas

Displays only disarmed areas in the System Status window.

Areas in alarm

Displays only areas that have an active alarm triggered.

Note:

If one or more of the specified device selections are made, only devices matching those criteria display in the view.

68 —

revision 1


Button/field

View

Lock display updates

OK

Cancel

Help

Description

Displays information about devices in one of two formats:

Tree

Displays information in a hierarchical fashion, also called a tree or branching arrangement.

Each entry in the list represents one device. Panels have the leftmost entries and any device connected to a panel is listed below the panel and indented to the right. the search, press F3 on your keyboard.

You can search this or any tree by focusing on the list window and clicking “Ctrl+F”. To proceed through

List

Lists the following information about devices in the system:

• Device (Name)

• Parent Device (Name)

• Current Device Status

Note:

The hardware list displays separate rows for Reader Auxiliary Input and Reader

Auxiliary Output devices.

Prevents items from being added or deleted from the display window.

When the Lock display updates check box is selected an indicator on the status bar displays

“LOCKED.” Devices cannot be added to or deleted from the display window. The status of devices currently in the window update as their status changes. Then if the status of devices not in the window change, they are not added to the display window.

When the Lock display updates check box is not selected, the status bar indicator is blank.

Devices are added to and removed from the display window automatically as their device status changes. For example, if an input becomes active and the view is displaying active devices, the input will be added to the view. If the input is now restored, it will be removed from the view.

Accepts the settings and closes the window.

Closes the window without saving any changes made to the settings.

Displays help for this topic.

Display Option Procedures

Select Event Types to Monitor

If you have permission to edit alarm filters, you can apply an alarm filter to each view in Alarm Monitoring, including the main alarm view, pending alarm view, video verification view and any trace view. Each of these views can be

revision 1

— 69


The alarm filter determines which alarms display based on the type of event the alarm is associated with.

configured to filter out alarms independent of each other, however, only the main alarm view filter is saved from session to session.

For example, you may wish to display every alarm for a specific reader’s trace window but you may not wish to display “Access Granted” alarms in the Main

Alarm Monitoring window. You can apply both of these filters to the different views, but when the session ends, only the filters applied the main window are saved.

1. Open the window from which you want to select the events displayed. Verify this window is the active (topmost) window.

2. From the Configure menu select Alarm Filter. The Alarm Filter window displays.

70 —

revision 1

3. By default, all event types are selected (have a checkmark). If you do not want to display a particular category of events, click that option to deselect it

(remove the checkmark). Click the option again to select it.

4. Click [OK] to close the Alarm Filter window

Select Column Configuration

You can rearrange the order of the columns in any window as well as add or remove columns that display. This is done independently for each type of window. For example, if the column configuration is changed for an alarm window, this becomes the default for all alarm windows of the same type. If the


column configuration is changed for a given reader trace, this will become the default configuration for all reader traces.

1. Open the window from which you want to configure the columns displayed.

Verify this window is the active (topmost) window.

2. From the Configure menu select Columns. The Column Configuration window displays.

Note:

3. In the Select columns display field, click/highlight the name of a column, then click [>>]. The column name appears in the Columns to view display field.

4. Arrange the column names in the order you want them to appear. Click/ highlight a column name in the Columns to view display box. Then use the

[Up] and [Down] buttons to change the column’s relative position.

The order the column names appear in the Columns to view display field is the same order the columns will display in the window which you are configuring the columns for.

5. Click [OK] and the window displays the new column configuration.

Set Automatic Display Options

Several display options are available from the Options menu. To activate an option select it (place a checkmark beside it). To deactivate an option select it again to remove the checkmark. For information on the options available from

the Options menu, refer to Chapter 2: Main Alarm Monitoring Window on page

43

revision 1

— 71


Display Multiple Windows

1. Open the desired windows using the toolbar buttons or menu options.

2. From the Window menu select one of the following:

• Cascade

• Tile Horizontally

• Tile Vertically

3. Using the mouse, click and drag each window to resize and relocate it.

Select Hardware View Options

Hardware view options include list or tree view as well as the type of devices displayed. Users can display every device or select devices that meet a specific criteria such as active, offline and/or masked devices as well as armed areas, disarmed areas and/or areas in alarm.

1. Verify you are in the System

Status

window, then select Configure > System

Status Options from the menu.

2. The System

Status

Options window displays.

a. Select the type of device you would like to display by clicking either the

All devices or Specified devices check box. If you selected the

Specified devices check box, select the desired device by clicking the appropriate radio button (active, offline or masked devices).

b. Select the Tree radio button to view the system hardware in a tree or branching format.

c. Select the List radio button to view a list of devices, their current status and parent device.

d. Select the Lock display updates check box if desired.

3. Click [OK].

72 —

revision 1


Chapter 5: Monitor Devices

The System

Status

window and Device Groups window are used to monitor devices.

System Status Window

Displayed by:

The System Status window lists every access control device, area or action group defined in System Administration for a specific segment. Other configuration settings are listed in parenthesis after each device.

The System

Status

window can be displayed several ways:

• Click the triangle on the System

Status

button and select an existing window or open a new one.

Note:

Clicking the System

Status

button (not the triangle) brings up a new System

Status

window if there is none present. If a System

Status

window is already open, clicking the System

Status

button causes the default (first) window to display.

• From t to display.

• Choose one of the numbered options under the Window menu.

– Though rare, if more than nine System

Status

windows are open, the

More Windows menu option will be available. Choose a window from the list and click [OK] to bring it to the foreground.

revision 1

— 73

5: Monitor Devices

Field

Display window

Hardware Status

Bar

Description

The information in the window is displayed in hierarchical fashion, also called a tree or branching arrangement. Each entry in the list contains the name of one device. Access Panels have the leftmost entries. For a specific Access Panel, a device connected to it is listed below and indented to the right. Each device connected to those devices is listed below them and further indented. An icon to the left of each entry identifies the entry’s type.

Located on the lower right portion of the screen, the status bar on the System Status window has four counters:

Viewing: Shows the number of devices viewed.

Active count: Shows the number of active points in the monitoring zone. This is NOT the same as the number of active devices. For example, if a reader is in the Door Forced Open,

Door Held Open and Reader Tamper states, the active count is increased by three. The active device number is not increased.

Offline count: Shows the number of offline devices in the Monitoring Zone. Every device is counted including alarm inputs, reader auxiliary inputs, alarm outputs and reader auxiliary outputs.

Mask count: Shows the number of masked points in the monitoring zone.

MUSTER MODE: This portion of the status bar only displays when a Monitoring Zone is in

Muster mode.

Device Groups Window

The Device Groups window displays the currently configured device groups within a monitoring zone and is expandable in the tree view. The Device Groups window allows operators to view, test and change the status of devices (cameras, remote monitors, readers, inputs and outputs).

74 —

revision 1

Toolbar Shortcut


To display the Device Groups Window, click the View Device Groups toolbar button or select Device Groups from the View menu

revision 1

— 75


Device Group Test Mode Window

Similar windows display for the test access grants, test forced open and test inputs for device groups. The example below is a Test Inputs for an input device group.

Field

Upper status bar

Upper display window

Lower display window

Lower status bar

Description

Displays information about the upper display window and includes the total number of devices tested, the number of devices that pass and fail, what time the test started and the current status of the device test.

Displays the device name, test status, alarm description, number of inputs or requests received and the current device status. The information displayed in this window can be sorted by any column.

Displays a variety of user-defined columns that can be sorted. Users can select whether the following columns display: Alarm Description, Time/Date, Controller, Device, Input/Output,

Card, Priority, Asset Scan ID, Asset Name, Intercom Station Called, Controller Time,

Transmitter, Transmitter Input, Biometric Score, Account Group, Badge Type, Text, Line

Number and Intrusion Area.

For more information, refer to Select Column

Configuration

on page 70.

Displays information about the lower display window and includes the name of the currently selected alarm, sort criteria, trace type and the total number of alarms listed.

Device Group Icons

The table below identifies the different icon groups available.

Icon Description

B.A.S.I.S. System

Alarm Mask Group

76 —

revision 1



Camera Group

Reader Group

Alarm Input Group

Alarm Output Group

Monitor Group

Hardware Device Icons

The table below identifies the different icons available. To view a list of icons and icon groups available in your database, as well as add or modify icons, open

MapDesigner and select Edit > Icon Library.


Access Panel

Alarm/Camera Input

Alarm/Camera Output

Alarm Panel

Camera

Note:

The Camera icon flashes when there is motion detected with the associated camera.

The CCTV Camera icon turns green when there is sound with the associated camera.

CCTV Monitor

CCTV Panel

Facility Utilization Gate

Fire Panel

Function List

IntelligentVideo Application

IntelligentVideo Server

revision 1

— 77



Intercom Exchange

Intercom Station

Intrusion Area

Intrusion Door

Intrusion Offboard Relays

Intrusion Onboard Relays

Intrusion Panels

Intrusion Zones

Matrix Switcher

Offline Lock Panel

DataConduIT Device

DataConduIT Source

DataConduIT Sub-Device

PC Panel

Personal Safety Device Panel

Reader

Receiver

Remote Monitor

Remote Monitor Video Cell

Segment (only if your system is segmented)

Device Status

Alarm Monitoring is the only application that displays the status of hardware devices. Alarm Monitoring obtains the status of a device from the

78 —

revision 1


Note:

Communication Server, which in turn obtains the device status from hardware controllers.

Status icons are located to the left of hardware device icon. There may be one icon or a combination of icons, depending on the hardware status.

The status of the device is displayed after the entry in parentheses. If viewing the icons on a map, the device status is displayed in parentheses after the icon or as a tool tip when the mouse pointer is over the device icon. This is determined by whether the Display Status on Maps option in the Options menu is checked.

To view a list of current hardware status icons in your database, as well as add additional icons, open MapDesigner and select Edit > Icon Library.

Offline Hardware Devices

Important:

The Communication Server must be running in order for the proper offline status to be reported in Alarm Monitoring.

Devices can be marked offline for two reasons: The connection may be broken or it can intentionally be set offline. In Alarm Monitoring a different color “X” is used to differentiate those items that are intentionally taken offline to those that have a broken connection.

Broken Connection

An “ X ” through an icon indicates a broken connection, meaning that the software cannot communicate to the device. For example:

If a child device is offline then the parent device is examined. If both child and parent are found to be offline then an “ X ” is used for both devices. If only the child device is offline then an “ X ” is used for just the child device.

Although surveillance-only cameras are not associated with a physical video recorder, they are assigned to a virtual “surveillance-only recorder” to maintain consistency in the user interface. For example, the Alarm Monitoring hardware tree below shows two surveillance-only cameras assigned to a virtually surveillance-only recorder which serves only as a placeholder to group cameras.

A 16-bit OEM code can be programmed into the device which allows for a check to occur in Alarm Monitoring. If the OEM code doesn’t match the hardware, an

revision 1

— 79


Invalid ID transaction is generated and the device will not come online. The system status tree will show the status as offline and list the invalid OEM code.

Marked Offline

Many items can be marked offline intentionally in System Administration. When items are marked offline, a black "X" appears on those items in Alarm

Monitoring. A black "X" also appears for those items that are deleted from the system. Deleted items are also marked with text that reads “deleted.”

A list of items that can be marked offline are: Alarm inputs, Cameras, Camera

Inputs, Camera Outputs, Elevator Dispatching Panels, Fire panels, Intercom devices, Intrusion Detection Devices, Stanley access panels, OPC Connections,

Personal Safety Devices, POS Devices, Receivers, SNMP Managers, Video

Recorders.

Items that show a black “X” if their parent device has been marked offline include: Alarm inputs Alarm Mask Groups, Alarm outputs, Alarm panels, Antipassback areas, Camera Inputs, Camera Outputs, Cameras, Elevator dispatching terminals, Fire Devices, Fire Inputs/Outputs, Intercom stations, Intrusion Areas,

Intrusion Doors, Intrusion Onboard/Offboard relays, Intrusion zones, Local function lists, OPC Sources, POS Register, Readers.

Map items need to be configured, in MapDesigner, to use the current state of the device rather than a default icon in order for the proper icons to be shown on the map.

Procedures for Monitoring Devices

Update the Hardware Status

Hardware status information displays in several Alarm Monitoring windows.

When alarms and actions occur in the system, B.A.S.I.S. software updates the status information “live” for the affected hardware. Operators can also choose to have the status updated on demand.

1. Select Update All Hardware Status from the Control menu or by rightclick an alarm, access panel, alarm panel, alarm input, relay output or reader.

2. The update all hardware status feature polls the currently selected device and updates the hardware status of the associated devices. A message displays when the update is complete.

80 —

revision 1


Note:

If you are running Apollo hardware, there is a Hardware Status Update

Frequency window to set automatic updates. You can set the frequency to

No Updates, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 minutes (by selecting Hardware Status

Frequency from the Configure menu).

Perform a Device Test

Operators can perform a test on various devices in the system. A special test mode operation is available for Input Groups, Reader Groups (Door Forced) and

Reader Groups (Access Grants). Performing this test allows you to see which devices generated alarms and which ones did not.

1. Display the Device Groups window by selecting View > Device Groups.

2. Right-click the device group and select the Test Inputs, Test Door Forced or Test Access Grants. If you select Test Access Grants, skip to step 7 .

3. A dialog box appears:

Note:

4. You have two choices. Choose Show alarms only in Test Mode windows if you do not want the results to show up on any Monitoring Station. Otherwise choose Show alarms in all windows on all Monitoring Stations.

5. Type in the duration (in minutes) of the test. This option is available only if you selected Show alarms only in Test mode windows.

6. Click [OK] to initiate the test.

7. A Test Mode window launches. The top portion of the window lists all the devices being tested and their current status (whether the test was successful/ unsuccessful). Devices that failed the test flash in red. The bottom portion of the window displays a trace of the related alarms.

8. When the test is finished, all the windows and monitoring stations resume their normal display of alarms.

Device status is not available for Matrix Switchers or Account Panels.

revision 1

— 81


Locate or Search for a Device

Operators can locate or search for a device in any window in Alarm Monitoring.

1. Display any Alarm Monitoring window.

2. Verify your cursor is in the window.

3. Begin typing the name of the device. The system automatically scrolls to the first occurrence of those letters in column one.

View the Last Connection Time for Dialup Panels

The Last connect time status is displays in parenthesis after each dialup panel. It reflects the time of the panel’s last “Communications Restored” event and is updated every time you disconnect from the panel.

To view a dialup panel’s Last connect time within Alarm Monitoring, locate the dialup panel in the System

Status

window. In parenthesis after the name of the dialup panel, the Last connect time is listed.

Last Connection Time Guidelines

The following are guidelines for the Last connect time status:

• If a dialup panel has never connected, the Last connect time for it is “Never”.

• If a dialup panel connects while Alarm Monitoring is not running, the Last connect time for it is retrieved from the database when Alarm Monitoring starts up again.

• When a dialup panel is disconnected, the System

Status

window immediately reflects the new Last connect time regardless of whether the

“Communications Lost” alarm is acknowledged or not.

• When a dialup panel and Alarm Monitoring station are in different time zones, the Last connect time displays both the local time and the panel time.

Download the B.A.S.I.S. Database or Firmware

Operators can download the B.A.S.I.S. database and/or firmware to devices via

Alarm Monitoring. Devices include access panels (BAS-500, BAS-1000, and

BAS-2000), dual interface Rdr1 readers, alarm panels, RS-485 command keypads and cameras.

82 —

revision 1


Notes:

It is not possible to download firmware to single reader interfaces.

It is only possible to download firmware to BAS-1320 version B dual reader interfaces through the primary reader.

It is only possible to download firmware to BAS-CK command keypads connecting directly via RS-485 interface cable.

It is only possible to download firmware to BAS-500B gateways communicating to RSI Handkey, Identix Fingerprint and Bioscrypt

Fingerprint Biometric readers (number 0 only).

Toolbar Shortcut

1. Open Alarm Monitoring and display the System

Status

window by selecting

View > System Status and then the desired window.

2. Right-click the device in the hardware view and select Download Database,

Download Firmware or Download Reader Firmware.

View the Controller Properties

The type of firmware a controller has is indicated in the firmware revision reported in the Alarm Monitoring hardware view. It can also be found in the diagnostic tab of the access panels folder in System Administration and in the main window of the Controller Encryption Configuration Utility, which can be found in the B.A.S.I.S. directory.

Note:

If the firmware on the BAS-500, BAS-1000, and BAS-2000 controllers is not up to the latest version that is in the release a “[Not current]” tag will be noted on the firmware version string.

Note:

The flash chip size is indicated in the Alarm Monitoring controller properties dialog box, which you get to by right-clicking on the controller and selecting properties. It can also be found in the diagnostic tab of the access panels folder in

System Administration.

If the current firmware revision in the controller is older then 3.041 the controller will not report its flash size and it will not be indicated in any utility.

The current DIP switch settings for a given controller are indicated in the Alarm

Monitoring controller properties dialog box, which you get to by right-clicking on the controller and selecting properties. It can also be found in the Diagnostic tab of the access panels folder in System Administration.

BAS-2000 and BAS-3000 boards show the Communications Path Status, which indicates which of their dual path connections are active. The value of this status can be either Primary or Secondary/Failover. The secondary connection is only used when a problem with the primary problem has occurred. This status can also be seen in the System Status Tree of the controller.

revision 1

— 83


There is an additional property, Selective Cardholder Download, which is either enabled or disabled in the controller properties of an Access Panel. If you update the selective download configuration in System Administration, you can perform an Update Hardware Status in Alarm Monitoring to see the changes.

84 —

revision 1


Chapter 6: Trace Alarms and Events

Note:

B.A.S.I.S. allows you to trace the alarms and events associated with a monitor zone, controller, device, badge, asset or area. This includes events from third party DataConduIT sources.

Trace permissions for a Monitor Permission Group are set in System

Administration or ID CredentialCenter in Administration > Users >

Monitor Permission Groups tab > Monitor sub-tab.

Trace Configuration Window Overview

The Trace Configuration window performs live and historical traces of events and is displayed by:

• Selecting the Trace menu and then the type of device you wish to trace.

Click [OK] when B.A.S.I.S. prompts you to verify the name of the device to be traced.

• Right-clicking an alarm and selecting Trace and then the device you wish to trace.

• If tracing a badge you are first introduced with the following dialog box.

Type the badge ID you wish to trace and click [OK].

revision 1

— 85

6: Trace Alarms and Events

Trace Configuration Window

Trace Configuration Window

Field

Perform historical trace

Today

Start

End

Apply start and end time to each day

Use restored transactions

Description

If the check box is selected, the trace will include events that occurred between the Start and

End date/times you specify.

When clicked, the Start and End fields populate with the following:

• Start and End date: the current day’s date

• Start time: 00:00 on the current date

• End time: 23:59 on the current date

The first date/time combination that the trace displays events for

The last date/time combination that the trace displays events for

If the check box is selected, the time range is applied to each day within the date range.

For example: A trace has a Start date/time of 12/1/2003 9:00 and an End date/time of 12/9/

2003 17:00.

• If the Apply start and end time to each day check box is checked, then the trace will include only those events that occurred during the hours of 9:00 a.m. through 5:00 p.m. on the days December 1 st

through December 9 th

, 2003.

• If the Apply start and end time to each day check box is not checked, then the trace will include all events that occurred from 9:00 a.m. on December 1 st

until 5:00 p.m. on

December 9 th

.

This option is applicable only when a historical trace is performed.

• If the check box is selected, restored transactions will be included in the historical trace.

• If the check box is not selected, normal transactions from the EVENTS table will be used for the historical trace.

86 —

revision 1


Trace Configuration Window (Continued)

Field

Perform live trace

Description

Controls whether new events are displayed or not

Show only those alarms which have marked video

Alarm Filter

OK

Cancel

Help

• If the check box is selected, the trace displays new events.

• If the check box is not selected, live tracing is disabled and new events are excluded from the trace.

Controls whether alarms (events) that have marked video are displayed or not.

• If the check box is selected, live tracing shows events that are new AND are configured

(in the System Administration application) to have video marked for them. The marking is not instant, so the trace may not show the icon in front of the event right away.

• When the Show only those alarms which have marked video check box is checked and the Perform historical trace check box is checked, the trace will show events which have video marked for them, regardless of the current alarm-video configuration in the System Administration application. This means that a video-only trace may exclude some alarms seen in the main alarm view with a icon in front of them.

Enables you to configure the type of events that will be displayed for a trace. When clicked, the Alarm Filter window opens.

Performs the trace using the settings selected and closes the Trace Configuration window. A

Trace Monitor window will open, which looks identical to the Main Alarm Monitoring window, but displays only those alarms that are associated with the trace criteria specified.

Cancels the pending requested action.

Displays help for this topic.

Procedure for Tracing

Trace Alarms and Events

B.A.S.I.S. allows you to trace the alarms and events associated with a monitor zone, controller, device, badge, asset or area. This includes events from third party DataConduIT sources.

1. Select (highlight) an alarm, event or device you want to trace.

2. Do one of the following:

• Right-click and select Trace. Then select Controller, Device, Badge,

Asset or Area.

• From the Trace menu select Controller, Device, Badge, Asset or Area.

• Click the toolbar button that corresponds to what you want to trace.

Choices include:

Traces a Controller

revision 1

— 87

6: Trace Alarms and Events

Note:

Traces a Device (including alarm outputs, reader aux inputs and reader aux outputs)

Traces a Badge

If you are tracing a badge the Trace Badge window displays asking you to verify the Badge ID. Click [OK].

3. The Trace Configuration window displays.

4. To perform a historical trace, select the Perform historical trace check box and select the Start and End dates.

• Optional - You can also select the Apply start and end time to each

day or the Use restored transactions check box.

5. To perform a live trace, select the Perform live trace check box.

• Show only those alarms which have marked video check box unchecked

6. To view only alarms with video select the Show only those alarms which

have marked video check box.

7. Click [Alarm Filter] to select the types of events that will be displayed for this trace.

8. In the Alarm Filter window, select (place a checkmark beside) the alarm types you want displayed.

9. Click [OK].

10. In the Trace Configuration dialog, click [OK].

11. B.A.S.I.S. will open a new Trace Monitor window that looks identical to the

Main Alarm Monitoring window, but only displays alarms that are associated with the trace.

88 —

revision 1


Chapter 7: Video Monitoring

Toolbar Shortcut

The Video Monitoring window displays live video only. To view recorded video you must use the Video Player.

The Video Monitoring window performs the following function:

• Displays live video from one camera at any given time.

The Video Monitoring window is displayed by:

• Selecting the Video Monitoring toolbar button.

• Selecting View > Video Monitoring from the menu.

Video Monitoring Window

Field

Device Groups listing

Display area

Description

Lists the available video device groups. A device group can contain devices from more than one access panel.

Device groups can also be segmented and belong either to one segment or all segments. If a device group belongs to only one segment, the group will contain only devices associated with the access panel defined for that segment.

Displays a specific camera view - live.

revision 1

— 89

7: Video Monitoring

Video Monitoring Window Procedures

View the Video Tour

The Video Tour is used to view a group of cameras successively. These cameras are defined as a device group in the Groups folder of System Administration. The

Video Tour feature is only available for online cameras/recorders.

Toolbar Shortcut

1. Launch the Video Monitoring window by either selecting the Video

Monitoring toolbar button or choosing Video Monitoring from the View menu.

2. Verify the cameras/recorders are online. If the device icon does not have a red “ X ” through it the device is online.

3. Right-click a camera device group and select Configure Video. The Video

Tour window displays.

4. Select the desired View time and click [OK]. This is the amount of time each camera is displayed in the tour.

5. Right-click the camera device group again and select Start Tour. The right side of the window displays the camera views.

Video Player

The Video Player performs the following functions:

• Displays live or recorded video from one camera

•

Displays live or recorded video from a group of cameras successively

• Displays video from a group of cameras or a recorder simultaneously.

• Displays recorded video associated with a video search

• Enables you to pan, tilt and zoom recorded and live video

90 —

revision 1


The Video Player is displayed by right-clicking an alarm, device, camera or camera device group and selecting Launch Video.

Note:

Refer to the Video Player Status Bar Table on page 93 for the descriptions of the status bar components, A-F.

Video Player Menu and Toolbar Buttons Table

Field Toolbar button

Description

Play menu

Control menu

Contains the following menu options:

Live: Plays live video from one or several cameras depending on the view settings.

Recorded: Plays recorded video for the selected camera(s).

File: Plays video clips from a file.

Note:

A checkmark displays beside the option that is active.

Load Layout: Restore a previously saved video matrix layout.

Save Layout: Save the current video matrix view as a new layout.

Contains several options to play, pause and stop video as well as advance video, adjust playback speed, search video, mute audio and remove cameras from the Video Player window.

revision 1

— 91


Video Player Menu and Toolbar Buttons (Continued)Table

Field Toolbar button

Description

Options menu

View menu

Play button

Contains options to load video files, set start/end times to view recorded video, export video to a file, capture images from video, create video events, modify video performance (frame rate, quality, and video acceleration), and configure

PTZ tours and presets.

Contains options to change how cameras views are displayed.

Plays recorded video.

Pause button

Stop button

Frame

Advance button

Fast Forward

End button

Previous

Camera

Next Camera

Pauses or temporarily stops playing recorded video.The video will continue from where it temporarily stopped when the play button is clicked.

Stops playing recorded video and resets the player to the beginning of the video.

Advances video one frame at a time.

Video Layout

Activate PTZ

Activate

Digital PTZ

Display window

Status bar

Advances (fast forwards) video to the last frame.

Displays the previous camera view. This feature only applies when you have opened multiple images and the Video Player is in single view mode.

Displays the next camera view. This feature only applies when you have opened the Video Player so that you can view multiple images and you are currently in single view.

Displays the selected visual matrix of video cells. Options include single view, matrix view, and static templates (1x1, 2x2, 3x3, 4x4, 13+1, 1+5, and 5+1).

Enables PTZ commands for supported cameras.

For more information, refer to Pan, Tilt, and Zoom

on page 121.

Enables digital zoom for PTZ cameras.

Displays live or previously recorded video.

For information on the status bar please refer to

Video Player Status Bar

Table

on page 93.

92 —

revision 1


Video Player Status Bar Table

Symbol

A

Description

When live video is playing the status bar displays the camera name.

If an LNVR is offline, the video player can connect directly to an IP camera to display live video. A direction connection to the IP camera is indicated in the video player status bar by a icon.

B

E

F

C

D

When recorded video is playing the status bar contains two arrow heads . You can click the arrow heads to change the information displayed to any of the following:

• Camera name

• Video start date and time

• Video start date/time and end date/time

Move the slider back and forth to view video at different dates/times. You do not need to pause or stop video to use the video display slider.

Note:

Cameras configured with an LNVR recorder display different colors in the slider for different types of recorded video.

•

Red - video is not available (e.g. a download was performed, LNVR was disconnected or restarted)

• White - video is not being recorded (e.g. time lapse recording)

• Green - video is being recorded (e.g. continuous recording or time lapse recording)

• Black - time synchronization (e.g. a third-party application has updated the time on the LNVR)

• Gray - video has not been cached on the client yet

Video start time. Use this feature to adjust your video search.

Determines how fast the video is played as well as searched. Using the cursor click near the minus symbol to slow the video down or click the plus symbol to speed the video up. You can also adjust the speed by clicking and dragging the speed bar arm.

Video end time. Use this feature to adjust your video search.

Set the volume level for the camera with audio recording enabled. Click the icon to toggle mute.

A red X will appear when the audio is muted.

Daylight Saving Time

To search video that was recorded the hour before or after the Daylight Saving

Time changeover, you must perform two searches instead of one. For example, in the Eastern Standard Timezone the Daylight Saving Time changeover occurs at

2:00 a.m. To view video that was recorded between 1:00 a.m. and 3:30 a.m., perform two searches. For the first search, specify 1:00 a.m. for the start time and

1:59:59 for the end time. For the second search, specify 3:00:01 a.m. for the start time and 3:30 a.m. for the end time. Use this same technique when exporting video recorded during the changeover time.

Attempting to play or export a continuous video clip with a start time before 2:00 a.m. to an end time after 3:00 a.m. is not recommended and may result in undesired playback behavior. For this reason, search and/or export recorded

revision 1

— 93


video before the Daylight Saving Time changeover separate from video after the changeover.

Troubleshooting

If you receive the message: “The end time must not be before the start time.” set the End time to 1:59.59 a.m. not 2:00:00 a.m.

If you receive the message: “The time requested is not available on the Video

Recorder, and could not be located on the Video Archive Server.” set the Start time to 3:00:01 a.m. not 3:00:00 a.m.

Customize Overlay Information Dialog

The Customize Overlay Information Dialog displays when you export video in

an “.ASF” format and you click [Customize]. For more information, refer to

Customize Overlay Information Dialog on page 536.

94 —

revision 1

Performance Dialog

Adjustments to the Video Player can be made to enhance performance by limiting the frame rate, decompression, video acceleration, and edge enhancement. The Performance dialog is displayed by selecting Options >

Performance from the Video Player window. Settings are configured and stored for the monitoring station and apply to both live and recorded video. Any changes to performance settings take effect after the Video Player is restarted.


Video Player - Performance dialog

Field

Frame rate limit

(LNVR only)

Decompression

Quality (LDVR-408 and LDVR-444 only)

Edge Enhancement

Filter (LDVR-408 and LDVR-444 only)

Video Acceleration

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Limit the frame rate displayed by the Video Player. Useful for remote clients that have limited bandwidth.

Determines the quality of the video decompression which influences the size of the image displayed in the Video Player. The lowest decompression setting produces a smaller image and requires fewer resources from the client computer.

Determines whether the LDVR decoder should favor smooth images or detail. Lower values produce smoother images, but loose some small details. Higher values produce a grainy image, yet emphasize and sharpen details.

Used for troubleshooting problems displaying video related to the video card or device drivers.

Full acceleration utilizes the video card, thus freeing the computer CPU and memory for other tasks. Additionally, Windows Display Properties has a Hardware Acceleration setting on the

Troubleshoot tab of Advanced Settings that may be used for troubleshooting.

Note:

Some video cards and device drivers may produce varying results. Adjust the value to each level to find the one that generates the desired effects.

Save settings and return to the Video Player window.

Note:

You must close the Video Player for the changes to take effect.

Close the Performance dialog without saving changes.

View help for this topic.

revision 1

— 95


Video Monitoring Features

Buffering Streaming Video

Buffering of live and recorded video reduces the amount of network bandwidth used by buffering the video on the client machine for playback. Video may be viewed multiple times from the client rather than requesting the video from the video recorder repeatedly.

This feature enhances live video mode by allowing the user to review live video that has been cached without switching to recorded video. The live video toolbar now displays a slider which can be used to navigate the cached video. The current time of the video is displayed in the toolbar. The live video cache retains a maximum of 10 minutes. The maximum size per cached video stream is 50 MB of RAM. Live video can be paused, resumed, slowed, or accelerated. Live video play will resume if video is paused or slowed down until it reaches the beginning of the cache or if video is accelerated to the current time.

Buffering of recorded video occurs during playback. During video playback, recorded video is cached in 10 minute increments.

To turn off the buffering of live and/or recorded video on a per workstation basis, add the following lines to the [DigitalVideo] section of the ACS.INI file:

• To turn off live: BufReader0=0

• To turn off recorded: BufReader2=0

To turn buffering back on, remove the line(s) above or set the value equal to 1.

Browser-based VideoViewer

An alternative to using the video player is to use the browser-based VideoViewer.

The browser-based VideoViewer has some enhanced feature capabilities that are not available in Alarm Monitoring. Some of these features include:

• More flexible recorded video viewing options

• Robust layout manipulation

• Better joystick control with the use of buttons

For more information about these features, refer to the VideoViewer (Browserbased) User Guide.

The browser-based VideoViewer can be launched from Alarm Monitoring. The

Use browser-based VideoViewer option located in the right-click menus of supported video devices can be used to enable this feature on a per workstation basis. A check mark next to the menu option indicates that the feature has been enabled. Once the Use browser-based VideoViewer option has been enabled, all manual requests for live and recorded video will be displayed in VideoViewer.

To use the browser-based VideoViewer, the Web Application Server must be fully installed and configured. For more information, refer to the Installation

Guide.

96 —

revision 1


Camera Lookup

Camera lookup is used to locate a specific camera or multiple cameras by name.

The search permissions can be configured to include only the current monitor zone or the entire system. To perform a camera lookup, right-click the monitor zone or camera device group in Alarm Monitoring and select “Camera lookup...”

Searches initiated from the monitor zone will have the results highlighted in the

System Hardware Tree and searches initiated from a camera device group will have the results highlighted in the Device Groups window. Searches that return results outside of the current monitor zone or device group will be added to the monitor zone or device group.

The extent of the search is limited by a user permission on the Users > Monitor

Permission Groups > Video sub-tab. To enable a user group to search for cameras across the entire system, select the Camera lookup includes all

monitor zones check box. In segmented systems, users must have segment access to the segment in which the cameras video recorder resides for it to appear in the search results.

When a search is performed, the Camera Lookup dialog is displayed. The

Camera Lookup dialog message indicates whether the search will be performed in the current monitor zone or across the entire system. The search is performed by entering a portion of the camera name, wildcard characters (*) are not used.

For example, a search for “hall” would return cameras named “Hallway”, “Main hall”, and “Hall stairwell” if they existed in the system.

If a single camera is found it is highlighted in the System Hardware Tree or

Device Groups window. If multiple cameras are found that match the string entered, they are displayed in the Select Cameras dialog. Multiple cameras can be selected for addition to the monitor zone by placing a check mark beside each camera. The first selected camera will be highlighted and additional selected cameras will be added to the monitor zone if they are not already included. This addition to the monitor zone is temporary and restricted to the current Alarm

Monitoring session, camera additions are not saved per user or workstation.

Two-way Audio

Two-way audio enables communication between a monitoring workstation and a camera equipped with a microphone and speakers. A workstation can communicate with a single device or multiple devices simultaneously. A microphone or a pre-recorded file can be used to send audio to the device.

Audio quality is dependent on the quality of the hardware. The two-way audio streams are retrieved by the client directly from the camera. Audio sent to the camera from the client is not captured by the video recorder and cannot be recorded.

Two-way audio is enabled on the Audio tab of the Camera form in System

Administration. If the selected camera does not support two-way audio, the

Allow Two-Way Audio check box will be grayed out. Two-way audio devices may support full or half-duplex. Full duplex allows simultaneous two-way communication, while half-duplex allows communication in one direction at a

revision 1

— 97


Note:

time. The Two-Way Audio check box on the Users > Monitor Permission

Groups > Video sub-tab determines user permissions for the feature.

Two-way audio is controlled by the Two-Way Audio Communication dialog.

This dialog can be launched from the right-click menu of a supported camera in the System Status Tree in Alarm Monitoring or from the Play menu in the video player or VideoViewer. If the camera is either not configured or not supported for two-way audio, the option will be grayed out. All devices are controlled from the same Two-Way Audio Communication dialog. Each device can be controlled individually or multiple devices can be controlled simultaneously by selecting the check boxes of the devices and using the Multiple Selection Controls portion of the dialog.

Two-way audio is not available if the camera is in MPEG4 mode.

Two-way Audio Communication Dialog

Field(s)

Device name and status

Talk/End Talk

Description

The name of the device is displayed with each control with the status of the device in parenthesis. Statuses include:

• Active - The device is currently being controlled.

• Inactive - There is a connection to the device, but the controls are not currently in use.

• Connecting - An attempt is being made to connect to the device.

• Communication error - There is a problem connecting to the device.

This button begins and ends transmission from the monitoring workstation to the camera using a microphone. The [Talk] button changes to [End Talk] while the connection is active.

This button is disabled under the following conditions:

• A file is currently being sent.

• A connection is being established to the device.

• The camera supports only half-duplex mode and [End Listen] is currently active.

98 —

revision 1


Two-way Audio Communication Dialog

Field(s)

Listen/End Listen

Description

This button begins and ends transmission from the camera to the monitoring workstation. The

[Listen] button changes to [End Listen] while the connection is active.

Send File/End

Send File

Reconnect

Device check boxes

Close button (Red

X)

Multiple Selection

Controls

Select all



• The camera supports only half-duplex mode and [End Talk] or [End Send File] is currently active.

This button begins and ends transmission from the monitoring workstation to the camera using an audio file. The [Send File] button changes to [End Send File] while the file is being transmitted.

When [Send File] is pressed, a dialog allows you to browse for an audio file. Only the .WAV

8kHz 16-bit PCM file format is supported. To cancel the file before it is complete, press [End

Send File].


• [End Talk] is currently active.


• The camera supports only half-duplex mode and [End Listen] is currently active.

This button is displayed when the connection to the camera is lost or cannot be established.

When clicked, an attempt will be made to reconnect to the camera.

Select the check box for each device that you wish to control using the Multiple Selection

Controls portion of the dialog.

Each device control includes a close button (red X). Pressing this button closes the connection to the device and removes the control from the dialog. If the dialog contains only one control, the dialog is closed.

These buttons are used in conjunction with the device check boxes to control multiple devices simultaneously from one set of controls.

Select this check box to select all devices for use with the Multiple Selection Controls.

Deselect this check box to clear the check boxes for all devices.

Video Monitoring Procedures

Launch Video (Live/Recorded) From a Camera

1. To launch video in the VideoViewer complete one of the following:

• Double-click a camera.

• Drag and drop a camera, camera device group or recorder into the display window or Video Player. If you drag and drop a device group or

revision 1

— 99


recorder into the Video Player, the first camera in the group that was added to the database displays.

2. To launch video in Alarm Monitoring complete one of the following:

• In an alarm window right-click an alarm with associated video and select Launch Video. Recorded video will be launched with the start time of the active alarm, including pre-roll if configured.

• In a map or System

Status

window right-click a device icon and select

Launch Video.

• In the Device Group window right-click a camera icon and select

Launch Video.

• In the Video Monitoring window double-click an online camera or right-click a camera icon and select Launch Video.

• Drag and drop a camera, camera device group or recorder into the Video

Player. This launches ALL of the video cameras in that particular group or recorder (up to 32 cameras at once).

3. To view live video select Live from the Play menu.

4. To view recorded video select Recorded from the Play menu.

Export Video to a File

Video can be exported to a file using the Video Export dialog from the Video

Player. For more information, refer to Export Video to a File on page 537.

Load and View a Video File

1. Display the Video Player. For more information, refer to Video Player on page 90.

2. Select Load File from the Options menu.

3. The Open window displays. Select the correct “.info” file, and click [Open].

The recorded video automatically plays.

4. To replay the video file click the Stop toolbar button and then click the Play toolbar button.

Monitor Video of a Specific Camera

To monitor video of a specific camera in Alarm Monitoring complete one of the following:

• In the Video Monitoring window double-click an online camera to view live video.

• In an alarm window, map or System

Status

window right-click a device icon and select Launch Video to view live or recorded video.

• In the Device Group window right-click a camera icon and select Launch

Video to view live or recorded video.

• In the Video Monitoring window double-click an online camera or rightclick a camera icon and select Launch Video.

100 —

revision 1


Toolbar Shortcut

• Drag and drop a camera into the Video Player.

• If the Video Player is in matrix view, select Single View from the Video

Layout toolbar button. Click the Previous Camera or Next Camera toolbar buttons to view a specific camera.

• In the Video Player select Camera from the View menu. A sub-menu lists the currently displayed cameras. Select the camera of your choice.

About Surveillance-Only Cameras

Surveillance-only cameras support live video only, they cannot record or playback video, whereas IP (Internet Protocol) cameras can. IP cameras are directly connected to the network with their own IP address. They do not need to be connected to a computer or a video capture card. More advanced IP cameras may provide additional functionality such as a built-in web server, motion detection, alarm inputs/outputs and e-mail and FTP support.

Switch Camera Views Displayed in Video Player

Cameras and device groups can be dragged and dropped from the camera list into the Video Player for viewing.

Monitor Video of Multiple Cameras (Successively)

You can use the Video Player or the Video Monitoring window to monitor video of multiple cameras successively. To monitor video using the Video Monitoring

window, refer to View the Video Tour on page 90. To monitor video of multiple

cameras in matrix mode, refer to Matrix View on page 116.

Toolbar Shortcuts

To monitor video of multiple cameras successively using the Video Player:

1. Follow the procedures to

Launch Video (Live/Recorded) From a Camera on page 99 in the Video Player.

2. Click and drag every camera or camera group, you will want to view, into the Video Player.

3. From the View menu select Camera. A sub-menu displays. Select the desired camera view.

4. Repeat step 3 to view different cameras successively or click the Previous

Camera and the Next Camera toolbar buttons.

revision 1

— 101


Capture an Image

You can capture images from live and recorded video. Images are saved as

“.JPG” files.



2. Verify one camera view is selected; the status bar for a selected camera is blue - not gray.

3. From the Options menu select Capture Image.

4. The Multimedia Capture window is displayed.

5. Click [Export]. The Save As window is displayed.

6. Enter a file name and click [Save]. If the photo is bitmapped and the crop window is used, the portion of the image within the cropped area is saved.

Otherwise, the whole photo is saved.

7. Click [OK].

Create a Video Event

Video events are automatically created in Alarm Monitoring if a camera is correctly added to a video recorder, hardware is linked to the camera and an alarm-video configuration is established.

You can also manually create a video event to lock/mark video at the exact start and stop times you desired. For example, if the B.A.S.I.S. system automatically creates an event for a door forced open, but you want the event to include 5 seconds after the event occurred, you can review the video and manually create an event at the desired times.


Launch Video (Live/Recorded) From a Camera on page 99. Verify the recorded video is playing in the Video Player.

2. If necessary use the toolbar settings and the start and stop time fields to identify the portion of video to be marked as an event.

3. From the Options menu select Create Video Event.

4. The Create Video Event dialog is displayed. Select the appropriate Event

text from the drop-down list or enter new text to append to the User

Generated Video Event alarm.

5. Click [OK].

6. The Alarm Monitoring window displays a User Generated Video Event alarm.

Automatically Launch both Live and Recorded Video on

Alarm

If an alarm is configured to automatically launch the Video Player, you can configure it to launch recorded video in addition to live video. This feature must be configured on each Alarm Monitoring workstation.

102 —

revision 1


It is highly recommended to set the playback pre-roll for the camera to at least 10 seconds when using this feature. For more information, refer to the Digital Video

Software User Guide.

To configure this feature, add the following settings in the [DigitalVideo] section of the ACS.INI file.

Setting Comment

DoubleVideoOnAlarm=1

AlarmDurationMax=60

Use this line to enable the launch of both live and recorded video when an alarm is configured to automatically launch video on alarm.

Use this line to configure the length of the recorded video clip that will be launched.

The default value is 60 seconds.

PauseOnDoubleVideoOnAlarm • A value of 1 pauses the video at the time of the alarm (the end of the recorded video clip).

• A value of 0 begins playing the recorded video including pre-roll (if configured).

The default behavior with this feature is to launch recorded and live video in matrix mode. Additional configuration may be necessary if multiple cameras are linked in a video event to display the each camera channel as a pair of video cells

(recorded and live).

By adding lines to the [DigitalVideo] section of the ACS.INI file, you can configure the layout of cameras in the matrix view. Each pair of live and recorded video streams for a camera has a width of 500 and a height of 200. You can configure different displays that depend on the total number of video streams.

The number located after PlayerWidth and PlayerHeight represents the number of video streams. For example:

To display 2 camera channels (4 video streams) with one camera (one pair of live and recorded video) on each of two rows you would add the following lines:

PlayerWidth4=500

PlayerHeight4=400

To display 4 camera channels (8 video streams) with two cameras (2 pairs of live and recorded video) on each of two rows you would add the following lines:

PlayerWidth8=1000

PlayerHeight8=400

revision 1

— 103


Event Configuration/Search Dialog

The Event Configuration/Search dialog is used to:

• Configure event parameters for real-time LNVR video processing and alarm generation. For detailed IntelligentVideo Event information, refer to the

IntelligentVideo User Guide.

• Display alerts when events occur. Alerts display in three areas of the dialog:

– In the video window, alerts display as a highlighted area.

– In the Event Feedback pane, alerts display as a spike in the alert status graph.

– In the alarm history pane, alerts display as thumbnails or text.

• Search LNVR or LDVR recorded/archived video for the occurrence of specific events.

• View search results as a detailed list or thumbnail images.

• Play recorded video search results in the Video Player pane.

• Play live video in the Video Player pane.

Configuration Pane

Video player pane

Event Feedback Pane

Alarm History Pane

Note:

Different fields, buttons and event options are available, depending on how you open the Event Configuration/Search dialog.

104 —

revision 1


Event Configuration/Search Dialog Menu Options

The following table describes the menu and sub-menu options available from the

Event Configuration/Search dialog.

Event Configuration/Search Dialog - Menus

Menu Name Menu

Options

Event Menu Select Event

Function

Enables you to select the event for which the current video source will be analyzed.

Note:

The Select Event sub-menu option is available only if you open the

Event Configuration/Search dialog using the Video Player.

In System Administration, you have to select an event before you can open the Event Configuration/Search dialog. Therefore, if you selected an event to open the dialog the Select Event sub-menu option will not display.

Screen Output Some event feedback and configuration parameters display directly on the video to help you visualize what is being (or what has been) configured. If you wish to enable this output, verify that a checkmark displays beside this sub-menu option.

Load/Save

Configuration

Copy/Paste

Configuration

Allows you to save the current configuration and load it at a later time for the same type of event.

It is possible to copy a configuration from one event and paste it to a different event. In this case, all parameters that apply to the new event will be used.

For example, the configuration for a motion detection event can be copied/pasted to an abandoned object event. In this example, the “Region of interest” parameter exists in both events, so that parameter will be saved. But the abandoned object event does not use “Threshold”, so that parameter will be ignored. Lastly, motion detection did not use the “Duration” parameter, so the original duration value for the abandoned object event will be used.

revision 1

— 105


Event Configuration/Search Dialog - Menus (Continued)

Menu Name Menu

Options

Player Menu Switch to

Recorded/

Live

Function

Select Start/

End Times

Displays a dialog where you can select the start and end times of a recorded video search.

Export Frame Allows you to export the current frame into a picture file. Supported image formats are BMP, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, and PNG.

Play Starts/resumes video playback. This command is not visible when video is playing.

Pause

Stop

Search

Zoom

Frame Rate

Enables you to switch to and from recorded and live video.

Pauses playback. When video play is resumed, it continues from where it was temporarily stopped. This command is visible only when video is playing.

Stops playback and rewinds the video to the beginning.

Fast-forwards through video while continuing to analyze it. This allows you to search through video faster than real-time and look for events of interest, using the Event Output and Event History panes.

Enables you to set pre-defined (50%, 100%, and 200%) zoom levels for the video player.

Sets the frame rate at which video is fed to the client side. By default, this value is set to 10 frames per second (fps). If the source video is set at a higher fps, video will be analyzed at the higher frame rate, but some frames will not be sent to the client display.

This option is available when the client display is on a computer separate from the video analysis service and the network connection between client and the service is less than ideal. Reducing the frame rate will speed up processing because the server side will not have to wait for the client to consume the video frames it has sent.

106 —

revision 1


Event Configuration/Search Dialog Fields

The following table describes some of the configuration parameters available in the Event Configuration/Search dialog.

Event Configuration/Search Dialog - Fields

Pane Field

Video Player Pane Video window

Description

Video playback window.

Command buttons and Status indicator

Note:

If configuration or event feedback controls have any additional information, you may choose to draw in this window or on top of the video.

Buttons at the bottom of the pane allow you to execute the same commands that are available through the menus. In addition to the menu options, the command buttons allow you to:

• Set an arbitrary zoom level for the entire video search window

• Search video by using the position indicator/seek bar control

• Play, pause, and stop recorded video

• Play the video at an accelerated rate by using the search button

Indicates the current status of the IntelligentVideo engine or video processing engine. If there are problems connecting to the search server component, the status indicator will indicate the connection state and any error values encountered.

Note:

In live video mode, most of these controls are absent since live video cannot be paused, stopped, or searched. The only option available with live video is to change the zoom level.

revision 1

— 107


Event Configuration/Search Dialog - Fields (Continued)

Pane

Configuration

Pane

Field Description

The fields that display in the Configuration pane depend on the event selected. An event must be selected to populate the Configuration pane.

Region of Interest

(ROI)

The ROI identifies the area of video to be processed.

Click the Create a Region of Interest button video to mark the area you wish to define.

and then click on the

Once the ROI has been created, use the mouse to drag and drop any of the green vertices or the entire ROI if adjustments are necessary.

Mask

Click the Delete Region Of Interest button

ROI.

to remove an existing

The ROI mask identifies an area of video to ignore.

Click on the Create a Mask button mark the area you wish to ignore.

and then click on the video to

Once the mask has been created, use the mouse to drag and drop any of the green vertices or the entire mask if adjustments are necessary.

Click the Delete Mask button to remove an existing mask.

Event Feedback

Pane

Alert status graph

Time Range

Level

A color-coded graphical representation of alerts. An alert is created only if the last detected event occurred more than 8 seconds ago.

Note:

For recorded video, you can click on any part of the graph to view the corresponding video. The video search must first be stopped.

Select the duration of time used by the graph.

History

The current level of change. Levels range from 0 to 100. The first and last frames of an event must have a value equal to or greater than the specified level, to be included in the search results.

Displays the history of the level of change.

108 —

revision 1


Event Configuration/Search Dialog - Fields (Continued)

Pane

Alarm History

Pane

Field

Event Thumbnail

View

Description

Displays a scaled-down image of the video frame for each detected event.

Help

Close

Refresh

You can double-click a thumbnail to view the recorded video for that event (in the Video Player pane). The video search must first be stopped.

The Event Thumbnail View does not apply to live video.

Event Detail View Displays information (start time, end time and duration) about each event that was detected.

You can double-click an event to view the recorded video for that event

(in the Video Player pane). The video search must first be stopped.

Push button

Push button

Push button

The Event Thumbnail View does not apply to live video.

Displays online help for this topic.

Closes the Event Configuration/Search dialog.

Once event configuration is modified, this button will be enabled and allow the user to apply configuration changes to the IntelligentVideo engine.

Event Configuration/Search Dialog Procedures

Open the Event Configuration/Search Dialog

The Event Configuration/Search dialog can be opened using the Video

Processing form or IntelligentVideo form (in System Administration) or using the Video Search menu option (in Video Player).

Using the Video Processing or IntelligentVideo Form

1. Open the Video Processing or IntelligentVideo form from System

Administration:

• For IntelligentVideo events: a. From the Video menu, select IntelligentVideo. The

IntelligentVideo folder opens.

b. Click the IntelligentVideo Events tab.

• For Video Processing events: a. From the Video menu, select Digital Video. The Digital Video folder opens.

revision 1

— 109


b. Click the Video Processing tab.

2. Select (place a checkmark beside) the appropriate camera.

3. Click [Modify].

4. Click the camera icon located in the lower right side of the Event Type listing window. The Event Configuration/Search dialog opens.

Toolbar Shortcut

Using the Video Player


Launch Video (Live/Recorded) From a Camera on page 99. Verify the recorded video is playing in the Video Player.

2. Click the Video Search toolbar button or from the Control menu select

Video Search. The Event Configuration/Search dialog displays.

Configure Event Properties

When you configure event properties, you define the parameters that make up an event. For example, duration time and object size are event properties for the

“Left Object” event.

Event properties are defined per event, not per channel. Therefore, you can define several unique event properties for the same event on the same video channel.

For detailed IntelligentVideo Event configuration information, refer to the


1. Open the Event Configuration/Search dialog. For more information, refer to

Open the Event Configuration/Search Dialog on page 109.

2. If you opened the Event Configuration/Search dialog using the Video Player, select the event type from the Event menu.

3. Set the region of interest. For more information, refer to Set Region of

Interest on page 111.

4. Set the event properties. For more information, refer to the IntelligentVideo

Events chapter in the IntelligentVideo User Guide.

5. If necessary, configure event parameters that apply to the video channel

itself. For more information, refer to Video Channel Configuration Dialog on page 114.

6. Click [OK].

110 —

revision 1


Set Region of Interest

The Event Configuration/Search dialog has a region of interest (ROI) button.

Although this setting is optional, it is highly recommended that ROI is used whenever possible to reduce computation time and the probability of false alarms. If the ROI is not set, the entire frame is considered the region of interest.

All the events except “Object Crosses a Region” and “People Counting” support the use of ROI.


Event Configuration/Search Dialog on page 104.


revision 1

— 111


Toolbar Shortcut

3. Click the Create Region of Interest button.

4. In the Video Player pane left-click to create a starting point for the area you want to highlight. A green dot displays.

5. Click another point in the area you want to highlight. A red line connecting the two points displays.

6. Continue clicking points to expand the highlighted area.

112 —

revision 1

Note:

7. Use the mouse to drag and drop any of the green vertices or the entire ROI if adjustments are necessary.

If at any time you want to remove a highlighted area, select it and click the

Delete Region of Interest toolbar button.

8. Only the highlighted area is recorded or searched.


Video Search Performance Requirements

A fast network, 100 Mbps or greater, is recommended between the site where video is located and the site where the computer running the Video Player is located. A fast network is recommended because video is analyzed/searched on the client side, therefore the faster video can be transmitted from the server side, the faster the search will be.

The hard drive speed on the server side must be able to support the number of clients using the server. Clients include Video Players and archive servers.

A fast CPU on the client computer is also recommended. Generally, when the network and server side hard drive are fast enough, the CPU on the client side can be the bottleneck. A Pentium III based computer is required although a

Pentium IV computer is recommended.

Search Video/Audio

You can search video and audio using the Video Player or Event Configuration/

Search dialog. To search video using the Video Player, simply verify recorded video is playing and select the start/end date. However, the Event Configuration/

Search dialog enables you to perform detailed searches quickly. Complete the following to search video using the Event Configuration/Search dialog.




3. From the Player menu select Select Start/End Times. The Date / Time window opens. Enter the desired date and time ranges you wish to search and click [OK].

Note:

You can also set the start/end date by selecting Options > Set Start/End

Date in the video player.

4. From the Player menu select Frame Rate.

5. Set the configuration parameters for the event or load a previously saved set of channel configuration parameters. For more information on event configuration parameters, refer to the IntelligentVideo Event chapters in the

IntelligentVideo User Guide. For more information on audio events, refer to

IntelligentAudio on page 79. For more information on channel configurations, refer to

Video Channel Configuration Dialog on page 114.

6. Click the search toolbar button. Events that meet the configuration parameters display in the Alarm History pane.

View Search Results

There are several ways to view the recorded video associated with the video search results.

revision 1

— 113


From the Event Configuration/Search dialog:

• Click any part of the graph, in the Event Feedback pane.

• Double-click a thumbnail or listed event, in the Alarm History pane.

Video Channel Configuration Dialog

Video channel configuration parameters can be applied to real-time

IntelligentVideo processing and to recorded video searches. The Video Channel

Configuration dialog is used to configure event parameters that apply to the video channel itself and not the video processing algorithms. For example, if the source video has a lot of motion, background learning time may need to be increases so the video processing engine picks out static scene elements more accurately.

For detailed IntelligentVideo Event configuration information, refer to the


Video Channel Configuration Dialog

Form Element

Video Channel

Configuration listing window

OK

Cancel

Load

Configuration

Comment

Displays the video channel processing properties and user-configured values. Parameters are sorted into types. Values are modified directly in the listing window. A new value may be entered or selected from the drop-down list. Click [Explain] to read a detailed description of the selected property.

Accepts the video channel configuration changes and closes the dialog.

Rejects the video channel configuration changes and closes the dialog.

Displays an Open window from which you can select the “.XML” configuration file you want to load.

114 —

revision 1


Video Channel Configuration Dialog (Continued)

Form Element

Save

Configuration

Reset to Defaults

Show Parameters

Only For

Show Advanced

Parameters

Explain

Comment

Saves the set of video channel configuration parameters for reuse.

Resets all parameter settings to their original default settings.

Select this check box to display only parameters which are relevant to the selected event. Only events configured for the current channel are available in the drop-down list.

Select this check box to view additional parameters used for troubleshooting and diagnostics.

The default setting hides the advanced parameters.

Click this button to read a detailed description of the selected property.

Open the Video Channel Configuration Dialog

The Video Channel Configuration dialog can be opened using the

IntelligentVideo Events form (System Administration) or using the Event

Configuration/Search dialog available through the Video Player.

Using the IntelligentVideo Events form

1. Open System Administration.

2. From the Video menu, select IntelligentVideo. The IntelligentVideo folder opens.

3. Click the IntelligentVideo Events tab.

4. Select (place a check mark beside) the appropriate camera.

5. Click [Modify].

6. Select an IntelligentVideo Server from the drop-down list.

7. Click [Channel Configuration] (located below the camera listing window on the right side). The Video Channel Configuration dialog opens.

Using the Event Configuration/Search Dialog



2. Click [Channel Configuration] (located on the lower right side of the window). The Video Channel Configuration dialog opens.

Configure Video Channel Parameters

Two types of parameters are available: basic and advanced. Parameters are defined per channel and for each event there is a unique set of parameters. By default, only basic parameters display. If you want to set an advanced parameter, click the Show Advanced Parameters check box. Advanced parameters should only be set by expert level administrators.

revision 1

— 115


A parameter can be set by entering or selecting a value from the drop-down list in the listing window.

1. Display the Video Configuration dialog. For more information, refer to Open the Video Channel Configuration Dialog on page 115.

2. It is recommended that you select the Show Parameters Only For check box.

3. Select (highlight) a property name.

4. Select or enter the property value.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each property.

6. Click [Save Configuration] if you would like to be able to load these configurations at another time.

7. Click [OK].

Matrix View

Matrix view allows the user to view multiple video streams at once in the Video

Player window. Video streams can be arranged for viewing in the Video Player using preconfigured templates. Once video streams have been added to a template, this layout can be saved so that it can be loaded by another user or monitoring station.

Select Template Dialog

The Select Template dialog is used to load an empty matrix view into the Video

Player. Each template has a fixed number of video cells arranged in a different layout. Once a template has been loaded, drag and drop cameras from the System

Status Tree to monitor them in the Video Player. The Select Template dialog is displayed by selecting View > Template from the Video Player menu.

116 —

revision 1


Save Layout Dialog

The Save Layout dialog is used to create a layout that can be reused at another time. Layouts can be made available to all users or it can be limited to the current user or local workstation. The Save Layout dialog is displayed by selecting Play

> Save Layout from the Video Player menu.


Field(s) Description

Save as new layout Select this radio button to create a new layout.

Private (assigned to the current user)

Select this check box to make the new layout available only to the current user.

Select this check box to make the new layout available only on the local workstation.

Local (assigned to this workstation)

Overwrite existing layout

Listing window

Select this radio button to replace an existing layout.

Select the layout you wish to overwrite from the listing window.

Remove Click this button to remove the layout selected in the listing window.

revision 1

— 117


Load Layout Dialog

The Load Layout dialog is used to display layouts that have been previously saved by a user in the Video Player. The Load Layout dialog is displayed by selecting Play > Load Layout from the Video Player menu.


Field(s)

Private (assigned to the current user)

Local (assigned to this workstation)

Listing window

Description

Filter the list of available layouts to display only private layouts assigned to the current user.

Filter the list of available layouts to display only locally created layouts.

The list of available layouts.

Matrix View Procedures

Monitor Video in Matrix View

The Video Player in matrix view can be used to view live or recorded video from multiple cameras simultaneously.



2. The Video Player displays. From the View menu, select As Matrix. You can also select the Matrix View toolbar button.

Note:

Matrix view displays up to 32 cameras. There may be more cameras available than can fit in the viewable area. You may scroll or resize the window to view additional cameras. To resize the window hover the pointer

118 —

revision 1


over the corner or edge of the window until a double-headed arrow displays.

Then drag the window to its desired size.

3. The screen below displays Matrix view.

Note:

When viewing multiple cameras simultaneously, please note that the system automatically displays each window in such a way that it is active (the status bar for each window is blue.) Therefore any command will be applied to every window. To deselect a window, place the cursor in the window and click. The status bar is gray when the window is deselected.

Note:

For PTZ cameras in matrix mode, double clicking on a single video launches a new single video window with PTZ enabled automatically.

Create a Matrix Layout

Layouts can be configured to display video channels in a matrix view. There are multiple templates for creating layouts. Once configured, layouts can be saved and loaded on client workstations.

Toolbar Shortcut



2. The Video Player displays. From the View menu, select Template.

3. Choose a static template from the Select Template dialog.

4. Empty video cells are displayed in the chosen template. Click and drag cameras to the template to assign them to a video cell.

revision 1

— 119


Note:

Cameras can be cleared from the template by selecting them and clicking the

Remove button . Selected video cells are indicated by a blue bar at the bottom the video cell, while unselected video cells display a gray bar. Video cells can be selected or deselected with a single right-click.

Save a Matrix Layout

Once cameras have been assigned to the video cells of a template, the layout can be saved for reuse by a different operator or monitoring station.



2. The Video Player displays. From the Play menu, select Save Layout.

3. The Save Layout dialog is displayed.

• To create a new layout: a. Select the Save as new layout radio button.

b. Enter a descriptive name for the layout.

c. Select the Private or Local check boxes if the layout should be available only to the current user or workstation.

• To replace a previously saved layout: a. Select the Overwrite existing layout radio button.

b. Highlight the layout you wish to overwrite.

4. Click [OK] to save the layout.

Load a Matrix Layout

Previously saved layouts can be used by different users on different workstations.



2. The Video Player displays. From the Play menu, select Load Layout.

3. The Load Layout dialog is displayed. The list of available layouts can be filtered by selecting the Private (assigned to the current user) or Local

(assigned to this workstation) check boxes.

4. Select a layout from the list.

5. Click [OK] to load the layout.

120 —

revision 1


Pan, Tilt, and Zoom

Pan, Tilt and Zoom (PTZ) control is supported by all Lenel video recorders.

Using PTZ you can control a camera’s movements and its ability to view images at different ranges (zoom in or out).

Digital PTZ is provided for cameras that do not have PTZ support. Digital PTZ allows the user to pan, tilt, and zoom throughout the camera’s field of view without moving the camera.

Configure PTZ with LNVR or LNVS Machines

LNVR and LNVS machines do not need a matrix switcher for PTZ control.

Therefore, these machines do not require special procedures in B.A.S.I.S. for

PTZ control; simply configure the recorder and camera.

Configure PTZ with all other Digital Video Recorders

LDVR, Loronix, and Generic Video machines require a matrix switcher (either real or virtual) for PTZ control. Complete the following in B.A.S.I.S. to configure PTZ control for these machines.

1. Verify the default matrix switcher type settings in B.A.S.I.S. are appropriate.

For more information, refer to “Modify a Matrix Switcher Type” in the

Matrix Switcher Folder chapter in the Digital Video Software User Guide.

2. Add the matrix switcher. For more information, refer to the Matrix Switcher

Folder chapter in the Digital Video Software User Guide.

3. Configure the video recorder. For more information, refer to “Add Video

Recorders Other Than LNVR/LNVS Recorders” in the Digital Video Folder chapter in the Digital Video Software User Guide.

4. Configure the camera. This includes linking the camera to the matrix switcher. For more information, refer to “Configure Cameras Other Than

LVR/LNVS Cameras” in the Digital Video Folder chapter in the Digital

Video Software User Guide.

revision 1

— 121


Using PTZ in the Video Player

The following screen shows the addition of PTZ control in the Video Player.

122 —

revision 1

• Using he t P

to activate PTZ. Use the remaining buttons to pan or tilt the camera, as well as, zoom in, zoom out, and focus the camera. You can also press and hold the zoom, focus, or iris buttons to achieve the preferred view.

•

Using the Mouse. After you click to activate PTZ you can pan, tilt, and zoom by right or left clicking your mouse in the video window. A left click moves the camera toward the cursor. The camera keeps moving in that direction until the mouse button is released. The camera moves with direction and speed determined by the mouse position relative to the center of the video window. If you move the mouse while holding the left button down, the camera changes the direction and speed accordingly. If you rightclick in the top half of the screen the camera zooms in until you release the mouse. If you right-click in the bottom half of the screen the camera zooms out until you release the mouse. You can also use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in/out. Scroll up to zoom in and scroll down to zoom out. The farther away from the center the mouse is the faster the camera moves.

•

Using the Keyboard. After you click to activate PTZ you can use the keyboard arrow keys to pan, tilt, and zoom. The left and right arrow keys pan the camera left and right. The up and down arrow keys tilt the camera up and down. Hold the <Shift> key down while pressing the up or down arrows


zooms the camera in or out. They keyboard keypad may also be used to control PTZ.

•

Using a Joystick. After you click to activate PTZ you can use video controllers, such as joysticks, to pan, tilt, and zoom. Iris and focus are also available if supported by the joystick.

Notes:

The Zoom, Focus, and Iris control buttons are only enabled if the corresponding operations are supported by the camera in the current PTZ mode.

The speed of the pan and tilt operation is calculated based on the distance from the mouse click position to the center of the image along with the current zoom position. If the camera is zoomed in, the same mouse click will cause a slower movement. This functionality is subject to individual cameras. If a camera doesn’t support getting the current zoom position, the movement will not slow.

PTZ Options Dialog

The PTZ Options dialog is used to configure PTZ locking options and PTZ control behavior. PTZ controls can be customized to send either relative, continuous, or mixed commands with a single mouse click. The PTZ Options dialog is available from the Options menu in Alarm Monitoring.

revision 1

— 123


Note:

The video window must be re-opened to use the new settings.

Field Description

Default access mode Used to specify the locking mode used by default when video is launched for a PTZ camera.

“Locked” access mode gives control of the PTZ functions to the first user to activate PTZ. If another user attempts to activate PTZ for the same camera, they will receive a message that

PTZ control is locked by another user.

“Shared” access mode allows multiple users to have access to the PTZ controls at the same time.

Timeout (in seconds) If the Timeout (in seconds) check box is selected, you may specify an amount of time (in seconds) after which the PTZ controls will become unlocked. After this period another user may gain control of the camera.

For no timeout on locking, simply clear the Timeout (in seconds) check box. Unlocking will only occur when the video window is closed, PTZ control is cancelled (by deselecting the PTZ button), or PTZ locking mode is changed to shared (by deselecting the PTZ locked button).

Note:

The PTZ timeout value is not utilized with background PTZ tours.

124 —

revision 1


Field

Mouse mode

Zoom mode

Focus mode

Iris mode

Zoom factor (>1.0)

Focus step (1-100)

Iris step (1-100)

Description

“Continuous” moves the camera while the user holds the mouse down and stops when the mouse is released. The camera moves with direction and speed determined by the mouse position relative to the center of the video window. If the user moves the mouse while holding the left button down, the camera changes the direction and speed accordingly.

“Click-to-center, then continuous” first issues a click-to-center command with a mouse leftclick. If the user continues holding the mouse button, continuous mode is turned on (as described above). This mode is only available when the camera supports both continuous and relative PTZ commands.

“Drag or double-click-to-center” allows the user to either drag the image to issue subsequent relative commands or double-click on a point to make that point the center of the image.

“Continuous” continuously changes the corresponding setting while the user keeps pressing the left mouse button and stops when the button is released.

“Step, then continuous” first issues a relative step command with a mouse left-click. If the user continues holding the mouse button, continuous mode is turned on. This mode is only available when the camera supports both continuous and relative PTZ commands.

“Step mode” issues relative step commands each time the user clicks a corresponding button.

The number that the current focal length is multiplied (or divided) by when the zoom in or zoom out button is pressed in step mode.

Determines the step size for relative commands. Values are normalized numbers from 1 to

100 (where 1 is the smallest and 100 is the largest).

PTZ Control Adjustment Parameters

Server and client (digital) modes can be configured with different settings.

Adjustments to the client modes can be only be configured by editing the

ACS.INI file on the Alarm Monitoring workstation. Parameters should be placed in the [DigitalVideo] section.

Note:

The video window must be re-opened to use the new settings.

revision 1

— 125


Pan and Tilt Parameters

Name Description

ServerMouseMode Pan and tilt operations in server mode:

• 0 = Click-to-center, then continuous

• 1 = Drag or double-click-to-center

• 2 = Continuous

Note:

This parameter can also be configured with the

Mouse mode drop-down list on the PTZ

Options dialog.

Pan and tilt operations in client (digital) mode: ClientMouseMode

• 0 = Click-to-center, then continuous

• 1 = Drag or double-click-to-center

• 2 = Continuous

MixedPanAndTiltTimeOutMS Sets the timeout value used in Click-to-center, then continuous (in milliseconds).

0

0

300

Zoom Parameters

Name Description

Default

Default

Possible

Values

0, 1, or 2

0, 1, or 2

0 - 65535

ServerZoomMode

Possible

Values

0, 1, or 2

ClientZoomMode

RelativeZoomStep

MixedZoomTimeOutMS

Zoom operation in server mode:

• 0 = Step, then continuous

• 1 = Step mode

• 2 = Continuous

Note:


Zoom mode drop-down list on the PTZ

Options dialog.

Zoom operation in client (digital) mode:


• 1 = Step mode

• 2 = Continuous

The number that the current focal length is multiplied (or divided) by when the zoom in or zoom out button is pressed in step mode.

Sets the timeout value used in Step, then continuous mode

(in milliseconds).

0

0

2

300

0, 1, or 2

>1.0

0 - 65535

126 —

revision 1


Focus Parameters

Name

ServerFocusMode

ClientFocusMode

RelativeFocusStep

MixedFocusTimeOutMS

Iris Parameters

Name

ServerIrisMode

ClientIrisMode

Description Default

Focus operation in server mode:


• 1 = Step mode

• 2 = Continuous

Note:


Focus mode drop-down list on the PTZ

Options dialog.

Focus operation in client (digital) mode:


• 1 = Step mode

• 2 = Continuous

Determines the size of each step in step mode. Value is normalized for the range of focus available for the camera.

Note:


Focus step (1-100) field on the PTZ Options dialog.


(in milliseconds).

0

0

2

300

Possible

Values

0, 1, or 2

0, 1, or 2

1 - 100

0 - 65535

Description

Iris operation in server mode:


• 1 = Step mode

• 2 = Continuous

Note:


Iris mode drop-down list on the PTZ Options dialog.

Iris operation in client (digital) mode:


• 1 = Step mode

• 2 = Continuous

0

0

Default Possible

Values

0, 1, or 2

0, 1, or 2

revision 1

— 127


Iris Parameters

Name

RelativeIrisStep

MixedIrisTimeOutMS

Description Default

Determines the size of each step in step mode. Value is normalized for the range of iris available for the camera.

Note:


Iris step (1-100) field on the PTZ Options dialog.


(in milliseconds).

2

300

Possible

Values

1 - 100

0 - 65535

PTZ Joystick Selection

If multiple joysticks are connected to the same workstation, the ACS.INI file can be used to specify which joystick will be used. Each connected joystick is listed as a parameter in the [DigitalVideo] section as InputDeviceName1,

InputDeviceName2

, etc. Set InputDeviceName (without a number) equal to the joystick name you wish to use as it is written in the file.

Configure PTZ Locking

PTZ options can be configured in Alarm Monitoring.

1. From the Options menu select PTZ Options.

2. The PTZ Options dialog is displayed.

3. The Default access mode drop-down list is used to specify the locking mode used by default when video is launched for a PTZ camera.

• Locked access mode gives control of the PTZ functions to the first user to activate PTZ. If another user attempts to activate PTZ for the same camera, they will receive a message that PTZ control is locked by another user.

• Shared access mode allows multiple users to have access to the PTZ controls at the same time.

4. A timeout can be enabled for PTZ control with the Timeout (in seconds) check box.

• If selected, you may specify an amount of time (in seconds) after which the PTZ controls will become unlocked. After this period another user may gain control of the camera.

• For no timeout on locking, simply clear the Timeout (in seconds) check box. Unlocking will only occur when the video window is closed, PTZ control is cancelled (by deselecting the PTZ button), or PTZ locking mode is changed to shared (by deselecting the PTZ locked button).

Presets

Client side presets can be absolute camera positions or PTZ commands. Presets are added to the PTZ Presets drop-down and can be selected by the user to

128 —

revision 1


control the camera. To open the PTZ Presets dialog, click in the Video

Player window to activate PTZ, then select the Options > Presets menu item or click the Preset button in the PTZ toolbar.

PTZ Preset dialog in Advanced mode

The PTZ Preset dialog has both a simple and an advanced mode. The simple mode can be used to configure a preset for an absolute camera position or to delete an existing preset. The advanced mode can be used to configure a preset for an absolute camera position or to configure a PTZ command.

Field

Type new name or select existing preset

Overwrite selected preset

Delete

Advanced

Comment

Enter descriptive name for the preset or select an existing preset from the drop-down.

Select this check box to replace an existing preset with a new camera position or command.

Click this button to delete the selected preset.

Click this button to toggle between the simple and advanced PTZ Preset dialogs.

revision 1

— 129


Field

Move to absolute position

Current

Move relatively by

Move continuously

Camera preset

Test

Save

Exit

Comment

Select this radio button to configure a preset for an absolute camera position.

Click this button to update the absolute position values with the camera’s current position.

Select this radio button, then return to the video player and execute the relative command you wish to configure. Return to the PTZ Preset dialog and click [Save].

Select this radio button, then return to the video player and execute the continuous command you wish to configure. Return to the PTZ Preset dialog and enter the length of time the camera should move in the Duration (sec) field. Click [Save].

Select this radio button, then enter the camera side preset number in the text box. Then click

[Save].

Click this button to execute the preset command in the video player.

Click this button to save the preset configuration. Multiple presets can be added, modified, or deleted without closing the PTZ Preset dialog.

Click this button to exit the PTZ Preset dialog.

Add an Absolute Preset

To set a client side preset for an absolute camera position using the PTZ Preset dialog in simple mode:

1. In the Video Player window, click to activate PTZ.

2. Use the PTZ controls to move the camera to the desired position.

3. From the Options menu, select Presets or click the Preset button in the

PTZ toolbar.

4. The PTZ Preset dialog is displayed in simple mode. Enter a descriptive name for the preset or select an existing preset from the drop-down.

5. If you want to overwrite an existing preset, select the Overwrite selected

preset check box.

6. Return to the video player window and adjust the camera position if desired.

7. Click [OK] to save the preset.

130 —

revision 1


Add a Relative or Continuous Preset



PTZ toolbar.

3. The PTZ Preset dialog is displayed. Enter a descriptive name for the preset or select an existing preset from the drop-down.



5. Click [Advanced].

6. Select the Move relatively by or Move continuously radio button.

7. Return to the Video Player window and execute the desired preset command.

This will automatically populate the values in the PTZ Preset dialog.

8. Return to the PTZ Preset dialog.

9. If you are configuring a continuous command, enter the Duration (sec) that the camera should move for.

10. Click [Test] to view the preset in the Video Player window.

11. Make adjustments to the configuration as needed, then click [Save].

Add a Camera Side Preset

The following procedure allows you to add preset previously configured on the camera to the system and give it a descriptive name.



PTZ toolbar.

3. The PTZ Preset dialog is displayed. Enter a descriptive name for the preset or select an existing preset from the drop-down.



5. Click [Advanced].

6. Select the Camera preset radio button and enter the number of the camera side preset in the text box.

7. Click [Test] to view the preset in the Video Player window.

8. Click [Save].

revision 1

— 131


PTZ Tours

PTZ tours can be created using absolute camera positions and PTZ commands.

PTZ tours can be run manually, continuously, or scheduled to run at specific times. PTZ tours should begin with an absolute camera preset to ensure the tour is properly executed.

PTZ Tour Dialog

The PTZ Tour dialog allows you to add, modify, delete, and run PTZ tours. To open the PTZ Tour dialog, click in the Video Player window to activate

PTZ, then select the Option > Tours menu item.

Field

Type new name or select existing tour

Overwrite selected tour

Delete

Comment

Enter descriptive name for the tour or select an existing tour from the drop-down.

Select this check box to replace an existing tour with a new configuration.

Click this button to delete the selected tour.

132 —

revision 1


Field

Listing window

Continuously

On the background

PTZ tour server

Save

Exit

Up/Down

Remove

Run

Comment

The list of the presets that make up the tour.

Edit the Delay (sec) column to change the number of seconds the tour should pause after executing the currently selected preset.

Select this check box to run the tour continuously.

Select this check box if you wish to continue running the tour after the video player has been closed. Select the PTZ tour server from the drop-down.

Note:

Background PTZ tours can only be interrupted by a user with a higher priority or by the user that started the tour. The PTZ timeout value is not utilized with background

PTZ tours.

Note:

A PTZ Tour Server must be configured on the Digital Video > PTZ Tour Server tab in System Administration to run a tour continuously in the background.

Click this button to save the tour.

Click to exit the PTZ Tour dialog.

Use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to reorder the presets in the listing window.

Remove the selected step form the tour.

Click this button to test the tour in the video player window.

revision 1

— 133


Add a PTZ Tour

PTZ tours are composed of a sequence of camera presets.


2. Use the PTZ controls in the Video Player window to move the camera to the desired start point.

3. Open the PTZ Presets dialog by selecting Options > Presets from the Video

Player menu.

4. In the PTZ Preset dialog, click [Advanced].

5. Click [Current] to update the absolute position values to the current camera position.

6. Enter a name for the starting point of the tour and click [Save].

7. Open the PTZ Tour dialog by selecting Options > Tours from the Video

Player menu.

8. Click <Click here to add new step> in the listing window.

9. Select the preset from the drop-down and enter the amount of time the tour should pause before the next step in the Delay (sec) column.

10. Create the next preset: a. In the PTZ Preset dialog, enter a preset name for the next step of the tour.

b. Select the radio button for the type of preset you wish to configure.

c. Return to the Video Player window and execute the command for the preset.

d. Click [Save] in the PTZ Preset dialog.

11. Add the preset to the tour: a. In the PTZ Tour dialog, click <Click here to add new step> in the listing window.

b. Select the preset from the drop-down.

c. In the Delay (sec) column, enter the amount of time the tour should pause before executing the next step of the tour.

12. Repeat steps 10

and 11 to add additional steps to the tour.

13. When you have finished creating the tour, click [Save] in the PTZ Tour dialog.

134 —

revision 1


Run a PTZ Tour

Note:


2. Launch the PTZ Tour dialog by selecting Options > Tours from the Video

Player menu.

3. Select the PTZ tour from the listing window drop-down.

4. Click [Run].

The Preset button in the PTZ toolbar will remain pressed while the tour is running. To interrupt the tour, simply execute any PTZ command or menu option. The tour will also stop if control is taken over by another user with higher PTZ priority level or when the PTZ control is given up by closing the video window or deselecting the PTZ button. If the tour is set to run in the background, an option will be given to resume the tour once PTZ control is relinquished.

Remote Monitor

Remote Monitor (RM), commonly referred to as “camera call-up”, is a video monitoring application that can be run on any PC with or without B.A.S.I.S. installed. Configuration is performed in System Administration. The RM application behaves as a slave to the Alarm Monitoring application which is used to send video commands allowing the user to:

• Launch video on the RM or Remote Monitor Group (RMG).

• View status of the RMs in the System Hardware Tree and the RMGs in the

Device Group window.

• Send matrix mode, camera selection, and video playback commands to the

RM.

• Mute audio.

• Drag and drop cameras onto the RM or RMG icon to start live video playback.

• Drag and drop alarms with associated video onto the RM or RMG icon to start recorded video playback.

• Launch a local monitor window on the Alarm Monitoring workstation to send commands performed in the window to the RM.

LNVR Security

Currently there is no secure communication between the RM and the B.A.S.I.S. software. The RM must use another method of authentication to an LNVR with security settings because it cannot receive credentials from the B.A.S.I.S. server.

revision 1

— 135


Note:

To enable authentication with the LNVR, log on to the RM client with a

Windows user account that belongs to the LNVUsers group or configure RM to run as a LNVUsers group member.

If anonymous DCOM is disabled on the LNVR, the Windows user logged on to the RM client must be authenticated by the LNVR as Everyone or

Administrator.

Add Cameras to a Remote Monitor

Cameras can be added via multiple drag and drop operations.

The source of the camera can be one of the following:

• Camera icon in the System Status Tree

• Alarm icon that has associated video from the Alarm view

The target of the drag and drop operations can be one of the following:

• RM icon in the hardware tree or device group view

• RMG icon in the device group view

• Local monitor window

Cameras that have been added to a Remote Monitor appear in the System Status

Tree below the RM and are referred to as video cells or Remote Monitor Cells

(RMC). RMGs are displayed in the Device Group window with lists of the RMs that belong to each group. Cameras added to RMGs are added to each RM that belongs to that group.

•

•

•

- Remote Monitor

- Remote Monitor Cell

- Remote Monitor Group

Remote Monitor Right-click Options

Commands are available for RMs and RMCs through a right-click menu and drag and drop functionality. Right-click options specific to Remote Monitors are listed in the table below.

Remote Monitor Right-click options

Command

Launch Video

(RM)

Description

Launches the local monitor window in Alarm Monitoring.

136 —

revision 1



Command

Launch Video

(RMC)

Download

Database (RM)

Remove All (RM)

Remove (RMC)

Select (RMC)

Matrix

Single

Next

Prev

Live

Recorded

Pause

Play

Stop

Frame Advance

Fast Forward End

Mute Audio

Unmute Audio

Description

Launches video on the RM and the local monitor window in Alarm Monitoring.

S ynchronizes the RM with the camera channels assigned in Alarm Monitoring.

Removes all video from the RM.

Removes the video cell from the RM.

In matrix view, changes to single player mode with the selected video cell.

Switches the RM to matrix view.

Switches the RM to single player mode.

In single player mode, selects the next video cell in the list

In single player mode, selects the previous video cell in the list.

Changes to live video on each video cell in the RM.

C hanges to recorded video on each video cell in the RM.

P auses the video playback on each video cell.

R esumes the video playback on each video cell.

S tops the video playback on each video cell.

Advances one video frame on each video cell.

F ast forwards to the end on each video cell.

Mutes the audio on the RM or video cell.

Turns mute off for the RM or video cell.

Local Monitor Window in Alarm Monitoring

The Local Monitor Window (LMW) is a mirror of the RM that can also be used to send commands from Alarm Monitoring. To open the LMW, right-click on the

RM or RMC in the System Status Tree and select Launch Video. If the LMW is opened from an RMC, the RM will switch to single view and display the selected video cell.

The following commands will be sent to the RM while manipulating video in the

LMW:

• Remove selected cameras. This can be done by selecting Remove Video from the right-click menu in matrix mode, by selecting Remove Video from the Control menu, or by pressing the delete key.

• Switch to matrix view or single player view.

• Select camera, move to the next camera, and move to the previous camera in single player view.

revision 1

— 137


• Switch between live and recorded video.

• Change recorded video time frame.

• Pause, resume, stop, frame advance, and fast forward to end commands.

• Mute audio, when selected from the right-click menu. If audio is muted in the LMW by clicking the speaker icon, this command will not be sent to the

RM.

Remote Monitor Application

The Remote Monitor Application (RMA) behaves as a slave to Alarm

Monitoring and does not support any video commands. The user has the following commands available:

• Launch and exit the application. Upon exit, the RMA looses video cell information. When the RMA comes back online, it must be synchronized via the Download Database command in Alarm Monitoring.

• Move and resize the main window.

• Close the application window.

• Open the window and exit the application by right-clicking the application’s icon in the system tray.

• Mute audio on one or more cameras by clicking the speaker icon.

• Turn on and off automatic window launch via the Auto launch on

command in the Options menu. When this setting is enabled, the RMA window will open to the previous position when the RM receives a matrix mode, camera selection, or video playback command.

• Activate full screen mode by selecting Full Screen from the Options menu.

To deactivate full screen mode, press <Esc>. You can also toggle full screen by pressing <Alt> + <Enter>.

• Change the TCP/IP connection port.

138 —

revision 1


Change the Remote Monitor TCP/IP Port

The Remote Monitor TCP/IP port is used by B.A.S.I.S. to communicate with the

Remote Monitor. The port number in the Remote Monitor application must match the port number defined in System Administration.

1. In the Remote Monitor application, select the Connection > Settings menu option.

2. The Connection Settings window is displayed.

a. Enter the new port number in the TCP/IP Port field.

b. Click [OK].

Application Profiles

Users of the Remote Monitor application can save the current settings as a profile for later use. Settings such as TCP/IP port number, window position, always on top, launch on command, and full screen mode are part of a Remote Monitor application profile.

Note:

Remote Monitor must be run by a user with Administrative permissions to save or remove profiles.

revision 1

— 139


Save a Remote Monitor Profile

1. In the Remote Monitor application, select the Profile > Save As menu option.

2. The Save Profile window is displayed.

• To create a new profile, select the Create New radio button and enter a

Name.

• To change an existing profile, select the Overwrite Existing radio button and highlight the profile you want to update.

3. Click [OK] to save the profile.

140 —

revision 1


Load a Remote Monitor Profile

1. In the Remote Monitor application, select the Profile > Load menu option.

2. The Load Profile window is displayed.

a. Select the profile you want to load.

b. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 141


Remove a Remote Monitor Profile

1. In the Remote Monitor application, select the Profile > Save As menu option.

2. The Save Profile window is displayed.

a. Select the Overwrite Existing radio button.

b. Highlight the profile you wish to delete.

c. Click [Remove].

3. Click [OK] to close the Save Profile window.

142 —

revision 1


Chapter 8: Video Verification

Displayed by:

Video verification

is the process of comparing “live” (as it is happening) video with a photograph stored in the database. When a person swipes a badge through a reader, you can use video verification to compare the cardholder’s photo.

The Video Verification window can be displayed several ways:

• Select the Video Verification toolbar button.

• From t

Video Verification Configuration Dialog

Form element

Video verification type

Use all video enabled readers

Reader listing window

Maximum number of videos to display

Comment

Select Use digital video verification if you are using cameras that connect to a video recorder or Use standard video verification if you are using CCTV.

Select this check box to use all readers that have a Device-Camera Link established in System

Administration.

If you do not wish to use all applicable readers, select each camera that you wish to use individually.

Select a number 1-10 from the drop-down list to indicate the maximum number of items you wish to display in the Video Verification window.

revision 1

— 143

8: Video Verification

Digital Video Verification

Digital Video Verification is used with cameras connected to a video recorder.

• Live video and cardholder information is displayed for each video verification item.

• Multiple video verification views can be displayed concurrently in the

Digital Video Verification window. The most recent view appears on top.

• If multiple cameras are linked to a device, the camera with the View Order of

1 (from the Device - Camera Links form in System Administration) will be displayed.

Digital Video Verification Window

Digital Video Verification Procedures

Set Up Digital Video Verification

Several procedures must be completed in System Administration prior to using

Digital Video Verification. Refer to the System Administration User Guide for additional information about each of the following steps.

1. Configure the video recorders and cameras that will be used with Digital

Video Verification.

2. Configure the additional devices (such as readers) that will be used with the cameras for video verification.

3. Configure a Device-Camera link for each camera and device pair. If more than one camera is associated with a device, the camera with a view order of

1 is used with video verification.

144 —

revision 1


Standard Video Verification

Standard Video Verification is used with CCTV cameras.

• Alarms are displayed in the Video Verification window.

Standard Video Verification Window

Form element

Panels/readers window

Selected readers

Live video

Photograph

On new event display

Comment

Lists all panels and readers in the system.

Contains those readers from which the Video Verification window will receive information. If this list is empty, no alarms will display in the Video Verification window.

Displays live video from a CCTV (camera) device at a specific location.

• If you see a black box instead of live video, it means that either there is no camera available or the camera isn't working properly.

• If you see a “Live video not available” message, it means that your System

Administrator has made live video from that location unavailable to Alarm

Monitoring stations.

Displays a specific cardholder record photo.

Includes the Photograph and Video check box fields.

• Video: If checked, pan, tilt and zoom CCTV commands are automatically enabled.

If unchecked, pan, tilt and zoom CCTV commands must be manually invoked. Live video remains visible regardless of the state of this check box.

• Photograph: If checked, as each new alarm arrives, the corresponding cardholder photo displays.

revision 1

— 145


Form element

Alarms window

Close

Comment

Lists alarms as they arrive. Each row represents one alarm.

Click the following column headings to arrange alarms by that heading:

• Alarm Description: Name of the alarm

• Cardholder: Cardholder’s name and Badge ID

• Time/Date: Time and date the alarm occurred. The way that the time and date are displayed varies according to the time/date settings chosen in the Windows Control

Panel on your computer.

• Reader: Reader at which the alarm occurred

Resize the width of a column by positioning the mouse pointer over the boundary of two column headings. Then click and drag to resize the column.

Closes the Video Verification window.

Standard Video Verification Procedures

Add or Remove Readers

To add or remove readers using the video verification window, the reader must be added to the Selected Readers list.

Note:

The Panels/Reader list is located in the upper left portion of the Video

Verification window. The Selected Readers list is located in the lower left portion of the Video Verification window.

• To add an entry to the Selected Readers list, double-click the reader in the

Panels/Readers list.

• To add a entry to the Selected Readers list, select one or more alarm(s) before you open the Video Verification window, the corresponding reader(s) will be added automatically.

• To add all the readers associated with a particular panel, double-click the panel entry in the Panels/Readers list.

• To remove a reader from the Selected Readers list, double-click the reader’s entry in the Selected Readers list.

Display the Cardholder Photo and Live Video

Clicking an alarm in the video verification alarms window displays both the cardholder photo and live video from a camera at the reader. Live video continues to display until one of the following happens:

• You click another alarm.

• Another alarm arrives (this is true only if the Video check box is selected.)

146 —

revision 1


Notes:

The Video check box must be selected to display live video when a new alarm occurs.

The Photograph check box must be selected to display the cardholder's photograph when a new alarm occurs.

Delete an Alarm in the Video Verification Window

• To remove an alarm from the alarms window, click the alarm then select

Delete from the Edit menu or right-click the alarm and select Delete.

• To clear all alarms from the alarms window, select Delete All from the Edit menu.

revision 1

— 147


148 —

revision 1


Chapter 9: Control Devices and Areas

Permissions for control device groups can be given or restricted through System

Administration. From the Administration menu select Users. On the Monitor

Permission Groups sub-tab there is a Control Device Groups sub-tab with which you can control access to device groups.

Grant / Deny Pop-up Window

Your System Administrator can configure any input event for any device to execute an output action that launches a grant/deny pop-up window associated with a door/reader. Alarm Monitoring operators with the correct permissions can either grant or deny access through the door/reader. When a grant is issued the door is pulsed open. When a deny is issued, no command is sent.

Note:

For configuration procedures refer to the Global I/O Folder chapter in the


Alarm Monitoring stations and operators monitoring the same zone the input device/event and output device/event are configured for are notified when the input event occurs.

revision 1

— 149

9: Control Devices and Areas

Field

Display area

Grant

Deny

Description

Displays any and all active requests. The display window contains the following columns:

• Destination Device - The door/reader the output action will affect.

• Initiating Device - The device the request is coming from.

Note:

Both the initiating device and destination device must be in the same monitor zone.

• Alarm - The input event that is linked to an output action.

• Alarm Time - The time the request was initiated.

• Timeout - The total amount of time the operator has to either grant or deny the request.

The timeout value is user-defined with a default value of 3 minutes. This field does not refresh. To determine the amount of time remaining the operator must also refer to the

Alarm Time column. The current time located in the status bar determines when the request was initiated.

Grants the request (pulses open the door) and removes the request from the Grant / Deny popup window.

Denies the request (no command is issued to the hardware) and removes the request from the

Grant / Deny pop-up window.

Grant / Deny Pop-up Window Procedures

Grant or Deny Access

1. Verify the Communication and Linkage Server are running. To do this, click the Start button then select All Programs > B.A.S.I.S. ET690 >

Communication Server or Linkage Server.

2. To grant access, complete one of the following when the Grant / Deny popup window displays:

• Double-click a request.

• Right-click a request and select Grant.

• Select (highlight) a request and click [Grant].

Note:

You must have the open door user permission in order to issue a grant.

Contact your System Administrator to set up this permission or refer to the

150 —

revision 1


Users Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide for procedures.

Note:

3. To deny access, complete one of the following when the Grant / Deny popup window displays:

• Let the timeout value expire by doing nothing.

• Right-click a request and select Deny.

• Select (highlight) a request and click [Deny].

A user transaction is logged when a grant or deny occurs.

Right-click Options to Control Devices and Areas

You can control devices and areas through a wide variety of right-click and leftclick menu options available in Alarm Monitoring. You can right-click and leftclick icons in map view, right-click alarms, right-click device groups as well as right-click and left-click hardware in the System

Status

window. The menu options available when you right-click or left-click depend on the window you are in and the device or area you are clicking on.

Some right-click and left-click menus contain sub-menus. To execute commands you must first select the device from the right-click or left-click menu. A submenu of options displays to control that device.

Note:

Many of the right-click and left-click options are also available as options from the main menu.

General Right-click Options

These right-click options can be available for alarms as well as multiple devices/ hardware.

•

Acknowledge - acknowledges the currently selected alarm.

•

Trace - traces the selected device.

• Update Hardware Status - polls currently selected access panel/controller and updates the hardware status. If a downstream device (like a reader) is selected, the update hardware status is done for the controller associated with that device.

•

View Map - displays a map associated with the selected device (if one exists). If more than one map exists, the user is prompted to select a map.

•

Launch Video - displays video for the selected device if a camera is associated with the device.

revision 1

— 151


Monitor Zone Right-click Options

•

Update All Hardware Status - updates the display to show the currently status of all devices.

• Set All Controller Clocks - sets all clocks to the current system time.

• Trace Monitor Zone - traces a monitor zone.

Access Panel and Alarm Panel Right-click Options

• Properties - available for access and intrusion panels.

• Open Door(s) - opens the door(s) associated with the selected access panel.

If using Recognition Source readers this option will not be available, because these specific readers are not in constant communication with the

PIM devices.

• Set Controller Clock - sets selected access panel/controller clock to current time. If a device other than an access panel/controller is selected, this option sets the clock on the access panel/controller to which the device is attached.

• Reader Access Modes - updates the reader mode of every reader associated with selected access panel/controller or reader.

– Card and Pin: Sets the reader to card and pin mode.

– Card Only: Sets the reader to card only mode.

r C

– Cipher Lock Emulation: Sets the reader to cipher mode requiring a master combination or “cipher code”.

– Facility Code Only: Sets the reader to facility code only mode.

– Locked: Locks the reader.

– Unlocked: Unlocks the reader.

– Default: Sets the reader to the default online mode that it is configured for in the database.

•

Reader Verify Mode - used to enable or disable verify mode for access control readers with an associated secondary reader. When verify mode is enabled, access to both the primary and secondary reader is required. When verify mode is disabled, only access to the primary reader is required.

•

Activate - activates the outputs associated with the selected access panel.

•

Deactivate - deactivates the outputs associated with the selected access panel.

•

Pulse - pulses all outputs associated with the selected access panel.

•

Mask - masks inputs or alarms for the currently selected reader.

• UnMask - unmasks inputs or alarms for the currently selected reader.

• Download Firmware - downloads firmware to the selected controller, BAS-

1100 or BAS-1200 alarm panel or RS-485 command keypads. Controllers and gateways display firmware revision numbers using three decimal places, while downstream devices display the firmware revision number using two.

•

Download Database - downloads the database to the access panel/ controller.

152 —

revision 1


•

Reset Use Limit - resets the number of times a badge can be used on a particular access panel/controller.

•

Connect - connects the access panel/controller via a dialup/modem connection.

•

Disconnect - connects the access panel/controller via a dialup/modem connection.

Intrusion Area Right-click Options

• Disarm (all intrusion controllers) - Disarms the area.

• Perimeter Arm (Detection Systems only) - Arms the perimeter of an area.

• Arm Entire Partition (Galaxy and Detection Systems only) - Arms the perimeter and interior points of an area.

• Partial Arm (Galaxy only) - Arms only the zones marked for partial set in the controller.

• Master Arm Delay (Bosch only) - Arms the perimeter and interior points with exit and entry delays.

• Master Arm Instant (Bosch only) - Instantly arms both the perimeter and interior points.

• Perimeter Delay Arm (Bosch only) - Arms the perimeter with exist and entry delays.

• Perimeter Instant Arm (Bosch only) - Instantly arms the perimeter points.

Intrusion Panel Right-click Options

In addition to the acknowledge, trace, update hardware status, properties and set controller clock right-click options, intrusion panels and relays can also have the following right-click option.

• Execute Custom Function - executes a custom function associated with the

Bosch Intrusion Controller. This menu option is only available with Bosch

Intrusion Controllers.

Intercom Right-click Options

•

Place Call - displays a dialog box where you enter the station number you are calling to.

•

Cancel Call - cancels the intercom call.

•

Badge Information - displays badge information associated with the intercom event; who placed the call and/or who received the call. If an intercom event has two intercom stations associated with it (the station that placed the call and the station that received the call) a dialog displays, allowing alarm monitoring operators to select the intercom station(s) they want to base the cardholder search on.

Note:

The Badge Information right-click option is only available for intercom stations linked with the customized cardholder field, Cell number. For more

revision 1

— 153


information, refer to the Cardholder Options folder - Automatic Lookup form in System Administration.

Ericsson MD110 Intercom Right-click Options

Note:

The Ericsson MD110 allows calls to be queued. If a call is queued, a Call

Queued alarm is sent to Alarm Monitoring.

• Place Call - displays a dialog box where you enter the station number you are calling to.

• Cancel Call - cancels the intercom call.

• Cancel all Calls - cancels all calls.

• Block Station - blocks the station from receiving a call.

• Unblock Station - lets the station receive calls again.

•

Divert This Call - for a call that has been queued. Displays a dialog box that allows you to divert the call to another station. That station will then receive a ringing alarm, which you then handle as normal.

Intrusion Door Right-click Options

Bosch is the only intrusion controller that supports doors.

• Open Door - Opens the door for the selected intrusion panel.

• Door Mode - Changes the current door mode.

– Lock -

– Unlock - Unlocks the door allowing free access to everyone.

Intrusion Relay Right-click Options

The information in this section applies to both onboard and offboard relays except where noted otherwise.

• Activate - Activates the outputs associated with the selected intrusion panel.

• Deactivate - Deactivates the outputs associated with the selected intrusion panel.

• Toggle - Puts the output in the opposite state of the current state. For example, if the output is currently set to activate then this command will set the output to deactivate. This command is available for Bosch Offboard relays only.

Intrusion Zone Right-click Options

• Bypass - Masks the zone from reporting alarm or tamper activity.

• Unbypass - Unmasks the zone so that any tamper or alarm activity for the zone will be reported.

154 —

revision 1


Reader Right-click Options

In addition to several options listed in Access Panels and Alarm Panels, rightclick options for readers also include:

It is not possible to download firmware to single reader interfaces.

• Download Reader Firmware - downloads firmware to the selected dual interface Rdr1 reader. Displays the major and minor firmware revision number. The minor firmware revision number displays as the last two digits

• Reader Biometric Verify Mode - enables/disables verify mode for access control readers with an associated biometric reader. When verify mode is enabled, the normal card and/or pin access and a biometric match is required. When verify mode is disabled, only the card and/or pin access is required.

• Reader First Card Unlock Mode - enables/disables the Reader First Card

Unlock Mode. The Reader First Card Unlock Mode is a qualifier for online

Reader Mode. When enabled, the online Reader Mode is in effect until the first (qualified) access granted with entry occurs. When the first access granted with entry occurs, the online Reader Mode changes to unlocked.

Note:

Reader First Card Unlock Mode is only supported on the BAS-2000 controller. However, first style unlock behavior can be configured for use with any access controller through Stanley’s Global I/O Support.

Alarm Mask Group Right-click Options

• Group Mask - masks inputs or alarms for the currently selected reader.

• Group U

Intrusion Mask Group Right-click Options

• Disarm/Reset - Disarms the Intrusion Mask Group. If the intrusion mask group is armed it will transition to be disarmed if no alarm is made. If the intrusion mask group was in an alarm state, it will transition into an alarm cancelled state until the same command is executed again to transition it into a disarmed state.

•

Arm Away - Arms all points of the mask group. Any point activation will either trigger an alarm or start the entry or exit delays. Exit delays start at the time arming occurs, and allows exit through trigger points for the user set duration.

•

Arm Stay - Arms the perimeter points of the mask group but does not arm the points defined as interior. This mode allows movement inside the protected area, but will trigger an entry delay and subsequent alarm if any perimeter point is activated. Exit delays start at the time arming occurs, and allows exit through trigger points for the user set duration.

•

Arm Stay Instant - Arms the perimeter points of the mask group but does not arm the points defined as interior. This mode allows movement inside the protected area but will trigger an entry delay and subsequent alarm if any perimeter point is activated. There is no exit delay.

revision 1

— 155


• Restore All Points - Removes bypass settings for all points in the intrusion mask group.

Function List Right-click Options

Function Lists

are keypad - activated commands that are programmed into an access panel. Function lists can be accessed by assigning them to specific keypad sequences.

•

Clear All Terms - only applicable to Apollo function lists. Used to clear all terms, and set all the resulting function list values to false.

• Execute: True - sets the logic term to true.

•

Execute: False- sets the logic term to false.

• Execute: Pulse - temporarily sets the logic term to true.

Action Group Right-click Options

In addition to the view map option, action groups also include execute as a rightclick option.

Note:

Action groups will display if the logged in user has the segment access to the action group along with permissions to execute all of the actions in the action group.

Anti-Passback Area Right-click Options

These right-click options are unique to areas and area alarms. There are other right-click options available for areas and they are listed in General Options.

• Update Area Status - updates the status of both safe and hazardous areas so that operators can have a current view of cardholder locations.

• Occupancy Report - provides a current report of the cardholders currently in a safe area.

• Move Badges - enables an operator to manually move all the badges in one area to another.

• Mustering Report - provides a current report of the cardholders currently in a hazardous area.

• Start Muster Mode - initiates Muster mode. The Start Muster Mode window displays and provides an area to enter comments.

• Reset Muster Mode - ends Muster mode. The Reset Muster Mode window displays and provides an area to enter comments.

Guard Tour Right-click Options

These right-click options are available if Guard Tour is set up in your system.

• Launch Tour - starts a guard tour.

156 —

revision 1


• View Tour - displays the guard tour live tracking window for a specific tour.


In addition to several options listed in Access Panels and Alarm Panels, rightclick options for Remote Monitors also include:

•

Launch Video - launches the local monitor window in Alarm Monitoring.

•

Download Database - synchronizes the RM with the camera channels assigned in Alarm Monitoring.

•

Remove All - removes all video from the RM.

•

Matrix - switches the RM to matrix view.

•

Single - switches the RM to single player mode.

•

Next - in single player mode, selects the next video cell in the list.

•

Prev - in single player mode, selects the previous video cell in the list.

•

Live - changes to live video on each video cell in the RM.

•

Recorded - changes to recorded video on each video cell in the RM.

•

Pause - pauses the video playback on each video cell.

•

Play - resumes the video playback on each video cell.

•

Stop - stops the video playback on each video cell.

•

Frame Advance - advances one video frame on each video cell.

•

Fast Forward End - fast forwards to the end on each video cell.

Remote Monitor Video Cell Right-click Options

In addition to several options listed for Remote Monitors, these right-click options are available for video cells assigned to Remote Monitors (RM):

•

Launch Video - launches video on the RM and the local monitor window in

Alarm Monitoring.

•

Remove - removes the video cell from the RM.

•

Select - in matrix view, changes to single player mode with the selected video cell.

Single and Double Left-click Mode

Each Alarm Monitoring operator can set their options so that commands are executed with a single left-click or a double left-click of an icon in the system status view or map view. The default setting is to execute commands with a double left-click.

Furthermore, if that command was previously available as a right-click menu option, then the command will be listed in bold when the device is right-clicked.

revision 1

— 157


For some menus, the default command may be in a sub-menu of the context menu. The example that follows shows the Reader Auxiliary Output # 2 in bold. This is the command that will be executed when the operator single or double left-clicks the controller icon, depending on how they have set their options.

Note:

Using the System Administration application your System Administrator can associate commands with a device or area icon so that when the icon is single or double left-clicked in Alarm Monitoring, the command is executed.

For information on how to associate a command with a device or area icon, refer to the Monitoring Options Folder Chapter in the System

Administration User Guide.

Activate Single or Double Left-click Mode

Single or double leftclick mode is configurable per user.

To activate single left-click mode select (place a checkmark beside) the Execute

Command on Single Click of Icon in the Options menu of Alarm Monitoring.

While in this mode you can single left-click an icon in the Alarm Monitoring system status and map view to execute the command configured for that device or area.

To activate double left-click mode deselect (there is no checkmark beside) the

Execute Command on Single Click of Icon in the Options menu of Alarm

Monitoring.

Select a Device in Single or Double Left-click Mode

158 —

revision 1


Single Left-click Mode

In single left-click mode you can select a device, by placing or hovering the cursor near the device without left-clicking. The system status list and tree view identifies a selected device by underlining and/or highlighting the device.

The map view identifies a selected device by displaying the tool tip.

Double Left-click Mode

To select a device in double-click mode, left-click the device.

Execute a Command in Single or Double Left-click Mode

Single Left-click Mode

To execute a command in single left-click mode, left-click the device. Clicking the expand symbol in tree view does not execute the command.

Double Left-click Mode

To execute the command, double left-click the device.

Note:

If you are in double left-click mode in the System

Status

view, not only do you execute the command when you double left-click a device, but you also expand or collapse the hardware list.

revision 1

— 159


160 —

revision 1


Chapter 10: Monitor Alarms

When an alarm occurs, it displays in the Main Alarm Monitoring window. Each alarm displays in its own row and is preceded by a colored dot. If alarms are configured in the System Administration software so that they do not automatically delete after they are acknowledged, an alarm icon will also display beside the colored dot after it is acknowledged.

Alarm Icons

Icon

The following table is a list of the different types of alarm icons.

Description

Alarm acknowledged without notes.

Alarm acknowledged with notes.

An outstanding acknowledgment action is associated with the alarm. An acknowledgment

action

is an action that will automatically be carried out when the alarm is acknowledged.

A camera is associated with the device that the alarm occurred on/for. Therefore you can pull up live video via the Launch Video right-click menu option.

Alarm acknowledged without notes and a camera is associated with the device.

Alarm acknowledged with notes and a camera is associated with the device.

An outstanding acknowledgment action is associated with the alarm and a camera is associated with the device.

The digital video associated with the alarm has been marked.

Alarm acknowledged without notes and has archived video.

Alarm acknowledged with notes and has archived video.

The alarm has outstanding acknowledgment actions and archived video.

The alarm has been marked in progress.

revision 1

— 161

10: Monitor Alarms

Pending Alarms Window

An initiating alarm is automatically deleted upon arrival of its corresponding canceling alarm. (e.g. Door

Forced Open/Door

Forced Open

Cancelled).

Toolbar Shortcut

The Pending Alarms window is similar to the Main Alarm Monitoring window in that it has the same menu options and toolbars. However, the Pending Alarms window only displays pending alarms, which are alarms that are configured to require an operator to take action. Pending alarms are highlighted in the Main

Alarm View and cause Alarm Sprites to be shown on graphical maps for the devices associated with those pending alarms.

Alarms are configured to be pending alarms in the Alarm Definitions Form in

System Administration. If events configured here are set to be “active” then their corresponding alarm will be highlighted in Main Alarm Monitoring window. For more information see the Alarm Configuration Folder chapter in System

Administration.

An example of a pending alarm can be anything depending on the configuration done in System Administration. Commonly though, higher need alarms such as a door being forced open are reserved for this type of immediate action.

If the Pending Alarms Window is left open, the window automatically updates itself. For example, when a pending alarm is acknowledged in the Main Alarm

Monitoring window, it immediately ceases to display in the Pending Alarms window.

If a pending alarm is an initiating alarm that becomes physically restored and must be acknowledged, it continues to display as a pending alarm until it is acknowledged. If a pending alarm is an initiating alarm that becomes physically restored but does not require acknowledgment, the alarm ceases to be a pending alarm.

Like the Main Alarm Monitoring window you can determine the type of information displayed about alarms through the Configure > Columns menu option. However, you cannot filter the type of alarms displayed through the

Configure > Alarm Filter menu option. That is because the Pending Alarms window is intended to summarize ALL pending alarms.

To display the window, select the Pending Alarms option from the View menu or click the View Pending Alarms toolbar button.

162 —

revision 1


To view tables of the menu items and toolbar options, refer to Menus and

Toolbars on page 43.

Procedure for Monitoring Alarms

Sort Alarms

Alarms are listed in the order indicated by the sort criterion. To determine the current sort criterion locate “Sort criteria” in the status bar (lower right side of the screen).

You can rearrange the order of existing and new alarms using either of these two methods:

• Clicking a column heading

• Selecting View > Sort by from the Main Alarm Monitoring menu.

The choices available in the Sort by submenu are:

Column name Description

Alarm Description Lists alarms alphabetically by alarm description.

Account Group

Lists alarms in order of receiver account group (panels). Receiver accounts are used to represent panels in a receiver setup.

Asset Name

Asset Scan ID

Associated Text

Badge Type

List alarm alphabetically by asset name.

Lists alarms in order of asset scan ID.

Indicates (Yes or blank) whether there is additional text associated with the alarm.

Displays the badge type associated with the alarm.

revision 1

— 163


Column name

Biometric Score

Card

Controller

Controller Time

Device

Input/Output

Intercom Station

Called

Intrusion Area

Line Number

Priority

Time/Date

Transmitter

Transmitter Input

Description

Lists alarms in order of biometric score. A biometric score is based on how well a biometric access control reader matches a template in the database. By default, this sort option is not enabled. To enable this sort option, the “Biometric Score” column must first be added via the

Configure > Columns menu option in Alarm Monitoring.

Lists alarms numerically by the card number (badge ID), if the alarm is associated with a cardholder.

Lists alarms alphabetically by name of the controller with which the alarms are associated.

The controller can be an access panel, fire panel, intercom exchange, receiver or receiver account.

Lists alarms in order of controller time. The time includes the hour and minute and the date includes the month, day and year. The display is based on the time zone setting selected in the

Control Panel of your computer. Typically the display is adapted to the country in which you are located.

Lists alarms alphabetically by name of the device (reader, alarm panel, intercom station etc.) associated with the alarm. If the alarm originates at a reader, the reader name displays. If the alarm originates at an alarm panel, the panel name displays. If the alarm originates at a video recorder, the recorder name displays.

Lists alarms alphabetically by name of the alarm input, if the alarm is generated at an alarm input.

Lists alarms in order of intercom station called.

Indicates the name of the area associated with the alarm. This is only displayed when the controller reported an area number along with the alarm.

Displays alarms in order of line number.

Lists highest priority alarms at the top of the list, followed by medium priority alarms, with low priority alarms placed at the bottom of the list.

Lists alarms in chronological order. Within a given date (month, day and year) the alarms are sorted by time, which include hours and minutes and optionally seconds.

• To view time in seconds go to the Options menu and select (place a checkmark beside)

Display Seconds.

• To view the most recent alarms at the bottom of the list, go to the Options menu and select (place a checkmark beside) Ascending Time/Date. To view the most recent alarms at the top of the list select (place a checkmark beside) Descending Time/Date.

Lists alarms in order of transmitter. Transmitters are devices that generate either an RF or IR

(or both) signal that Visonic SpiderAlert receivers can receive. There are three types of transmitters: fixed, portable (hand-held) and man-down.

For more information refer to the Personal Safety Devices Folder chapter in the System


Lists alarms in order of transmitter input.

For any sort, the second level sort criterion is always Priority and the third level criterion is always Time/Date. For example:

• If you sort by Controller, all alarms associated with the same controller will be sorted by Priority then by Time/Date.

164 —

revision 1


• If you sort by Priority, all alarms with the same priority will be sorted by

Time/Date.

• If you sort by Time/Date, alarms with the same time (to the second)/date will be sorted by Priority.

The sort criterion applies to the current window only. You can have one Main

Alarm Monitoring window and various Trace windows, each with a different sort criterion. When you open a new Main Alarm Monitoring window, it is initially sorted by Priority.

revision 1

— 165


166 —

revision 1


Chapter 11: Acknowledge Alarms

Note:

When you acknowledge an alarm, you provide a software response to it. Your

System Administrator can configure alarms so they have to or do not have to be acknowledged before they are deleted from the Main Alarm Monitoring window.

Furthermore, your System Administrator can associate actions with an alarm so when the alarm is acknowledged an action or group of actions is automatically triggered.

An action is any task performed by software as a result of an event or schedule.

Alarm Acknowledgment Window

The Alarm Acknowledgment window enables you to:

• Respond (in the software) to an alarm.

• View or listen to stored instructions for a specific alarm.

• Print information pertaining to an alarm.

• Enter or select notes pertaining to an alarm.

The Alarm Acknowledgment window can be displayed several ways:

• Double-click an alarm

• Highlight an alarm entry and from the Edit menu select Acknowledge

revision 1

— 167

11: Acknowledge Alarms

• Right-click an alarm entry and select Acknowledge

Alarm Acknowledgment Window

Form Element

Description

Controller

Input/output

Time/date

Device

Card

Original notes

Notes

Select

Instructions

Audio

Print

In Progress

Comment

Contains the same name for the alarm as indicated in the Main Alarm Monitoring window.

Displays the name of the access panel/controller associated with the alarm.

If the alarm originated at an input/output device, displays the name of the device.

Displays the time and date the alarm occurred.

If the alarm originated at a reader, displays the name of the reader.

If the alarm originated at an alarm panel, displays the name of the alarm panel.

If the alarm is card-related, displays the cardholder name (if known*) and the badge ID.

*Cardholder name would not be available for an “Invalid Badge” alarm, for example.

Displays any notes carried forward from the associated original alarm.

Enables you to add your own comments/response to the selected alarm.

Displays a window where pre-configured acknowledgment notes can be selected.

Displays pre-configured instructions pertaining to the alarm.

Plays audio instructions.

Prints the information from this window, including alarm information and any notes entered.

Marks the alarm as “In Progress.” This shows that the alarm is currently being checked on but whose source has yet to be determined. If an alarm has been marked in progress, the “Original notes:” control will list the operator that marked the alarm in progress and the date\time this occurred prior to displaying the current notes for that alarm.

168 —

revision 1


Alarm Acknowledgment Window (Continued)

Form Element

Update

Acknowledge

Previous

Next

Close

Help

Comment

Once an alarm has been marked “In Progress” you are able to update the notes for the alarm by clicking [Update] and adding additional notes. Each note is time stamped with the date and time of the update.

Tells the B.A.S.I.S. software to acknowledge the currently selected alarm.

Displays information about the previous alarm in the Main Alarm Monitoring window.

Displays information about the next alarm in the Main Alarm Monitoring window.

Closes the Alarm Acknowledgment window.

Displays online assistance for using this window.

Alarm Acknowledgment Procedures

Acknowledge an Alarm

1. Display the Alarm Acknowledgment window by double-clicking an alarm.

2. If the alarm has text instructions associated with it the information displays in the Instructions sub-window. Click [Print] to print the instructions.

3. If the alarm has voice instructions click [Audio].

4. To select pre-configured acknowledgment note(s) click [Select]. The Select

Acknowledgment Notes dialog appears. Select the name of the preconfigured note and click [OK].

5. To add notes to the alarm, type your comments and click in the Notes subwindow. If this is a canceling alarm, any notes carried forward from the associated initiating alarm gets displayed in the Original Notes field.

revision 1

— 169


Note:

If your System Administrator has configured the alarm to be marked “in

progress” before being acknowledged continue to step 6 . If not, move on to

step 8 .

An initiating alarm is an alarm that B.A.S.I.S. automatically deletes when the corresponding canceling alarm occurs.

6. If you are unable to acknowledge an alarm click [In Progress]. This marks the alarm as being “in progress” and acts as a state in between an unacknowledged and acknowledged alarm.

7. One an alarm is marked “In Progress” you are able to update the notes by clicking [Update]. Each update is time stamped with the date and time.

8. Click [Acknowledge] to acknowledge the alarm.

• If your System Administrator has configured this alarm type for

“Require Login On Ack.” you must first log in before this alarm can be acknowledged.

• If this is an initiating alarm, the corresponding canceling alarm may not be displayed until you acknowledge this alarm. Whether this happens depends upon how your system is set up.

• Your System Administrator may have set up some types of alarms to be automatically deleted from the Main Alarm Monitoring window after you acknowledge them. If this is not the case, delete the alarm manually.

For more information, refer to Delete an Alarm on page 171.

9. You can acknowledge multiple alarms without closing the Alarm

Acknowledgment window. Repeat step 2 through 8 for each alarm you display in the Alarm Acknowledgment window. Use the navigation buttons to move through the list of alarms.

10. To close the Alarm Acknowledgment window, click [Close].

Fast/Group Acknowledge Alarms

The Fast/Group Acknowledge feature allows you to acknowledge a group of alarms simultaneously. This feature can be used without bringing up the acknowledgment dialog box.

1. Select the alarm(s) that you wish to acknowledge.

• To choose two or more alarms, hold down the <Ctrl> key while selecting additional alarms.

• To select all the alarms press <Ctrl> + <F11>.

170 —

revision 1

Toolbar Shortcut


2. Acknowledge the group of alarms by completing one of the following:

• Choose Fast/Group Acknowledge from the Edit menu

• Right-click the selected group of alarms and choose Fast/Group

Acknowledge

• Click the Fast/Group Acknowledge toolbar button

• Press <Ctrl> + <F12>

3. A message displays:

Notes:

4. Click [Acknowledge] to confirm the acknowledgment of the alarms.

If any of the chosen alarms require notes upon acknowledgment, you will be prompted to enter notes.

If any one of the alarms has already been acknowledged, it cannot be reacknowledged. A message displays to inform you of how many alarms have been acknowledged. Click [OK] and delete the alarm(s).

The configuration for any given alarm may require that the operator log in upon acknowledging the alarm. If this is the case the user will be prompted to log in.

The configuration for an alarm may also require an acknowledgment password. If this is the case the operator will be prompted only once for the password (for each type of alarm).

Delete an Alarm

1. In the Main Alarm Monitoring window, highlight (click) the alarm you wish to delete.

2. Complete one of the following:

• Press the <Delete> key.

• From t

3. A confirmation message displays. Click [Yes].

Note:

You can also right-click the alarm and select Delete. When the confirmation message displays click [Yes].

revision 1

— 171


Delete All Alarms

Depending on how your System Administrator configured alarms, some alarms cannot be deleted until they have been acknowledged. B.A.S.I.S. will alert you if this is the case.

1. To delete all of the alarm entries from the current alarm view, select Delete

All from the Edit menu.

2. A confirmation message displays. Click [Yes]. All entries will be removed from the Main Alarm Monitoring window.

Note:

You can also delete multiple alarms in the Main Alarm Monitoring window using the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys and right-clicking. Select the Delete option.

A confirmation message displays. Click [Yes].

Display a Map

A monitoring map is a graphical representation of a facility or area monitored by the B.A.S.I.S. system. You can manually view maps associated with an alarm or you can set your display options to automatically display maps when an alarm occurs.

1. To manually display a map, open Alarm Monitoring.

2. If alarms are displayed in the Main Alarm Monitor window, right-click an alarm that has a map associated with it and select View Map. Otherwise, with the alarm selected choose Map from the View menu.

3. If no alarms are displayed in the Main Alarm Monitor window, select Map

Selection from the View menu. Select the desired map and click [OK].

Note:

If the selected device has multiple maps associated with it you will be prompted to select a map from a list provided. Do so and click [OK].

172 —

revision 1

Example of a Map


An alarm sprite is a small bitmap image used as an icon.

Graphical symbols on the map indicate the location of devices. Using your mouse, scroll over each symbol to view the device status and any text associated with the device. For information on associating text with map icons refer to the

MapDesigner User Guide.

Right-click a device symbol to perform a variety of operations depending on the type of device you select.

The word “ALARM” blinks, indicating an alarm’s location on the map.

• The blinking alarm displays only if there is one or more alarm designated as an “Active Alarm” in the System Administration software and if these alarms are unacknowledged/undeleted.

• The alarm sprite disappears once the alarm has been acknowledged.

• The alarm sprite disappears if the alarm has been deleted without acknowledgment (as in the case of an initiating alarm that is automatically replaced by a canceling alarm).

• The alarm sprite is not used for canceling alarms.

View Linked Maps

Several maps can be linked to each other using the MapDesigner software application. For more information refer to the “Place Icons on a background” section in the MapDesigner User Guide.

To view linked maps do one of the following:

revision 1

— 173


• If the map that is currently displayed has a link to another map, you can double-click the icon or right-click and select Switch Map.

• With a map currently displayed, click the map icon beside the File menu option. If you have previously brought up more than one map, a Back 1

Map menu option displays. If you go back one map, a Forward 1 Map menu option displays.

• From t

[OK].

Send an E-mail

Using B.A.S.I.S. software you can automatically or manually send electronic mail with alarm information. Contact your System Administrator to automatically send electronic mail for specific alarms.

174 —

revision 1


To manually send an e-mail using Alarm Monitoring:

1. Verify the Global Output Server is running by clicking Start and selecting

Programs > B.A.S.I.S. ET690 > Global Output Server.

2. Right-click an alarm and select Send Email. The Send Email window opens.

3. Click [To] and select (place a checkmark beside) the desired e-mail addresses. Use the <Ctrl> or the <Shift> key to select multiple addresses.

4. The subject and body of the message are automatically populated with information that describes the alarm. Click in either field to make any changes.

5. Click [OK].

Field/button

To

Subject

Message

OK

Cancel

Description

Allows you to select an e-mail address that is already in the database.

Displays the subject of the message. By default, the description of the alarm that has occurred is displayed. To change it, type over the text.

Displays the body of the message being sent. By default, information pertaining to the alarm is displayed. To change it, type over the text.

Once you are done, click the [OK] button to send the message and exit the window.

To exit the window without sending an e-mail message, click the [Cancel] button.

revision 1

— 175


Send a Page

Using B.A.S.I.S. software you can send a page to a recipient with alarm information.

1. Verify the Global Output Server is running by clicking Start and selecting

Programs > B.A.S.I.S. ET690 > Global Output Server.

2. Right-click an alarm and select Send Page. The Send Page window opens.

3. Click [To] and select (place a checkmark beside) the pager number of the recipient.

4. The message field is automatically populated with an alarm description, the time and date on which it occurred and the location (which reader/alarm panel).

5. Click [OK] to send the page.

Field/Button

To

Message

OK

Cancel

Description

Allows you to select pager number that is already in the database.

Displays the body of the message being sent. By default, information pertaining to the alarm is displayed. To change it, type over the text.

Once you are done, click the [OK] button to send the message and exit the window.

To exit the window without sending a page, click the [Cancel] button.

176 —

revision 1


Chapter 12: Muster Mode

Mustering

is a licensed feature that identifies all cardholders in a hazardous location during an incident. When an incident occurs (triggers an alarm)

B.A.S.I.S. automatically goes into muster mode. System operators can also manually initiate muster mode if necessary.

An incident is any situation/emergency where everyone in a hazardous area must evacuate and convene at designated safe locations. Safe locations are defined by exit and entry readers called muster readers. These readers are used purely for registration purposes and not to actually gain access into the safe location.

When an incident occurs a muster report can be generated listing all personnel within a hazardous location. During an incident cardholders must register in a safe location by entering the safe location via a designated muster readers.

Registering in a safe location removes the cardholder from the muster report. In this way the muster report becomes a report of all those who are on-site and have failed to register in a safe location.

At the end of an incident system operators can remove all cardholders from the safe locations; this is referred to as a muster reset.

Overview of Hazardous / Safe Locations

Hazardous and safe locations are defined in System Administration as a special type of global APB (Anti-PassBack) area. APB is the prevention of a badge from gaining entry in an access control system when that badge has either recently entered the same reader or area (timed APB) or is not considered to be in the proper area required to gain entry into a new area (area APB). Global APB is

APB enforced at a system level; areas span across multiple controllers.

Global APB can be soft APB or hard. Soft APB allows badges to enter areas that would normally be denied due to APB violations whereas Hard APB does not.

Hard APB in Hazardous Locations

Soft global APB is required for hazardous locations but it is strongly recommended that hard global APB be used when ever possible, because soft global APB can invalidate the accuracy of muster reporting. For example the accuracy of muster reporting will be compromised if a person swipes into a hazardous location that they are already considered to be in or swipes out of a hazardous location when they are not considered to be in it.

revision 1

— 177

12: Muster Mode

Notes:

Soft global APB is required for hazardous locations but it is strongly

recommended that hard global APB be used when ever possible.

Mustering is fully supported with B.A.S.I.S. and Apollo hardware. However, hard global APB is not supported with Apollo hardware.

Soft APB in Safe Locations

Soft APB must be applied to safe locations. It is assumed that readers entering safe locations are used purely for registration purposes and not to actually gain access into the safe location. In other words it is not expected that a badge will be presented to a reader to register at a safe location except during a muster mode.

Since readers entering safe locations are used purely for registration purposes and not to gain access, any card transaction at a reader entering a safe location that contains a badge ID will be used to register that badge as being in a safe location.

This includes granted with entry, granted with no entry, and access denied transactions.

Note:

Soft Global APB is required for safe locations.

Enable Global APB

Hazardous and safe locations are segmented and can only belong to one segment at any time. In order to enable mustering functionality in a given segment,

Global APB support must be enabled in that segment.

To enable global APB:

• In a segmented system, open System Administration or ID CredentialCenter and select the Global Anti-Passback check box on the Anti-Passback subtab of the Segments form in the Segments folder.

• In a non-segmented system, open System Administration or ID

CredentialCenter and select Administration > System Options. Select the

Global Anti-Passback check box on the Anti-Passback form.

Mustering Inside Hazardous Locations

For every hazardous location there must be at least one safe location associated with it, although multiple safe locations can be specified. In addition, multiple

178 —

revision 1


APB areas can be defined as hazardous, and safe locations can exist within these hazardous locations. Refer to the example below.

This site wants to do mustering inside of a hazardous location. They also want to use APB within area 1 (hazardous location) and the two storage rooms (area 2 and area 3). To have APB control within the two storage rooms, area 2 and area 3 must be defined as separate areas.

When a Badge enters “Storage Room B”, the system will consider it to be area 3.

As far as APB goes, that person is not considered to be in area 1 (the hazardous location). To function properly in this situation APB will not allow the badge to re-enter area 1 through any reader other than a reader leaving area 3.

However, for purposes of mustering, a person in “Storage Room B” (area 3) or in

“Storage Room A” (area 2) needs to be considered as being in a hazardous location since everything inside of Building 1 except the safe location (area 4) is in the danger zone.

How can both of these be achieved? The answer is by considering the hazardous location to be a combination of area 1 + area 2 + area 3. When determining who

revision 1

— 179

12: Muster Mode

is in the hazardous location, mustering will report anybody who is currently in any one of those areas.

Only normal APB areas can be configured as being contained in a hazardous location. Safe locations cannot, even though they may physically reside inside the hazardous location. This is because Badges recorded in a safe location should not be considered as being contained in the hazardous location.

General Constraints of Muster Mode

• When controllers go offline, B.A.S.I.S. is not able to provide accurate muster and safe location reports since B.A.S.I.S. will be unaware of access activity and safe location registration that occurs while a controller is offline.

When the controller comes back online, B.A.S.I.S. will be able to synchronize as long as the controller queued up all event transactions while it was offline.

Note:

It is recommended that dual path panels and communications be deployed to help avoid offline panel situations.

Note:

• For the case of safe areas outside of hazardous areas, the muster exit readers are unlocked providing free access into and out of the hazardous area.

Therefore access into and out of hazardous areas during an incident cannot be accurately tracked. Registration at the safe locations is what is accurately tracked.

For the case of safe locations inside of hazardous areas, entry and exit readers are locked.

Recommendations for Optimal Reliability

• The operators main concern during an incident is to change the mode of muster exit readers to unlocked or locked and to run the muster and safe location reports.

• If a reader entering or leaving a hazardous location is configured with an offline mode of “unlocked” or “facility code only” and that reader goes offline with the controller, badges will be able to enter and/or exit the hazardous location without a record being made. If an incident occurs before these badges are swiped again (thus self-correcting the record of their location), the muster report will not be correct. It may list badges as being in

180 —

revision 1


hazardous locations when they are no longer there. Furthermore, it may not list badges that are still in the hazardous location as being there.

The same issues can occur if, during normal times, badges are not forced to swipe at muster readers to gain entry into and out of hazardous areas or if physical barriers are not present to enforce one and only one physical entry per card swipe.

Stanley recommends the following during normal times, at muster entry and exit readers:

– Require that all access to hazardous locations be performed through the

Access Control System. Utilize physical barriers such as full turnstile and vehicle gates to enforce one and only one physical entry per card swipe.

This implies that a scenario should not be allowed where people freely enter a hazardous location and are then issued an access control badge once inside. If an incident occurs just after they have entered the hazardous location, there will be no record of them being in the hazardous area. If personnel, such as visitors, must enter hazardous locations without being issued a physical badge, they should first be issued a “virtual” badge in the system and the interface to manually place their badges inside of the hazardous location should be used.

When they visitors physically leave the hazardous location, the same interface should be used to manually take them out of the hazardous location. It is likely going to be simpler and more reliable to actually issue real visitor badges that are used for access into and out of the hazardous locations.

– Utilize Hard APB enforcement into and out of hazardous locations.

– Configure reader offline modes to be “Locked”. If personnel must enter/ exit the hazardous areas through doors whose readers are currently offline with their ISC, record the badge movement via the interface for manually moving a badge into a specific area.

Note, however, that if free access is required through muster exit readers during muster mode, that the door strikes must be physically overridden during muster mode via an external source to ensure free exit during muster mode when readers are offline with their ISC’s.

Additionally, all host computers running B.A.S.I.S. Communication Servers that are communicating with Access Controllers in the same Global APB Segment, must be time synchronized.

• B.A.S.I.S. will not automatically change the mode of muster exit readers to unlocked or locked during an incident and back to a card mode at the end of an incident. It is assumed an external override will be used to override door strikes and physical barriers. For example if a fire system and access control system are installed at a site, the access control system is typically not depended upon to unlock the doors during a fire; the fire system overrides the door strike.

• Registration at safe locations is required after muster mode occurs even if personnel are already in the safe location at the start of the incident.

revision 1

— 181

12: Muster Mode

Muster Mode in Main Alarm Monitoring Window

In muster mode, the Main Alarm Monitoring window displays a muster mode start alarm. Right-clicking the alarm and selecting the area in muster mode displays a sub-menu of options. These options are also available by right-clicking a hazardous or safe area icon in a map or in the System

Status

window.

Note:

In certain situations some right-click options listed below may not be available because they are location and/or mode (normal or muster) dependant.

Right-click Muster mode alarm sub-menu options

Option Description

Update Area

Status

View Map

Updates the status of both safe and hazardous areas so that operators can have a current view of cardholder locations.

Displays a map associated with the alarm. If several maps are associated with an alarm, the operator is prompted to select a map.

Move Badges Enables an operator to manually move all the badges in one area to another.

Occupancy Report Provides a current report of the cardholders currently in a safe area with information such as: the badge ID, the cardholder name, the time entered, and how the area was entered.

Muster Report

Note:

The occupancy report can also be run for a hazardous area. The occupancy report for a hazardous area is the similar to the muster report except it does not report the last attempted location.

Provides a current report of the cardholders currently in a safe area with information such as: the badge ID, the cardholder name, the time entered, and the area/last attempted location.

Note:

The muster report cannot be run for a safe area.

Start Muster Mode Initiates muster mode. The Start Muster Mode window displays and provides an area to enter comments.

Reset Muster

Mode

Ends muster mode. The Reset Muster Mode window displays and provides an area to enter comments.

Hazardous / Safe Locations in System Status Window

Hazardous and safe location icons display in the System

Status

window under the

Global Anti-Passback Areas and Mustering section. Alarm monitoring operators can right-click hazardous or safe area icons and view all or some of the options available in the Right-click Muster mode alarm sub-menu options on page 182 table, depending on the area selected.

182 —

revision 1


Muster Mode Procedures

Initiate Muster Mode

Muster mode is manually initiated via the Main Alarm Monitoring window,

System

Status

window or map view.

Depending on how your

System Administrator configures hazardous locations, muster mode initiation may automatically remove all cardholders from a safe location.

1. Using the Alarm Monitoring application, do one of the following:

• From the Main Alarm Monitoring window - Right-click the Muster

Mode Start alarm and select the hazardous location in muster mode. A sub-menu displays. Select Start Muster Mode.

• From the System

Status

window - Right-click an area and select Start

Muster Mode.

• From t select Start Muster Mode.

2. The Start Muster Mode window displays.

3. Enter any notes relating to why muster mode is being activated, and click

[Yes] to activate muster mode.

4. A warning message displays. Click [OK]. Muster mode is initiated.

Reset Muster Mode

Muster reset is a manual operation that takes a hazardous area out of muster mode. Muster reset will not automatically remove personnel in hazardous

revision 1

— 183

12: Muster Mode

locations. If a person really does remain in a hazardous area, you want to keep a record of them being there.

1. Using the Alarm Monitoring application, do one of the following:


Mode Start alarm and select the hazardous location in muster mode. A sub-menu displays. Select Reset Muster Mode.

• From the System

Status

window - Right-click an area and select Reset

Muster Mode.

• From t select Reset Muster Mode.

2. The Reset Muster Mode window displays. Enter any notes and click [Yes] to reset muster mode.

3. A warning message displays. Click [OK] and muster mode is initiated.

Reports

Several reports are available with mustering:

•

Muster mode report - lists the badge IDs, cardholder name, time entered, how entered, and their last attempted location for a specific hazardous area.

The status bar of the report displays the total occupancy for that area and the words MUSTER MODE. The title of the report displays the name of hazardous location and the time and date the report was initiated.

•

Occupancy report - list badge IDs, cardholder name, time entered, and how entered. The status bar displays the total occupancy for that area. The title of the report displays the name of the safe location and the time and date the

184 —

revision 1


report was initiated. The occupancy report is sometimes referred to as the

Safe Location report.

Run Muster and Occupancy Reports

Operators can run the muster and occupancy reports from the Main Alarm

Monitoring window or System

Status

window. They can also right-click a hazardous or safe icon in map view to run reports.

1. Display either the Main Alarm Monitoring window or the System

Status window.



Mode Start alarm, select the device (in this case it would be the hazardous location in muster mode.) A sub-menu displays. Select

Muster Report or Occupancy Report.

• From the System

Status

window - Right-click an area and select Muster

Report or Occupancy Report.

Notes:

Muster reporting automatically refreshes every two minutes. However the user can manually refresh a report at any time.

Automatic reporting ends when the number of personnel in the muster report becomes zero.

Report right-click options

Both the muster and occupancy report (via right-click options) allow operators to move one or several badges from an area as well as select a cardholder and bring up their badge information.

Moving Badges

Specific user permission is required to move badges.

The focus of muster mode is to account for all personnel in hazardous locations.

The muster report provides this information. If an operator verifies that personnel recorded as being in the hazardous location are physically outside the hazardous area they can manually move the badge to a different area.

revision 1

— 185

12: Muster Mode

Move All Badges from an Area

1. You can move every badge from a safe or hazardous area via several windows:

• From the Main Alarm Monitoring window right-click the muster mode

Start alarm, select the hazardous area and then select Move Badges.

• From the System

Status

window right-click an APB area and select

Move Badges.

• From a map view right-click an APB area and select Move Badges.

2. When prompted to confirm your request. Click [Yes].

3. The Area Move Badges window displays. Select the desired area (a checkmark displays beside the area), enter any notes and click [OK].

Move a Single Badge from an Area

Operators can also move a single badge from a safe or hazardous area; this can only be done through the occupancy or muster report.

1. Run the occupancy or muster report. For more information, refer to Run

Muster and Occupancy Reports on page 185.

2. From the occupancy or muster report right-click and select Move Badge to

APB Area.

Note:

You can also move multiple badges from an area; this can be done by highlighting the desired badges, right-clicking and selecting Move Badge to

APB area.

186 —

revision 1

Advanced Operator

Procedures


Chapter 13: Cardholders Folder

Toolbar Shortcut

Notes:

The Cardholders folder contains forms with which you can:

• Add, modify and delete cardholder and visitor records.

• Assign cardholders or groups of cardholders to different segments.

• Create badge records for cardholders and visitors.

• Assign access levels to active badges for cardholders and visitors.

• Assign one or more Precision Access groups to a badge (if Precision Access is used on your system).

• Search for and display cardholders and visitors biometrics records.

• Search for cardholders and visitors visit records.

• Assign and track assets to cardholders and visitors.

• Link directory accounts to cardholders and visitors.

• Assign a cardholder as a tour guard.

• Assign security clearance levels to tour guards.

• Create and print reports containing cardholder information.

The folder contains up to eleven forms: the Cardholder/Visitor form, the Badge form, the Segments form (if segmentation is enabled), the Access Levels form, the Precision Access form (if in use), the Biometrics form, the Visits form, the

Assets form, the Directory Accounts form, the Guard Tours form and the Reports form.

The Cardholders folder is displayed by selecting Badge Info from the View menu, or by selecting the Cardholders toolbar button.

The forms in the Cardholders folder are visually divided into four sections; the right section, the upper-left section, the middle-left section and the bottom section.

Several of the form elements in these sections are common to every form in the cardholders folder. Refer to the following table for descriptions of the common form elements.

This documentation refers to cardholder data fields that are shipped as the default by Stanley. If you have used the FormsDesigner application to

revision 1

— 189

13: Cardholders Folder

customize your cardholder data, the elements on your Cardholders folders will be different.

The Segments form is only available if segmentation is enabled on your system

The availability of certain forms and fields in the Cardholders folder is subject to licensing restrictions.

Cardholders Folder

Form Element Comment

Common form elements - right section

Photo display

Signature display

Last access

Displays the cardholder’s photo as it appears on their badge.

Displays the cardholder’s signature as it appears on their badge.

If Show Last Granted Location is selected in the Cardholder menu, displays information about the most recent valid access by this cardholder, including the triggered event, date, time and reader name.

Badge ID

Issue code

Prints

Activate

If Show Last Attempted Location is selected in the Cardholder menu, displays information about the most recent access attempt (whether access was granted or not) by this cardholder, including the triggered event, date, time and reader name.

Displays the numeric identifier assigned to the cardholder’s active badge.

Displays the issue code assigned to the cardholder’s active badge.

Displays the number of times the active badge has been printed.

Displays the date when the badge becomes valid.

Deactivate Displays the date when the badge becomes invalid.

Common form elements - upper-left section

Last name

First name

Middle name

Cardholder ID

Indicates the cardholder’s last name.

Indicated the cardholder’s first name.

Indicates the cardholder’s middle name.

Indicates the cardholder’s ID number.

Badge type

Note:

This field is not displayed on the Visitor form.

Indicates the cardholder’s badge type. Badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder.

For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration

User Guide.

Common form elements - bottom section

Search Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. This button is used to search for existing cardholder records.

190 —

revision 1


Cardholders Folder (Continued)

Form Element

Add

Comment

Enabled in view mode on the Cardholder/Visitor and Badge form and is used to add a record.

Modify

Delete

Print

Encode

Note:

This button is displayed but not enabled on the Segments form, the Access Levels form, the Precision Access form, the Biometrics form, the Visits form, the Guard

Tours form and the Reports form because these records are not added in the

Cardholders folder.

Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder.

Note:

This button will be displayed but will not be enabled on the Directory Accounts form and the Reports form, because directory account and report records cannot be modified.

Enabled in view mode on the Cardholder/Visitor and Badge form and is used to delete a record.

Note:

This button is displayed but not enabled on the Segments form, the Access Levels form, the Precision Access form, the Biometrics form, the Guard Tours form and the

Reports form because these records are not deleted in the Cardholders folder.

Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, displays the

Badge Printing window from where you can print the active badge for the current record, or the active badges for all records found in a search.

You can also log and print errors encountered during the print operation.

Note:

When you select this button on the Reports form, the Print Report Options window

is displayed.

For more information, refer to

Window

on page 361.

Chapter 18: Print Report Options

Note:

Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, displays the Encode Badge window from where you can encode the badge configurations selected for the cardholder onto a smart card. For more information refer to the Card Formats Folder chapter in the System Administration User

Guide.For cardholder records with guest badge types, clicking this button will display the Increment Issue Code window.

The availability of this button is subject to licensing restrictions.

Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, moves to the first record that matches your search criteria.

Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, by default moves 10 matching records back. You can change the number of records moved back by modifying the value in the Number of records to scroll for fast forward and rewind field on the View Options window. The View Options window is displayed by selecting View Options from the Cardholder menu.

Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, moves to the previous record that matches your search criteria.

Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, moves to the next record that matches your search criteria.

revision 1

— 191


Cardholders Folder (Continued)

Form Element

OK

Cancel

Clear

Clear All

Capture

Last Search

Record count

Comment

Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, by default moves 10 matching records forward. You can change the number of records moved forward by modifying the value in the Number of records to scroll for fast forward and rewind field on the View Options window. The View Options window is displayed by selecting View Options from the Cardholder menu.

Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, moves to the last record that matches your search criteria.

Displayed in search or modify mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, saves the changes made to the current record, or begins the requested search.

Displayed in search or modify mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, cancels the pending requested action.

Displayed in search or modify mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, clears all current record information that can be cleared from the current form.

Displayed in search or modify mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, clears all current record information that can be cleared from all forms in the folder.

Displayed in add or modify mode on the Cardholder/Visitor form, the Segments form, the

Badge form, the Access Levels form, the Precision Access form and the Biometrics form.

Displayed in modify mode on the Visits form. When selected, opens Multimedia Capture.

Note:

The availability of Multimedia Capture is subject to licensing restrictions.

Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder. When selected, retrieves the same group of records that was found by the most recent search operation.

Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder and indicates the number of the record out of the total number of records found by the most recent search operation. For example: 6 of 10.

Person type

You can type in a number and hit the <Enter> key to jump to that record number.

In search mode, select the type of record you want to search.

Choices are:

• All - when selected, your search will locate both Cardholder and Visitor records

• Cardholders - when selected, your search will only locate cardholder records

• Visitors - when selected, your search will only locate visitor records

Cardholders Folder Procedures

The following procedures pertain to every form in the Cardholders folder unless otherwise noted.

192 —

revision 1


Cardholder Search Capabilities

Before you begin searching cardholders you must have cardholder search permissions enabled. For more information, refer to Cardholder Permission

Groups Form (Cardholder Sub-tab) in the System Administration or ID

CredentialCenter user guide.

In search mode, you can search on any combination of fields in the Visits folder, including the Status search, Visit and Details forms. On the E-mail and Reports forms, you can only search for the host name or visitor name.

Comparison operator

>

<

=

!= or <>

>=

<=

%

Comparison Operators

Comparison operators

are symbols that represent specific actions. You can refine your search by prefixing search fields with a comparison operator. Refer to the following table to identify the comparison operators you can use with different fields.

Description

Equal to

Not equal to

Greater than

Less than

Greater than or equal to

Less than or equal to

Contains

Text field

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Numeric field

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

NA

Drop-down list

Yes

Yes

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

Notes:

“Equal to” is the default comparison operator for numeric and drop-down list fields.

If you type an equal to sign “=” in a field and nothing else, B.A.S.I.S. will search for records that have an empty value for that field. For example, typing an “=” in the Department field will find every record that does not have an assigned department.

Note:

Search Fields Using “Begins With”

For text and drop-down list fields you can search records whose values begin with specific characters by entering those characters in the field. For example, when searching by last name, a filter of “L” will find “Lake”, “Lewis”, etc. A filter of “Lake” will find “Lake”, “Lakeland”, etc.

The default comparison operator for text fields is “begins with”.

revision 1

— 193


Note:

Search Multiple Fields

When you search multiple fields, the search criteria for each field is combined.

For example, typing “A” in Last name field and “B” in First name field will find all people whose last name begins with “A” and whose first name beings with “B”.

One exception is searching access levels, which uses an “or” comparison for multiple selections. For example, selecting both “Access Level A” and “Access

Level B” will find all cardholders with either “Access Level A” or “Access Level

B” assigned.

If you want to search for a range of Badge IDs, take advantage of the two

Badge ID fields on the Badge form. One field is located in the middle-left section of the form and the other field is located in the right section of the form. Note, the form must be in modify mode to see both fields. Type “>=

100” in one field and “<= 200” in the other to find all badges with IDs between 100 and 200 (inclusive).

Search for a Cardholder Record

1. In Alarm Monitoring, select Badge Info from the View menu. In all other applications, select Cardholders from the Administration menu.

2. The Cardholders folder opens. Click [Search].

3. If you are searching for a cardholder or visitor, select the type of person you are searching for in the Person type drop-down list (in the lower right). This field may not display due to licensing restrictions.

4. Specify your search criteria by typing full or partial entries in any enabled field on any of the tabs.

5. Click [OK].

6. B.A.S.I.S. retrieves and displays the first matching record. Use the navigational buttons (in the lower right) to look at additional matching records.

record.

First record/Last Record - Displays the first/last matching

Rewind/Fast Forward - Moves backward/forward ten matching records. To modify the number of records moved, refer to the View Options window, which is accessed from the Cardholder menu.

Previous record/Next record - Displays the previous/next matching record.

194 —

revision 1


Retrieve the Most Recent Search Results

1. Display the Cardholders folder or Visits folder by completing one of the following:

• To display the Cardholders folder in Alarm Monitoring, select Badge

Info from the View menu. For all other applications, select

Cardholders from the Administration menu.

• To display the Visits folder in Alarm Monitoring, select Visits from the

View menu. For all other applications, select Visits from the

Administration menu.

2. Click [Search].

3. Click [Last Search]. The criteria you selected from the most recent search operation will be inserted into the appropriate fields.

4. You can optionally modify your search criteria.

5. Click [OK].

6. B.A.S.I.S. retrieves and displays the first matching record. Use the navigational buttons to look at additional matching records.

Change the Cardholders Folder View Options

1. Select View Options from the Cardholder menu. The View Options window opens.

2. From the Cardholder photo lookup drop-down list, select the image type you want displayed in Photo display (located in the right section of the

Cardholders folder forms).

Choices include:

• None - no image will be displayed

• Normal image - a photo image will be displayed as it was originally captured

• Normal image with chromakey - a photo image will be displayed, but without its background

• Thumbnail - This option is only displayed if the Create/save photo

thumbnails check box in Administration > Cardholder Options >

revision 1

— 195


General Cardholder Options is selected. A smaller thumbnail version of the photo is displayed.

3. From the Cardholder signature lookup drop-down list, select the type of signature you want displayed in Signature display (located in the right section of the Cardholders folder forms).

Choices include:

• None - no signature will be displayed

• Normal image - a signature will be displayed

4. In the Number of records to scroll for fast forward and rewind field, type in the number of records you want to move backwards and forwards when you select the

5. Click [OK].

and push buttons.

196 —

revision 1

Keyboard Wedge Settings Window


A wedge scanner, also sometimes referred to as a wedge reader, is a device that is attached to a keyboard and used to scan badge IDs as direct keyboard input.

Wedge scanners can be used with B.A.S.I.S. to:

•

Add a badge. In this scenario, each card entry station has a wedge scanner.

The operator clicks [Add] and swipes the badge with the wedge scanner to read the badge ID. This is equivalent to typing in the badge ID at the keyboard. When a wedge scanner is used in this manner, no configuration of the settings on the Keyboard Wedge Settings window is needed.

•

Search for a badge. The normal way to search for a badge in B.A.S.I.S. is to click [Search] and then specify what to search for, such as badge ID or social security number. When a wedge scanner is used, the [Search] button does not need to be clicked; instead, the system specifically searches on one predefined criteria. When a wedge scanner is used in this manner, the settings on the Keyboard Wedge Settings window must be properly configured.

When to Use the Keyboard Wedge Settings Window

The Keyboard Wedge Settings window only needs to be configured on systems that will be using a wedge scanner to search for badges. This may include:

• MobileVerify stations. MobileVerify stations typically use a wedge scanner because using a keyboard on a mobile computer is awkward. The wedge scanner provides a quick way to search for a cardholder and instantly grant or deny access based on the system’s recommendation.

The settings on the Keyboard Wedge Settings window determine the format of the data that is sent between a wedge scanner and the B.A.S.I.S. system, and are specified on a per workstation basis. Administrative rights to the workstation are required to change these settings because any changes must be written to the

ACS.INI file.

revision 1

— 197


Displaying the Keyboard Wedge Settings Window

The Keyboard Wedge Settings window is displayed by selecting Keyboard

Wedge Settings from the Cardholder menu. (In System Administration, ID

CredentialCenter, Visitor Management, and View/Edit Only the Cardholder menu is only displayed after selecting Cardholders from the Administration menu. In Alarm Monitoring, the Cardholder menu is displayed after clicking the

toolbar button.)

CAC Barcodes

A common access card (CAC) is a military-issued ID card that is issued to active duty personnel, selected reservists, Department of Defense civilian employees, eligible contractors, and some foreign nationals. Retirees, family members, and inactive reservists are not currently issued a CAC card.

Configuring B.A.S.I.S. to Read CAC Barcodes

To set the B.A.S.I.S. system up to read CAC cards, the If length of input

exceeds limit, assume CAC barcode check box on the Keyboard Wedge

Settings window must be selected. A limit also needs to be specified. If only

CAC cards will be read, then the Limit can be set to 0. However, most systems will also need to have the ability to read other cards in addition to CACs, so the limit will need to be set to an appropriate value.

For example, a military base that assigns badge IDs to the people on its base may want to be able to read those badge IDs as well as CACs because visitors from other bases will only have a CAC. In this case, the limit would need to be set to an appropriate number. If the badge IDs were all nine digits long, then an appropriate limit would be ten because CAC barcodes are much longer than ten digits.

Scanning Barcodes with a Wedge Scanner

When an ID is scanned, B.A.S.I.S. determines the length of the number that was scanned. If the number of digits exceeds the limit, then the number is treated as a

CAC number, and the social security number is decrypted and searched up.

If the number of digits is less than the limit, then the maximum length, start, and end settings are applied to the string and used to extract the search criteria

(typically badge ID or social security number).

After those settings are examined, the system then examines the Table and Field and searches that information up. The Table and Field specified depend on what information is encoded on the card that will be read in addition to the CAC.

Common options include:

• Badge ID. If searching on Badge IDs, select the BADGE table and the ID field.

• Social security number. If searching on social security numbers, select the

EMP table and the SSNO field.

198 —

revision 1


• User-defined field. If searching on a user-defined field, select the desired table and field. For example, a company may wish to search on a table and field that is unique to their system, such as an employee number.

The following flowchart describes what happens when a barcode is scanned with a wedge scanner:

Scanning Barcodes with a Wedge Scanner

Scan badge

Is CAC being used?

No

Yes

Is length of number scanned greater than Limit?

No

B.A.S.I.S. examines

Ignore non-numeric

data, Max length, Start, and End settings

Yes

B.A.S.I.S. decrypts social security number from CAC number

B.A.S.I.S. examines

Field and Table

B.A.S.I.S. searches up social security number

B.A.S.I.S. searches up

field and table

revision 1

— 199


Keyboard Wedge Settings Window

Form Element

Table

Comment

Select the table in the B.A.S.I.S. database that you wish to search on when keyboard input is detected. If searching for badge ID numbers, select the BADGE table, and if searching for social security numbers, select the EMP table.

Field

If length of input exceeds limit, assume CAC barcode

Limit

Ignore nonnumeric data

Max length

Note:

If CAC is being used and an ID is scanned that has more than the specified Limit of digits, then the Table and Field will be ignored.

Select the field in the selected table in the B.A.S.I.S. database that you wish to search on when keyboard input is detected. If searching for badge ID numbers, select ID (in the BADGE table), and if searching for social security number, select SSNO (in the EMP table).

Note:

If CAC is being used and an ID is scanned that has more than the specified Limit of digits, then the Table and Field will be ignored.

If selected, CAC (Common Access Card) barcodes can be used. This allows military code

3of9 barcodes to be scanned and decoded into the cardholder’s social security number. If you do not wish to use this feature, leave this check box deselected.

If this check box is selected, you must specify an appropriate Limit. When this check box is selected and an ID is scanned, the number of digits will be examined.

• If the number of digits is less than or equal to the Limit, then the system will search on the Table and Field.

• If the number of digits is greater than the Limit, then the system will assume the

ID was a CAC, decrypt the social security number, and search the social security number up.

The Limit field is only enabled when the If length of input exceeds limit, assume CAC

barcode check box is selected.

If the Limit is set to zero, then only CAC can be read. Setting a limit greater than zero enables the system to recognize two different formats. When an ID is scanned, the number of digits will be examined.

• If the number of digits is less than or equal to the Limit, then the system will search on the Table and Field using the Max length, Start, and End settings.

• If the number of digits is greater than the Limit, then the system will assume the

ID was a CAC, decrypt the social security number, and search the social security number up.

If selected, non-numeric data is removed and not counted as a placeholder. This is important for scans that include dashes in the social security number. For example, if an ID is scanned that has 123-45-6789 encoded, the system will search for 123456789.

A maximum length must be provided if the wedge scanner does not automatically provide a line feed carriage return. This allows the wedge scanner to be used as long as the length of the scan is always the same (i.e., social security number).

If 0 or -1 is specified, then the whole string will be read in.

200 —

revision 1


Keyboard Wedge Settings Window (Continued)

Form Element

Start

Comment

The Start field works in combination with the End field. When an ID is scanned, a string of numbers are read. As long as the ID is not a CAC, that string of numbers typically contains the actual badge ID or social security number. For a CAC, that string of numbers doesn’t contain the actual social security number, but B.A.S.I.S. does “decrypt” the social security number from the string.

End

OK

Cancel

The Start position is important because the string of numbers may contain other numbers in addition to what is being searched for; it is the first position in the string of numbers that contains a digit of what is being searched for. The End position is the last digit of what is being searched for.

The End position should be greater than or equal to the Start position. Take for example the string 123456789. If 4 is the Start position and 7 is the End position, then the B.A.S.I.S. system will search on 4567.

If you specify an End position that is less than the Start position, B.A.S.I.S. assumes the end is 255. Therefore, for the string 123456789 with 4 as the Start and 3 as the End, B.A.S.I.S. would search on 456789.

The End field works in combination with the Start field. As long as the ID is not a CAC, that string of numbers typically contains the actual badge ID or social security number. For a CAC, that string of numbers doesn’t contain the actual social security number, but B.A.S.I.S. does

“decrypt” the social security number from the string.

The Start position is important because the string of numbers may contain other numbers in addition to what is being searched for; it is the first position in the string of numbers that contains a digit of what is being searched for. The End position is the last digit of what is being searched for.

The End position must be greater than or equal to the Start position. Take for example the string 123456789. If 4 is the Start position and 7 is the End position, then the B.A.S.I.S. system will search on 4567.

If you specify an End position that is less than the Start position, B.A.S.I.S. assumes the end is 255. Therefore, for the string 123456789 with 4 as the Start and 3 as the End, B.A.S.I.S. would search on 456789.

Applies the selected wedge scanner settings and closes the Keyboard Wedge Settings window.

Closes the Keyboard Wedge Settings window without applying any changes made.

revision 1

— 201


Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Procedures

Configure a Wedge Scanner

How the B.A.S.I.S. system interprets the information it receives from a wedge scanner can be configured by doing the following:

1. In System Administration, ID CredentialCenter, Visitor Management, or

View/Edit Only, select Cardholders from the Administration menu. In

Alarm Monitoring, click the toolbar button.

2. Select Keyboard Wedge Settings from the Cardholder menu.

3. The Keyboard Wedge Settings window opens.

202 —

revision 1

a. Specify the Table and Field you wish to search on when non-CAC input is detected. By default, the system searches on the ID field in the

BADGE table. If for example you wanted to search based on social security number instead of badge ID, you would select the SSNO field in the EMP table.

b. If CAC (Common Access Card) barcodes will be used, select the If

length of input exceeds limit, assume CAC barcode check box and specify the limit. This allows military code 3of9 barcodes to be scanned and decoded into the cardholder’s social security number. If you do not wish to use this feature, leave this check box deselected.

c. Select whether to ignore non-numeric data. By default, the Ignore non-

numeric data check box is selected. This is important for scans that include dashes in the social security number.

d. Specify the maximum length in the Max length field. A maximum length must be provided if the wedge scanner does not automatically provide a line feed carriage return. This allows the wedge scanner to be used as long as the length of the scan is always the same (i.e., social security number).


Note:

If 0 or -1 is specified, then the whole string will be read in.

e. Specify the start and end. In a string of numbers that contains a search criteria (typically social security number or badge ID), start and end are the first and last position, respectively, that contain the search criteria.

f. Click [OK].

Verify Fingerprint(s) Dialog

Fingerprint Verification with PIV Cards

When fingerprint data is imported from PIV cards, the Verify Fingerprint(s) dialog will be displayed allowing you to capture the cardholder's live fingerprint for comparison against the fingerprint encoded on the PIV card. If the PIV card is encoded with a facial image, it is displayed for additional verification.

Important:

Fingerprint verification is optional. To verify fingerprints, select the Verify

fingerprints on import check box in the Cardholder Options Folder >

General Cardholder Options Form in System Administration.

Verify Fingerprint(s) Dialog

Dialog Element

Facial image from

PIV card

Capture Device

Comment

If a facial image is encoded on the PIV card, it is displayed in the left pane of the dialog for verification of the cardholder’s identity.

From the drop-down list, select the fingerprint scanning device you are using to capture the fingerprint.

revision 1

— 203


Verify Fingerprint(s) Dialog (Continued)

Dialog Element

Live fingerprint

Status display

Capture

Abort

Close

Comment

The captured fingerprint is displayed in the left pane. This image is compared against the fingerprints encoded on the PIV card.

Messages and on-screen prompts are displayed in the status box below the fingerprint image.

Click this button to begin capturing the fingerprint.

Click this button to stop the capture operation.

Click this button to close the dialog.

Verify Fingerprint(s) Dialog Procedures

Verify Fingerprints from a PIV Card

1. When the Verify Fingerprint(s) dialog is displayed, follow the on-screen prompts provided in the status box below the fingerprint image. You will be guided through the process of capturing and verifying the fingerprints.

2. From the Capture Device drop-down select the device you will use to capture the fingerprints.

3. When prompted, the cardholder presents his/her finger to the capture device.

4. Click [Capture].

5. If the fingerprints match, a successful issuance is registered with B.A.S.I.S.

However, if fingerprint verification fails, the card is terminated and recycled.

Note:

If the PIV card contains a facial image, it is displayed with the captured fingerprint image for additional verification of the cardholder.

6. To stop the capture operation, click [Abort].

Import Fingerprints from a PIV Card

To import the fingerprints encoded on the PIV card into the database:

Important:

Ensure the Import fingerprints from card into database check box is selected in the Cardholder Options Folder > General Cardholder Options

Form in System Administration.

Note:

When importing data from a PIV card after adding, modifying, or searching on a badge (NOT a cardholder), cardholder-specific data that is imported

204 —

revision 1


(Last name, First name, Middle name, and Cardholder ID) is not overwritten even though it is displayed in the grayed-out fields. However, the cardholder photo is imported if the user confirms replacement of the existing photo.

Overwrite Facial Image Dialog

Note:

After fingerprint verification, if the cardholder already has a photo, the Overwrite

Facial Image dialog is displayed allowing you to import the facial image from the

PIV card and overwrite the current cardholder photo with it.

Existing cardholder photos are NOT automatically overwritten. If there is an existing cardholder photo, the Overwrite Facial Image dialog is displayed with the current photo and the photo from the card allowing the user to choose which one to use.

Overwrite Facial Image Dialog

Dialog Element

Current Photo

New Photo on

Card

Overwrite

Cancel

Comment

Displays the cardholder’s current photo.

Displays the facial image encoded on the PIV card.

Click this button to replace the current photo with the one on the PIV card.

Click this button if you do not wish to overwrite the current photo.

revision 1

— 205


Overwrite Facial Image Dialog Procedure

Replace Cardholder Photo with Facial Image on PIV Card

1. If the Overwrite Facial Image dialog is displayed, compare the facial image from the PIV card with the current cardholder photo.

2. Click [Overwrite] to replace the current cardholder photo with the one from the PIV card.

3. If you do not wish to replace the current cardholder photo, click [Cancel].

Cardholder Form

Cardholder Form Overview

In the System Administration and ID CredentialCenter applications, the

Cardholder form is used to:

• Define a cardholder.

• Enter or import demographic information into the cardholder record.

• Choose a badge type for the cardholder.

• Access Multimedia Capture (subject to licensing restrictions).

In the Visitor Management application, the Cardholder form is used to search for a cardholder.

206 —

revision 1


Cardholders Folder - Cardholder Form

Form Element

Cardholder data

Record last changed

Comment

Displayed in view mode. When adding or modifying a cardholder record, enter the cardholder’s information such as name, address and department into these fields.

Displayed in view mode and indicates the date on which the selected cardholder record was last modified and saved.

This date is updated only when cardholder information is changed, not when badge information is changed. The last changed date is saved individually for each badge record as well.

Import Cardholder/Visitor Data

Users can import demographic data stored on business cards, passports, driver’s licenses, identification (ID) cards, and smart cards during cardholder/visitor add,

modify, or search operations. Refer to the Cardholder/Visitor Import table on page 208 for a summary of the hardware used to import demographic data and

the user-defined fields (UDF) that must be mapped in FormsDesigner to import data into the Cardholder form.

Note:

Licenses are required to import cardholder data and are based on the number of scanning terminals used.

Prerequisites

System Administrators should complete the following steps in order to prepare

B.A.S.I.S. to import information:

1. Configure the reader/scanner communication settings including the

workstation to which it is connected. Refer to the third column in the

Cardholder/Visitor Import table on page 208 to determine if you have to

configure the reader/scanner in B.A.S.I.S. and if so, what the device type would be. For more information, refer to the Encoders/Scanners form in


revision 1

— 207


Note:

Some reader/scanners do not need to be configured in the B.A.S.I.S. application. Simply load the drivers onto the encoding/scanning workstation.

2. Map the demographic data to the appropriate user-defined fields in Forms

Designer. For more information, refer to the FormsDesigner User Guide.

3. For PIV cards: a. Configure the fingerprint settings in the General Cardholder Options form. For more information, refer to the Cardholder Options chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

b. Ensure the PIV card is inserted in the PC/SC encoder/scanner.

Cardholder/Visitor Import

Source Hardware scanner

Business card

Passport

License required

Driver’s license ScanShell 800 Terminal Yes

Identification card

GSC (DESFire) smart card

GSC (iCLASS) smart card

Corex CardScan scanner

ScanShell 1000

Terminal

ScanShell 1000

Terminal

ID-Check Terminal

ScanShell 800 Terminal

ScanShell 1000

Terminal

ID-Check Terminal

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

MIFARE Pegoda

Contactless Smart Card

Reader (MF EV700)

HID iCLASS

Yes

Yes

Device Type to select in

Workstations folder

NA

NA

NA

NA

ID-Check

Terminal

NA

NA

ID-Check

Terminal

NA

HID (iCLASS) reader/encoder

Import Source to select

UDF

Corex CardScan scanner

ID Scan vCard

ID Scan

ID Scan

ID-Check Terminal

ID Scan

ID Scan

ID-Check Terminal

GSC (DESFire) smart card

GSC (iCLASS) smart card

DMV/

Passport

DMV/

Passport

DMV/

Passport

DMV/

Passport

DMV/

Passport

DMV/

Passport

DMV/

Passport

CAC

GSC

CAC

GSC

FASC-N

208 —

revision 1


Cardholder/Visitor Import

Source Hardware scanner

GSC

Cartographer smart card

PIV card

TWIC card

PC/SC encoder/scanner



License required

Yes

No

No

Device Type to select in

Workstations folder

PC/SC encoder/ scanner

Import Source to select

GSC Cartographer smart card



PIV card

TWIC card

PIV card

UDF

CAC

GSC

FASC-N

PIV

FASC-N

PIV

FASC-N

Corex Business Card Scanner

Using Corex Business Card scanners, users can import demographic data into the

Cardholder form from business cards.

The Corex Business Card scanners are not configured in B.A.S.I.S. as encoder/ scanners. Simply load the drivers onto the encoding/scanning workstation and the Corex CardScan scanner will be an option on the Select Import Source dialog.

Only data that is mapped to the appropriate vCard -UDF or DMV-UDF field in

FormsDesigner is imported into the Cardholder form.

GSC (iCLASS) Card

Using HID (iCLASS) readers/scanners, users can import demographic data into the Cardholder form from GSC (iCLASS) smart cards.

Only data that is mapped to the appropriate CAC, GSC, or FASC-N-UDF fields in FormsDesigner is imported into the Cardholder form.

Note:

If badge information is stored on the smart card, you will have to assign a badge type during import.

GSC (DESFire) Card

Using MIFARE Pegoda Contactless Smart Card Readers (MF EV700), users can import demographic data into the Cardholder form from smart cards from GSC

(DESFire) smart cards.

The MIFARE Pegoda Contactless Smart Card Reader (MF EV700) is not configured through the B.A.S.I.S. application. Simply load the drivers onto the

revision 1

— 209


encoding/scanning workstation and the MF EV700 will be an option on the

Select Import Source window.

Only data that is mapped to the appropriate CAC or GSC -UDF fields in


ID Scan

Using the ID Scan scanners, users can import demographic data on driver licenses, identification cards, and passports issued by various Countries and State and Provincial Departments of Motor Vehicles.

Note:

Not all the state and provincial DMV’s currently encode their driver’s license and identification cards. Therefore, not all state driver licenses are supported.

Note:

Importation of cardholder and visitor data with ScanShell 800 and ScanShell

1000 CSS devices is now licensed. This license allows only a certain number of CSS devices, dictated by the license, to be configured through workstations and scanners.

The ScanShell 800 is the regular scanner that scans driver’s licenses and uses

OCR to extract data off of them. The ScanShell 1000 performs the same function plus passport scanning.

Only data that is mapped to the appropriate DMV-UDF fields in FormsDesigner is imported into the Cardholder form.

Data Import

Users will be prompted to select an ID, barcode, or passport during the scanning process. When ID scanning is selected users will have to select the country and the state/region of the driver license. However, when U. S. is selected (as the country), users will have an option to select auto detect (for the state). When auto detect is selected ID scan attempts to detect the state of the driver license that is being scanned.

ID-Check Terminal

Using the ID-Check Terminal scanner, users can import demographic data on driver licenses and identification cards issued by various State and Provincial

Departments of Motor Vehicles. These credentials usually use any combination of a 3-track magnetic stripe, 2D barcode, and 1D barcode. Only data that is mapped to the appropriate DMV-UDF field in FormsDesigner can be imported.

210 —

revision 1


Notes:

Not all state and provincial DMV’s are supported.

B.A.S.I.S. supports ID-Check terminals (IDC-1400) version 5.4 and later.

Note:

Importation of cardholder and visitor data with the ID-Check Terminal is now licensed. This license allows only certain number of ID-Check Terminal devices, dictated by the license, to be configured.

PIV Card

Using a PC/SC encoder/scanner, users can import data into the Cardholder form from PIV cards.

Only data that is mapped to the appropriate PIV-UDF or FASC-N-UDF fields in


After selecting the PIV card as the data import source, the user must enter their

PIN number to authenticate the process.

Fingerprint Verification and Import

Users will be prompted to verify the cardholder’s fingerprint(s) and the photo on the PIV card is presented for further verification. Fingerprints from the card may be imported as well. For more information, refer to

Fingerprint Verification with

PIV Cards

on page 203 and Import Fingerprints from a PIV Card on page 204.

Photo Replacement

If a photo is encoded on the PIV card, the user may elect to replace the current

cardholder photo with the one on the card. For more information, refer to

Replace Cardholder Photo with Facial Image on PIV Card on page 206.

TWIC Card

Using a PC/SC encoder/scanner, users can import data into the Cardholder form from TWIC cards which contain both TWIC and PIV data.

Only data that is mapped to the appropriate PIV-UDF or FASC-N-UDF fields in


After selecting either the TWIC card or PIV card as the data import source, the user must enter their PIN number to authenticate the process.

revision 1

— 211


Import Cardholder Data

1. Select Cardholders from the Administration menu for all applications except Alarm Monitoring. (In Alarm Monitoring, select Badge Info from the View menu.)

2. The Cardholders folder opens. Click [Add].

Note:

The Import function is also available if the user searches for or modifies a cardholder/visitor or badge.

3. Click [Import].

4. In the Select Import Source window, select the import source available for

this workstation. For more information, refer to the Cardholder/Visitor

Import table on page 208.

Note:

Import devices are configured in System Administration. In System

Administration, select Encoders/Scanners from the Workstations menu.

5. Click [OK].

6. Perform the instructions that display to complete the import data process.

Cardholder Form Procedures

Add a Cardholder Record

1. Select Badge Info choice the View menu. The Cardholders folder opens.

2. By default, the Cardholder form is displayed. Click [Add].

3. From the Person type drop-down list, select Cardholders.

212 —

revision 1


Note:

The Person type drop-down list is subject to licensing restrictions. If this field is not displayed, move on to the next step.

Note:

4. Enter the cardholder’s name and any additional information in the cardholder data fields.

You can switch to other tabs and modify the other forms at this time.

5. If you want to add a photograph or signature to the cardholder record, click

[Capture]. Multimedia Capture opens. For more information refer to the

Multimedia Capture appendix in the System Administration User Guide.

6. Click [OK] to save the record.

Modify a Cardholder Record

1. Locate the cardholder record you want to change.

2. Click [Modify].

3. Make the changes you want to the record.

4. Click [OK] to save the changes, or [Cancel] to revert to the previously saved values.

Delete a Cardholder Record

1. Locate the cardholder record you want to delete.

2. Click [Delete].

3. Click [OK].

Note:

If you delete the cardholder record, all associated records (Badge, Access

Levels, Precision Access, Biometrics, Assets, Directory Accounts, Guard

Tours and Visits) for the cardholder are also removed from the database.

revision 1

— 213


Delete a Selected Group of Cardholder Records

Warning

This is a powerful feature that cannot be undone. Use caution when performing a bulk deletion of cardholders to ensure that you only delete the cardholders you want to eliminate from your database.

1. Locate the cardholder records you want to delete using the search function.

The bulk delete operation will act on all cardholders that result from the current search.

2. Select Bulk > Delete Cardholders in Search from the Cardholder menu.

The following message is displayed:

3. Click [Yes].

Destroy all Cardholder Data

Warning

This feature will wipe out all cardholder and badge information from the database without any transaction logging and cannot be undone. This function is mainly intended for wiping out data after a system has been installed and tested. For example, when you are first setting up the system and have imported cardholder data but you wish to change and redo the import. This function provides a quick way to wipe out all existing cardholder data.

1. Select Bulk > Destroy ALL Cardholder Data from the Cardholder menu.

The following message is displayed:

2. Click [Yes] to confirm the deletion of all cardholder data.

Visitor Form

To provide integration with Visitor Management, visitor records can be searched and viewed in the Cardholders folder. When the current record is a visitor, the first tab in the window changes from Cardholder to Visitor and will display the appropriate fields.

If you select the [Add] button on the Cardholder form, or the [Search] button on any of the forms in the Cardholders folder, the Person type drop-down list is displayed in the bottom section of the form.

214 —

revision 1


Notes:

The drop-down list choices are:

• All - when selected, your search will locate both Cardholder and Visitor records

• Cardholders - when selected, your search will only locate cardholder records

• Visitors - when selected, your search will only locate visitor records

With the exception of the Allowed visitors check box and the [Capture] button (in modify mode only) on the Visits form, visit records cannot be added, modified, or deleted from the Cardholders folder. To add, modify, or delete visits, you must purchase Visitor Management.

The availability of this form is subject to licensing restrictions.

Cardholders Folder - Visitor Form

Form Element

Visitor data

Last changed

Comment

Displayed in view mode. When adding or modifying a visitor record, enter the visitor’s information such as name, address and organization into these fields.

Displayed in view mode and indicates the date on which the selected visitor record was last modified and saved.

This date is updated only when visitor information is changed, not when badge information is changed. The last changed date is saved individually for each badge record as well.

revision 1

— 215


Visitor Form Procedures

Import Visitor Data

For more information, refer to Import Cardholder/Visitor Data on page 207.


2. The Cardholders folder opens. Click [Add].

3. Click [Import].

4. In the Select Import Source dialog, select the import source available for this workstation. Click [OK].

Note:

Import sources are configured in System Administration under the

Workstations folder > Encoders/Scanners form.

5. Follow the instructions that display. They should explain how to scan and execute the import data transaction.

Add a Visitor Record

1. Select the Badge Info from the View menu. The Cardholders folder opens.

By default, the Cardholder form is displayed.

2. Click [Add].

3. From the Person type drop-down list, select Visitors.

4. Enter the visitor's name and any additional information in the visitor data fields.

216 —

revision 1


Note:

You can switch to other tabs and modify the other forms at this time.

5. If you want to add a photograph or signature to the visitor record, click

[Capture]. Multimedia Capture opens. For more information refer to the

Multimedia Capture appendix in the System Administration User Guide.

6. Click [OK] to save the record.

Modify a Visitor Record

1. Locate the visitor record you want to change.

2. Click [Modify].


4. Click [OK] button to save the changes, or the [Cancel] button to revert to the previously saved values.

Delete a Visitor Record

1. Locate the visitor record you want to delete.

2. Click [Delete].

3. Click [OK].

Note:

If you delete the visitor record, all associated records (Badge, Access Levels,

Precision Access, Biometrics, Assets, Directory Accounts, Guard Tours and

Visits) for the visitor are also removed from the database.

revision 1

— 217


Segments Form

Note:

The Segments tab is only displayed if segmentation is enabled on your system.

Segments Form Overview

The Segments form is used to:

• Modify a cardholder’s segment assignment.

• Change a group of cardholder’s segments.

Cardholders Folder - Segments Form

Form Element

Primary segment

Additional

Segments listing window

Number of selections

Comment

In modify mode, select which primary segment you want the selected cardholder to be assigned to.

A cardholder can be assigned to a primary segment and as well as additional segments.

Lists all of the segments that have been configured in the system. For more information refer to the Segments Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

Displays the number of segments that have been selected in the Additional Segments listing window. For example: 2 selections.

218 —

revision 1


Segments Form Procedures

Modify a Cardholder’s Segment Assignment


2. Select the Segments tab.

3. Locate the cardholder record that you want to modify.

4. Click [Modify].

5. From the Primary segment drop-down list, select which primary segment you want the selected cardholder to be assigned to.

6. If you want to assign additional segments (if any exist), click on an entry in the Additional Segments listing window to select it. You can select multiple entries.

7. Click [OK].

Change a Group of Cardholder's Segments

1. Locate the group of cardholder records you want to change.

2. Select Bulk > Change Cardholder Segments from the Cardholder menu.

The Bulk Segment Change window opens.

3. Select the Make changes to segment assignments radio button or select the

Set the exact assignments radio button if you want all assignments that

revision 1

— 219


exist for the cardholders in your group to be replaced with the new assignments you select.

4. Click [Next].

5. Select which primary segment you want the selected groups of cardholders to be assigned to.

6. If you selected the Set the exact assignments radio button in step

3

, and if you want to assign additional segments (if any exist), click on an entry in the

Segments listing window to select it. You can select multiple entries.

7. Click [Next]. If you selected “All Segments” in step 5 , proceed to step 10 .

If you selected the Make changes to segment assignments radio button in step

3

: a. From the Segments listing window, select any assignments you want to add in addition to the primary segment.

b. Click [Next].

c. If there are segment assignments you want to remove from the group, click on an entry in the Segments listing window to select it. You can select multiple entries.

d. Click [Clear] to remove the assignment.

e. Click [Next].

8. If you want to perform preliminary validation and be prompted with the results before proceeding, select the Perform preliminary validation and

prompt for confirmation radio button. Select the Prompt only if a

problem is found check box if you do not want to a prompt for confirmation if there is no validation problem.

If you do not want to be prompted, select the Skip preliminary validation

and perform the operation without prompting radio button.

9. Click [Next].

10. Click [Finish].

• If you selected the Skip preliminary validation and perform the

operation without prompting radio button in step 8 or if you selected

“All Segments” in step

5

, the Bulk Action Results window opens and displays a summary of your modifications. Click [OK].

• If you selected the Perform preliminary validation and prompt for

confirmation radio button in step 8 and a problem was found, the Bulk

Segment Validation Results window opens.

a. Click [View Badges]. An explanation of the problem is displayed.

b. Click [OK].

c. Click [Continue]. The Bulk Action Results window opens and displays a summary of your modifications. d. Click [OK].

220 —

revision 1

Badge Form

Badge Form (View Mode)


Badge Form (Modify Mode)

revision 1

— 221


Cardholders Folder - Badge Form

Form Element

Badge listing window

Comment

Displayed in view mode. Lists all badges for the selected cardholder. If you right-click on a badge in this listing window, the following options are available:

Badge ID

Issue code

• One Free Pass - If selected, allows the selected badge to violate anti-passback rules one time. This is the same as selecting One Free Pass from the Cardholder menu.

• APB Move Badge - If selected, displays the Area Move Badges window from where you can move a badge to a new area. This is the same as selecting APB Move Badge from the

Cardholder menu.

• Encode - If selected, displays the Encode Badge window from where you can encode the badge configurations selected for this badge onto a smart card. This is the same as clicking [Encode].

• Encoding History - Displays historical encoding information for the selected badge including card format, type, encoding count, and last time encoded.

• Import Badge - Displays the Import Card window, in which you may select a reader to import cards from.

Note:

If this option is selected for a VeriSoft logical access badge, the badge type associated with the badge must have VeriSoft logical access enabled in order for the badge to be imported.

• Import Badge ID - Displays the Encoder selection list window, in which you may select an encoder to read a badge ID from. In order for this option to be available for selection and function correctly:

An encoder with the Device type “Digion24 (MIFARE)” must be configured in

Administration > Workstations > Encoders/Scanners tab.

The selected badge must be associated with a badge type that has “Import from card” selected in the Generate badge ID field in Administration > Badge Types > Badge ID

Allocation tab > ID Allocation sub-tab.

The system should have Maximum badge number length set to “10” in

Administration > System Options > Hardware Settings tab.

Displayed in add or modify mode. Indicates the numeric identifier that is assigned to this badge.

The maximum Badge ID length is determined in System Administration or ID

CredentialCenter in the System Options folder > Hardware Settings form (non-segmented systems) or the Segments folder > Segments form > Hardware Settings sub-tab (segmented systems).

Displayed in add or modify mode. Indicates the selected badge's issue code if your installation uses issue codes on its badges.

Issue codes are required for guest badges.

222 —

revision 1


Cardholders Folder - Badge Form (Continued)

Form Element

Activate

Comment

Displayed in add or modify mode. Indicates the date when the selected badge becomes valid.

The current date (at the time the badge record is created) is entered by default, but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field, or by selecting a date from the dropdown calendar.

Deactivate

• To select a month, click on the and navigation buttons.

• You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a dropdown list of months. Highlight the month you want to select it.

• Navigate to a year by clicking on the displayed year to access the year spin buttons .

• Once you have selected a month and a year, click on the day that you want the selected badge to activate on.

Displayed in add or modify mode. Indicates the date when the selected badge becomes invalid.

A default date is assigned based on the Badge type, but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field, or by selecting a date from the drop-down calendar.

Status


• You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a dropdown list of months. Highlight the month you want to select it.


• Once you have selected a month and a year, click on the day that you want the selected badge to deactivate on.

Displayed in add or modify mode. Indicates the badge status for the selected badge.

Status drop-down list choices are defined on the Simple Lists form of the List Builder folder.

revision 1

— 223



Form Element

PIN

Comment

Displayed in add or modify mode. Indicates the personal identification number for the selected badge. PIN numbers are used in conjunction with card readers that are operating in “Card and

Pin,” or “Pin or Card,” mode.

Use limit

The maximum PIN length is determined by the PIN type field in the Access Panels folder.

For increased security, PIN codes are not viewable by any user. However, if the system is configured to randomly generate a new PIN code when adding a badge, the user can see the

PIN code when they first add the badge (but not later).

A user can see the PIN code for guest type badges.

Displayed in add or modify mode. Imposes a restriction on the number of times a cardholder can use his/her badge at readers marked with the “Enforce Use Limit” option. A use limit value of zero (0) indicates that a badge has no uses at readers that enforce a use limit. A use limit value of 255 or that is left empty indicates that the badge has unlimited uses.

Note:

Users who have upgraded to this current build should note that the Use Limit feature has changed. Having a use limit of “0” no longer means unlimited. It now means none. A use limit of “255” now means unlimited. Also, performing a download of your system will no longer reset the uses count.

APB exempt

Destination exempt

Use extended strike/held times

Note:

When the use limit for a badge is modified the uses left are updated to reflect the new use limit assigned. For example, if you have 10 total uses and have already used

5 (so 5 are left), and you increase the Use limit to 15, the panel will be updated so the uses left will be 10. Conversely if you have a badge with 10 total uses and have already used 5 (so 5 are left), and you decrease the Use Limit count to 8, the panel will be updated so the uses left will be 3.

Note:

Making changes to the use limit feature while your system is offline with the host may cause the badges to become out of synch with the panel.

Displayed in add or modify mode. When this check box is selected, any anti-passback violation for the selected badge will granted access into the anti-passback area with no violation noted in the Alarm Monitoring application.

Displayed in add or modify mode. Select this check box if you want the selected badge record to be exempt from destination assurance processing.

When selected, the badge will not be included in the destination assurance processing and no alarms will be generated if the cardholder violates any of the destination assurance settings.

Via the Reports folder, you can run a Destination Assurance Exempt Cardholders report to see a list of which cardholders will be exempt from processing.

For more information, refer to the Destination Assurance Folder chapter in the System


Displayed in add or modify mode. When this check box is selected, extended held open and extended strike times will be used for the selected badge.

Note:

This option is supported by Stanley hardware only.

224 —

revision 1



Form Element

Embossed

Default floor

Allow Access To

Comment

Displayed in add or modify mode. If applicable, enter in this field any numbers or characters that are embossed on the card. Typically this applies to Proximity cards, which are embossed by the manufacturer prior to delivery.

Indicates the floor that is called by default when a badge accesses the reader associated with the Destination Entry Computer (DEC).

Displayed only when a valid guest class badge type is selected. Valid guest class badge types are those badge types which were configured during their creation to provide guest parameters.

Last changed

Last printed

Choices in the drop-down list include readers/locks that are associated with the selected badge type. Select an option from the list if you want to assign the selected cardholder to a specific guest reader/lock.

The Badge ID and Issue Code fields are automatically updated when a cardholder is assigned to a guest reader/lock. The values for these fields are obtained from the next available badge

ID from the badge numbers reserved for the selected reader, and the next valid issue code for that badge number. The values are updated after you select an item for the drop-down list and then move on to another field on the form.

Passage Mode

Note:

This field is subject to licensing restrictions.

Select this checkbox if you want the selected cardholder to have passage mode privileges. The passage mode privilege lets a cardholder use their card twice (within the lock's unlock duration) to place the lock in an unlock mode for an indefinite duration. The door remains unlocked until a card with the passage mode feature is used to relock the door or until a timezone with the “locked” mode becomes effective.

Note:


Deadbolt Override If this checkbox is selected, the selected cardholder will have deadbolt override privileges. The deadbolt override privilege lets the cardholder access a door with a deadbolt function mortise lock even when the deadbolt is thrown.

Note:


Displayed in add or modify mode. Indicates the date when the selected badge record was last saved.

Displayed in add or modify mode. Indicates the most recent date that the selected badge was printed.

revision 1

— 225


Badge Form Procedures

Add or Replace a Badge Record


2. Locate the existing cardholder/visitor record.

3. On the Badge tab, click [Add].

4. Select the badge type.

5. Enter the badge activation and deactivation dates.

6. Depending on how badge ID allocation is configured, you may need to manually enter a badge ID.

7. If the badge will be used for access control and access requires a card and/or personal identification number (PIN), ask the cardholder/visitor to enter a

PIN.

Note:

The length of PIN codes is configured in System Administration under the

Access Panels folder > Options sub-tab and the Cardholder Options folder. If a PIN code is configured to be n-digits long and a cardholder enters a PIN code longer than n, the PIN code gets downloaded with the badge record, but

226 —

revision 1


gets truncated at n digits. For example, if a cardholder enters “123456” and the PIN type is 4-digits, then “1234” gets downloaded.

8. Enter any additional information and click [OK].

9. If this is the only active badge assigned to the cardholder/visitor, you are finished. Otherwise, continue with the next step.

10. If the cardholder/visitor record already has an active badge, the Change

Badge Status dialog opens, prompting you to change the status of the “old” badge. To do this: a. Verify the current active (old) badge is selected.

b. Select the new status from the New Status drop-down list. Choices include the default badge status values, and any badge status values that were added in the List Builder folder.

c. Click [OK].

d. The Access Level and Pin Assignment dialog opens, prompting you to assign an access level and PIN to the recently added (new) badge.

Note:

Select the No access levels for this badge radio button to manually assign access levels or to not assign access levels at all. e. Click [OK].

Modify a Badge Record

1. Locate the badge record you want to change.

2. Click [Modify].


revision 1

— 227


Note:

If the PIN type is modified on the Access Panel and/or the General

Cardholder Options form, you must log off/log on before you modify a cardholder’s pin number.

4. Click [OK] to save the changes, or the [Cancel] button to revert to the previously saved values.

Modify Badges for a Selected Group of Cardholders

1. Locate the group of cardholders whose records you want to modify.

2. Select Bulk > Modify Badges from the Cardholder menu. The Bulk

Modify Badges window opens.

Note:

3. If you want to update the activation date, deactivation date, badge status, or use limit, do so in the Fields to Update section.

The Update use limit field refers to the number of times a cardholder can use a badge at readers marked with the “enforce use limit” option. If you do update the use limit and leave the field empty it will be set to 255 (unlimited uses). In previous versions of B.A.S.I.S. this would be set to 0, which now means 0 (or no) uses. Also note that a bulk use limit change updates a cardholder’s previous use number. So, if a badge originally was set to 5 uses,

228 —

revision 1


and has already used 3, and then a bulk update changed the use limit to 4, then the badge would only have 1 use left.

4. If you want to filter which badges from the selected group get modified, do so in the Badge Filter section. You can filter by badge status and/or badge type.

5. If you do not want to filter badges, select the Update badges of all statuses and/or Update badges of all types radio buttons.

6. Click [OK]. A message displays asking if you want to continue with the modification.

7. Click [Yes]. The Bulk Action Results window opens and displays a summary of your modifications.

8. Click [OK].

Encoding Prerequisites

Several steps must occur in B.A.S.I.S. to properly encode a magnetic, Wiegand, or smart card. Each step occurs in a different folder in the B.A.S.I.S. application.

1. In the Workstations folder > Encoding form, configure an inline or standalone encoder/scanner.

Note:

You do not need to configure USB encoders/scanners (e.g. MIFARE Pegoda contactless smart card reader) in B.A.S.I.S. applications. Simply install the drivers and attach the hardware to the workstation. This does not apply to the

ScanShell 800/1000.

2. In the Card Formats folder, create a card format that will contain data to be encoded on a badge.

3. In the Badge Types folder > Encoding form, assign an encoding format to a badge type. In other words, assign a card format to be encoded on a badge of a specific type.

4. In the Cardholders folder, add a cardholder or visitor record to the database.

5. In Multimedia Capture, capture the cardholder/visitor’s photo, signature, and/or biometric data.

6. In the Cardholders folder, encode the badge.

revision 1

— 229


Encode a Badge

This procedure assumes the magnetic encoder has been set up and configured in

System Administration on the Administration > Workstations > Encoders/

Scanners form.

1. Display a cardholder/visitor in the Cardholders folder. You can do this by enrolling a cardholder or searching for one or several cardholders.

2. Click [Encode]. If the selected badge record has a “guest” badge type, the

Increment Issue Code window opens. If the selected badge record has a badge type other than “guest,” the Encode Badge window opens.

3. If the Encode Badge window is open, select a format to encode and an

Encoder, then click [Encode]. If the Increment Issue Code window is open, click [Yes].

4. Follow the instructions that display on your monitor.

Delete a Badge Record

1. Locate the badge record you want to delete.

2. Click [Delete].

3. Click [OK].

230 —

revision 1

Access Levels Form

Access Levels Form (View Mode)


Access Levels Form (Modify Mode)

Cardholders Folder - Access Levels Form

Form Element

Show levels for badge ID (issue code)

Show inactive badges

Comment

Displayed in view mode. Lists the badge ID and issue code (in parentheses) for the current active badge. If the Show inactive badges check box is selected, the list includes both the active and the inactive badge(s) assigned to the selected cardholder. Select a badge ID (issue code) from the list and the corresponding access levels for that badge will be displayed in the

Access levels display.

Displayed in view mode. When selected, the Show levels for badge ID (issue code) dropdown list will list both the active and inactive badge(s) assigned to the selected cardholder.

revision 1

— 231


Cardholders Folder - Access Levels Form (Continued)

Form Element

Access levels display

Show unassigned levels

Number of levels assigned

Intrusion

Authority

Activate Dates

Access Groups

Comment

Displayed in a view and modify mode. When the Show unassigned levels check box is selected, lists both access levels that have been and that can be assigned to the selected cardholder/badge record. If the Show unassigned levels check box is not selected, only access levels that have been assigned will be listed. If they exist, also displays the access level’s activation and deactivation dates.

Displayed in view and modify mode. When selected, the Access levels display lists both access levels that have been and that can be assigned to the selected cardholder/badge record.

Displayed in view and modify mode. Displays the number of access levels that have been assigned to the selected cardholder/badge record. For example: 6 levels assigned.

Note:

The authority levels assigned act as access levels. Make note of this as the maximum number of access levels is usually 32.

Displayed in modify mode. When selected, displays the Intrusion Authority Levels form from where you can assign intrusion authority levels. These levels will allow the cardholder the ability to issue commands via the keypad. For more information, refer to the Command

Keypad Templates Folder in the System Administration User Guide.

Displayed in modify mode. When selected, displays the Access Level Activation Dates form from where you can select the dates when the selected access level will become valid and invalid.

Displayed in modify mode. When selected, displays the Select Access Levels in a Group form from where you can choose the access level group that you want to select access levels from.

Access Levels Form Procedures

Assign Access Levels to a Badge


2. Select the Access Levels tab.

3. Locate the cardholder record for which you want to assign access levels.

4. From the Show levels for badge ID (issue code) drop-down list, select the badge you want to assign access levels to.

Note:

If the Show inactive badges check box is selected, the Show levels for

badge ID (issue code) drop-down list will list both the active and inactive badge(s) assigned to the selected cardholder.

5. Click [Modify].

6. Select the Show unassigned levels check box. The Access levels display will list both access levels that have been and that can be assigned to the selected cardholder/badge record.

232 —

revision 1


Note:

To find out more about a particular access level, either double-click on an access level entry, or right-click on an access level entry and select Level

Definition. A popup window opens, listing the reader/time zone combinations that define the access level. For example:

7. Click on an access level in the Access levels display to select it.

Optional: If you want to assign all the access levels that belong to an access group: a. Click [Access Groups]. The Select Access Levels in a Group window opens.

b. The Select Access Levels in a Group window lists all currently defined access groups. You can expand an entry to display the list of access levels that make up a group. Select an access level or an access group. If you select an access group, you select all of the access levels it contains.

c. Click [Select].

d. Click [Yes].

8. Repeat step 7 for each access level you want to assign.

9. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 233


Assign Intrusion Authority to the Cardholder

1. On the Access Levels form, click [Modify].

2. Click [Intrusion Authority]. The Intrusion Authority Levels window opens.

3. Select what access levels you would like to assign Level 1 and/or Level 2 authority.

4. Click [OK]. On the access levels listing window you will see an intrusion authority column that shows you what intrusion authority level(s) that access level now shares.

Important:

The authority levels assigned act as access levels but do not count toward the maximum number of access level assignment allowed per badge. When the

“Advanced Permission Control” intrusion command configuration option is selected, the maximum number of access level assignments allowed per badge is reduced to 30.

234 —

revision 1


Assign Activation and Deactivation Dates to Access

Levels

1. On the Access Levels form, click [Modify].

2. The access levels listing window displays all access levels that are currently configured for use with the selected cardholder’s badge type. From the listing window, select one or more access levels.

3. Click [Activate Dates]. The Access Level Activation Dates window opens.

The selected access levels that have been assigned to the selected cardholder/badge record will be listed in the Assigned Access Levels listing window.

4. Click on an access level entry to select it.

5. In the Activation Date section: a. Type a numeric date into the field, or select a date from the drop-down calendar.


• You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a drop-down list of months. Highlight the month you want to select it.


• Once you have selected a month and a year, click on the day that you want the selected badge to activate on.

b. If your system is configured so that you can specify a specific activation time, enter a time in the field to the right of the date field. This time will be used in conjunction with the selected activation date.

revision 1

— 235


Notes:

To specify the activation time, the Store expiration date field on the

Options sub-tab of the Access Panels form must be set to Date only or Date

and time. The Date and time option applies to Stanley panels only, while the

Date only option applies to Stanley panels but not Offline Lock panels.

The activation time you enter should match the granularity setting on the

Cardholder Options folder, General Cardholder Options form. Otherwise, the time you enter will be rounded down. For example if the granularity is set to 30 minutes, and you enter any time between 4:00 and 4:29 the time will automatically be rounded to 4:00. Any time entered between 4:31 and

4:59 will be rounded to 4:30.

6. In the Deactivation Date section, repeat step

5

, choosing the date when you want the selected badge to become invalid.

7. Click [Set Date/Time].

8. Repeat steps 4 -

7

for each access level entry.

9. Click [OK].

Assign Access Levels to a Selected Group of

Cardholders

1. Locate the group of cardholders that you want to assign access levels.

2. Select Bulk > Assign Access Levels from the Cardholder menu. The Bulk

Access Levels Selections window opens.

236 —

revision 1

3. To modify access levels: a. Select (place a checkmark beside) the access level(s) you want to assign. b. If you want to assign an entire access group, click [Access Groups].

Highlight the access group and click [Select].


Note:

You can expand access groups to display associated access levels. You can also double-click access levels to display associated readers

Note:

c. Select the Delete existing access level assignments check box if you want to delete the existing access level assignments and apply the new access level assignments. If you do not select this check box, the cardholders will retain their existing access levels in addition to their new access level assignments.

4. To modify activation/deactivation dates: a. Click [Activate Dates].The Access Level Activation Dates dialog opens.

Although you can assign multiple access levels to a record, you can only assign activation/deactivation dates to one access level at a time.

b. Select the first access level. c. Set the activation and deactivation dates.

d. If there is more than one access level that you want to assign dates to, click [Set] and continue setting the activation/deactivation dates. e. When you are finished, click [OK]. f. Select the Overwrite activate date settings for existing assignments check box to apply the new dates.

g. Click [OK] and acknowledge any messages that display.

Remove Access Levels From a Selected Group of

Cardholders

1. Locate the group of cardholders that you want to remove access levels from.

2. Select Bulk > Remove Access Levels from the Cardholder menu. The

Bulk Access Levels Selections window opens.

3. Click on the access level you want to remove to select it. You can select multiple entries.

Optional: If you want to remove all the access levels that belong to an access group: a. Click [Access Groups]. The Select Access Levels in a Group window opens.

b. The Select Access Levels in a Group window lists all currently defined access groups. You can expand an entry to display the list of access levels that make up a group. Select an access level or an access group. If you select an access group, you select all of the access levels it contains.

c. Click [Select].

d. Click [Yes].

4. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 237


Note:

All active badges will be affected by this change, even in multiple active badge environments.

Modify Access Levels Assignments

1. Locate the cardholder/badge record whose access level assignments you want to change.

2. Click [Modify].


• Select the access level to assign it to a cardholder/badge record.

• Deselect the access level to limit cardholder/badge access.

• Click [Clear all] to deselect all the access level assignments.


Precision Access Form

Note:

The Precision Access tab is only displayed if either “Inclusion” or

“Exclusion” is selected in the Precision Access Mode field on the General

Cardholder Options form of the Cardholder Options folder in the System

Administration software application.

238 —

revision 1


Cardholders Folder - Precision Access Form

Form Element

Precision Access

Inclusion/

Exclusion Groups

Comment

Lists all currently defined Exclusion or Inclusion groups (your system will have one or the other) and the readers and timezones/elevator control levels that belong to each.

A icon precedes each exclusion group entry.

Assigned Groups

Assign

Remove

An icon precedes each inclusion group entry.

Exclusion or Inclusion groups are defined on the Precision Access form of the Access Levels folder.

Lists the Inclusion/Exclusion Groups assigned to the selected cardholder/badge record.

Assigns to the selected cardholder/badge record the access levels selected in the Precision

Access Inclusion/Exclusion Groups field.

Removes from the current cardholder/badge record the access levels selected in the Precision

Access Inclusion/Exclusion Groups field.

Precision Access Form Procedures

Assign Precision Access Groups to a Badge

1. Select the Badge Info from the View menu.The Cardholders folder opens.

2. Select the Precision Access tab.

3. Locate the cardholder record that you want to assign precision access.

Precision access can only be assigned to the selected cardholder’s/visitor’s active badge.

4. Click [Modify].

5. In the Precision Access [Inclusion or Exclusion] Groups window, select a precision access group.

• The window contains all currently defined precision access groups. You can expand an entry to display the list of readers (if entries are

revision 1

— 239


Exclusion groups) or readers and timezones (if entries are Inclusion groups) that make up the group.

• You can select only one group at a time.

• By selecting a precision access group you select all of the readertimezone combinations it contains. These combinations are defined on the Precision Access form of the Access Levels folder.

6. Click [Assign]. The group(s) you selected will be listed in the Assigned

Groups window.

7. Repeat steps 5 and

6

for each additional group you want to assign to the badge. You can assign multiple Exclusion or Inclusion groups in addition to the 6 access levels that a cardholder can normally have.

8. Click [OK].

Remove Precision Access Groups From a Badge

1. Locate the record of the cardholder whose precision access assignment you want to remove.

2. In the Assigned Groups window, select the precision access group to be removed.

3. Click [Remove].

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3

for each precision access group you want to remove.

5. Click [OK].

Biometrics Form

240 —

revision 1


Cardholders Folder - Biometrics Form

Form Element

Biometric listing window

Comment

In search mode, lists all biometric features and the type associated with each. In view mode, lists the selected cardholder’s biometric information (if any exists).

There are three biometric features, Fingerprint, Hand Geometry and Iris. A biometric fingerprint’s type can be template or image.

Fingerprint image Displayed in view mode. Displays a visual representation of the cardholder’s fingerprint. For more information refer to Multimedia Capture appendix in the System Administration User

Guide.

Search Type Displayed in search mode. This field is used in conjunction with the listing window.

Click on a biometric feature in the listing window and select a choice from the Search Type drop-down list to search for a record that Has or Does Not Have a fingerprint image, a fingerprint template, iris data, or a hand geometry template associated with the cardholder.

Biometrics Form Procedures

Search for a Cardholder’s Biometric Record


2. Select the Biometrics tab.

3. Click [Search].

4. In the Biometric listing window, click on a biometric feature to select it.

5. Choose either “Has” or “Does Not Have” from the Search Type drop-down list to search for a record that has or does not have specific biometric data associated with the cardholder.

6. Click [OK].

B.A.S.I.S. retrieves and displays the first matching record. Use the ,

, , , and buttons to navigate through the database. A dimmed button means that the associated operation is not possible (e.g., moving to the next record while the last record is being displayed).

revision 1

— 241


Visits Form

Visits Form (View Mode)

Visits Form (Modify Mode)

Cardholders Folder - Visits Form

Form Element

Allowed visitors

Comment

When selected in modify mode, the selected cardholder is allowed to be assigned visitors.

When not selected, the cardholder will not be available for visit assignment in the Visitor

Management application.

242 —

revision 1


Cardholders Folder - Visits Form (Continued)

Form Element

Add Visit

Find Visits

Type

Purpose

Comment

In modify mode, click this button to display the Adding Visit window. From here you can add or modify visits, display visit records for a selected date range, and search for visit records based on the scheduled time in, scheduled time out, time in, time out, or date and time last changed.

This button quickly looks up visit records associated with the record whose name is specified in the Last name, First name and Middle name fields.

Displayed in modify mode. Indicates the type of visit.

Displayed in modify mode. Indicates the purpose of the visit.

Visits Form Procedures

Modify a Cardholder’s Permission to Have Visitors

A cardholder must have permission to have visitors visit. This permission can only be granted (or taken away) in System Administration or ID

CredentialCenter, but not in Visitor Management. To change a cardholder’s permission to have visitors:

1. Select the Badge Info from the View menu.

2. Click the Cardholders tab.

3. Locate the record of the cardholder that you want to allow visitors.

Note:

Cardholders who are visitors cannot be assigned visitors.

4. Click the Visits tab.

5. Click [Modify].

6. The Allowed visitors check box setting controls a cardholder’s permission to have visitors. Select the setting you want for the selected cardholder. The two possible settings are:

• When t allowed to have visitors. Only cardholders with the Allow visitors check box will be returned when searching for a cardholder and attempting to add a new visit.

• When t cardholder can be scheduled.

revision 1

— 243


Note:

Changing the Allow visitors check box setting for a cardholder will only change the cardholder’s ability to have visitors after the setting has been changed; any previously scheduled visits will be allowed to occur.

7. Click [OK].

Assets Form

Cardholders Folder - Assets Form

Form Element

Asset group

Asset listing window

Assign

Unassign

Comment

Indicates the asset group to which the cardholder or visitor belongs.

Lists all assets that are currently assigned to the selected cardholder or visitor.

When selected, assigns an asset to a cardholder.

When selected, unassigns an asset.

244 —

revision 1


Assets Form Procedures

Assign an Asset to a Cardholder


2. Select the Assets tab.

3. Locate the cardholder record for which you want to assign the asset.

4. While still on the Assets tab, locate the asset record that you want to assign.

5. Click [Assign].

Note:

Authorized users can manually assign an asset to a cardholder who does not have proper asset group permissions for that asset.

Unassign an Asset

1. In the Asset listing window, click on the name of an asset to select it.

2. Click [Unassign].

Modify the Asset Group

1. Locate the cardholder record for which you want to modify.

2. Click [Modify].

3. Select an Asset Group from the drop-down list.

4. Click [OK].

Note:

A record can only be modified if an asset group was assigned when the cardholder or visitor was added.

revision 1

— 245


Directory Accounts Form

Cardholders Folder - Directory Accounts Form

Form Element

Directory accounts listing window

Link

Comment

Lists the directory accounts that have been linked to the selected cardholder.

Unlink

When selected, displays the Select Account window from where you can link a directory account to the selected cardholder.

When selected, unlinks the selected cardholder from the directory account that is selected in the Directory Accounts listing window.

Directory Accounts Form Procedures

Link a Cardholder to a Directory Account


2. Select the Directory Accounts tab.

3. Locate the cardholder record for which you want to link a directory account.

4. Click [Link]. The Select Account window opens. In the Select Account window: a. In the Directory drop-down list, select the directory you wish to link to.

b. In the Field drop-down list select whether to search for a name or user name.

c. In the Condition drop-down list, select how the value will be related to the field. For example, a search where the Field selected is “Name”, the

246 —

revision 1


Note:

Condition selected is “contains” and the Value specified is “Lake” will display all accounts where the name contains the word “Lake”, such as

Lisa Lake.

d. In the Value field, type or select a word you think may be in the user name or name. If you leave this field empty, all accounts for the selected directory will be displayed when the search is executed.

To help you search, the Value field will contain different ways that the selected account may be expressed. For example, if the user account Lisa

Lake is selected, the permutations listed might be “L. Lake”, “LISA”,

“Lisa”, “Lisa L.”, “Lisa Lake”, “LL”, “Lake” and “Lake, Lisa.” e. Click [Search].

f. The accounts associated with the selected Directory will be displayed in the Accounts listing window.

• If the account you wish to link to is displayed, select it. Your window should look similar to the following:

• If the account you wish to link to is not displayed, return to step

d

and select another Value to search for.

g. Click [OK].

h. Repeat steps

3 and 4

for each directory account you wish to link to the selected user account.

5. Click the [OK] button on the Directory Accounts form.

Unlink a Directory Account

1. Locate the record of the cardholder you want to unlink a directory account from.

2. Click on an entry in the Directory accounts listing window to select it.

3. Click [Unlink].

4. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 247


Logical Access Form (ActivIdentity Sub-tab)

Before a badge can be issued to a user, the cardholder record for the user must have a logical user account linked to it on this form.

Displayed by: Administration > Cardholders > Logical Access form >

ActivIdentity sub-tab.

Cardholders Folder - Logical Access Form (ActivIdentity Sub-tab)

Form Element

Issuing CMS

User ID

Cards listing window

Update list from server

Comment

The CMS that the user exists in. It will be the CMS that is connected to when issuing a badge to the cardholder.

The cardholder’s logical user account name.

Lists all cards/badges that have been encoded or bound to the cardholder. If the check box

Update list from server is selected, then the list will also display badges which were issued to users outside of B.A.S.I.S. Badges issued to users outside of B.A.S.I.S. cannot be linked to a physical badge and thus do not support life cycle management. Additional operations on the badge (such as resuming, suspending, terminating, or unlinking) can be performed by rightclicking on an entry in the list.

• Resume

• Suspend

• Terminate

• Unlink

Allows badges that have been issued to the user outside of B.A.S.I.S. to be displayed in the

Cards listing window.

248 —

revision 1


Logical Access Form - VeriSoft Sub-tab

In order to associate any cardholder or badge operations with a logical user account or logical token, VeriSoft logical user accounts must be linked to

B.A.S.I.S. cardholders. VeriSoft user accounts are linked to cardholders by simply specifying the logical user account’s directory and user ID on this form.

Displayed by: Administration > Cardholders > Logical Access form > VeriSoft sub-tab.

Cardholder Folder - Logical Access Form (VeriSoft Sub-tab)

Form Element

Directory

User ID

Comment

This defines the directory that the VeriSoft user account that is being linked to the cardholder resides in.

The user ID of the VeriSoft user account to link to the cardholder. Click [...] to open the Select

Account window. This allows the user account to be searched for by different fields (first name, last name, user ID, e-mail, etc.) and selected from a list.

Show Unregistered

Tokens

Show Tokens

From Server

A VeriSoft user account can be unlinked by simply removing the User ID.

If selected, this option will show unregistered tokens in addition to registered tokens. If deselected, only registered and linked tokens are shown in this list. Registered and unlinked tokens will also be displayed if the Show Tokens From Server check box is selected.

If selected, tokens that are registered with VeriSoft, but not linked to an access control badge are displayed. If not selected, only registered and linked tokens are shown in the list.

Unregistered tokens will also be displayed if the Show Unregistered Tokens check box is selected.

revision 1

— 249


Cardholder Folder - Logical Access Form (VeriSoft Sub-tab)

Form Element

VeriSoft Tokens listing window

Comment

Lists all registered and unregistered tokens (cards). If you right-click on an entry in this listing window, the following options are available:

Register with

VeriSoft

• Enable (Logical Token Only)

• Disable (Logical Token Only)

• Delete (Logical Token Only)

• Unlink from Badge - Unlinks the selected VeriSoft logical token from a B.A.S.I.S. badge.

• Link to Badge - Links the selected VeriSoft logical token with a B.A.S.I.S. badge. A registered and linked token is a logical token whose state is dependent on any B.A.S.I.S. badges.

• Remove from Database - For a selected unregistered badge, the selected badge information will be removed from the database.

When clicked, the system performs registration of fingerprints and badges for the active cardholder. Fingerprints are only sent if they have been captured and the cardholder options are configured to register fingerprints for fingerprint only authentication (not on card). If the

VeriSoft user account already has fingerprints registered, the fingerprints are still re-registered.

Registered tokens are not re-registered. Unregistered tokens, if any exist, are always registered with VeriSoft. Unregistered tokens are displayed as inactive (indicated by the red badge icon) and display “<Not Registered>” for the authentication method, status, and type. Tokens are registered with VeriSoft with the registration method specified by the badge’s badge type settings.

250 —

revision 1

Guard Tours Form


Cardholders Folder - Guard Tours Form

Form Element

Can perform guard tours

Security Clearance

Levels listing window

Number of levels assigned

Comment

Select this check box to if you want the selected cardholder to perform guard tours.

Lists all security clearance levels that have been configured in the system. Security clearance levels are a means of limiting the number of tour guards to choose from when a tour is launched. Particular security clearance levels will be assigned only to guards who will need access to areas where a tour will take them. When a tour is launched, only guards with the appropriate security clearance level for that tour will be listed.

Guard tours and security clearance levels are configured in the Guard Tour folder. For more information refer to the Guard Tour Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

Note:

This field is enabled only if the Can perform guard tours check box is selected.

Displays the number of security clearance levels that have been assigned to the selected cardholder. For example: 6 levels assigned.

revision 1

— 251


Guard Tours Form Procedures

Assign Guard Tour Security Clearance Levels to a

Cardholder


2. Select the Guard Tours tab.

3. Locate the cardholder record for which you want to assign security clearance levels.

4. Click [Modify].

5. Select the Can perform guard tours check box.

6. In the Security Clearance Levels listing window, click on an entry to select it.

7. Click [OK].

Note:

You can assign multiple security clearance levels to a cardholder.

Reports Form

Cardholders Folder - Reports Form

Form Element

Limit report to current search

Comment

When selected, only cardholders in the current search will be included in the report.

252 —

revision 1


Cardholders Folder - Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

Report listing window

Description

Comment

Lists currently defined cardholder-related reports.

A brief description of the report contents.

Reports Form Procedures

Run a Cardholder Report


2. Select the Reports tab.

3. Locate the cardholder record(s) for which you want to run a report. (If you want to run a report on all cardholder records, skip this step.)

4. In the Reports listing window, click on the name of the report you want to run.

5. Select the Limit report to current search check box if you want only cardholders in the current search to be included in the report. If you do not select this check box, all cardholder who meet the criteria specified in the

Description field will be included in the report.

6. Click [Print]. The Print Report Options window opens. For more information, refer to Chapter 18: Print Report Options Window on page 361.

Note:

Any report in the Reports List Window on the Event Reports form in the

Reports folder that has “Cardholder” listed in the Type(s) column is available on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder. This means that a report can be generated on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder based on a cardholder search operation.

revision 1

— 253


Offline Form

Offline Form Overview

B.A.S.I.S. V and B.A.S.I.S. G Locks are offline locks with an integrated reader.

B.A.S.I.S. G Locks provide guest management features. Guest management features allow cards to be encoded for use by students each semester in dormitory doors without having to reprogram the readers/locks as students change.

Although B.A.S.I.S. V and B.A.S.I.S. G Locks are offline (stand-alone) locks and are not managed by access control panels, access panel settings must be defined for the readers/locks.

The Offline form is used to define offline readers. When offline readers are defined, they are defined as either guest readers or non-guest readers. “Guest” readers are offline readers that are attached to locksets used in the guest environment. Non-guest offline readers are referred to as “Offline” readers. If you have a combination license that includes both offline and guest, you can configure the reader as an offline reader, a guest reader, or as a combination

“Offline Guest” reader.

254 —

revision 1


Offline Form Procedures

Configure an Offline Reader

1. On the Reader form, select the offline reader for which to configure. If the

Multiple Selection checkbox is selected, you can select more than one reader at the same time.

2. Click the [Modify] button.

3. Choose the settings you wish. Please refer to the for specific information on each field.

4. Click the [OK] button to save the changes, or the [Cancel] button to revert to the previously saved values.

Download Reader Information to a PDA

Important:

The Communication Server must be present on a workstation that intends to download. Note that the Communication Server is not automatically installed during a client installation. To install on a client workstation, you must run a separate custom installation. (To run a custom installation, select

Start > Control Panel. Then, select Add or Remove Programs. From the list of programs, select B.A.S.I.S. ET690. For detailed instructions on running a custom installation, please refer to the Installation & Setup User

Guide.)

revision 1

— 255


To download reader configuration information to a Personal Digital Assistant

(PDA):

1. Select System Tree from the View menu.

2. The System Tree displays the available access panels below the item labeled

Hardware. Expand the access panel list items to display the readers that are attached to each of them.

3. Click on one or more readers under the same access panel, or across different access panels. (Click on the reader while pressing the <Ctrl> key to select multiple entries.)

4. Right-click to display the following popup menu:

256 —

revision 1

Notes:

5. Select Download from the popup menu.

To program a B.A.S.I.S. G or B.A.S.I.S. G lock, you need to:

In the System Administration application, define an access control panel and reader configuration for the lock.

Download the reader configuration from the PC to the PDA.

Download the reader configuration from the PDA to the lock. (Refer to the

B.A.S.I.S. Transport User's Guide.)

6. After you have downloaded reader configurations to the PDA, the system tree view does not automatically update. To update the view, right-click on the tree and select Refresh from the pop-up menu.

Reader Level Download System Tree View

When a change is made to B.A.S.I.S. that affects any reader, the affected reader and the access panel to which it is attached will be marked in the system tree view with a red “X.” When a change is made to the system at the access panel level, then all the readers under the access panel are marked with an “X.” The

“X” indicates that data relevant to the reader(s) under this access panel must be downloaded to the lockset(s) to maintain synchronization of data.


Chapter 14: Badge Print Preview Window

The Badge Print Preview window is used to:

• View (on-screen) a badge to be printed from the Cardholders folder.

• Print a badge.

This window is displayed by clicking [Print] in the Cardholders folder and then clicking [Print Preview], or by selecting Print from the Application menu. The

Application menu is only available in System Administration and ID

CredentialCenter.

Badge Print Preview Window

Element

Preview window

Print All

Print Current

Close

Next Page

Previous Page

Comment

Displays the currently selected badge layout with cardholder information.

Prints all the badges selected according to the Badge Printing window.

Prints the badge that is currently displayed in the preview window.

Click on this button to exit from the Badge Print Preview window.

Allows you to view the next badge if multiple badges are being printed or to view the back layout of a two-sided badge.

Allows you to view the previous badge if multiple badges are being printed or to view the front layout of a two-sided badge.

Displays online help for this topic.

Enter a value to zoom in or zoom out on the badge in the preview window.

Help

Zoom

• Entering a number greater than 100% will cause the preview to zoom in on the badge, displaying less area and more detail

• Entering a number less than 100% will cause the preview to zoom out on the badge, display more area and less detail

Badge information Displays badge and cardholder information for the badge currently in the print preview window. Printer information displays also.

Page number Displays the number of the page or badge that is currently in the preview window.

revision 1

— 257

14: Badge Print Preview Window

Badge Printing Form

Badge Printing Form

Form Element

Print active badge(s) for current cardholder only

Select All

Clear All

Print active badges for all cardholders...

Show badge type printer assignments

Send all badges to an alternate printer

Printer

Report all errors immediately

(pause printing)

Comment

Select this to print the active badges currently shown on the Cardholders form.

By default, the active badge currently selected on the Cardholder form is selected to print. If other active badges exist for the cardholder, these will be included and may be selected to print as well.

Click to select all badges of the current cardholder.

Click to de-select all badges of the current cardholder.

Select this option to print all active badges that match the search criteria currently in the

Cardholders form.

Click to show what printer is assigned to the current print selection.

Select to open the Printer dialog box which allows you to select a printer other than the one assigned.

Select what printer should be used.

Select to pause the printing when an error occurs. Selecting this causes errors to be reported immediately.

258 —

revision 1


Badge Printing Form

Form Element

Log errors to error log only (continue printing)

Print

Print Preview

Cancel

Comment

Select this to continue printing when errors occur. Selecting this causes errors to be logged for further review.

Click to print your current selection.

Click to preview what will be printed.

Closes the Badge Printing form.

Badge Print Preview Window Procedures

Preview and Print a Badge

1. Select an active badge from within the Cardholders folder (Cardholders,

Badge, Access Levels, Assets or Precision Access form).

• Before printing, make sure that you are properly configured to print badges. Configurations are done using the Badge Types and Card

Formats folders in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter.

• Make sure the proper printer is chosen. This is configured by selecting

Badge Types from the Administration menu in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter and setting the printer assignments on the

Printing/Encoding folder.


• Select Print from the Application menu.

• Click [Print] on any form within the Cardholders folder (Cardholders,

Badge, Access Levels, Assets or Precision Access form).

3. The Badge Printing window displays.

• The Print selection section determines which badges are printed or previewed out of the cardholders listed in the current search results.

– To print/preview specific badges for the current cardholder select

Print active badge(s) for current cardholder only. The badge selected within the Cardholder form is selected by default. If multiple active badges are included in the list, select any of these to print or preview as well. Only the active badges for the current cardholder display in the Print selection section.

– To print all the active badges for the current cardholder select

Print active badges for all cardholders matching current search

criteria. If you click [Show badge type printer assignments] the following information displays within the Badge Printing window:

Badge Type, Primary Segment and Assigned Printer.

Notes:

Badges will not print if at least one badge does not have a printer assigned to it or at least one badge has been assigned to a printer that B.A.S.I.S. no

revision 1

— 259


longer recognizes. You must establish a network connection to a remote printer (via control panel) in order B.A.S.I.S. to recognize that printer.

To be printable, a badge must be active, have a print count of zero if you do not have permission to print duplicates or a print count less than the maximum number of prints for its badge type if you have permission to print duplicates. Also, a badge must have a front and/or back layout assigned to its badge type.

• The Alternate printer section allows you to override badge type printer assignments and send all badges to an alternate printer. This section is only active when an alternate printer is configured and the user has permission to choose an alternate printer.

• The Error Reporting section allows you to configure how printing errors are handled. All badge printing is logged to the transaction log

(print previews are not logged).

– Click the Report all errors immediately (pause printing) radio button if you want to be prompted to either abort printing or skip to the next badge (or badge type) when an error occurs.

– Click the Log errors to error log only (continue printing) radio button if you want errors logged and badge printing to continue on to the next badge (or if the error is associated with the badge type, the printing will move onto the next badge type).

4. It is recommended that you preview your badges first before printing them.

If there is no need to preview the badge(s), you may print at this time by

260 —

revision 1


clicking [Print]. Skip to step 9 . If you wish to exit the window without

printing, click [Cancel]. Otherwise continue on to the next step.

5. Click [Print Preview] to display the Badge Print Preview window.

Note:

The current badge displays along with cardholder data and printer information.

6. Use the [Next Page] and [Previous Page] buttons to view the next badge or other side of a two-sided badge.

7. You can zoom in or out on the badge by changing the percentage value in the

Zoom box. A larger number displays the badge close-up, in more detail. A smaller number will display more of the badge, in less detail.

8. To print the badge(s), do one of the following:

• Click [Print Current]. Doing so will print the badge that is currently in the preview window.

• Click [Print All] to print all of the badges that have been selected.

• To exit from the window without printing, click [Close].

If a user attempts to print a badge that has already been printed the maximum number of times then an error displays and the badge does not print. As with other printing errors the user can continue on to the next badge if a batch print is being performed.

9. If you decided to print badges a status window displays to indicate the status of the print operation.

A single print job entry represents all the badges selected in the Print

selection section.

revision 1

— 261


262 —

revision 1


Chapter 15: Visits Folder

Toolbar Shortcut

The Visits folder contains the Status search form, the Visit form, the Details form, the E-mail form and the Reports form with which you can:

• Display visit records for a selected date range

• Search for visit records based on the scheduled time in, scheduled time out, time in, time out or date and time it was last changed

• Display visit records that are scheduled in the future, scheduled and are late, active, active and overstayed and finished

• Filter and display visit records for a selected cardholder, visitor or both

• Display the cardholder or visitor record associated with a visit

• Refresh the Visits listing window

• Send e-mail notifications regarding visits

• Add or modify visits

• Delete a visit or multiple visits

• Print a disposable badge or multiple disposable badges

• Sign out and sign in a visit or multiple visits

• Generate a report for either a defined search criteria or for all visits

This folder is displayed by selecting Visits from the View menu.

The forms in the Visits folder are divided into two sections: the form elements that are common to every form in the Visits folder (shown in the screen shot that follows) and the form elements that are unique to each form. For descriptions of

the common form elements refer to the Visits Folder Field Table table on page

265. For descriptions of the unique form elements refer to the

Status Search Form

Field Table table on page 285, the Visit Form Field Table table on page 282, the

Details Form Field Table table on page 287, and the E-mail Form Field Table table on page 288, and the Reports Form Field Table table on page 291.

revision 1

— 263

15: Visits Folder

Notes:

This documentation refers to visit data fields that are shipped as the default by Stanley. If you have used the FormsDesigner application to customize your visit data, the elements on your Visits folder forms will be different.

Forms and fields that pertain to segmentation are only available if segmentation is enabled on your system.

Visit Right-Click Menu

If you right-click on a visit in the listing window, a menu will be displayed. The menu contains the following options:

Right-click menu option

Select All

Clear All

Add

Modify

Delete

Sign In

Sign Out

Description

Enabled only when the Multiple Selection check box is selected. If selected, all visits in the listing window will be selected.

If selected, all visits selected in the listing window will be deselected.

Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the [Add] button - it allows you to add another visit based on the currently selected visit.

Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the [Modify] button - it allows you to change the visit that is currently selected.

Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the [Delete] button - it allows you to delete the visit that is currently selected. The visit will be deleted without prompting for confirmation.

This option is only available for a visit that is not active/not signed in. If the Multiple Selection check box is selected, multiple visits can be selected and signed in at once. Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the [Sign In] button. If selected, the Sign In Visit(s) window is displayed. In this window, select whether to print disposable badges for the visitor that is being signed in.

This option is only available for a visit that is active/signed in. If the Multiple Selection check box is selected, multiple visits can be selected and signed out at once. Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the [Sign Out] button. To use this feature, you must first configure a badge status to use when doing an automatic sign out. This is done on the General Cardholder

Options form of the Cardholder Options folder. For more information refer to Configure Systemwide Visit Options in the Cardholder Options Folder chapter in the System Administration User

Guide.

When selected, the actual Time out for the visit is updated to the current date/time.

If the visitor has an active badge, the deactivate date is updated and the badge status is set to the status setup that was selected on the General Cardholder Options form.

Find Cardholder Opens the Cardholders folder and displays the cardholder record that is associated with the currently selected visit.

Find Visitor Opens the Cardholders folder and displays the visitor record that is associated with the currently selected visit.

Refresh Click this button to refresh the visits listed in the Visits listing window. When someone else makes changes in the database, you may need to click this button to see the changes. (Cardholder information is not automatically updated, but visit information is.)

264 —

revision 1


Visits Folder Field Table

Visits Folder


Common form elements

Visits listing window

Host name

Displays the status, host, visitor, scheduled time in, scheduled time out, time in, time out, visit type and visit purpose for visit records.

Specifies the host for whom you want to display scheduled visits.

Visitor name

Status

Specifies the visitor for whom you want to display scheduled visits.

Displays the status of the visit. Choices include:

Search

Add

Modify

Delete

Print

Sign In

Sign Out

• Scheduled - A visit that has a scheduled time in and scheduled time out that are both in the future

• Late - A visit where the current date and time is after the scheduled time in

• Overstayed - A visit where the current date and time is after the scheduled time out

• Active - A visit that has been signed in and the scheduled time out has not yet been reached

• Finished - A visit occurred in the past and has been signed out

Allows you to search based on any field on any form in the Visits folder. The search results will be displayed in the Visits listing window.

Allows you to add a visit record.

Allows you to modify a selected visit record. Multiple selection cannot be used when modifying visit records. If the Multiple Selection check box is selected and multiple visit records are selected, the [Modify] button will be grayed out.

Allows you to delete a selected visit record. If the Multiple Selection check box is selected, multiple visit records can be deleted at once. The visit(s) will be deleted without prompting for confirmation.

Allows you to print a disposable badge. Disposable badge types are configured in the Badge

Types folder. For a badge type to be used to print disposable badges, it must have “Visitor” selected for the Class and the Disposable check box must be selected (on the Badge Type subtab). If segmentation is enabled, the correct segment must be selected on the Segment

Membership sub-tab.

If selected, the Sign In Visit(s) window is displayed. In this window, select whether to print disposable badges for the visitor(s) that are being signed in. If the Multiple Selection check box is selected, multiple visit records can be signed in at once.

To use this feature, you must first configure a badge status to use when doing an automatic sign out. This is done on the General Cardholder Options form of the Cardholder Options folder. For more information, refer to the Cardholder Options Folder chapter in the System


When selected, the actual Time Out for the visit is updated to the current date/time.

If the visitor has an active badge, the deactivate date is updated and the badge status is set to the status setup that was selected on the General Cardholder Options form.

revision 1

— 265


Visits Folder (Continued)


Multiple Selection If selected, more than one entry in the listing window can be selected simultaneously. The changes made on this form will apply to all selected visits. This feature is primarily used for printing badges, signing in visits and signing out visits.

Sign In Visit(s) Window

This window is displays when:

• A visit is added in the Visits folder and the Sign In Now check box is selected on the Visit form.

• A visit record is selected in the Visit listing window in the Visits folder and the [Sign In] button is clicked.

• Automatic sign in is enabled. For more information about this feature, refer to the Automatic Sign In section of the Visitor Management User Guide.

Visits Folder - Sign In Visit(s) Window Field Table

Form Element

Print disposable badge(s) of this type

Comment

• For this field to be enabled, the Allow disposable badge printing check box on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter must be selected.

• Displays a list of disposable badge types that can be selected for the visit.

• Only those badge types that are disposable are listed.

• If you do not want to print a disposable badge for the visitor, deselect this check box.

266 —

revision 1


Visits Folder - Sign In Visit(s) Window Field Table (Continued)

Form Element

Send all badges to this printer

(overriding badge type printer assignment)

Assign this access control badge ID

Sign In

Cancel

Comment

• Select this check box to select an alternate printer

• For this field to be enabled, the Choose alternate printer check box on the Users Folder,

Cardholder Permission Groups Form, Badge sub-tab must be selected.

CredentialCenter users guide.

For more information refer to the Users Folder chapter in the System Administration or ID

• Selecting this check box overrides the printer assignments in the Printing/Encoding form of the Badge Types folder.

• For this field to be enabled, the Allow access control badge assignment check box on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder in System Administration or ID

CredentialCenter must be selected.

• The badge must already exist in the system

• The existing badge’s class must be “Visitor”

• If the visitor already has an active access control badge (from a manual assignment or another visit), this field will automatically be populated with that ID.

• If you do not want to assign an access control badge ID for the visitor, deselect this check box.

Signs in the visit using the options selected on the form.

Closes the Sign In Visit(s) window without signing in the visit.

revision 1

— 267


Print Badge(s) Window

This window displays when the [Print] button is clicked on any form in the Visits folder.

Visits Folder - Print Badge(s) Window Field Table

Form Element

Print disposable badge(s) of this type

Send all badges to this printer

(overriding badge type printer assignment)

OK

Cancel

Comment

• For this field to be enabled, the Allow disposable badge printing check box on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter must be selected.

• Displays a list of disposable badge types that can be selected for the visit. You must select a badge type and only one badge type can be selected.

• Only those badge types that are disposable are listed.

• Select this check box to select an alternate printer. Chose the printer from the drop-down list.

• For these fields to be enabled, the Choose alternate printer check box on the Users

Folder, Cardholder Permission Groups Form, Badge sub-tab must be selected.

CredentialCenter users guide.

For more information refer to the Users Folder chapter in the System Administration or ID

• Selecting this check box overrides the printer assignments in the Printing/Encoding form of the Badge Types folder.

Prints the disposable badge

Closes the Print Badge(s) window without printing the visit.

Visits Folder Procedures

The following procedures pertain to every form in the Visits folder unless otherwise noted.

268 —

revision 1


Visit Search Capabilities

In search mode, you can search on any combination of fields in the Visits folder, including the Status search, Visit and Details forms. On the E-mail and Reports forms, you can only search for the host name or visitor name.

Comparison operator

>=

<=

%

>

<

=

!= or <>

Comparison Operators

Comparison operators

are symbols that represent specific actions. You can refine your search by prefixing search fields with a comparison operator. Refer to the following table to identify the comparison operators you can use with different fields.

Description

Equal to

Not equal to

Greater than

Less than

Greater than or equal to

Less than or equal to

Contains

Text field Numeric field Drop-down list

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

NA

Yes

Yes

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

Notes:

“Equal to” is the default comparison operator for numeric and drop-down list fields.

If you type an equal to sign “=” in a field and nothing else, B.A.S.I.S. will search for records that have an empty value for that field. For example, typing an “=” in the Department field will find every record that does not have an assigned department.

Note:

Search Fields Using “Begins With”

For text and drop-down list fields you can search records whose values begin with specific characters by entering those characters in the field. For example, when searching by last name, a filter of “L” will find “Lake”, “Lewis”, etc. A filter of “Lake” will find “Lake”, “Lakeland”, etc.

The default comparison operator for text fields is “begins with”.

Search Multiple Fields

When you search multiple fields, the search criteria for each field is combined.

For example, typing “A” in Last name field and “B” in First name field will find all people whose last name begins with “A” and whose first name beings with “B”.

revision 1

— 269


Note:

One exception is searching access levels, which uses an “or” comparison for multiple selections. For example, selecting both “Access Level A” and “Access

Level B” will find all cardholders with either “Access Level A” or “Access Level

B” assigned.

If you want to search for a range of Badge IDs, take advantage of the two

Badge ID fields on the Badge form. One field is located in the middle-left section of the form and the other field is located in the right section of the form. Note, the form must be in modify mode to see both fields. Type “>=

100” in one field and “<= 200” in the other to find all badges with IDs between 100 and 200 (inclusive).

Search for All Visits to a Selected Cardholder

This procedure will search for every person who visited a selected cardholder.

1. Select Visits from the View menu. The Visits folder opens.

2. On the Visit tab, click [Search].


• Enter the full or partial last name of the cardholder in the Host name drop-down list.

• Use the Select Host Wizard by leaving the Host name drop-down list blank and clicking the [...] button to the right it. When the wizard opens, enter any information that you know about the cardholder and click

[Next]. The wizard will display all records that match the criteria you entered. Select the correct cardholder and click [Finish].

4. Click [OK]. B.A.S.I.S. displays all the visits made to the selected cardholder.

If you entered a partial cardholder name, B.A.S.I.S. displays all the visits made to the cardholders that meet the search criteria.

Search for All Visits by a Selected Visitor




• Enter the full or partial last name of the visitor in the Visitor name drop-down list.

• Use the Select Host Wizard by leaving the Visitor name drop-down list blank and clicking the [...] button to the right it. When the wizard opens, enter any information that you know about the visitor and click [Next].

The wizard will display all records that match the criteria you entered.

Select the correct visitor and click [Finish].

4. Click [OK]. B.A.S.I.S. displays all the cardholders the selected visitor has met with. If you entered a partial visitor name, B.A.S.I.S. displays all the cardholders visited by the visitors that meet the search criteria.

270 —

revision 1


Search for Scheduled, Active or Finished Visits


2. On the Status search tab, click [Search].

3. In the Search for visits section, select that status you wish to search for.

• To search for scheduled visits, select the Scheduled, future check box.

– If you wish to search for visits that are scheduled to begin in a specified amount of time, select the Starting within check box and specify the number of minutes, hours, or days.

– By default, scheduled visits that are late getting started are included in the search. If you do not want to search for scheduled visits that are late, deselect the Scheduled, late check box.

• To search for active visits, select the Active check box.

– If you wish to search for visits that are scheduled to end within a specified amount of time, select the Ending within check box and specify the number of minutes, hours, or days.

– By default, active visits that are late signing out (overstayed) are included in the search. If you do not want to search for overstayed visits, deselect the Active, overstayed check box.

• To search for finished visits, select the Finished check box.

4. The refresh rate is how often (in minutes) the database is queried for changes.

• Select the Use system default rate check box to use the system default rate. Notice the Refresh rate field automatically populates with the default value.

• Deselect the Use system default rate check box to use a different rate.

Enter the new rate in the Refresh rate field. This setting is stored on a per user basis.

5. Click [OK]. The visit records that meet the search criteria display in the

Visits listing window.

Search for All Visits for a Specific Date or Time

Depending on the fields you populate, this procedure will search for:

• Visits scheduled to start on a specific date or time.

• Visits scheduled to end on a specific date or time.

• Visits that start on a specific date or time.

revision 1

— 271


• Visits that end on a specific date or time.



3. To search for a specific date: a. Click the [...] button to the right of one of the four date fields (Scheduled time in, Scheduled time out, Time in, or Time out).

b. The Select Date(s) window opens. Complete one of the following:

• Select a time range and the number of days to search. If you select

“Today”, you do not need to enter the number of days to search.

• Select a time range and a date.

• Select a start date and the number of days to search.

• Select a start date and end date.

c. Click [OK]. The code for the search criteria that you specified displays in the Visit form.

4. To search for a specific time: a. Click the [...] button to the right of one of the four time fields.

Notes:

b. The Select Time Range window opens. Select the start time range and enter a time. c. Select the end time range and enter a time.

If you select “None” for a time range, you cannot enter a specific time.

You can change the time by using the spin buttons or typing new values. The hour, minute, and time of day are adjusted individually.

d. Click [OK].

5. Click [OK] on the Visit form. The visit records that meet the search criteria display in the listing window.

6. Repeat steps 3 5 to search for scheduled time in, scheduled time out, time in, or time out.

272 —

revision 1


Retrieve the Most Recent Visit Search Results

1. Display the Cardholders folder or Visits folder by completing one of the following:

• To display the Cardholders folder in Alarm Monitoring, select Badge

Info from the View menu. For all other applications, select

Cardholders from the Administration menu.

• To display the Visits folder in Alarm Monitoring, select Visits from the

View menu. For all other applications, select Visits from the


2. Click [Search].


4. You can optionally modify your search criteria.

5. Click [OK].

6. B.A.S.I.S. retrieves and displays the first matching record. Use the navigational buttons to look at additional matching records.

Find a Cardholder or Visitor Associated with a Visit


2. Locate the visit record that you wish to find the visitor or cardholder for.

3. Right-click on the visit record.

• If you wish to view the cardholder record, select Find Cardholder.

• If you wish to view the visitor record, select Find Visitor.

4. The record of the corresponding cardholder or visitor will be displayed in the

Cardholder or Visitor window.

Add a Visit Record

To add a visit, information about the visit needs to be entered on the Visit, Details and E-mail forms in the Visits folder; it does not matter which form you start with. When the Visits folder opens, the Visit form displays by default, so this procedure begins on that form.

Note:

This procedure does not apply to view/edit only workstations.


2. On the Visit form: a. A new visit record can either be based on an existing visit record or it can be an entirely new record.

• To create a record based on an existing visit record, select a visit record in the Visits listing window, then click [Add]. The fields

revision 1

— 273


Note:

prepopulate with the information from the selected visit. You can select new values for any field.

• To create a record that is not based on an existing visit record, make sure that no visit record is selected in the Visits listing window, then click [Add]. The fields will be blank to begin with.

Steps

b

and

c

can be done in either order.

Note:

b. Click the [...] button to the right of the Host name drop-down list. The

Select Host Wizard: Search form opens. For more information, refer to

Select Host Wizard: Search Form on page 293.

1) Specify your search criteria by typing full or partial entries in the enabled fields.

Leave all fields blank to display all cardholders.

Note:

2) If a visitor is specified and you wish to search for only cardholders who have been visited by that visitor, select the Previous hosts for

current visitor only check box.

3) Click [Next].

4) The Select Host Wizard: Select form opens. In the Cardholder listing window, select the cardholder you wish to add a visitor for.

For more information, refer to Select Host Wizard: Select Form on page 295.

5) Click [Finish]. The cardholder’s name appears in the Host name field on the Visit form.

c. Click the [...] button to the right of the Visitor name field. The Select

Visitor Wizard: Search form displays.

1) Specify your search criteria by typing full or partial entries in the enabled fields.

Leave all fields blank to display all visitors.

2) If a cardholder is specified and you wish to only search for visitors who have visited that cardholder, select the Previous visitors for

current host only check box.

3) Click [Next].

4) The Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add form displays. If the

Visitor is listed below, select the visitor and click [Finish]. The visitor’s name appears in the Visitor name field on the Visit form.

If the Visitor is not listed below, select the Create new visitor radio button and click [Next]. The Select Visitor Wizard: Add form displays. Enter the new visitor’s information and click [Finish].

274 —

revision 1


Note:

For a detailed description of the Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add form

refer to Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add Form on page 298.

Note:

d. In the Scheduled time in fields, specify the date and time the visit will begin. You can either type the values or select them.

If the Sign In Now check box is selected, these fields will be grayed out.

Note:

e. In the Scheduled time out fields, specify the date and time the visit will end. You can either type the values or select them.

f. Select the Sign In Now check box if the visit is starting immediately. If you select this option, the Scheduled time in fields will become grayed out and the date and time when you click the [OK] button will be assigned as the visit’s Time in.

3. Click the Details tab. For a detailed description of the Details form refer to

Details Form on page 287. On the Details form:

a. In the Type drop-down list, select the type of visit.

Types of visits must first be configured in the List Builder, which is displayed in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter by selecting the

Administration menu, then selecting List Builder.

Note:

b. In the Purpose field, type the reason for the visitor’s visit.

4. You may wish to send e-mail notifications to all parties that require information about a scheduled visit. For a detailed description of the E-mail

form refer to E-mail Form on page 288. To set up e-mail notifications, click

the E-mail tab. On the E-mail form:

For an e-mail to be sent, the Allow e-mail notification check box on the

Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder must be selected.

a. In the Include section, verify the Default Recipients check box is selected as long as you wish to send e-mail messages to the default

revision 1

— 275


recipients. The default recipients are configured in the following locations:

• On segmented systems, select Administration > Segments, click the Segments tab, then click the Visits sub-tab. On the Visits subtab, you can view or modify the default recipients.

• On nonsegmented systems, select Administration > System

Options, then click the Visits tab. On the Visits tab, you can view or modify the default recipients.

b. Select the Cardholder for this visit check box if you wish to have an email sent to the cardholder for this visit.

c. Select the Visitor for this visit check box if you wish to have an e-mail sent to the visitor for this visit.

d. Click [Add] if you wish to add another recipient. The Add recipient window displays. You may add a cardholder, visitor, directory account or SMTP address.

276 —

revision 1

• If you select the Cardholder radio button and click [OK], the

Select Host Wizard: Search form displays. For a detailed

description of the Select Host Wizard: Search form refer to Select

Host Wizard: Search Form on page 293.

• If you select the Visitor radio button and click [OK], the Select

Visitor Wizard: Search form displays. For a detailed description of

the Select Visitor Wizard: Search form refer to Select Visitor

Wizard: Search Form on page 297.

• If you select the Directory account radio button and click [OK], the Select Account window displays.

• If you select the SMTP address radio button, type the SMTP address, then click [OK]. An example of an SMTP address is

“[email protected]”.

5. Click [OK].

6. If the Sign in now check box was selected, proceed to step 7 . If the Sign in

now check box was not selected, the visit will be added. The value for the

Time In column for the visit will remain blank and the visit can be signed in later when it actually occurs.

7. If none of the Allow disposable badge printing, Allow access control

badge assignment and Allow e-mail notification check boxes are checked


on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder, the visit will be signed in. If any of those options are selected, the Sign In Visit(s) window displays.

Note:

8. The Print disposable badge(s) of this type check box and listing window are enabled if the Allow disposable badge printing check box is selected on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder.

• If enabled, you can print a disposable badge for the user by selecting the

Print disposable badge(s) of this type check box, then selecting a disposable badge type to be assigned and printed.

Disposable badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder in System

Administration. For a badge type to be used to print disposable badges, it must have “Visitor” selected for the Class and the Disposable check box must be selected (on the Badge Type sub-tab). If segmentation is enabled, the correct segment must be selected on the Segment Membership sub-tab.

• If the check box is deselected, the system will not print a disposable badge.

9. To override the badge type printer assignment select the Send all badges to

this printer (overriding badge type printer assignment) check box and select the printer from the drop-down list. This check box and drop-down list

revision 1

— 277


are enabled if the Print disposable badge(s) of this type check box is selected and the user has the correct permissions.

10. The Assign this access control badge ID check box and field are enabled if the Allow access control badge assignment check box is selected on the

Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder in System Administration.

• If enabled, you can select the Assign this access control badge ID check box and then type the number of an existing badge that has the class “Visitor” in the field or leave the field blank.

• If the visitor already has an active access control badge (from manual assignment or another visit), this field will automatically be filled in with that ID.

• If the check box is deselected, the system will not attempt to assign an access control badge ID.

11. Click [Sign In]. The visit will be added, the Time In field will be updated to the current date and time and any access control badge assigned will become active.

Modify a Visit Record

Note:

This procedure does not apply to view only workstations.

Note:


2. Locate the visit record you want to change and select it in the Visits listing window.

Multiple selection cannot be used when modifying visits.

3. Click [Modify].

4. Make the changes you want to the record. Changes can be made on any tab in the Visits folder.


Delete a Visit Record

Note:



2. In the Visits listing window select the visit record you want to delete.

278 —

revision 1


Note:

To select multiple visit records select the Multiple Selection check box.

3. Click [Delete].

4. Click [OK]. The visit(s) will be deleted without confirmation.

Print a Visitor Badge


2. In the Visits listing window select the visit record you want to print.

Note:

To select multiple visit records select the Multiple Selection check box.

3. On any form in the Visits folder, click [Print].

4. The Print badge(s) window displays. In the Print disposable badge(s) of

this type listing window select the type of badge to print.

Note:

Disposable badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder in System

Administration and must have “Visitor” selected for the Class and the

Disposable check box selected (on the Badge Type sub-tab). If segmentation is enabled, the correct segment must be selected on the Segment

Membership sub-tab.

5. To select an alternate printer select the Send all badges to this printer

(overriding badge type printer assignment) check box and choose a printer from the drop-down list. This check box and drop-down list are enabled if the user has the correct permissions.

6. Click [OK].

Sign in a Previously Scheduled Visit and Print a Badge

Note:


revision 1

— 279


Note:

Each visit has a time that it is scheduled to begin. When the visitor arrives and the visit actually begins, the visit should be “signed in”. When a visit is signed in, the actual Time In of the visitor is updated to the current date and time and any access control badge that the visitor is issued is activated. A visit can be signed in immediately after it is added or it can be signed in later.

1. Open the Sign In Visit(s) dialog by completing one of the following:

a. Add a visit. For more information, refer to Add a Visit Record on page 273.

b. Search for an existing visit and click [Sign In]. For more information, refer to Search for Scheduled, Active or Finished Visits on page 271.

2. Depending on how the badge types are configured, different fields are active on the Sign In Visit(s) form.

• To print a disposable visitor’s badge using the default printer

assignment, complete steps a and d (below).

• To print a disposable visitor’s badge by overriding the default printer

assignment, complete steps a

,

b

, and

d

.

• To print a non-disposable visitor’s badge by using the default printer

assignment, complete steps c and d .

• To print a non-disposable visitor’s badge by overriding the default

printer assignment, complete steps a through d

.

a. Select the Print disposable badge(s) of this type check box and select a badge type.

b. Select the Send all badges to this printer (overriding badge type printer assignment) check box and select the printer from the dropdown list.

c. Select the Assign this access control badge ID check box and enter the badge ID. Note, the badge ID must exist in the database as an active visitor badge ID. If the visitor already has an active access control badge, this field will automatically be filled in with that ID.

d. Click [Sign In].

Disposable badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder. For a badge type to be used to print disposable badges, it must have “Visitor” selected for the Class and the Disposable check box must be selected (on the

Badge Type sub-tab). If segmentation is enabled, the correct segment must be selected on the Segment Membership sub-tab.

Sign Out a Visit

Note:


Each visit has a time that it is scheduled to end. When the visitor leaves and the visit actually ends, the visit should be “signed out.” When a visit is signed out,

280 —

revision 1

Visit Form


the actual Time Out of the visitor is updated to the current date and time and any access control badge that the visitor is issued is deactivated.

To use the Sign Out feature, you must first configure a badge status to use when doing an automatic sign out. This is done on the Visits form in the Cardholder

Options folder. For more information refer to “Configure System-wide Visit

Options” in the Cardholder Options Folder in the System Administration User

Guide.


2. Locate the active visit record that needs to be signed out.

3. In the Visits listing window, select the active visit that you want to sign out by clicking on it.

4. Click [Sign Out].

5. The message “Are you sure you wish to sign out the selected visit(s)? This will also deactivate any badges the visitors have.” will be displayed. Click

[Yes] to complete the sign out. The Time out will be updated to the current date/time. If the visitor has an active badge, the deactivate date will be updated and the badge status will be set to the status setup that was selected on the Cardholder Options form. The signed out visit will appear in the

Visits listing window.

Visit Form Overview

The Visit form is displayed by default when the Visits folder opens. It is used to:

• Add or modify visits

• Display visit records for a selected date range

revision 1

— 281


• Search for visit records based on the scheduled time in, scheduled time out, time in, time out or date and time last changed

Visit Form Field Table

Form Element

Scheduled time in

Time in

Scheduled time out

Time out

Last changed

Comment

Select the date and time that the visit is expected to start.

When a visit is signed in, the visit’s Time in gets updated to the current date and time.

Select the date and time that the visit is expected to end.

When a visit is signed out, the visit’s Time out gets updated to the current date and time.

Indicates the date and time on which this visit record was last modified and saved.

This date and time are only updated when visit information is changed, not when badge information is changed. The last changed date is saved individually for each badge record as well.

Select Date(s) Window

This window is only displayed when the Visit form in the Visits folder is in

Search mode. In Search mode, click the [...] button to the right of the first

Scheduled time in, Time in, Scheduled time out or Time out field.

Visit Form - Select Date(s) Window Field Table

Form Element

Day

Specific Date

Comment

Used when searching for a scheduled time in, time in, scheduled time out or time out. Selects visits that occurred today, on a previous number of days or on a specified number of days in the future.

Used when searching for the date portion of a scheduled time in, time in, scheduled time out or time out. Selects visits that occurred on a specified date. Choices include on, on or after, after, on or before or before a specified date.

282 —

revision 1


Visit Form - Select Date(s) Window Field Table (Continued)

Form Element

Number of Days

After a Date

Between Two

Dates

OK

Cancel

Comment

Used when searching for the date portion of a scheduled time in, time in, scheduled time out or time out. Selects visits between a specified start date and a specified number of days after the start date.

Used when searching for the date portion of a scheduled time in, time in, scheduled time out or time out. Selects all visits that occurred between the specified Start date and the End date.

Enters the code for the selected search criteria in the respective field on the Visit form in the

Visits folder.

Closes the Select Date(s) window without selecting a date search criteria.

revision 1

— 283


Select Time Range Window

This window is only displayed when the Visit form in the Visits folder is in

Search mode. In Search mode, click the [...] button to the right of the second

Scheduled time in, Time in, Scheduled time out or Time out field.

Visit Form - Select Time Range Window Field Table

Form Element

Start time

End time

OK

Cancel

Comment

Used when searching for the time portion of a scheduled time in, time in, scheduled time out or time out. Allows you to search for visits that start on or after or after a specified time. If

“None” is selected, no time restraints are put on the visit records that are returned. (Visits that started at any time on the specified date will be returned.)

Used when searching for the time portion of a scheduled time in, time in, scheduled time out or time out. Allows you to search for visits that end on or before or before a specified time. If

“None” is selected, no time restraints are put on the visit records that are returned. (Visits that ended at any time on the specified date will be returned.)

Enters the code for the selected search criteria in the respective field on the Visit form in the

Visits folder.

Closes the Select Time Range window without selecting a time search criteria.

284 —

revision 1

Status Search Form


Status Search Form Overview

The Status Search form is only enabled when the [Search] button is clicked. It is used to:

• Search for Visits that meet a specified criteria (scheduled in the future, scheduled but late, active, finished, etc.)

• Set the refresh rate

Status Search Form Field Table


Scheduled, future

Starting within

Scheduled, late

Active

If selected, the search will find visits that are scheduled in the future, i.e., have a scheduled time in that is in the future and have not been signed in yet

Enabled for selection only when the Scheduled, future check box is selected. If selected, specify the number of hours, days or minutes that the visit is scheduled to begin in. For example, you can search for all visits that are scheduled to begin within the next two days.

If selected, the search will find visits that are late, i.e., have a scheduled time in that is in the past and have not been signed in yet

If selected, the search will find all visits that are currently signed in and have not been signed out yet

Ending within Enabled for selection only when the Active check box is selected. If selected, specify the number of hours, days or minutes that the visit is scheduled to end in. For example, you can search for all visits that are scheduled to end within the next two days.

Active, overstayed If selected, the search will find all visits that are currently signed in where the current date and time is after the scheduled time out. For example, a visitor that was supposed to leave at 3 p.m., but is still visiting at 5 p.m.

Finished If selected, the search will locate visits that occurred in the past.

revision 1

— 285


Status Search Form Field Table (Continued)

Form Element

Refresh rate (in minutes)

Use system default rate

Comment

The refresh rate is how often the database is queried to see if it has changed. The refresh rate is stored on a per user basis and only applies when searching based on a status (i.e., the

“Scheduled, future”, “Scheduled, late”, “Active”, “Active, overstayed” or “Finished” status) on the Status search form in the Visits folder. The default value is set in the Refresh rate (in

minutes) field on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options form. A custom refresh rate can be specified as long as the Use system default rate check box is not selected.

If selected, the system default rate will be used when refreshing. The system default rate is set in the Refresh rate (in minutes) field on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder.

If not selected, a custom refresh rate can be specified in the Refresh rate (in minutes) field.

286 —

revision 1


Details Form

Details Form Overview

The Details form is a user-defined form that has been created for you. This form can be modified or even deleted using FormsDesigner. By default, the form contains the type and purpose of the visit.

Details Form Field Table

Form Element

Type

Purpose

Comment

Select the type of visit.

Note:

Types of visits must first be configured in the List Builder, which is displayed by selecting the Administration menu, then selecting List Builder. For more information refer to the List Builder Folder chapter in the System Administration

User Guide.

Type the reason why the visitor is visiting the cardholder.

revision 1

— 287


E-mail Form

E-mail Form Overview

The E-mail form is used to specify e-mail addresses and pager numbers that are automatically notified of visits. You can:

• Add a recipient

• Remove a recipient

• Specify whether to e-mail the default recipients, the cardholder being visited and/or the visitor

E-mail Form Field Table


Default Recipients Select this check box if you wish to send e-mail messages to the default recipients.

Cardholder for this visit

Visitor for this visit

• On segmented systems, select Administration > Segments, click the Segments tab, then click the Visits sub-tab. On the Visits sub-tab, you can add or remove recipients. These recipients will be collectively considered the “Default Recipients” on the E-mail form in the Visits folder.

• On non segmented systems, select Administration > System Options, then click the

Visits tab. On the Visits tab, you can view or modify the default recipients.

Whether this check box is selected by default when a new visit is added is determined by the

Include default recipients by default check box on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder.

Select this check box if you wish to have an e-mail sent to the cardholder for this visit.

Whether this check box is selected by default when a new visit is added is determined by the

Include host’s e-mail by default check box on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder.

Select this check box if you wish to have an e-mail sent to the visitor for this visit. Whether this check box is selected by default when a new visit is added is determined by the Include

visitor’s e-mail by default check box on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder.

288 —

revision 1


E-mail Form Field Table (Continued)

Form Element

Additional

Recipients listing window

Add

Comment

Displays the e-mail addresses that will receive e-mail notification of visits.

Note:

The addresses for the default recipients are not displayed in this listing window.

Click this button if you wish to add another recipient. The Add recipient window is displayed.

You may add a cardholder, visitor, directory account or SMTP address.

Remove

• If you select the Cardholder radio button and click [OK], the Select Host Wizard: Search form is displayed.

• If you select the Visitor radio button and click [OK], the Select Visitor Wizard: Search form is displayed.

• If you select the Directory account radio button and click [OK], the Select Account window is displayed.

• If you select the SMTP address radio button, type the SMTP address, then click [OK].

An example of an SMTP address is “[email protected]”.

Removes the selected recipient from the list of recipients that will receive notification of visits.

revision 1

— 289


Add Recipient Window

This window is displayed when the E-mail form in the Visits folder is in Add or

Modify mode and the [Add] button to the right of the Additional Recipients listing window is clicked.

E-mail Form - Add Recipient Window Field Table


Cardholder The Select Host Wizard: Search form is displayed, which allows you to add a cardholder as an

e-mail recipient. page 293.

For more information, refer to Select Host Wizard: Search Form

on

Visitor The Select Visitor Wizard: Search form is displayed, which allows you to add a visitor as an email recipient.

Directory account The Select Account window is displayed, which allows you to add a directory account as an email recipient.

SMTP address Type the SMTP address, then click [OK]. An example of an SMTP address is

“[email protected]”.

OK • If you selected the Cardholder radio button, the Select Host Wizard: Search form is displayed.

page 293.

For more information, refer to Select Host Wizard: Search Form

on

• If you selected the Visitor radio button, the Select Visitor Wizard: Search form is displayed.

page 297.

For more information, refer to Select Visitor Wizard: Search Form

on

• If you selected the Directory account radio button, the Select Account window is displayed.

• If you selected the SMTP address radio button and typed an SMTP address, the address will be added to the Additional Recipients listing window.

Cancel Closes the Add recipient window without adding a recipient.

290 —

revision 1


Reports Form

Reports Form Overview

The Reports form shows only visit-related reports. On the Reports form you can:

• Search for a cardholder

• Search for a visitor

• Generate a report

Reports Form Field Table

Form Element


Description


Comment

If selected, the report will only include those records that match the rest of the search criteria specified on any form in the Visits folder.

If not selected, the report will include all records for the selected report type.


Lists currently defined reports of the type(s) selected in the Report listing window.


Run a Visit Report from the Visits Folder

A visit report can be generated for either a defined search criteria or for all visits.

revision 1

— 291


Note:


1. If you wish to generate a visit report that searches through all visit records not just those that match a search criteria, proceed to step 2 . To generate a visit report based on a search criteria: a. Select Visits from the View menu. The Visits folder opens.

b. In the Visits folder, click [Search].

c. Run the search that you wish to print a report for. For more information on searching refer to the following:

•

Visit Search Capabilities on page 269

•

Search for All Visits to a Selected Cardholder on page 270

•

Search for All Visits by a Selected Visitor on page 270

•

Search for Scheduled, Active or Finished Visits on page 271

•

Search for All Visits for a Specific Date or Time on page 271

•

Retrieve the Most Recent Visit Search Results on page 273

d. Click the Reports tab.

e. Select the Limit report to current search check box.

f. Proceed to step 3 .

2. To generate a visit report that searches through all visits: a. Select Visits from the View menu. The Visits folder opens.

b. In the Reports listing window, select the type of report you wish to print.

c. Proceed to step 3 .

3. Click [Print]. The Print Report Options window opens.

292 —

revision 1

4. In the Print Destination section, select whether to print to a preview window, export directly to a file or print directly to a printer.

5. If you selected Print Directly to a Printer in the Print Destination section, select a printer in the drop-down list and choose whether to Prompt for

Number of Pages.

6. In the Report Subtitle section, type the report subtitle. If the Limit report to

current search check box is selected, the search criteria will be listed in the


Report Subtitle section by default. The subtitle will be displayed below the report title on the report.

7. Click [OK]. The options selected in the Print Destination section will determine where the report is sent.

Select Host Wizard: Search Form

Note:

If the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your cardholder data, the elements on your Select Host Wizard: Search form will be different. The default fields are pictured below.

This form is displayed when the [Search] button in the Visits folder is clicked and then the [...] button to the right of the Host name field is clicked.

Select Host Wizard: Search Form Overview

This form is used to enter search criteria that will allow you to locate a specific cardholder.

revision 1

— 293


Visits Folder - Select Host Wizard: Search Form


Previous hosts for current visitor only

Last name

First name

Middle name

Cardholder ID

Badge type

This check box is only enabled when a visitor has been selected and a cardholder is being searched for. If selected, only those cardholders who have previously been visited by the selected visitor will be displayed on the Select Visitor: Select or Add form.

Indicates cardholder’s last name.

Indicates cardholder’s first name.

Indicates cardholder’s middle name.

Indicates a cardholder’s ID, which is most commonly their Social Security Number. The cardholder ID must be a numeric value.

Selects which of the cardholder’s badges (if he or she has more than one) is to be the active one.

User-defined fields All fields below the line on this form are user-defined fields. The default fields are pictured, but your form may be different if the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your cardholder data.

Back This button is not used.

Next

Cancel

Help

Import

The wizard will proceed to the Select Host Wizard: Select form.

Closes the window without locating a cardholder and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder.

Displays online help for this topic

Displays the Select Import Source window, which allows you to select a device to import cardholder data from, such as a business card scanner

294 —

revision 1


Select Host Wizard: Select Form

This form is displayed when the [Next] button on the Select Host Wizard: Search form is clicked.

Select Host Wizard: Select Form Overview

This form is used to select a cardholder record from those that matched the specified search criteria. The columns displayed are configured on the

Cardholder Search Results form in the Cardholder Options folder. For more information refer to the Segments Folder chapter in the System Administration

User Guide.

Visits Folder - Select Host Wizard: Select Form

Form Element

Cardholder listing window

Back

Finish

Cancel

Comment

A list of cardholder records that match the search criteria specified on the Select Host Wizard:

Search form are displayed.

Note:

The fields that are displayed in columns are set on the Cardholder Search Results

Lists form in the Cardholder Options folder.

Returns to the Select Host Wizard: Search form.

Completes the wizard. The selected cardholder’s name will be displayed in the Host name field.

Closes the window without selecting a cardholder and returns you to the Visit form in the

Visits folder.

revision 1

— 295


Visits Folder - Select Host Wizard: Select Form (Continued)

Form Element

Help

Comment


296 —

revision 1


Select Visitor Wizard: Search Form

Note:

If the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your visitor data, the elements on your Select Visitor Wizard: Search form will be different. The default fields are pictured below.

This form is displayed when the [...] button to the right of the Visitor name dropdown list on the Visit form is clicked.

Select Visitor Wizard: Search Form Overview

This form is used to locate visitor records that match the specified search criteria.

Visits Folder - Select Visitor Wizard: Search Form

Form Element

Previous visitors for current host only

Last name

First name

Middle name

Comment

This check box is only enabled when a cardholder has been selected and a visitor is being searched for. If selected, only those visitors who have previously visited the selected cardholder will be displayed on the Select Visitor: Select or Add form.

Indicates visitor’s last name.

Indicates visitor’s first name.

Indicates visitor’s middle name.

revision 1

— 297


Visits Folder - Select Visitor Wizard: Search Form (Continued)


Badge type Indicates the visitor’s badge type. Badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder. For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration User

Guide.

User-defined fields All fields below the horizontal line on this form are user-defined fields. The default fields are pictured, but your form may be different if the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your visitor data.

Back

Next

Cancel

This button is not used.

The wizard will proceed to the Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add form.

Import

Help

Closes the window without locating a visitor and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder.

Displays the Select Import Source window, which allows you to select a device to import visitor data from, such as a business card scanner


Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add Form

This form is displayed when the [Next] button on the Select Visitor Wizard:

Search form is clicked.

298 —

revision 1


Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add Form Overview

This form is displayed when adding a visit. From this form, you can:

• Search for visitor records that match the specified search criteria.

• Add a new visitor record.

Visits Folder - Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add Form

Form Element

Select visitor below

Comment

Select this option if the visitor you need to add a visit for is listed below in the Visitor listing window.

If you select this option, also select a visitor in the Visitor listing window below.

Create new visitor Select this option if the visitor you need to add a visit for is not listed in the Visitor listing window.

Visitor listing window

If you select this option, the [Finish] button will be replaced with a [Next] button. When the

[Next] button is clicked, the Select Visitor Wizard: Add form will be displayed, on which you can add a new visitor.

A list of visitor records that match the search criteria specified on the Select Visitor Wizard:

Search form are displayed.

Back

Finish

Cancel

Help

Note:

The fields that are displayed in columns are set on the Visitor Search Results Lists form in the Cardholder Options folder.

Returns to the Select Visitor Wizard: Search form.

This button is displayed only if Select visitor below is selected. Click this button to complete the wizard. The selected visitor’s name will be displayed in the Visitor name field.

If Create new visitor is selected, the [Finish] button is replaced by a [Next] button.

Closes the window without selecting a visitor and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder.


revision 1

— 299


Select Visitor Wizard: Add Form

This form is displayed when Create new visitor is selected and the [Next] button is clicked on the Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add form.

Select Visitor Wizard: Add Form Overview

This form allows you to:

• Add a new visitor record

• Capture photographic information such as a photo, signature or biometric data for a visitor

• Import visitor data from a business card scanner or other similar device

Visits Folder - Select Visitor Wizard: Add Form

Form Element

Last name

First name

Middle name

Badge type

Comment



Indicates visitor’s middle name.

Select the visitor’s badge type. Badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder. For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration User

Guide.

300 —

revision 1


Visits Folder - Select Visitor Wizard: Add Form (Continued)


User-defined fields All fields below the Name fields on this form are user-defined fields. The default fields are pictured, but your form may be different if the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your visitor data.

Import

Capture

Back

Displays the Select Import Source window, which allows you to select a device to import visitor data from, such as a business card scanner

Displays Multimedia Capture, where you can capture photographic information such as a photo, signature or biometric data for a visitor

Returns to the Select Visitor Wizard: Select or Add form.

Finish

Cancel

Help

Completes the wizard. The visitor record will be added to the database and the name of the visitor who was just added will be displayed in the Visitor name field.

Closes the window without adding a visitor and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder.


revision 1

— 301


Select Visitor Wizard: Select Form

This form is displayed when the [...] button to the right of the Visitor name field on the Visit form in the Visits folder is clicked.

Select Visitor Wizard: Select Form Overview

This form is displayed when searching; it is used to select a visitor record from those that matched the specified search criteria.

Visits Folder - Select Visitor Wizard: Select Form


Last Name

First Name

Back

Finish

Cancel



Middle Initial Indicates visitor’s middle initial.

User-defined fields All fields below the Name fields on this form are user-defined fields. The default fields are pictured, but your form may be different if the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your visitor data.

Returns to the previous form.

Completes the wizard. The selected visitor’s name will be displayed in the Visitor name field.

Help

Closes the window without selecting a visitor and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder.


302 —

revision 1


Select Import Source Window

This window is displayed by clicking the [Import] button on any window in the

Select Host Wizard or Select Visitor Wizard.

Select Import Source Window Field Table

Form Element

Source listing window

OK

Cancel

Comment

Displays a list of available sources, such as a business card scanner, to import cardholder or visitor data from.

If a valid source is selected, you will be able to import cardholder or visitor data using it.

Closes the Select Import Source window without selecting a source to import cardholder or visitor data from.

revision 1

— 303


304 —

revision 1


Chapter 16: Assets Folder

Toolbar Shortcut

The Assets folder contains forms with which you can:

• Add, change or remove asset records.

• Assign assets to cardholders.

• Track assets that are assigned to cardholders.

• Preview and print asset reports.

The Assets folder contains four forms: the Assets form, the Asset Classes form, the Assignments form and the Reports form.

This folder is displayed by selecting the Asset Info from the View menu.

revision 1

— 305

16: Assets Folder

Assets Form

Assets Folder - Assets Form

Form Element

Scan ID

Name

Type

Subtype

Serial Number

Department

Last Inspection

Next Inspection

Acquired

Replace

Assessed Value

Replacement

Value

Comment

Enter the Scan ID of the asset.

Enter a descriptive name for the asset. This is a “friendly” name assigned to each asset to make it easy to identify. Each name must be unique and contain no more than 32 characters.

Select the type of asset being configured. Available choices depend on what asset types were added in the Asset Types and Subtypes Management window. The window is displayed by selecting Asset Types and Subtypes from the Asset menu.

Select the subtype of the asset being configured. Available choices depend on what asset subtypes were added in the Asset Types and Subtypes Management window. The window is displayed by selecting Asset Types and Subtypes from the Asset menu.

Enter the serial number of the asset you are adding.

Select the department of the asset being configured. Available choices depend on what departments were added in the List Builder folder.

Enter the date when the asset was last inspected.

Enter the date when the asset will be inspected next.

Enter the date when the asset was acquired.

Enter the date when the asset will be replaced.

Enter the assessed value of the asset.

Enter the replacement value of the asset.

306 —

revision 1


Assets Folder - Assets Form (Continued)

Form Element

Asset Can Be

Disabled

Comment

(For special HID, IBM notebooks only) If checked, when the asset generates an access denied alarm (when a cardholder is not assigned to the asset), the asset will be disabled.

The Can Disable Asset check box on the Settings form of the Readers folder in System

Administration must also be checked in order for the selected reader to disable the asset.

Indicates the date of when the selected asset record was last changed.

Record Last

Changed

Photo

Last Access

Assign Asset/

Assign To

Search

Last Search

Displays a photo capture of the asset if one was added in Multimedia Capture.

Displays the date and time of the asset’s last access.

When adding or modifying an asset, select the [Assign Asset] button to launch the Cardholders folder. On the Cardholder form you can search for or add a cardholder to assign to the asset being configured.

Once you have located the cardholder on the Cardholder form, their name will appear on the

[Assign To] push button. Click on this button to assign the asset to the cardholder.

If the Cardholders folder is already open and a cardholder record is displayed, then the [Assign

To] button will automatically display the name of that cardholder record.

Click on this button to search for an asset based on a value entered in one or more of the fields.

Click on this button the display the findings of the previous search.

Moves to the first matching record.

Moves 10 matching records back.

Moves to the previous matching record.

Record count

Add

Capture

Modify

Delete

Moves to the next matching record.

Moves 10 matching records forward.

Moves to the last matching record.

Displayed in view mode and indicates the number of the record out of the total number of records found by the most recent search operation. For example: 6 of 10.


Used to add an asset record.

Launches Multimedia Capture where you can add a photo of the asset.

Used to change an asset record.

Used to delete an asset record.

revision 1

— 307


Assets Form Procedures

Add an Asset

Note:


1. Select Asset Info from the View menu. The Assets folder opens.

2. Click [Add].

3. In the Scan ID field, enter an ID number for the asset.

4. In the Name field, enter a descriptive name for the asset. This is a “friendly” name assigned to each asset to make it easy to identify. Each name must be unique and contain no more than 32 characters.

5. If you want to identify the asset by type, select one from the Type dropdown list. If you want to identify the asset by subtype, select one from the

Subtype drop-down list. If you don’t want to identify the asset by type and/ or subtype, choose N/A from the Type and Subtype drop-down lists.

6. Type in a Serial Number and then choose the Department of the asset from the drop-down list.

7. Enter the date of the asset’s Last Inspection and the date of the asset’s Next

Inspection.

8. Enter the date of when the asset was acquired in the Acquired field.

9. Enter the date of when the asset will be replaced in the Replace field.

10. In the Assessed Value field type the amount, in dollars, of the asset’s value.

In the Replacement Value field type the amount, in dollars, it will cost to replace the asset.

11. Check the Asset Can Be Disabled check box if the asset can and you want it to be disabled when the asset generates an access denied alarm (when a cardholder is not assigned to the asset.) The Can Disable Asset check box on the Settings form of the Readers folder in the System Administration application must also be checked in order for the selected reader to disable the asset.

12. Click [Capture] to launch Multimedia Capture from where you can capture a photo of the asset to be displayed on the Assets form. For more information refer to the Multimedia Capture appendix in the System Administration User

Guide.

13. You can switch to the Asset Classes form if you want to configure groups

and classes now. For more information, refer to Asset Classes Form

Procedures on page 314.

14. Click [OK].

308 —

revision 1


Modify an Asset

Note:


1. Locate the asset record that you want to change.

2. Click [Modify].

3. Make the changes you want to the fields.

4. Click [OK] to save your changes, or [Cancel] to revert to the previously saved values.

Delete an Asset

Note:


1. Locate the asset record that you want to delete.

2. Click [Delete].

3. Click [OK].

Assign a Cardholder to an Asset

Note:


1. Locate the asset record that you want to assign.

2. If the Cardholders folder was already open and a cardholder record displayed, proceed to

3

. If not, click [Assign Asset] to launch the

Cardholders folder.

3. In the Cardholders folder, retrieve the record of the cardholder you want to assign to the asset. On the Assets form of the Assets folder, the name of the cardholder will appear in the [Assign To] push button.

4. Click [Assign To] to assign the asset.

revision 1

— 309


Search for an Asset Record


2. Click [Search].

3. Specify your search criteria by typing full partial entries in the enabled fields.

4. Click [OK].



Retrieve the Most Recent Search Results

1. Click [Search].


3. If you want, modify your search criteria.

4. Click [OK].



310 —

revision 1


Add an Asset Type/Subtype

Note:



2. Select Asset Types and Subtypes from the Asset menu. The Asset Types and Subtypes Management window opens.

3. Select and asset type in the Asset Types listing window. If you want to modify a subtype, select the Subtype tab first.

4. Click [Modify] and make your desired changes.

5. Click [OK].

6. Click [Close] to return to the Assets form.

revision 1

— 311


Asset Classes Form

Asset Classes Form (View Mode)

Asset Classes Form (Modify Mode)

312 —

revision 1


Asset Classes Form Field Table

Assets Folder - Asset Classes Form

Form Element

Scan ID

Name

Type

Subtype

Assigned Classes

Asset Groups

Asset Group

Asset Classes

Photo

Last Access

Assign Asset/

Assign To

Search

Last Search

Comment

Indicates the Scan ID of the asset.

Indicates the name of the asset.

Indicates the type of asset being configured.

Indicates the subtype of the asset being configured.

(View and modify mode) Displays the classes that are currently assigned to a group in the

Asset Groups listing window.

(View mode) Displays the asset groups that correspond with the classes in the Assigned

Classes listing window.

(Modify mode) Select the asset group(s) to which the asset will belong.

Select the asset classes that will be assigned to the asset. Groups can contain as many as 32 classes, but each asset can only belong to as many as 15 classes.

Displays a photo capture of the asset if one was added in Multimedia Capture.


When adding or modifying an asset, select the [Assign Asset] button to launch the Cardholders folder. On the Cardholders form you can search for or add a cardholder to assign to the asset being configured.

Once you have located the cardholder on the Cardholders form, their name will appear on the

[Assign To] push button. Click on this button to assign the asset to the cardholder.

If the Cardholders folder is already open and a cardholder record is displayed, then the [Assign

To] button will automatically display the name of that cardholder record.

Click on this button to search for an asset based on a value entered in one or more of the fields.








revision 1

— 313


Assets Folder - Asset Classes Form (Continued)

Form Element

Record count

Comment


Add

Modify

Delete

Print



Used to change an asset classes record.



Asset Classes Form Procedures

Assign Classes to an Asset

Note:


1. Locate the record of the asset that you want to assign classes to.

2. Click [Modify].

3. Select an Asset Group from the drop-down list.

4. In the Asset Classes listing window, select the classes you want to assign.

You can select as many as 15 classes for each asset.

5. Click [OK].

Modify an Asset Classes Assignment

Note:


1. Locate the record of the asset that you want to change.

2. Click [Modify].


4. Click [OK] to save your changes, or [Cancel] to revert to the previously saved values.

314 —

revision 1


Add Asset Groups and Classes

1. Select Asset Info from the View menu.

The Assets folder opens.

2. Select Asset Groups and Classes from the Asset menu. The Asset Groups and Classes Management window opens.

3. To add an asset group: a. Click the Asset Groups tab.

b. Click [Add].

c. In the Asset Group field, enter the name of the group you are adding.

d. Click [OK].

4. To add an asset class: a. Click the Asset Class tab.

b. Click [Add].

c. In the Asset Class field, enter the name of the class you are adding. You can add as many classes as you want but you can only assign as many as

32 classes to a group.

d. Click [OK].

5. To assign a class to a group: a. Click the Asset Class tab. b. Select an asset class.

c. Click [Modify].

d. Select the name of an asset group.

e. Click the push button to remove the asset group. Click the

push button add the asset group.

f. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 315


Assignments Form

Assets Folder - Assignments Form

Form Element

Scan ID

Name

Type

Subtype

Listing window

Comment

Displays the assets scan ID. If you click [Search], you can enter the scan ID you want to search.

Displays the name of the asset. If you click [Search], you can enter the name of the asset you want to search.

Displays the type of asset. If you click [Search], you can enter the type of asset you want to search.

Displays the subtype of the asset. If you click [Search], you can enter the subtype of the asset you want to search.

Displays a list of cardholders who are currently or have been assigned to the selected asset.

Last Name

First Name

Assigned

Unassigned

Photo

Last Access

You can choose the number of entries you want listed by selecting Show Assignments X Days

Past from the Asset menu.

When you select the [Search] button, enter the last name of a cardholder to locate the assets that have been assigned to them.

When you select the [Search] button, enter the first name of a cardholder to locate the assets that have been assigned to them.

When you select the [Search] button, enter the date the asset was assigned if you want to locate the cardholder who was assigned to the asset on that date.

When you select the [Search] button, enter the date the asset was unassigned if you want to locate the cardholder who was unassigned to the asset on that date.

Displays a photo of the asset if one was captured in Multimedia Capture.

Displays the date and time of the assets last access.

316 —

revision 1


Assets Folder - Assignments Form (Continued)

Form Element

Assign Asset/

Assign To

Search

Last Search

Comment

Displays the name of the asset currently displayed in the Cardholders folder. If no name is displayed, when selected the Cardholders folder is launched from where you can search for and select the cardholder you wish to assign to the asset.

Used to locate a cardholder or asset assignment record.



Record count








Assignments Form Procedures

Assign a Cardholder to an Asset

Note:


1. Locate the record of that asset that you want to assign.

2. If the Cardholders folder was already open and a cardholder record displayed, proceed to

3

. If not, click [Assign Asset] to launch the

Cardholders folder.

3. On the Cardholders folder, retrieve the record of the cardholder you want to assign to the asset. On the Assignments form of the Assets folder, the name of the cardholder will appear in the [Assign To] push button.

4. Click [Assign To] to assign the selected asset to the selected cardholder. The name of the cardholder will appear in the listing window.

revision 1

— 317


Unassign an Asset

Note:


1. Locate the record of the asset that you want to unassign.

2. In the listing window, select the name of the cardholder who is currently assigned to the asset. The entry of the cardholder who is assigned will not list an Unassigned Date.

3. Right-click on the cardholder entry you selected and choose Unassign Asset from the menu. The Unassigned field will be updated to the current date.

Search for a Cardholder Assigned to an Asset

1. Locate the asset record that you want to look up a cardholder for.

2. In the listing window, select the name of the cardholder you want to look up.

3. Right-click on the cardholder entry you selected and choose Find

Cardholder from the menu. The Cardholders folder will display the record of the cardholder you selected.

318 —

revision 1


Reports Form

Note:

The Reports form is not available in view/edit only workstations or in the

Alarm Monitoring application.

Assets Folder - Reports Form

Form Element

Scan ID

Name

Type

Subtype

Listing window

Comment

Displays the scan ID of the selected asset.

Displays the name of the selected asset.

Displays the type of the selected asset.

Displays the subtype of the selected asset.

Displays a list of the types of reports that can be previewed and/or printed. An icon precedes each entry.

Select this check box if you want to limit this report to the search that you just completed.


Description

Filename

Photo

Last Access

Assign Asset/

Assign To

Displays a description of the report type you selected from the listing window.

Displays the file name of the report type.

Displays the captured photo of the currently selected asset.


Displays the name of the cardholder currently displayed in the Cardholders folder. If no name is displayed, when selected the Cardholders folder is launched from where you can search for and select the cardholder you wish to assign to the selected asset.

revision 1

— 319


Assets Folder - Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

Print

Comment

This button launches the Report Print Options window from where you can preview, print or export a report.




Record count

Close






Closes the Assets folder.

320 —

revision 1



Run an Asset Report

Note:

This procedure does not apply to Alarm Monitoring.

1. In the listing window, select the type of report you want to run.

2. Select the Limit report to current search check box if you want to limit this report to the search that you just completed.

3. Click [Print]. The Print Report Options window will be displayed.

4. Choose a Print Destination and if you want, update the text used for the report subtitle.

5. Click [OK].

• If you chose the Print Directly to a Printer radio button, select a printer from the drop-down list. If you select the Prompt for Number

of Pages check box, the Print window will be displayed where you can select print range, number of copies and whether or not to collate your report.

• If you chose the Export Directly to a File radio button, the Export window will be displayed. Choose the report Format and Destination from the drop-down lists. Depending on what you chose, enter the destination and format information in the corresponding window, then click [OK].

• If you chose the Print to a Preview Window radio button, an asset report print preview window will be displayed from where you can view the selected report on the screen. For more information refer to the

Report Print Preview Window chapter in the System Administration

User Guide.

revision 1

— 321


322 —

revision 1


Chapter 17: Reports Folder

Toolbar Shortcut

Note:

The Reports folder contains forms with which you can:

• View on the screen reports created using report layout templates in the database and current data

• Report on data that meets specified criteria (such as dates, times, readers, alarm panels, cardholders and badge IDs)

• Print a report, save it to a file or export the data

The folder contains eight forms: the Report Configuration form, the Reader

Reports form, the Alarm Panel Reports form, the Anti-Passback Reports form, the Date/Time Reports form, the Event Reports form, the Receiver Account Zone

Reports form, and the Alarm Acknowledgment Reports form.

This folder is displayed by selecting Reports from the View menu or by selecting the Reports toolbar button.

Reports are installed when Database Setup is run. All reports are installed on the database server under the ReportTemplates subdirectory in the B.A.S.I.S. installation path. By default, this location is C:\Program

Files\B.A.S.I.S.\ReportTemplates.

Refer to the release notes for the versions of Seagate Crystal Reports that are supported. The release notes are located on the root of the B.A.S.I.S. installation disc.

For more information, refer to Appendix C: Reports on page 519.

revision 1

— 323

17: Reports Folder

Report Configuration Form

Reports Folder - Report Configuration Form


Listing window Lists currently defined reports of the type(s) selected in the Report View Filter window. Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type.

Filter Report View Click this button to display the Report View Filter window from where you can choose the types of reports you wish to view.

Name The name of the report.

File

Browse

Description

Password

The location and name of the file that contains the report.

Used to search through drives and directories to choose a report filename to insert into the File field.


This field is optional. If you type a password here, a user attempting to print this report will be asked to first enter the correct password.

A password can be from 1 to 32 characters in length. As you type, the password will appear in the field as a series of *s.

Confirm Password If you typed something in the Password field, you must type exactly the same thing here. As with the Password field, your entry here will appear as a series of *s.

Type(s) Lists the types of reports that you can configure.

The system reports that are included with the installation are each assigned an appropriate

Type. You can modify report types on the system reports but selecting invalid types could result in unwanted behavior.

Note:

To restore types back to their defaults, run Database Setup.

Note:

To make the report appear in Area Access Manager the Area Access Manager check box must be selected in the Types field.

324 —

revision 1


Reports Folder - Report Configuration Form (Continued)

Form Element

Add

Modify

Delete

Print

Preview

Help

Use restored records

Comment

Used to configure a report.

Used to change a report configuration.

Used to remove a report.

Opens the Print Report Options window.

Displays the selected report in the Report Print Preview window.

Displays relevant on-screen help for this form.

If this check box is selected, data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events/transactions in the database, rather than from the current “live” events/ transactions.

Mode

Close

Restored events/transactions are those restored using the [Restore Archive] button on the

Restoring form of the Archives folder.

In view mode, indicates the number of reports selected in the listing window and the total number of reports contained in all selected categories. For example: “1 of 42 selected.”

In modify mode, indicates the current operation, such as “Modify Mode.”

Closes the Reports folder.

Report View Filter Window

This window is displayed by clicking the [Filter Report View] button on the

Report Configuration form.

revision 1

— 325


Reports Folder - Report View Filter Window

Form Element

Access Granted/

Denied

Comment

If this check box is selected, Access Granted and Access Denied reports will be included in the listing window.

Alarm

Acknowledgments

Alarm Panel

Alarm Panel

Events

Anti-Passback

Asset

Cardholder

Date/Time

General

Guest

Reader

Reader Events

Receiver

Receiver account

Zone

Reports of this type appear on the Reader Reports form for filtering.

If this check box is selected, Alarm Acknowledgment reports will be included in the listing window.

If this check box is selected, Alarm Panel reports will be included in the listing window.

Reports of this type appear on the Alarm Panel Reports form for filtering.

If this check box is selected, Alarm Panel Events reports will be included in the listing window.

Reports of this type appear on the Alarm Panel Reports form for filtering.

If this check box is selected, Anti-Passback reports will be included in the listing window.

Reports of this type appear on the Anti-Passback Reports form for filtering.

If this check box is selected, Asset reports will be included in the listing window.

Reports of this type appear on the Asset Reports form for filtering.

If this check box is selected, Cardholder reports will be included in the listing window.

Reports of this type appear on the Reports form of the Cardholder folder for filtering.

If this check box is selected, Date/Time reports will be included in the listing window.

Reports of this type appear on the Date/Time Report form for filtering.

If this check box is selected, general reports will be included in the listing window.

If this checkbox is selected, guest reports will be included in the listing window.

If this check box is selected, Reader reports will be included in the listing window.


If this check box is selected, Reader Events reports will be included in the listing window.


If this check box is selected, the names of Receiver reports will be displayed in the listing window.

Reports of this type appear on the Receiver Account Zone Reports form for filtering.

If this check box is selected, the names of Account Zone reports will be displayed in the listing window.


326 —

revision 1


Reports Folder - Report View Filter Window (Continued)

Form Element

Receiver Events

Comment

If this check box is selected, the names of Receiver Events reports will be displayed in the listing window.

User Transactions

Video Events

Visitor

OK

Cancel

Select All

Clear All


If this check box is selected, User Transactions reports will be included in the listing window.


Restoring form of the Archives folder.

If this check box is selected, Video events reports will be included in the listing window.

If this check box is selected, Visitor reports will be included in the listing window.

Click this button to save your changes and return to the Report Configuration form.

Click this button to return to the Report Configuration form without saving your changes.

Click this button to select all check boxes in the window.

Click this button to deselect all check boxes in the window.

Report Configuration Form Procedures

Add a Report

1. Select Reports from the View menu. The Reports folder opens.

2. Click [Add].

3. In the Name field, type a unique, descriptive name for the report.

4. Click [Browse]. The Open window opens.

5. Select the drive, then the directory, then the file name for an existing report layout.

6. Click [OK] to insert the selection into the File field on the Report

Configuration form.

Note:

You cannot use the Report Configuration form to design a report layout.

Only existing layouts can be used to create reports. A valid report layout

revision 1

— 327


must have been designed using Crystal Reports for Windows™ and must have the file extension “rpt.”

Note:

7. In the Description field, type a description of this report's contents.

8. If you want to restrict previewing and printing of this report, type a password in the Password field.

9. Type the password again in the Confirm Password field.

10. In the Type(s) listing window, select the check boxes beside the most appropriate category for this report.

You do not have to select a check box. Many of the reports currently in the system are uncategorized.

11. Click [OK] to add the report. The name of the report will be inserted alphabetically into the listing window.

Modify a Report

1. From the listing window, select the name of the report that you want to be changed. If the report is not listed, make sure that the appropriate check box is selected in the Report View Filter window (displayed by selecting the

[Filter Report View] button).

2. Click [Modify].



Delete a Report

1. From the listing window, select the name of the report that you want to delete. If the report is not listed, make sure that the appropriate check box is selected in the Report View Filter window (displayed by selecting the [Filter

Report View] button).

2. Click [Delete].

3. Click [OK].

328 —

revision 1


Filter The Report View

1. On the Report Configuration form, click [Filter Report View]. The Report

View Filter window opens.

2. Select the check boxes that correspond with the types of reports that you want to view. Click [Select All] to select all of the choices in the listing window. Click [Clear All] to deselect all of the choices in the listing window.

3. Click [OK]. The types of reports that correspond to the check boxes that you selected will be displayed in the listing window on the Report Configuration form.

Preview and Print a Report

For more information, refer to Preview and Print a Report on page 368.

Reader Reports Form

Reader Reports Form Overview

This form allows you to add filtering criteria to a reader report, so that you can narrow the results of your report. Depending on the type of report you select, you can optionally add a filter on reader(s), start date/time, end date/time, badge ID and/or cardholder name.

revision 1

— 329


Reader Reports Form Field Table

Readers Folder - Reader Reports Form

Form Element

Listing window

Today

Start

Comment

Lists currently defined reader reports, and each report’s type. Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type.

Click this button to:

• Set the Start time/date to 12:00:00 AM on the current date

• Set the End time/date to 11:59:59 PM on the current date

If you want to filter a report by a specific date, select the Start date check box and choose a specific start date from the drop-down calendar.

• Select the first month for which data is to be included in this report. Use the and

navigation buttons to view different months. You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop-down list of every month.

• Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report. To change the year, click on the name of the year and use the spin buttons .

• Once you have selected a month and a year, click on the first day for which data is to be included in this report. Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date.

• Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start

time check box and choosing a specific start time.

Highlight the hour, minutes, or seconds by clicking on them. Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value. To change from AM to PM, highlight AM by clicking on it, and use the spin buttons.

330 —

revision 1


Readers Folder - Reader Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

End

Comment

If you want to filter a report by a specific date, select the End date check box and choose a specific end date from the drop-down calendar.

• Select the last month for which data is to be included in this report. Use the and


• Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report. To change the year, click on the name of the year and use the spin buttons .

• Once you have selected a month and a year, click on the last day for which data is to be included in this report. Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date.

• Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the End time check box and choosing a specific end time.


Cardholder Filter

Last Name

First Name


If selected, the specified time range will be applied to any date that falls within the specified date range.

For example, if you specify a Date/Time Filter starting January 1, 1998 at 8:00 AM and ending March 31, 1998 at 7:00 PM:

• If this box is checked, the report will include only data collected during the hours of

8:00 AM through 7:00 PM, on any and all days between January 1 and March 31.

• If this box is not checked, the report will include all data gathered from 8:00 AM on

January 1 straight through until March 31 at 7:00 PM.

Includes the Last Name, First Name, and Badge ID fields. These fields are available only for applicable report types. These fields are not case-sensitive and will match any names beginning with the characters you type (much like the Cardholder form searches). For example, typing “smith” for Last Name will match “Smith”, “SMITHY”, “smithereen”, etc.

Enter the cardholder’s last name.

Enter the cardholder’s first name.

revision 1

— 331


Readers Folder - Reader Reports Form (Continued)


Badge ID If you wish to report on the activity associated with a specific badge, enter the Badge ID here. This field is available only for applicable report types.

Report All

Report All/__ selected

Reader listing window

If this button is pushed, all entries in the Reader list are deselected. “Report All” is displayed to the left of this button, to indicate that data for all readers will be included in the report.

Indicates “Report All” if no devices are selected in the Reader field. Indicates “__ selected” if one or more devices are selected in the Reader field.

Lists all readers on the system and the access panel to which each is attached.

Clear

Print

Preview

Help

To select/deselect a reader, click on the icon beside it. A checkmark on an icon indicates that the reader is selected. Only data from selected readers will be included in the report.

However, if no devices are selected, data for all readers will be reported.

Clears all current filter criteria.

Displays the Print Report Options window.

Displays the selected report with selected criteria in the Report Print Preview window.


Use restored records If this check box is selected, data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events/transactions in the database, rather than from the current “live” events/ transactions.

Close


Restoring form of the Archives folder. For more information refer to the Archives Folder in the System Administration User Guide.


Reader Reports Form Procedures

Run a Reader Report

1. Select Reports from Administration View menu. The Reports folder opens.

2. Select the Reader Reports tab.

3. From the listing window, select the report that you want to run.

4. In the Reader Filter section, select the icon(s) corresponding to the reader(s) whose data you wish to include in the report. If you don’t select any readers, data for all readers will be reported.

5. If desired, specify a date/time interval for gathering data in the Date/Time

Filter section. Only data gathered during the specified period will be

332 —

revision 1


Note:

included in the report. To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval, select the Apply start and end time to each day check box.

6. In the Cardholder Filter section, enter the person’s Last Name, First

Name, and/or Badge ID if you want the report to contain data pertaining only to cardholders having the specified name and/or badge ID (cardholder name and badge ID is applicable only to reader reports based on events).

7. Click either the [Print] or [Preview] button depending on which function you

wish to perform. For more information, refer to Chapter 19: Report Print

Preview Window on page 365.

Only data that’s currently in the database can be included in the report.

Events or other transactions deleted because of space limitations or elapsed time are no longer available.

Alarm Panel Reports Form

Alarm Panel Reports Form Overview

This form allows you to add filtering criteria to an alarm panel report, so that you can narrow the results of your report. Depending on the type of report you select, you can optionally add a filter on alarm panel(s), start date/time, and end date/ time.

revision 1

— 333


Alarm Panel Reports Form Field Table

Reports Folder - Alarm Panel Reports Form

Form Element

Listing window

Today

Start

Comment

Lists currently defined alarm panel reports, and each report’s type. Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type.







• Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report. To change the year, click on the name of the displayed year and use the spin buttons .


• Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start time check box and choosing a specific start time.

Highlight the hour, minutes, or seconds by clicking on them. Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value. To change from AM to PM, highlight

AM by clicking on it, and use the spin buttons.

334 —

revision 1


Reports Folder - Alarm Panel Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

End

Comment




• Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report. To change the year, click on the name of the year to access the spin buttons .




Highlight the hour, minutes, or seconds by clicking on them. Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value. To change from AM to PM, highlight

AM by clicking on it, and use the spin buttons.


Report All

Report All

/__ selected


• If this box is checked, the report will include only data collected during the hours of 8:00

AM through 7:00 PM, on any and all days between January 1 and March 31.



If this button is pushed, all entries in the Alarm Panel list are deselected. “Report All” is displayed to the left of this button, to indicate that data for all readers will be included in the report.

Indicates “Report All” if no devices are selected in the Alarm Panel field. Indicates “__ selected” if one or more devices are selected in the Alarm Panel field.

revision 1

— 335


Reports Folder - Alarm Panel Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

Alarm Panel listing window

Comment

Lists all alarm panels on the system and the access panel to which each is attached.

Clear

Print

Preview

Help

Use restored records

To select/deselect an alarm panel, click on the icon beside it. A checkmark on an icon indicates that the alarm panel is selected. Only data from selected alarm panels will be included in the report. However, if no devices are selected, data for all alarm panels will be reported.





If this check box is selected, data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events/transactions in the database, rather than from the current “live” events/ transactions.

Close


Restoring form of the Archives folder. For more information refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.


Alarm Panel Reports Form Procedures

Run an Alarm Panel Report


2. Select the Alarm Panel Reports tab.

3. From the listing window, select the report that you want to run.

4. If desired, specify a date/time interval for gathering data in the Date/Time

Filter section. Only data gathered during the specified period will be included in the report. To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval, select the Apply start and end time to each day check box.

5. In the Alarm Panel Filter section, select the icon(s) corresponding to the alarm panel(s) whose data you wish to include in the report. If you don’t select any alarm panels, or click [Report All], data for all alarm panels will be reported.




336 —

revision 1


Note:



Anti-Passback Reports Form

Anti-Passback Reports Form Overview

This form allows you to add filtering criteria to an anti-passback report, so that you can narrow the results of your report. Depending on the type of report you select, you can optionally add a filter on area(s), start date/time, end date/time, badge ID and/or cardholder name.

revision 1

— 337


Anti-Passback Reports Form Field Table

Reports Folder - Anti-Passback Reports Form

Form Element

Listing window

Today

Start

Comment

Lists currently defined anti-passback reports, and each report(s) type. Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type.











338 —

revision 1


Reports Folder - Anti-Passback Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

End

Comment








Cardholder Filter

Last Name








Includes the Last Name, First Name, and Badge ID fields. These fields are available only for applicable report types. These fields are not case-sensitive and will match any names beginning with the characters you type (much like the Cardholder form searches). For example, typing “smith” for Last Name will match “Smith”, “SMITHY”, “smithereen”, etc.

Enter the cardholder’s last name.

revision 1

— 339


Reports Folder - Anti-Passback Reports Form (Continued)


First Name

Badge ID

Enter the cardholder’s first name.

If you wish to report on the activity associated with a specific badge, enter the Badge ID here. This field is available only for applicable report types.

Report All

Report All /__ selected

If this button is pushed, all entries in the Area list are deselected. “Report All” is displayed to the left of this button, to indicate that data for all areas will be included in the report.

Indicates “Report All” if no entries are selected in the Area field. Indicates “__ selected” if one or more entries are selected in the Area field.

Area listing window Lists all anti-passback areas defined on the system, and the access panel associated with each.

Clear

Print

Preview

To select/deselect an area, click on the icon beside it. A checkmark on an icon indicates that the area is selected. Only data pertaining to selected areas will be included in the report.

However, if no entries are selected, data for all areas will be reported.




Help Displays relevant on-screen help for this form.


Close




Anti-Passback Reports Form Procedures

Run an Anti-Passback Report


2. Select the Anti-Passback Reports tab.

3. In the reports listing window, select the icon that corresponds to the report you wish to run.

4. Complete the Date/Time Filter section to specify a date/time interval for gathering data. Only data gathered during the specified period will be

340 —

revision 1


Note:

included in the report. To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval, select the Apply start and end time to each day check box.

5. In the Cardholder Filter section, enter the person’s Last Name, First

Name, and/or Badge ID if you want the report to contain data pertaining only to cardholders having the specified name or badge ID.

6. In the Area Filter section, select the icon(s) corresponding to the antipassback area(s) whose data you wish to include in the report. If you don’t select any areas, or click [Report All], data for all areas will be reported.






Date/Time Reports Form

Date/Time Reports Form Overview

This form allows you to add filtering criteria to a date/time report, so that you can narrow the results of your report.

revision 1

— 341


Date/Time Reports Form Field Table

Reports Folder - Date/Time Reports Form

Form Element

Listing window

Today

Start

Comment

Lists currently defined date/time reports, and each report(s) type. Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type.











342 —

revision 1


Reports Folder - Date/Time Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

End

Comment








Badge ID

Text Field Filter








If you wish to report on the activity associated with a specific badge, enter the Badge ID here. This field is available only for applicable report types.

Includes the Where and Match criteria fields, as well as a Blank field. This section is enabled only when a report that allows filtering is selected in the listing window.

revision 1

— 343


Reports Folder - Date/Time Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

Where

Comment

You can now add a text filter to the following:

Match criteria (Set to

Contains by default.

May also be set to

Begins With, Ends

With, or Equals)

Blank field

• Action Type, Details, or Object for User Transactions reports

• Alarm Acknowledgment text for Alarm Acknowledgments reports

When this section is enabled, the Where field contains the attribute in B.A.S.I.S. that is to be filtered.

If enabled, the Match criteria drop-down list may be changed from its default value of contains to Begins With, Ends With, or Equals. This setting specifies how the selection in the Where field relates to the value entered to search for in the Blank field.

In this field, type the value you wish to filter or search for.

For example, if you wanted to display all User Transactions associated with System

Administration, you should:

1. Select a User Transaction Log report in the listing window.

2. In the Where field, select “Object”.

3. In the Match criteria field, select “Equals”.

4. In the blank field, type “System Administration” (without the quotes).

Click [Preview], and only those entries associated with System Administration will be displayed in the resulting report.



Clear

Print

Preview

Help




Close




344 —

revision 1


Date/Time Reports Form Procedures

Run a Date/Time Report


2. Select the Date/Time Reports tab.


4. Complete the Date/Time Filter section to specify a date/time interval for gathering data. Only data gathered during the specified period will be included in the report. To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval, select the Apply start and end time to each day check box.

5. Enter a Badge ID if you want the report to contain data pertaining only to cardholders having the specified name or badge ID.

6. Complete the Text Field Filter section. (This section is optional, and is only enabled for User Transactions reports and Alarm Acknowledgment reports.) a. Select a value to filter in the Where field.

• If the report you are running is a User Transactions report and you wish to apply a filter, select Action Type, Details, or Object in the

Where field.

• If the report you are running is an Alarm Acknowledgment report and you wish to apply a filter, select Alarm Acknowledgment in the

Where field.

b. In the next drop-down list, select whether the filter criteria Begins

With, Contains, Ends With or Equals the value that you will enter in the next blank field.

c. In the blank field, type the value you wish to filter for.




Note:



revision 1

— 345


Event Reports Form

Note:

On the Event Reports form, any report in the reports listing window that has

“Cardholder” listed in the Type(s) column is available on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder. This means that a report can be generated on the

Reports form in the Cardholders folder based on a cardholder search operation.

Event Reports Form Overview

This form allows you to add filtering criteria to an event report, so that you can narrow the results of your report.

346 —

revision 1


Event Reports Form Field Table

Reports Folder - Event Reports Form

Form Element

Listing window

Today

Start

Comment

Lists currently defined event reports, and each report’s type(s). Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type.











revision 1

— 347


Reports Folder - Event Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

End

Comment








Report All (panels)

Report All /

__ selected








If this button is pushed, all entries in the Panel list are deselected. “Report All” is displayed to the left of this button, to indicate that data for all access panels will be included in the report.

Indicates “Report All” if no entries are selected in the Panel field. Indicates “__ selected” if at least one entry is selected in the Panel field.

348 —

revision 1


Reports Folder - Event Reports Form (Continued)


Panel listing window Lists all panels in the system. An icon that indicates the panel’s type precedes each entry.

Report All (events)

If your installation uses segmentation, the segment assignment is listed for each entry.

If this button is pushed, all entries in the Event list are deselected. “Report All” is displayed to the left of this button, to indicate that data for all events for the selected Event Type will be included in the report.

Indicates “Report All” if no entries are selected in the Event field. Indicates “__ selected” if at least one entry is selected in the Event field.

Report All /

__ selected

Event Type Can be used to filter all events of a particular type. For example, if you select the “All Events

Over Time” report and select an Event Type of “Fire”, an “All Fire Events Over Time” report will effectively be created.

Event listing window Lists currently defined events for the selected Event Type, and each event’s type.

Clear

Print

Preview

Help






Close




revision 1

— 349


Event Reports Form Procedures

Run an Event Report


2. Select the Event Reports tab.



5. In the Access Panel Filter section, select the icon(s) corresponding to the panel(s) whose data you wish to include in the report. If you don’t select any panels, or click [Report All], data for all panels will be reported.

6. In the Event Filter section, select an Event Type.

7. In the Event listing window, select the icon(s) corresponding to the event(s) whose data you wish to include in the report.

• If you select “<All>” in the Event Type field, data for all events will be reported.

• If you click [Report All], data for all events of the selected Event Type will be reported.




Note:



350 —

revision 1

Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form


Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Overview

The Alarm Acknowledgment Reports form is designed to provide reports on acknowledged alarms. These reports can be filtered by the date/time the acknowledgment occurred, the device that triggered the alarm, and the operator who acknowledged the alarm. When you select a filter, the report displays alarm acknowledgments for only the filtered device. If you want to view everything, use the convenient [Report All] button.

The result of the report includes the following:

• Date and time this report was created

• Date and time the alarm occurred

• Date and time the alarm was acknowledged

• Who acknowledged the alarm

• Any notes included with the acknowledgment

• The device that caused the alarm

• The total number of acknowledgments

Notes:

The details column does not report who acknowledged the alarm, but rather who was logged into Alarm Monitoring when the alarm was acknowledged.

Therefore, someone other than the person logged into Alarm Monitoring may have acknowledged the alarm.

The first and last name displayed in the details column are configured in the

System Administration Users folder.

revision 1

— 351


Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Field Table

Reports Folder - Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form

Form Element

Listing window

Today

Start

Comment

Lists currently defined alarm acknowledgment reports, and each report’s type(s). Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type.





Start



• Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report. To change the year, click on the name of the displayed year to access the spin buttons .





352 —

revision 1


Reports Folder - Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

End

Comment


End



• Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report. To change the year, click on the name of the year to access the spin buttons .




Report All

Filter by








Reports every alarm acknowledgment and does not apply any filter.

Select one device you want the report based on. The report displays the alarm acknowledgments only for the device you select.

revision 1

— 353


Reports Folder - Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form (Continued)


Filter listing window Select one or multiple filters for the report. The filters that display in this window depend on what you select in the Filter by drop-down list.

Clear

Print

Preview

Help

The report displays the alarm acknowledgments for only the devices you select.






Close




Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Procedures

Run an Alarm Acknowledgment Report


2. Select the Alarm Acknowledgment Reports tab.

3. In the listing window, select the report you wish to run.


5. In the Filter by drop-down list, select the device whose data you wish to include in the report. If you don’t select any device, or if you click [Report

All], data for every device will be reported.

6. In the Filter listing window, select the device(s) whose data you wish to include in the report.




354 —

revision 1


Note:



revision 1

— 355


Receiver Account Zone Reports Form

Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Overview

This form allows you to add filtering criteria to a receiver account zone report, so that you can narrow the results of your report.

356 —

revision 1


Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Field Table

Reports Folder - Receiver Account Zone Reports Form

Form Element

Listing window

Today

Start

Comment

Lists currently defined alarm acknowledgment reports, and each report’s type(s). Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type.





Start








revision 1

— 357


Reports Folder - Receiver Account Zone Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

End

Comment


End







Report All (account zones)

Report All/___ selected








If this button is pushed, all entries in the Account Zone list are deselected. “Report All” is displayed to the left of this button, to indicate that data for all account zones will be included in the report.

Indicates “Report All” if no entries are selected in the Account Zone field. Indicates “__ selected” if at least one entry is selected in the Account Zone field.

358 —

revision 1


Reports Folder - Receiver Account Zone Reports Form (Continued)

Form Element

Account Zone listing window

Comment

Lists all account zones in the system. An icon that indicates the account zone’s type precedes each entry.

Clear

Print

Preview

Help

If your installation uses segmentation, the segment assignment is listed for each entry.






Close




Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Procedures

Run a Receiver Account Zone Report


2. Select the Receiver Account Zone Reports tab.

3. In the listing window, select the icon that corresponds to the report you wish to run.


5. In the Account Zone Filter section, select the icon(s) corresponding to the account zone(s) whose data you wish to include in the report. If you don’t select any account zones, or if you click [Report All], data for all account zones will be reported.




revision 1

— 359


Note:



360 —

revision 1


Chapter 18: Print Report Options Window

Toolbar Shortcut

From the Print Report Options window, you can:

• Choose a destination for the report. Choices include:

– Preview Window (the default)

– Direct Export to a File

– Directly to a Printer

• Update the subtitle used for the report

This window is displayed by clicking the [Print] button on the Reports form or the Print toolbar button while a report is displayed.

revision 1

— 361

18: Print Report Options Window

Print Report Options Window

362 —

revision 1


Print Report Options Window Field Table

Print Report Options Window

Form Element

Print Destination

Print to a Preview

Window

Export Directly to a File

Print Directly to a

Printer

Printer drop-down list

Prompt for

Number of Pages

Comment

Includes the Print to a Preview Window, Export Directly to a File and Print Directly to a

Printer radio buttons. Also includes the Printer drop-down list and the Prompt for Number

of Pages check box.

If selected, the Report Print Preview window will be displayed when the [OK] button is clicked. In the Report Print Preview window, you can view the selected report on the screen.

For more information, refer to Chapter 19: Report Print Preview Window

on page 365.

If selected, the Export window will be displayed when the [OK] button is clicked. Choose the report Format and Destination from the drop-down lists.

Depending on what you choose, enter the destination and format information in the corresponding window, then click [OK].

If selected, also select a printer from the Printer drop-down list.

If you select the Prompt for Number of Pages check box, the Print window will be displayed where you can select the print range, number of copies and whether or not to collate your report.

Select a printer in this field for the report to be printed on. This field is enabled for selection only when the Print Directly to a Printer radio button is selected.

All printers currently configured for use are listed.

This field is enabled for selection only when the Print Directly to a Printer radio button is selected.

Report Subtitle

Report Subtitle textbox

OK

Cancel

Help

If selected, the Print window will be displayed where you can select the print range, number of copies and whether or not to collate your report.

Includes the Report Subtitle textbox.

Type the text here that will be displayed as the subtitle on the report.

Prints the report using the options you selected.

Closes the Print Report Options window without printing the report.

Displays online help for this form.

Print a Report

1. Select a report from within the Reports folder. Reports are also available in the Cardholders folder (Reports form) and the Assets folder (Reports form).

You can use this procedure to print those reports as well.

revision 1

— 363

18: Print Report Options Window

Toolbar Shortcut

Notes:

The report form is available from within the Reports folder, Cardholders folder and Assets folder for System Administration and ID CredentialCenter.

The report form is only available from the Cardholders folder in Alarm

Monitoring. (View menu > Badge Info > Reports form/tab).

The availability of the Reports folder is subject to licensing restrictions.

2. Select additional criteria if you want the report to include only a specific range of data.

3. Click one of the following:

• The Print button on the Main toolbar

• [Print] button on the form

4. The Print Report Options window opens.

364 —

revision 1

Note:

5. In the Print Destination section, select whether to print to a preview window, export directly to a file or print directly to a printer.

6. If you selected Print Directly to a Printer in the Print Destination section, select a printer in the drop-down list and choose whether to Prompt for

Number of Pages.

If the Linkage Server is running under a local system account it may not have permission to access a network printer (depending on its configuration). If this is the case you must select a local or default network printer. Contact your System Administrator to determine what account the

Linkage Server is running under and the printers it can access.

7. In the Report Subtitle section, type the report subtitle. The subtitle will be displayed below the report title on the report.

8. Click [OK]. The options selected in the Print Destination section will determine where the report is sent.


Chapter 19: Report Print Preview Window

Toolbar Shortcut

Toolbar Shortcut

If you click [Preview] or [Print Preview] while a report form is displayed, the report is automatically printed to the Report Print Preview window.

Previewing a report is done in a window. This allows you to preview multiple reports at the same time. It also means that while the report is processing, you can do other work. From the Report Print Preview window, you can:

• View an on-screen report created in the Reports folder.

• View an on-screen report created in the Cardholders folder (Reports form),

The Visits folder (Reports form) or the Assets folder (Reports form) via the

Print Report Options window.

• Print a report, save it to a file or send it over electronic mail.

• Search for any textual information in the report.

This window is displayed by:

• Clicking on the [Print Preview] button on any form in the Reports folder.

• Clicking on the Print Preview toolbar button when a report is selected on a form in the Reports folder.

• Clicking [Print] on the form, selecting the Print to a Preview Window radio button on the Print Report Options window, then clicking the [OK] button.

(This is how the Report Print Preview form can be viewed from the Reports form in the Cardholders folder, the Visits folder or the Assets folder.)

revision 1

— 365

19: Report Print Preview Window

Report Print Preview Window

366 —

revision 1


Report Print Preview Window Field Table

Report Print Preview Window

Form Element

Report navigation tree

Preview window

Comment

The display in the left portion of the Report Print Preview window. The report navigation tree lists the records contained in the report, in a hierarchical arrangement.

The information is content-sensitive. The report type determines the entries in the tree.

For example, the default “User Transaction Log” report is arranged in date order, so the tree will contain a list of dates. The tree for the default “Text Instructions” report lists alarms. The

“Access and Denials, by Reader” report has an entry for each queried reader, with subentries by event date.

If the tree has branching entries, you can expand the branches of the tree. When you click an entry in the tree, you move to that section or record in the report. When a section or record is selected via the report navigation tree, that section or record will appear in the preview

window with a blue box border.

For more information, refer to Preview and Print a

Report

on page 368.

The display in the right portion of the Report Print Preview window. The preview window displays up to one full page of the report, depending upon the zoom level set. If a report appears too large for the current window, either adjust the zoom level or use the up, down, left, and right arrow keys to scroll and see the rest of that page of the report.

For reports that contain more than one page, use the arrows or the <Page Up>/<Page Down> keys to navigate through the pages.

Click to displays a Print window from where you can select the page range and number of copies to print, then initiate report printing.

Click to export the report to a file or to your organization’s electronic mail system.

Click to toggle the display of the report navigation tree on or off.

Zoom

Page count

From this drop-down list, you can select the magnification level of the preview window contents, with respect to the actual size. Choices include 400%, 300%, 200%, 150%, 100%,

75%, 50%, 25%, Page Width and Whole Page. Selecting either Page Width or Whole Page displays the corresponding percentage in this field.

You can also type a number directly into this field, but you must then either press <Tab> or click outside of the field for the number to take effect.

Click to move to the first page of the report.

Click to move to the previous page of the report. Another way to do this is to click the <Page

Up> key.

This display indicates the page number of the currently displayed page, followed by the total page count for the report. For example: “2 of 4.”

Click to move to the next page of the report. Another way to do this is to click the <Page

Down> key.

revision 1

— 367


Report Print Preview Window (Continued)


Click to move to the last page of the report.

Click to terminate the report building process. This button is especially useful if the report is lengthy and you want to view only part of it.

Click to display the Search window from where you can perform a text search of the report.

When you enter text in the Find what field (in the Search window) and click [Find Next], the view jumps to the first occurrence of the requested text or a message is displayed if no match was found.

Report Print Preview Window Right-click Options

While viewing a report in the Report Print Preview Window there are a number of right-click options and identifiers that appear depending on what section of the report is highlighted.

• Field: Tells you what field is currently selected.

• Text: Tells you whether the current selection is text.

• Copy: Copy the information into the clipboard.

• Freeze Pane: Freezes the section of the pane so you continue to see the information as you scroll.

• Unfreeze Pane: Unfreezes the pane so the page scrolls normally

Report Print Preview Window Procedures

Preview and Print a Report

1. Select a report from within the Reports folder.

Note:

Reports are also available on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder,

Visits folder and Assets folder. However, the Print Preview toolbar button and the [Preview] button on the form are disabled or “grayed out.” Instead, the Print toolbar button or the [Print] button on the form are used to preview

and print reports from these forms. For more information, refer to Print a

Report on page 363.

2. Select additional criteria if you want the report to include only a specific range of data.

3. Click one of the following:

368 —

revision 1

Toolbar Shortcut


• The Print Preview button on the Main toolbar.

• The [Print] button, select the Print to a Preview Window radio button and then click [OK].

• The [Preview] button on the form.

4. If the chosen report has been password-protected, type the correct password when prompted to do so, then click [OK].

5. The Report Print Preview window is displayed.

• On the left, the report navigation tree may have branching entries.

– If the tree has branching entries, expand that branch of the tree.

– Click an entry in the tree to move to that section or record in the report. When a section or record is selected via the report navigation tree, that section or record will appear in the preview window with a blue box border. For example:

• On the right, the preview window will show the first page of the report as it will look when it is printed. Click a section or record in the preview window. When a section or record is selected in the preview window, that section or record will appear in the preview window with a blue box border.

• Click and drag the split bar to resize the report navigation tree and the preview window relative to each other.

• Click the button to hide the report navigation tree and maximize the space used for the preview window.

6. Use the , , and buttons or the <Page Down>/<Page Up> keys to view other pages of the report.

7. Select an option from the zoom drop-down list to change the size of the display. You can instead type a number directly into this field, but you must then either press <Tab> or click outside of the field for the number to take

revision 1

— 369


effect. If a report page is still too large for the window, you can use the up, down, left, and right arrow keys to scroll and see the rest of the page.

8. To save the report to a file on your computer or to send the report to someone using your company’s electronic mail system, select the

Export window is displayed.

button. The

• Select the format that you want to send the report in from the Format drop-down list.

• In t to an application, a disk file, an exchange folder, a Lotus Notes database or your electronic mail system (if you have one).

• Click [OK] and follow the instructions

9. To print the report from within the Report Print Preview window: a. Click the button. The Print window is displayed from where you can select which pages to print and the number of copies.

b. Select one of the following:

• The All radio button to print the entire report without user intervention.

• The Pages radio button and enter a page range.

c. A message box will be displayed to indicate the status of the print operation.

Search a Report for Specific Information

Note:

1. To search through the report for specific information, click the button.

2. The Search window is displayed. In the Find what field, type the word, contiguous words or number you wish to locate in the report.

The search is not case-sensitive.

3. Click [Find Next].

4. One of two things will happen:

• If the requested information was found, the preview window display will move to the first occurrence of it.

• If the information is not contained in the report, a message box will be displayed.

5. If the requested information was found, click [Find Next] to move through successive occurrences of it.

370 —

revision 1


Chapter 20: Guard Tour

Checkpoints are designated stops along a tour.

A late event means the checkpoint was reached after its maximum time expired. An overdue event means the checkpoint has not yet been reached.

Note:

Guard tour provides a guard (a cardholder who has been specifically chosen to conduct a tour) with a defined set of tasks that must be performed within a specified period of time. Typical tasks include swiping a card at a checkpoint access reader or turning a key connected to an alarm panel input.

Guard tour records the location and timestamp for each checkpoint visited by the tour guard. The Checkpoint Time represents the time it should take to reach a particular checkpoint. All checkpoints have minimum and maximum checkpoint times. A guard tour event is generated if a checkpoint is missed, reached early, on time, late, out of sequence or overdue.

A tour is considered complete when one of the following actions occurs:

• All of the checkpoints on the tour are reached, even if they are reached out of sequence or some checkpoints are missed

• The tour is acknowledged as complete at a monitoring station

• The tour is terminated at a monitoring station

System Administrator procedures to set up a Guard Tour are located in the

Guard Tour Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

revision 1

— 371

20: Guard Tour

Start Guard Tour Form

Button

Select Tour listing window

Select Guard

Function

Displays a list of configured Guard Tours. Click a tour to select it. A checkmark displays beside a tour when it is selected.

Displays a list of guards. Select a guard to perform the Guard Tour. The list of Guards can be filtered by selecting the show guards with proper security clearance level radio button.

Limits the guards displayed in the Select guard listing to the guards with authorization to perform the selected guard tour.

Show guards with proper security clearance level

Show all guards

Enter badge ID

Manually

Tour Instructions

Displays all the guards in the Select guard listing.

Provides you the option to enter the badge ID of the guard instead of selecting a guard from the

Select guard list.

Displays the Tour Instructions window which contains specific instructions for the selected tour. From the Tour Instructions window you can print the instructions.

372 —

revision 1

Guard Tour Live Tracking Form


Button

Terminate

Force Complete

View Instructions

Add Tour Note

Show Video

Function

Stops a tour before it is completed (before all of the checkpoints have been reached). When this button is selected, a “Guard Tour Terminated” event is generated.

Manually completes a tour. For example, the [Force Complete] button could be used to end a tour that otherwise could not be completed because of a card that could not be swiped at a reader (a checkpoint) that was in “unlocked” mode.

Displays special instructions that were written for this tour when it was configured in the

System Administration application.

Adds a note to an event. For example, you can add a note explaining why a particular checkpoint was reached late.

Displays live video of the tour as it progresses. (This button is displayed only when the tour is configured to show video.

Guard Tour Events Table

Event

Guard Tour

Initiated

Guard Tour

Completed

Description

Generated when a tour is launched from a monitoring station.

Generated when all checkpoints on a tour have a “Checkpoint Reached on Time” status.

Otherwise, a “Guard Tour Completed with Errors” event is generated.

revision 1

— 373

20: Guard Tour

Guard Tour Events Table

Event

Guard Tour

Completed with

Errors

Guard Tour

Cancelled

Guard Tour

Terminated

Checkpoint reached out of

Sequence

Checkpoint

Missed

Checkpoint

Reached on Time

Description

Generated when the last checkpoint has been reached but one or more checkpoints were not reached on time or were missed altogether.

Generated when the scheduled automatic guard tour is cancelled before the tour was started.

Generated when the [Terminate] button is selected in the Guard Tour Live Tracking window.

Generated when a checkpoint is hit ahead of schedule on a tour (i.e., it is supposed to be hit later in a tour).

When a checkpoint is assigned a status of “Checkpoint reached out of sequence”, the

“Checkpoint Missed” event is generated for all previous checkpoints that have a status of

“Checkpoint Not Reached.”

Generated when a checkpoint is hit between its minimum and maximum checkpoint times.

Checkpoint

Reached Early

Note:

Checkpoint reached events are:

• Generated for readers in all modes except “locked” and “unlocked” on Apollo panels.

• Generated when any inputs that are used as checkpoints are activated.

Generated when a checkpoint is the next checkpoint on a tour and is hit before its minimum checkpoint time has elapsed.

Checkpoint

Overdue

Checkpoint

Reached Late

Note:




Generated when a checkpoint’s maximum checkpoint time has elapsed and the guard has not yet arrived.

Generated for a checkpoint when its maximum checkpoint time has elapsed and it is then hit.

Note:




Readers on Apollo panels in “locked” and “unlocked” modes will not report cardholder events. Therefore, although those readers may be included within a guard tour, the status of those checkpoints will not be updated within the live tracing of the tour. Furthermore, since the status of a checkpoint reader in the “locked” or “unlocked” mode cannot be updated, tours containing such checkpoints will generate a “Completed With Errors with Errors” event when finished.

Guard Tour Form Procedures

The following procedures in this section are:

374 —

revision 1


•

Launch a Guard Tour

•

Schedule an Automatic Guard Tour Action

•

Respond to an Automatic Guard Tour

•

View a Guard Tour

Launch a Guard Tour

1. Start the Linkage Server by clicking the Start button, then selecting

Programs > B.A.S.I.S. ET690 > Linkage Server.

2. Open the Select Guard Tour window by completing one of the following:

• From t

Toolbar Shortcut

• Click the down arrow on the Guard Tour toolbar button and select

Launch Tour.

• Right-click a tour name in the system status tree and select Launch

Tour.

3. Select a tour in the Tour listing window.

Note:

You can click [Tour Instructions] to see if any special instructions exist for this tour. These instructions are written when the tour is configured in


Note:

4. If you know the badge ID of the tour guard, select the Enter badge ID

manually radio button and type in their ID.

Otherwise select the Select guard radio button and complete the following: a. Select the Show guards with proper security clearance level radio button to limit the number of tour guards to choose from or select the

Show all guards radio button to list all tour guards, regardless of their security clearance levels.

b. Click a tour guard entry in the Name listing window to select it.

5. Click [OK]. The Guard Tour Live Tracking window opens.

6. At this time, the tour guard can begin the tour. As the tour progresses, the status of checkpoints and generated events display in the Guard Tour Live

Tracking window. For more information, refer to Guard Tour Events Table on page 373.

Checkpoints can be predecessors or successors. A predecessor checkpoint is any checkpoint occurring before other checkpoints on a tour. For example: a tour has three stops. Checkpoints one and two are the predecessors to checkpoint three. A successor checkpoint is any checkpoint occurring after other checkpoints on a tour. For example: a tour has three stops. Checkpoints two and three are successors to checkpoint one.

7. When a tour is completed, the Guard Tour Live Tracking window displays the status of the tour and the events that were generated.

revision 1

— 375

20: Guard Tour

Schedule an Automatic Guard Tour Action

Assuming your System Administrator has configured a Guard Tour (in System

Administration) you can schedule an automatic guard tour action (in Alarm

Monitoring). This means that using the Scheduler you can set B.A.S.I.S. to automatically launch a Guard Tour on at a specific date and time as well as on a regular basis.

1. Open the Scheduler by clicking the Scheduler toolbar button or selecting

Scheduler from View menu.

2. Click [Add].

3. The Add Action Wizard window displays. In the Category pane select

Action Types. In the Objects pane select Automatic Guard Tour.

4. Click [Next].

5. The Automatic Guard Tour Properties window displays. Select a tour or tour group.

6. Select the Monitoring stations to be notified.

7. Click the Schedule tab.

8. Select the World time zone.

9. If the automatic Guard Tour is a single occurrence select the One time radio button and set the start date and time.

10. If the automatic Guard Tour will occur several times click the Recurring radio button and click [Change].

a. Set how often you want the Guard Tour to occur and the start and end dates. b. Click [OK].

c. The frequency settings display in the in the Recurring pane on the schedule tab.

11. Click [OK].

376 —

revision 1


Respond to an Automatic Guard Tour

1. When an automatic Guard Tour is started, Alarm Monitoring displays a

Scheduler Action Executed

alarm and you prompts you to start the Guard

Tour.

2. Click [OK].

3. The Start Guard Tour window displays with the guard tour name selected.

Select the guard (person) to complete the tour by either selecting the guard from the list provided or entering the guard’s badge ID.

4. Click [OK].

5. While the Guard Tour is active you can monitor the Guard Tour status by selecting Control > Guard Tour > View from the main menu.

6. The Guard Tour Live Tracking window display information such as the badge ID of the person performing the Guard Tour, the checkpoint statuses, tour history as well as the ability to view instructions and video.

View a Guard Tour

1. Start the Linkage Server by clicking the Start button, then selecting

Programs > B.A.S.I.S. ET690 > Linkage Server.

2. Open the Select Guard Tour window by completing one of the following:

• From t

• Click the down arrow on the Guard Tour toolbar button and select

Launch Tour.

3. The View Guard Tour window opens. Select the tour and click [OK].

revision 1

— 377

20: Guard Tour

Checkpoint Status and Events Diagram

Guard Tour completed/

Guard Tour cancelled/

Guard Tour terminated/ successor hit first

Guard Tour initiated

Checkpoint not reached

Checkpoint hit before minimum time

Checkpoint

Missed

Guard Tour completed/

Guard Tour cancelled/

Guard Tour terminated/ successor hit first

Checkpoint maximum time expired

Checkpoint hit before predecessor

Checkpoint

Reached

Early

Checkpoint hit between minimum time and maximum time

Checkpoint

Reached out of

Sequence

Checkpoint

Overdue

Checkpoint

Reached on

Time

Checkpoint hit

Checkpoint

Reached

Late

378 —

revision 1


Chapter 21: Scheduler Folder

Note:

The Scheduler folder contains the Scheduler form with which you can schedule actions.

Additional documentation on actions is available in the Actions appendix.

For more information, refer to Appendix A: Actions on page 393.

Toolbar Shortcut

This folder is displayed by selecting Scheduler from the View menu.

Important:

For the Scheduler to run and execute action the Linkage Server needs to be configured and running. You can configure the Linkage Server host on the

General System Options Form in System Administration.

revision 1

— 379

21: Scheduler Folder

Scheduler Form

Scheduler Folder - Scheduler Form

Form Element

Service status

Host name

Current time in

Listing window

Add

Modify

Delete

Help

Close

Comment

Lists the status of the LS Linkage Server host and whether it’s running or not. This is displayed only when the LS Linkage Server host is configured.

Lists the name of the host computer. This is displayed only when the Linkage Server host is configured.

When scheduling an action, select which time zone you want the action to be scheduled in.

The selections in the drop-down list are listed sequentially and each includes:

• The world time zone’s clock time relative to Greenwich Mean Time. For example,

(GMT+05:00) indicates that the clock time in the selected world time zone is 5 hours ahead of the clock time in Greenwich, England.

• The name of one or more countries or cities that are located in that world time zone.

Displays a list of all scheduled actions.

Click this button to open the Add Action Wizard.

Click this button to modify the selected scheduled action.

Click this button to delete the selected scheduled action.

Click this button to display online assistance for this form.

Click this button to close the Scheduler folder.

380 —

revision 1


Scheduler Form Procedures

Add and Schedule an Action

1. Select Scheduler from the View menu. The Scheduler folder opens.

2. Click [Add]. The Add Action Wizard opens.

Note:

You can also display the Add Action Wizard by right-clicking anywhere on the Scheduler form and selecting the Add Action menu option.

3. Select either “Action Types” or “Action Group Library” from the Category listing window.

• When “Action Types” is selected, the Objects listing window lists all available action types.

• When “Action Group Library” is selected, the Objects listing window lists all action groups which have been either created in or saved to the

revision 1

— 381


action group library. For more information refer to the Action Group

Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

4. Click on an entry in the Objects listing window to select it.

5. Click [Next]. Depending on which Category/Object combination you chose

in steps 3 and

4

, a corresponding action properties window will open.

For example, if you selected “Action Types” in the Category listing window and “Archive/Purge Database” in the Objects listing window, then the

Archive/Purge Database Properties window would open.

6. Click the Schedule tab. The Schedule form is displayed.

The Schedule form is the same in every action properties window that is accessed via the Scheduler folder.

7. From the World time zone drop-down list, select which time zone you want the action to be scheduled in. The selections in the drop-down list are listed sequentially and each includes:

• The world time zone’s clock time relative to Greenwich Mean Time. For example, (GMT+05:00) indicates that the clock time in the selected

382 —

revision 1


world time zone is 5 hours ahead of the clock time in Greenwich,

England.

• The name of one or more countries or cities that are located in that world time zone.

8. If you want to schedule the action to occur more than once, skip this step and proceed to step

9 . If you want to schedule the action to occur once:

a. Select the One time radio button.

b. In the On date field, the current date is entered by default, but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field or by selecting a date from the drop-down calendar.




• Once you have selected a month and a year, click on the day that you want the action to occur.

c. In the At time field, select the time when you want this action to occur.

Proceed to step 10

.

9. If you want to schedule the action to occur more than once: a. Select the Recurring radio button.

b. Click [Change]. The Edit Recurring Action Schedule window opens.

revision 1

— 383


384 —

revision 1

c. Do one of the following:

• Select the Daily radio button in the Occurs section if you want the action to occur on a daily basis.

If you want the action to occur every day, in the Daily section, type the number 1 in the Every___day(s) field. If you want the action to occur every other day, type the number 2 and so on.

• Select the Weekly radio button in the Occurs section if you want the action to occur on a weekly basis.

If you want the action to occur every week, in the Weekly section, type the number 1 in the Every___week(s) on field. If you want the action to occur every other week, type the number 2 and so on. You must also select the check box that corresponds with the day of the week that you want the action to occur.

For example, if you want the action to occur every other Monday, type the number 2 in the Every___week(s) on field and select the

Mon check box.

• Select the Monthly radio button in the Occurs section if you want the action to occur on a monthly basis. Then, do one of the following:

Select the Day___of every___month(s) radio button and type in which day of how many months you want the action to occur.

The following example shows an action being scheduled to occur on the 4th day of every 6th month.

Select the The___of every___month(s) radio button and enter which day of how many months you want the action to occur.


The following example shows an action being scheduled to occur of the 2nd Tuesday of every 3rd month.

d. In the Daily frequency section, do one of the following:

• If you want the action to occur only once on its scheduled day(s), select the Occurs once at___ radio button and enter a time.

The following example shows an action being scheduled to occur at

12:00 PM.

• If you want the action to occur more than once on its scheduled day(s), select the Occurs every___Starting at___Ending at___ radio button and enter the hours that you want the action to occur.

revision 1

— 385


The following example shows an action being scheduled to occur every 2 hours, starting at 9:00 AM and ending at 5:00 PM.

e. Enter the action’s Start date. The current date is entered by default, but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field or by selecting a date from the drop-down calendar.




• Once you have selected a month and a year, click on the day that you want the action to begin occurring.

f. Enter the action’s End date. The current date is entered by default, but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field or by selecting a date from the drop-down calendar.

386 —

revision 1




Note:


• Once you have selected a month and a year, click on the day that you want the action to stop occurring.

You do not have to select an end date. If you do not want to set an end date, select the No end date radio button.

g. Click [OK].

10. Now you must configure the action that you have just scheduled. Select the tab to the left of the Schedule tab (this tab will correspond to the specific

action properties window which you are viewing). For more information, refer to Appendix A: Actions on page 393.

Display the Scheduler Right-Click Menu

1. Right-click on a scheduled action in the listing window. The scheduler rightclick menu is displayed.

Note:

If you right-click anywhere on the Scheduler form when a scheduled action is not selected in the listing window, the scheduler right-click menu will look like this:

revision 1

— 387


Add and Schedule an Action Using the Scheduler Right-

Click Menu

1. Right-click anywhere on the Scheduler form. The scheduler right-click menu is displayed.

2. Select the Add Action menu option. The Add Action Wizard opens.

3. Proceed to step 3 of the “Add and Schedule an Action” procedure in this

chapter.

Start an Action


2. Select the Start Action menu option to start the selected action immediately.

Stop an Action


2. Select the Stop Action menu option to stop the selected action immediately.

View Action History


2. Select the View Action History menu option. The Action History window opens and the name of the action, when the action was run, the result, the application and any errors or messages that resulted from the action are all displayed.

388 —

revision 1


View the Current Status of an Action


2. Select the View Current Status menu option. A message similar to the following will be displayed:

Refresh an Action


2. Select the Refresh Action menu option. The listing window will be updated to display the most current information for the selected action.

Refresh all Actions

1. Right-click anywhere on the Scheduler form except on a scheduled action in the listing window. The scheduler right-click menu is displayed.

2. Select the Refresh All Actions menu option. The listing window will be updated to display the most current information for all of the scheduled actions.

Delete a Scheduled Action using the Scheduler Right-

Click Menu


2. Select the Delete Action menu option. A confirmation message is displayed.

3. Click [Yes].

Note:

Selecting the Delete Action right-click menu option does the same thing as selecting an action in the listing window, and then clicking [Delete] on the

Scheduler form.

revision 1

— 389


Modify a Scheduled Action using the Scheduler Right-

Click Menu


2. Select the Modify Action menu option. Depending on which action you selected in the listing window, a corresponding action properties window will open.

3. Make the changes you want to the fields. For more information, refer to

Appendix A: Actions on page 393.

4. Click [OK].

Note:

Selecting the Modify Action right-click menu option does the same thing as selecting an action in the listing window, then clicking the [Modify] button on the Scheduler form.

390 —

revision 1

Appendices


Appendix A: Actions

Important:

Actions can be added (configured) through the Action Group Library, Scheduler,

Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O folders in System

Administration. Actions can also be added through the Scheduler in Alarm

Monitoring.

If you add an action through the Scheduler or Guard Tour folder, you can also schedule the action to execute routinely or once. To manually execute an action you can right-click a device in Alarm Monitoring > System Status window.

This appendix describes how to add (configure) an action to your B.A.S.I.S. system.

For the Scheduler to be able to execute actions the Linkage Server must be configured and running. You can configure the Linkage Server host on the

General System Options form in the System Options folder in System

Administration or ID CredentialCenter.

General Actions Procedures

Specify the Number of Simultaneous Actions

Occasional problems may occur when running a large number of actions at once.

B.A.S.I.S. defaults the limit of simultaneous actions to fifty but that can be changed in the ACS.INI file.

To change the ACS.INI file to override the default limit on simultaneous actions:

1. Click the Start button, then select Run.

2. In the Run dialog box type:

ACS.INI

3. In the ACS.INI file find the [Service] section and add the line:

“MaxNumberActionThreads=<Number of actions>” without the quotes and where the “Number of actions” equals the number of simultaneous actions you want to occur.

Open an Action Properties Window

Refer to the following procedures to open an action properties window through various folders in System Administration and Alarm Monitoring.

revision 1

— 393

A: Actions

Toolbar Shortcut

Using Action Group Library

Note:

The Action Group Library folder can be used to group actions. To schedule a group of actions or configure a group of actions based on incoming events, guard tour related conditions, or acknowledged alarms, you can use the action type called “Action group” which is available using the Scheduler,

Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O folders. For more information, refer to Add an Action Group on page 398.

1. In System Administration, select Action Group Library from the


2. Click [Add].

3. The Action Group Properties window is displayed.

4. Enter an action group name and click [Add].

5. The Select Action Type window opens. Select the appropriate action and click [Next]. The Action Properties window opens.

Using the Scheduler

The Scheduler folder can be used to configure actions to occur on a schedule

(reoccurring or one time only). For more information, refer to Chapter 21:

Scheduler Folder on page 379.

1. In System Administration, select Scheduler from the Administration menu. In Alarm Monitoring, click the Scheduler toolbar button.

2. Click [Add]. The Add Action Wizard window displays.

3. In the Category listing window, select “Action Types” and in the Objects listing window, select the appropriate action.

4. Click [Next]. The Action Properties window opens.

394 —

revision 1


Using Global I/O

The Global I/O folder can be used to configure actions to occur based on an incoming event. For more information, refer to the Global I/O Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

1. In System Administration, select Global I/O from the Access Control menu.

2. Select a global linkage.

3. Click [Modify].

4. On the Output Action tab, click [Add].

5. The Add Action Wizard window displays. In the Category listing window, select “Action Types” and in the Objects listing window, select the appropriate action.


Using Guard Tour

The Guard Tour folder can be used to configure actions to occur under certain conditions related to a guard tour. For more information, refer to the Guard Tour

Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

1. In System Administration, select Guard Tour from the Monitoring menu.

You cannot configure an action using the Guard Tour option available in

Alarm Monitoring.

2. On the Tours tab, highlight a tour.

3. Click [Modify].

4. The Tour Wizard window opens. Select (place a checkmark beside) an ID/ hardware device.

5. Click [Next].

6. Click [Add].



revision 1

— 395

A: Actions

Using Acknowledgment Actions

The Acknowledgment Actions folder can be used to configure actions to occur when an alarm is acknowledged. For more information, refer to the Alarm

Configuration Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

1. In System Administration, select Alarms from the Monitoring menu.

2. Click the Acknowledgment Actions tab.

3. Select (place a checkmark beside) an alarm.

4. Click [Modify].

5. In the Actions section, click [Add].



396 —

revision 1


Action Group Properties Window

The Action Group Properties action executes multiple actions simultaneously.

You can display the Action Group Properties window using the Scheduler, Guard

Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O forms. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:

If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder, the window will

also contain the Schedule tab. For more information, refer to Chapter 21:


revision 1

— 397

A: Actions

Action Group Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Description

Action Group

Library

Comment

When adding or modifying an action group, you can enter a description of the action group that is being configured.

When selected, the action group that you are adding or modifying will be available for selection in the Action Group Library. For more information, refer to “Action Groups

Overview” in the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User

Guide.

Displays the action types which have been assigned to the selected action group.

Action Type listing window

Add

Modify

Delete

OK

Cancel

Help

Click this button to add an action type.

Click this button to modify the action type that is selected in the Action Type listing window.

Click this button to delete the action type that is selected in the Action Type listing window from the selected action group.

Click this button to save your changes and exit out of the Action Group Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Action Group Properties window without saving your changes.

Click this button to display online help for this window.

Action Group Properties Window Procedures

Add an Action Group

1. Open the Action Group Properties window using the Scheduler, Guard Tour,

Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to

Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. In the Description field, enter a description of the action group that is being configured.

3. Select the Action Group Library check box if you want this action group to be available for selection in the Action Group Library. For more information, refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System


4. Click [Add]. The Select Action Type window opens.

5. Select an action type and then click [Next]. Depending on which action type you chose, a corresponding action properties window will open.

6. Configure the action type you selected in step 5 . To do this, you must refer to

the action properties windows sections in this chapter for information on each action properties window.

7. Repeat steps 4 6

for each action type you want to assign to this group.

8. Click [OK].

398 —

revision 1


Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties

Window

The Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging action allows you to create an action that will automatically delete certain records after they are a specified number of days old. For example, you can have all Guard Tour History record types deleted when they are 180 days old.

You can display the Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties

window using the Action Group Library or Scheduler. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:

In segmented systems, the Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging action must be applied to all segments.

Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window

Form Element

Number of Days

Action History

Guard Tour

History

OK

Cancel

Comment

The history records older than the number of days selected will be permanently deleted when the action runs.

Select this check box if you want Action History records deleted that are older than the

Number of days setting.

Select this check box if you want Guard Tour History records deleted that are older than the

Number of days setting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Action History/Guard Tour Event

Purging Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties window without adding the action.

revision 1

— 399

A: Actions

Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window

Form Element

Help

Comment


Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties

Window Procedures

Add an Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Action

1. Open the Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging Properties window

using the Scheduler. For more information, refer to Open an Action

Properties Window on page 393.

2. Enter how old (number of days) records can be before they are purged.

3. Choose the type of records you want to delete.

4. Click [OK]. This action is now configured to archive/purge the database using your current archive/purge configurations.

400 —

revision 1


Archive/Purge Database Properties Window

You can display the Archive/Purge Database Properties window using the Action

Group Library or Scheduler. For more information, refer to Open an Action


Note:

In segmented systems, the Archive/Purge Database Properties action must be applied to all segments.

Note:




revision 1

— 401

A: Actions

Archive/Purge Database Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Listing window

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Displays the following message:

“<This action will archive/purge the database using current archive/purge configuration>”

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Archive/Purge Database Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Archive/Purge Database Properties window without adding the action.


Archive/Purge Database Properties Window Procedures

Add an Archive/Purge Database Action

1. Open the Archive/Purge Database Properties window using the Scheduler.

For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. Click [OK]. This action is now configured to archive/purge the database using your current archive/purge configurations. For more information, refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

402 —

revision 1


Arm/Disarm Area Properties Window

You can display the Arm/Disarm Area Properties window using the Action

Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O.


Note:




revision 1

— 403

A: Actions

Arm/Disarm Area Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Listing window

Arm

Arm

Comment

Lists currently enabled intrusion areas. Intrusion areas are configured on the Areas form in the

Intrusion Detection Configuration folder.

When configuring an area as an action, select this radio button if you want the action to be that the area will be armed. When an area is armed, protection for this area is “turned on.” Alarms will be reported within the area (the zones within the area will report alarms when activated).

For example, consider a home burglar system that has sensors on the windows and doors and motion detectors inside. When the owner leaves the home, they arm the system. Alarms will be reported if those windows/doors are opened or if motion is detected.

You must also select an option from the drop-down list. The following terms will help you choose an option.

Instant arm

- some intrusion panels support the notion of both delay arm and instant arm. With instant arm, the area is armed immediately.

Interior

and Perimeter- in higher end intrusion panels, there is the concept of an interior and a perimeter of an area. Various zones within the area are associated with either the interior or the perimeter. Zones that might be associated with the interior are motion detectors placed in the hallways of an office building. Zones that might be associated with the perimeter are sensors on external windows and doors.

Master arm

- when an area is master armed, the entire area is armed. This includes both the perimeter and the interior.

Perimeter arm

- when an area is perimeter armed, only the perimeter is armed. This means that those zones associated with the interior will continue to generate alarms, but those associated with the perimeter will not. This type of arming may be used when an authorized person is inside a building at off hours. They don’t want the interior armed and reporting alarms since they will be moving throughout the interior. However, if somebody else breaches the perimeter of the building (forces open a door, breaks a window, etc.), alarms will be reported. (continued

on next page

)

Partial arm -

arms only those zones that have been configured for partial arming. All other zones in the area will not be armed.

404 —

revision 1


Form Element

Arm (continued)

Disarm

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

For Detection Systems intrusion detection panel types, choices include:

• Arm Entire Partition - arms both the interior and perimeter of the area.

• Perimeter Arm - arms the perimeter of the area.

For Bosch intrusion detection panel types, choices include:

• Master Arm Delay - master (both perimeter and interior) arm (with exit and entry delays) the area.

• Master Arm Instant - master (both perimeter and interior) arms (no delays) the area.

• Perimeter Delay Arm - delay arms all perimeter points in the area.

• Perimeter Instant Arm - instantly arms all perimeter points (no delays) in the area.

For Galaxy intrusion detection panel types, choices include:

• Arm Entire Partition - arms both the interior and perimeter of the area.

• Partial Arm - arms only those zones that have been configured for partial arming. All other zones in the area will not be armed.

When configuring an area as an action, select this radio button if you want the action to be that the area will be disarmed. When an area is disarmed, protection for this area is “turned off.”

Alarms will not be reported within the area.

For example, consider a home burglar system that has sensors on the windows and doors and motion detectors inside. When the owner arrives home, he/she disarms the system so that alarms won’t be reported as they walk around the house.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Arm/Disarm Area Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Arm/Disarm Area Properties window without adding the action.


revision 1

— 405

A: Actions

Arm/Disarm Area Properties Window Procedures

Add an Arm/Disarm Area Action

1. Open the Arm/Disarm Area Properties window using the Action Group

Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O.


2. From the listing window, click on an entry to select it.


• Select the Arm radio button if you want the action to be that the area will be armed. You must also select an option from the drop-down list.

• Select the Disarm radio button if you want the action to be that the area will be disarmed.

Important:

Refer to the Arm/Disarm Area Properties Window Field Table table on page

404 for detailed information on arming and disarming areas.

4. Click [OK].

406 —

revision 1


Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window

You can display the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window using the Action



Note:

If you have accessed the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window via the

Scheduler form, the window will contain both the Automatic Guard Tour form and the Scheduler form.

revision 1

— 407

A: Actions

Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Tour/Tour Group listing window

Single tour

Randomly select tour from group

Monitoring Station listing window

Add

Remove

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Displays a list of the tours and tour groups which have been configured in the system. Tours and tour groups are configured in the Guard Tour folder.

Select this radio button if you want to configure an automatic guard tour for a single tour.

When selected, only single tours will be listed in the Tour/Tour Group listing window.

Select this radio button if you want to configure an automatic guard tour that will be randomly selected from a tour group. When selected, only tours groups that are configured as random tour lists will be listed in the Tour/Tour Group listing window. Tour groups are configured on the Tour Groups form of the Guard Tour folder. A tour group is considered a random tour list when the Random Tour List check box is selected on the Tour Groups form.

Displays a list of the monitoring stations which are assigned to the selected tour. These monitoring stations will be notified when the automatic guard tour is scheduled to begin.

Click this button to display the Select Monitoring Station window and add a monitoring station to the Monitoring Station listing window.

Click this button to remove the selected monitoring station from the Monitoring Station listing window.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window without adding the action.


Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window Procedures

Add an Automatic Guard Tour Action

1. Open the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window using the Action Group

Library or Scheduler. For more information, refer to Open an Action



• Select the Single Tour radio button if you want to configure an automatic guard tour for a single tour. When selected, only single tours will be listed in the Tour/Tour Group listing window.

• Select the Randomly select tour from group radio button if you want to configure an automatic guard tour that will be randomly selected from a tour group. When selected, only tours groups that are configured

408 —

revision 1


Note:

as random tour lists will be listed in the Tour/Tour Group listing window.

3. The monitoring stations that have been assigned to the selected tour or tour group will be displayed in the Monitoring Station listing window. Do one of the following:

• If no monitoring stations have been assigned or if you want to assign an additional monitoring station, then click [Add]. The Select Monitoring

Station window opens.

• If you do not want to assign a monitoring station, proceed to step

7

.

4. Click on a monitoring station to select it.

5. Click [OK]. The monitoring station you selected will be listing in the

Monitoring Station listing window. All monitoring stations in the

Monitoring Station listing window will, in the Alarm Monitoring application, receive a notification message when the tour is scheduled to begin.

6. Repeat steps 3 5

for each monitoring station you want to add.

If you want to remove a monitoring station from the Monitoring Station listing window, click on an entry to select it and then click [Remove].

Note:

7. Click [OK].

If you have accessed the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window via the

Scheduler folder or the Scheduler form in the Guard Tour folder, the window will contain both the Automatic Guard Tour form and the Schedule form.

For more information, refer to Chapter 21: Scheduler Folder on page 379.

revision 1

— 409

A: Actions

Change Network Video Password Properties Window

The Change Network Video Password action allows you to schedule automatic password changes for video recorders. You can make the change a one-time event or to schedule it daily, weekly, or monthly with the Edit Recurring Action

Schedule. For more information, refer to Chapter 21: Scheduler Folder on page 379.

You can display the Change Network Video Password Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, or Global I/O. Only the Scheduler will let

you set up the password to be changed at a later date. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:




Change Network Video Password Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Description

Listing Window

Comment

Names the video device you are currently changing the password for.

Lists currently defined LNVR recorders and cameras associated with them.

Select the recorders and/or cameras you want to modify.

410 —

revision 1


Change Network Video Password Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Current User

Comment

The name of the user account.

This field automatically populates if a user name was initially populated on the Video

Recorder/Camera forms.

Enter the password in the text box. The following restrictions apply: Reset to this password

• Axis cameras allow up to 10 character passwords using A through Z, a through z, 0 - 9, !,

#' - ', -, ., ^, _, ~, $

• Sony cameras allow up to 16 character passwords using A through Z, a through z, 0 - 9

• LNVR recorder password length is limited by the LNVR’s computer password policy, which is set by the system administrator. Valid characters are ! - ~

Note:

In addition to these restrictions, B.A.S.I.S. includes strong password enforcement, which checks the user’s password against password standards.

For more information, refer to Chapter 1: Introduction

on page 31.

Confirm password Enter the password a second time for verification.

OK Adds the action and exits out of the Change Network Video Properties window.

Cancel

Help

Exits the Change Network Video Password Properties window without adding the action.

Displays online help for this window.

Change Network Video Password Properties Window

Procedures

Change the Network Video Password

1. Open the Change Network Video Password Properties window using the

Action Group Library or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an

Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. On the Change Network Video Password tab, enter the new password and confirm the password by typing it again.

3. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 411

A: Actions

Schedule a One-Time Password Change


Scheduler. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties

Window on page 393.

2. On the Change Network Video Password tab, enter the new password and confirm the password by typing it again.

3. On the Schedule tab, select the One time radio button.

4. Select the date and time you wish the password to change.

5. Click [OK].

Schedule a Recurring Password Change



Window on page 393.

2. On the Change Network Video Password tab, enter the new password and confirm the password by typing it again

3. On the Schedule sub-tab, select the Recurring radio button.

4. Click [Change]. The Edit Recurring Action Schedule form displays.

5. Choose the time and date intervals that best suit your needs.

6. Click [OK] on the Edit Recurring Action Schedule form.

7. Click [OK] on the Change Network Video Password Properties window.

412 —

revision 1


Deactivate Badge Properties Window

The Deactivate Badge action allows you to deactivate a cardholder’s badge when it is either lost or returned.

You can display the Deactivate Badge Properties window using Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:

In segmented systems, the Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging action must be applied to all segments.

Deactivate Badge Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Badge Status

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Use to select the status of a badge that will be deactivated. Choices are Lost and Returned.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Deactivate Badge Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Deactivate Badge Properties window without adding the action.


revision 1

— 413

A: Actions

Deactivate Badge Properties Window Procedures

Add a Deactivate Badge Action

1. Open the Deactivate Badge Properties window using Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:

In order to execute the action, Global I/O should have a linkage configured on a device, event, and badge ID that is passed to the action at runtime.

2. Click [Add].

3. Click the Output Action sub-tab.

4. Click [Add]. The Add Action Wizard window opens.

5. Select “Deactivate Badge” from the Objects listing window.

6. Click [Next]. The Deactivate Badge Properties window appears.

7. Choose the type of badge you want to deactivate.

8. Click [OK].

9. Click [OK] again.

414 —

revision 1


Device Output Properties Window

You can display the Device Output Properties window using Action Group

Library, Scheduler, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:




Form Element

Output listing window

Activate

Deactivate

Pulse

Comment

Displays a list of available device outputs which have been configured in the system.

When configuring a device output as an action, select this from the drop-down menu if you want the action to be that the device output will activate. When a device output is activated, that means it is in an “on” state.

When configuring a device output as an action, select this from the drop-down menu if you want the action to be that the device output will deactivate. When a device output is deactivated, that means it is in an “off” state.

When configuring a device output as an action, select this from the drop-down menu if you want the action to be that the device output will pulse (turn on and then turn off again).

revision 1

— 415

A: Actions

Form Element

Toggle

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

When configuring a device output as an action, select this from the drop-down menu if you want to toggle the state of the relay. For example, if the relay is on (activated), toggling deactivates it. If the relay is off (deactivated), toggling activates it.

Note:

Only offboard relays on the Bosch (7412 and 9412) intrusion panels support the toggle option.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Device Output Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Device Output Properties window without adding the action.


Device Output Properties Window Procedures

Add a Device Output Action

1. Open the Device Output Properties window using the Action Group Library,

Scheduler, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. Select (place a checkmark beside) an entry in the Output listing window.


• Select Activate from the drop-down menu

if you want this action to be that the device output will activate. When a device output is activated, that means it is in an “on” state.

• Select Deactivate from the drop-down menu

if you want this action to be that the device output will deactivate. When a device output is deactivated, that means it is in an “off’ state.

• Select Pulse from the drop-down menu

if you want this action to be that the device output will pulse (turn on and then turn off again).

• Select Toggle from the drop-down menu

in you want this action to be that the device output will toggle the state of the relay. For example, if the relay is on (activated), toggling deactivates it. If the relay is off

(deactivated), toggling activates it.

Note:

Only offboard relays on the Bosch (7412 and 9412) intrusion panels support the toggle option.

4. Click [OK].

416 —

revision 1


Device Output Group Properties Window

You can display the Device Output Group Properties window using the Action



Note:




revision 1

— 417

A: Actions

Device Output Group Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Output Device

Group listing window

Activate

Comment

Displays a list of available output device groups which have been configured in the system.

Deactivate

Pulse

OK

Cancel

Help

When configuring an output device group as an action, select this radio button if you want the action to be that the device outputs in the group will activate. When device outputs are activated, that means they are in an “on” state.

When configuring an output device group as an action, select this radio button if you want the action to be that the device outputs in the group will deactivate. When device outputs are deactivated, that means they are in an “off” state.

When configuring an output device group as an action, select this radio button if you want the action to be that the device outputs in the group will pulse (they will turn on and then turn off again).

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Device Output Group Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Device Output Group Properties window without adding the action.


Device Output Group Properties Window Procedures

Add a Device Output Group Action

1. Open the Device Output Group Properties window, using the Action Group



2. Select (place a checkmark beside) a group in the Output Device Group listing window.


• Select the Activate radio button if you want this action to be that the device outputs in the group will activate. When device outputs are activated, that means they are in an “on” state.

• Select the Deactivate radio button if you want this action to be that the device outputs in the group will deactivate. When device outputs are deactivated, that means they are in an “off’ state.

• Select the Pulse radio button if you want this action to be that the device outputs in the group will pulse (they will turn on and then turn off again).

4. Click [OK].

418 —

revision 1


Download Network Video Firmware Properties Window

The Download Network Video Firmware action type allows users to select multiple network video devices and automatically upgrade their firmware when the action is executed. Network video devices are LNVR recorders and IP cameras assigned to LNVR recorders.

To configure this action type, the Accessory Add-On for Network Video

Firmware Remote Upgrades must be installed on the same server as the Linkage

Server. The add-on can be found on the Supplemental Materials disc. Users need the System Permissions Groups > Video Hardware > Cameras Modify permission to use this feature.

This feature requires one of the following:

• The authenticated account specified in the LNVR connection properties is a member of the Administrators group, which by default has remote and local launch permissions enabled in the machine-wide limits.

• The authenticated account specified in the LNVR connection properties is left blank, and the Linkage Server is run under an account with

Administrator privileges on the LNVR.

The Download Network Video Firmware action type is available from the

Scheduler in System Administration or Alarm Monitoring. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:




revision 1

— 419

A: Actions

Form Element

Description

Listing window

The System

Account

Comment

A distinctive name for the type of network video firmware download action. If one video device is selected in the listing window, this field automatically populates. If multiple devices are selected, enter a distinctive name.

Displays network video devices as well as the current firmware version and upgrade that is available.

Note:

Devices must be online when you configure the action and when the action executes.

Note:

If multiple upgrades are scheduled at the same time, the firmware will download to each LNVR consecutively.

Select this radio button if you want recorder services to run under the system account after the upgrade.

This User

User

This radio button applies to LNVR only.

Select this radio button if you want recorder services to run under a specific user account after the upgrade.


Enter the user name for the specific user account. Typically the account you choose here is the same as the one selected during the original network video device installation. However, you can select a different account.

Password


Enter the password for the specific user account.


Confirm password Retype the password.

OK

Cancel

Help

Adds the action and exits out of the Download Network Video Firmware Properties window.

Exits the Download Network Video Firmware Properties window without adding the action.

Displays online help for this window.

LNVR and Camera Requirements

During the action configuration, only network video devices that meet the following criteria are available for selection:

• The device is online.

• The device is an LNVR recorder or a network camera assigned to an LNVR recorder.

• The LNVR to be upgraded is version 2.0 or higher.

• The IP camera to be upgraded is connected to an LNVR recorder with version 2.0 or higher.

• Upgrades are supported for the following IP cameras: Axis 2100, 2120,

2130, 2400, 2401, 2411, and 2420.

420 —

revision 1


• The network video device has an upgrade available and the upgrade is installed properly on the Linkage Server machine.

• The current version of the network video device is eligible for an upgrade.

Multiple upgrades can co-exist for the same device. This allows older versions to be upgraded in multiple steps. Each step is considered an upgrade.

Download Network Video Firmware Properties

Window Procedures

When you download network video firmware you are essentially upgrading the device. In order to execute a device upgrade, the upgrade has to be made available in B.A.S.I.S. and then the action must be configured.

Make an Upgrade Available in B.A.S.I.S.

Stanley distributes upgrades for network video devices as they become available.

Complete the following steps to make an upgrade available in your B.A.S.I.S. system.

1. Shut down System Administration, Alarm Monitoring, Communication

Server, and Linkage Server on the machine running the Linkage Server.

2. Run the Lenel Network Video Firmware Remote Upgrades.msi file on the Linkage Server computer.

3. Restart the applications closed in step 1 .

Camera Upgrade Limitations

Some camera types support more than one camera model. In B.A.S.I.S., different models may be treated the same. For example, the Axis 2400, Axis 2400+, and

2400+Blade models are configured in B.A.S.I.S. as Axis 2400 camera types.

However, different camera models require different firmware upgrades. With this in mind, only the first model listed in the text file will be upgraded when the action is executed, regardless of how many models are listed. To upgrade a different model, change the order in which that model appears in the file, by making it the first element under the corresponding <NV> tag.

For example, if the first entry listed was an Axis 2400, only the Axis 2400 camera model upgrade will occur, even if there are additional Axis 2400+ and

2400+Blade camera models listed. If a user accidentally selects a 2400+ or

2400+ Blade camera model during configuration, the upgrade will fail at action execution time because of the order the models are listed in the text file.

To upgrade an Axis 2400+, change the text file such that it is the first element under the corresponding <NV> tag. The text file should look like this:

<Upgrades>

<NV Name= “Axis 2400”>

<Model Name= “Axis 2400+ Video Server”>

revision 1

— 421

A: Actions

<Upgrade min=“3.01” ver=“3.13”>Upgrades\Axis2400+\3.13</Upgrade>

</Model>

<Model Name= “Axis 2400 Video Server”>

<Upgrade min=“2.20” ver=“2.34”>Upgrades\Axis2400\2.34</Upgrade>

</Model>

<Model Name= “Axis 2400+ Blade Video Server”>

<Upgrade min=“3.11” ver=“3.13”>Upgrades\Axis2400+Blade\3.13</Upgrade>

</Model>

</NV>

</Upgrades>

Add a Download Network Video Firmware Action

The Download Network Video Firmware action is available from the Scheduler only.

1. Open the Download Network Video Firmware Properties window using the


Window on page 393.

2. Select (place a checkmark beside) the network video device in the listing window.

Note:

Only devices that meet the network video device requirements will display.

For more information, refer to LNVR and Camera Requirements on page 420.

Note:

3. If there is more than one LNVR to upgrade, enter a name for the download network video firmware action or use the pre-populated name provided.

If multiple upgrades are scheduled at the same time, the firmware will download to each LNVR consecutively.

4. For LNVR only: a. Select the account the recorder services will run under after the upgrade.

Choices include The System Account radio button and This User radio button.

b. If you selected This User radio button, enter the user name and password. Re-enter the password.

5. Click [OK].

422 —

revision 1


Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Properties Window

You can display the Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or

Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:




Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Allowed Floors

Floors

Comment

Allowed floors are floors that can be accessed via the elevator terminal without supplying security credentials. Your options include:

• All Floors Always - the elevator is allowed to all floors no matter the security credentials presented.

• No Floors - The elevator is allowed to no floors without security credentials being presented.

Lists the floors the elevator is capable of traveling to.

revision 1

— 423

A: Actions

Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Properties Window

Procedures

Add an Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Action

1. Open the Elevator Terminal Allowed Floors Properties window using the

Action Group Library or Scheduler. For more information, refer to Open an


2. Select an elevator terminal in the listing window.

3. Select an option in the Allowed Floors drop-down box.

4. Click [OK].

Elevator Terminal Mode Properties Window

You can display the Elevator Terminal Mode Properties window using the Action



424 —

revision 1

Note:





Elevator Terminal Mode Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Elevator Terminal

Mode listing window

Mode

Comment

Lists the current elevator terminals and elevator controllers.

Refers to operational modes which dictate how the terminal interacts with the cardholder.

Choose from:

• Access to Authorized Floors

• Default Floor Only

• Default Floor or User Entry of Destination Floor

• User Entry of Destination Floor

Elevator Terminal Mode Properties Window Procedures

Add an Elevator Terminal Mode Action

1. Open the Elevator Terminal Mode Properties window using the Action




3. Select an option in the Mode drop-down box.

4. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 425

A: Actions

Execute Function List Properties Window

You can display the Execute Function List Properties window using the Action



Note:




426 —

revision 1


Execute Function List Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Function List listing window

Execute: True

Comment

Displays a list of available function lists which have been configured in the system.

Execute: False

Execute: Pulse

OK

Cancel

Help

When configuring a function list as an action, select this radio button if you want the action to execute the function list with an argument of “True.”

When configuring a function list as an action, select this radio button if you want the action to execute the function list with an argument of “False.”

When configuring a function list an action, select this radio button if you want the action to execute the function list with an argument of “Pulse.”

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Execute Function List Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Execute Function List Properties window without adding the action.


Execute Function List Properties Window Procedures

Add an Execute Function List Action

1. Open the Execute Function List Properties window, using the Action Group



2. Select (place a checkmark beside) an entry in the Function List listing window.


• Select the Execute: True radio button if you want this action to execute the function list with an argument of “True.”

• Select the Execute: False radio button if you want this action to execute the function list with an argument of “False.”

• Select the Execute: Pulse radio button if you want this action to execute the function list with an argument of “Pulse.”

4. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 427

A: Actions

Generate Event Properties Window

You can display the Generate Event Properties window using the Action Group

Library or Scheduler. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties

Window on page 393.

Generate Event Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Event text

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Type your custom event text here. You must create your own event text for this event.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the window.

Click this button to exit the window without adding the action.


428 —

revision 1


Elevator Terminal Mode Properties Window Procedures

Add an Elevator Mode Action

1. Open the Elevator Terminal Mode Properties window using the Action




3. Select an option in the Mode drop-down box.

4. Click [OK].

Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties Window

You can display the Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties window

using the Action Group Library or Scheduler. For more information, refer to


revision 1

— 429

A: Actions

Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Description

Global APB

System/Segment listing window

OK

Comment

Displays a description of the selected global APB system/segment.

Displays a list of the segments available for this action.

Cancel

Help

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Global APB System/Segment Reset

Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties window without adding the action.


Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties Window

Procedures

Add a Global APB System/Segment Reset Action

Note:

Global APB must be configured on your system in order to add this action.

1. Open the Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties window, using the



2. Select (place a checkmark beside) a segment from the Global APB System/

Segment listing window.

3. Click [OK]. If segmentation is enabled, this action will reset APB for the selected segment. If segmentation is not enabled, this action will reset APB for your entire system.

430 —

revision 1


ISC Database Download Properties Window

You can display the ISC Database Download Properties window using the Action



Note:




revision 1

— 431

A: Actions

ISC Database Download Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Description

Max number of panels to be downloaded at a time

Controller listing window

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Displays a description of the access panel which is selected in the Access Panel listing window.

Note:

This field only displays a description when one and only one access panel is selected.

When configuring a database download as an action, select the maximum number of access panels that can be downloaded at a time.

Displays a list of available controllers that have been configured in the system.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the ISC Database Download Properties window.

Click this button to exit the ISC Database Download Properties window without adding the action.


ISC Database Download Properties Window Procedures

Add an ISC Database Download Action

1. Open the ISC Database Download Properties window using the Action



2. Select the max number of panels to be downloaded at a time.

3. From the Access Panel listing window, click on an entry to select it.

Note:

You can select multiple entries.

4. Click [OK].

432 —

revision 1


ISC Firmware Download Properties Window

You can display the ISC Firmware Download Properties window using the



Note:




revision 1

— 433

A: Actions

ISC Firmware Download Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Description

Comment

Displays a description of the access panel which is selected in the Access Panel listing window.

Note:

This field only displays a description when one and only one access panel is selected.

When configuring a firmware download as an action, select the maximum number of access panels that can be downloaded at a time.

Max number of panels to be downloaded at a time


OK

Cancel

Help

Displays a list of available controllers that have been configured in the system.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the ISC Firmware Download Properties window.

Click this button to exit the ISC Firmware Download Properties window without adding the action.


ISC Firmware Download Properties Window Procedures

Add an ISC Firmware Download Action

1. Open the ISC Firmware Download Properties window, using the Action



2. Select the max number of panels to be downloaded at a time.

3. From the Access Panel listing window, click on an entry to select it.

Note:

You can select multiple entries.

4. Click [OK].

434 —

revision 1


Moving Badges for APB Areas Properties Window

You can display the Moving Badges for APB Areas Properties window using

Action Group Library, Scheduler, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to


Note:





From listing window

Displays a list of areas that are available for selection.

To listing window Displays a list of areas that are available for selection.

OK

Cancel

Help

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Moving Badges for APB Areas

Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Moving Badges for APB Areas Properties window without adding the action.


revision 1

— 435

A: Actions

Moving Badges for APB Areas Properties Window

Procedures

Add a Moving Badges for APB Areas Action

1. Open the Moving Badges for APB Areas Properties window using the

Action Group Library, Scheduler, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. In the From listing window, select (place a checkmark beside) the area that you want to move badges from when this action is executed.

3. In the To listing window, select (place a checkmark beside) the area that you want to move badges to when this action is executed.

4. Click [OK].

436 —

revision 1


Muster Mode Initiation Properties Window

You can display the Muster Mode Initiation Properties window using the Global

I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Form Element

Hazardous

Location listing window

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Displays a list of available hazardous locations that have been configured in the system.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Muster Mode Initiation Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Muster Mode Initiation Zone Properties window without adding the action.


revision 1

— 437

A: Actions

Muster Mode Initiation Properties Window Procedures

Add a Muster Mode Initiation Action

1. Open the Muster Mode Initiation Properties window using Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. From the listing window, click on an entry to select it.

3. Click [OK]. This action is now configured to initiate muster mode in the selected hazardous location. (Refer to the Areas folder chapter in this user guide for more information on mustering.)

438 —

revision 1


Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window

You can display the Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties window using the

Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or

Global I/O.

Note:




revision 1

— 439

A: Actions

Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Alarm Input listing window

Mask

Unmask

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Displays a list of available alarm inputs which have been configured in the system.

When configuring a mask/unmask alarm input action, select this radio button if you want the alarm input to be masked. When alarm inputs are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm

Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

When configuring a mask/unmask alarm input action, select this radio button if you want the alarm input to be unmasked. When alarm inputs are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm

Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties window without adding the action.


Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window

Procedures

Add a Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Action

1. Open the Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties window using the Action

Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global


2. From the Alarm Input listing window, click on an entry to select it.


• Select the Mask radio button if you want the alarm input to be masked.

When alarm inputs are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm

Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

• Select the Unmask radio button if you want the alarm input to be unmasked. When alarm inputs are unmasked, they are reported to the

Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

4. Click [OK].

440 —

revision 1


Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties Window

You can display the Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment

Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties

Window on page 393.

Note:




revision 1

— 441

A: Actions

Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Input Group listing window

Mask

Unmask

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Displays a list of available alarm input groups which have been configured in the system.

When configuring a mask/unmask alarm input for group action, select this radio button if you want the group of alarm inputs to be masked. When alarm input groups are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

When configuring a mask/unmask alarm input for group action, select this radio button if you want the group of alarm inputs to be unmasked. When alarm input groups are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group

Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties window without adding the action.


Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties Window

Procedures

Add a Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Action

1. Open the Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties window using the


Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties

Window on page 393.

2. From the Input Group listing window, click on an entry to select it.


• Select the Mask radio button if you want the alarm inputs in the group to be masked. When alarm inputs are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

• Select the Unmask radio button if you want the alarm inputs in the group to be unmasked. When alarm inputs are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

4. Click [OK].

442 —

revision 1


Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window

You can display the Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask for Group Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment

Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties

Window on page 393.

Note:




revision 1

— 443

A: Actions

Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Mask Group listing window

Mask

Comment

Displays a list of available alarm mask groups which have been configured in the system.

Unmask

OK

Cancel

Help

When configuring a mask/unmask alarm mask group action, select this radio button if you want the mask group to be masked. When alarms are masked, they are not reported to the

Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

When configuring a mask/unmask alarm mask group action, select this radio button if you want the mask group to be unmasked. When alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the

Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group

Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties window without adding the action.


Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window

Procedures

Add a Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Action

1. Open the Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask for Group Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment

Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action


2. Select (place a checkmark beside) and entry in the Mask Group listing window.


• Select the Mask radio button if you want the mask group to be masked.

When alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

• Select the Unmask radio button if you want the mask group to be unmasked. When alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm

Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

4. Click [OK].

444 —

revision 1


Mask/Unmask Door Properties Window

You can display the Mask/Unmask Door Properties window using the Action



Note:




revision 1

— 445

A: Actions

Mask/Unmask Door Form Properties Window Table

Form Element

Reader/Controller listing window

Mask

Unmask

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Displays a list of readers that are available for selection and the controllers that are associated with each.

When configuring a mask/unmask door action, select this radio button if you want the action to be that the door is masked. When masked doors generate alarms, they are not reported to the

Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

When configuring a mask/unmask door action, select this radio button if you want the action to be that the door is unmasked. When unmasked doors generate alarms, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask/Unmask Door Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Mask/Unmask Door Properties window without adding the action.


Mask/Unmask Door Properties Window Procedures

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Action

1. You can display the Mask/Unmask Door Properties window using the



Window on page 393.

2. Select (place a checkmark beside) and entry in the Reader/Controller listing window.


• Select the Mask radio button if you want the action to be that the door is masked. When masked doors generate alarms, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

• Select the Unmask radio button if you want the action to be that the door is unmasked. When unmasked doors generate alarms, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

4. Click [OK].

446 —

revision 1


Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window

You can display the Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or


Note:




revision 1

— 447

A: Actions

Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window Field Table

Form Element


Mask

Unmask

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Displays a list of available readers which have been configured in the system and the controllers that are associated with each.

When configuring a mask/unmask door forced open action, select this radio button if you want the door forced open alarm to be masked. When door forced open alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

When configuring a mask/unmask door forced open action, select this radio button if you want the door forced open alarm to be unmasked. When door forced open alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open

Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties window without adding the action.


Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window

Procedures

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Action

1. Open the Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties window using the



Window on page 393.



• Select the Mask radio button if you want door forced open alarms for the selected reader to be masked. When door forced open alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

• Select the Unmask radio button if you want the door forced open alarms for the selected reader to be unmasked. When door forced open alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

4. Click [OK].

448 —

revision 1


Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group

Properties Window

You can display the Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group

Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour,

Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an


Note:




revision 1

— 449

A: Actions

Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Field Table

Form Element

Reader Group listing window

Mask

Comment

Displays a list of available reader groups which have been configured in the system.

Unmask

OK

Cancel

Help

When configuring a mask/unmask door forced open for reader group action, select this radio button if you want the door forced open alarms to be masked. When door forced open alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

When configuring a mask/unmask door forced open for reader group action, select this radio button if you want the door forced open alarms to be unmasked. When door forced open alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for

Reader Group Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties window without adding the action.


Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group

Properties Window Procedures

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader

Group Action

1. Open the Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour,



2. Select (place a checkmark beside) and entry in the Reader Group listing window.


• Select the Mask radio button if you want door forced open alarms for the selected reader group to be masked. When door forced open alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

• Select the Unmask radio button if you want the door forced open alarms for the selected reader group to be unmasked. When door forced open alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

4. Click [OK].

450 —

revision 1


Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window

You can display the Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties window using the



Note:




revision 1

— 451

A: Actions

Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window Field Table

Form Element


Mask

Unmask

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment


When configuring a mask/unmask door held open action, select this radio button if you want the door held open alarm to be masked. When door held open alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

When configuring a mask/unmask door held open action, select this radio button if you want the door held open alarm to be unmasked. When door held open alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask/Unmask Door Held Open

Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties window without adding the action.


Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window

Procedures

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Action

1. Open the Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties window using the



Window on page 393.



• Select the Mask radio button if you want door held open alarms for the selected reader to be masked. When door held open alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

• Select the Unmask radio button if you want the door held open alarms for the selected reader to be unmasked. When door held open alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

4. Click [OK].

452 —

revision 1


Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group

Properties Window

You can display the Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour,

Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an


Note:




revision 1

— 453

A: Actions

Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Field Table

Form Element


Mask

Comment


Unmask

OK

Cancel

Help

When configuring a mask/unmask door held open for reader group action, select this radio button if you want the door held open alarms to be masked. When door held open alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

When configuring a mask/unmask door held open for reader group action, select this radio button if you want the door held open alarms to be unmasked. When door held open alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for

Reader Group Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties window without adding the action.


Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group

Properties Window Procedures

Add a Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group

Action

1. Open the Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties window using the Action Group Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour,



2. From the Reader Group listing window, click on an entry to select it.


• Select the Mask radio button if you want door held open alarms for the selected reader group to be masked. When door held open alarms are masked, they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting.

• Select the Unmask radio button if you want the door held open alarms for the selected reader group to be unmasked. When door held open alarms are unmasked, they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting.

4. Click [OK].

454 —

revision 1


Pulse Open Door Properties Window

You can display the Pulse Open Door Properties window using the Action Group

Library, Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:




revision 1

— 455

A: Actions

Pulse Open Door Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Reader/controller listing window

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment


Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Pulse Open Door Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Pulse Open Door Properties window without adding the action.


Pulse Open Door Properties Window Procedures

Add a Pulse Open Door Action

Note:

The open door commands will not be available for those using Schlage

Wireless Access readers, because those types of readers are not in constant communication with the PIM device. For more information, refer to “Action

Groups Overview” in the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System


1. Open the Pulse Open Door Properties window using the Action Group



2. Select (place a checkmark beside) and entry in the listing window.

3. Click [OK]. The pulse open door action (the door opens and then closes) is now configured for the selected reader.

456 —

revision 1


Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window

You can display the Pulse Open Door Group Properties window using the Action



Note:




revision 1

— 457

A: Actions

Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window Field Table

Form Element


OK

Comment

Displays a list of available readers groups which have been configured in the system.

Cancel

Help

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Pulse Open Door Group Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Pulse Open Door Group Properties window without adding the action.


Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window Procedures

Add a Pulse Open Door Group Action

1. Open the Pulse Open Door Group Properties window using the Action



2. Select (place a checkmark beside) and entry in the Reader Group listing window.

3. Click [OK]. The pulse open door group action (the doors open and then close) is now configured for the selected reader.

458 —

revision 1


Reader Mode Properties Window

You can display the Reader Mode Properties window using the Action Group


Note:




revision 1

— 459

A: Actions

Reader Mode Form Properties Window Table

Form Element


Reader Mode

Verify Mode

First Card Unlock

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment


When configuring a reader mode action, select a mode from this drop-down list. Choices include:

• Card nly O

• Facility Code Only

• Locked

• Card and Pin

• Pin r ard C

• Unlocked

• Default Reader Mode - Used to return a reader to its default online access mode.

When configuring a reader mode action for a reader on a Stanley controller that is a primary reader to an alternate biometric reader, you can select a verify mode. When verify mode is enabled, for alternate reader support, the primary reader will ask for verification from the alternate reader.

When configuring a reader mode action for a reader that is not a primary reader to an alternate biometric reader, this field is disabled.

Select this check box if you want the reader mode action to be that first card unlock mode is enabled.

Doors configured with first card unlock will not unlock until valid personnel arrives. For example, rather than setting a lobby door to unlock at 9:00 am, you can leave it in a secure mode (i.e., card only, card and pin, etc.) and set the first card unlock to 9:00 am. The first person that comes in the door after 9:00 am will have to present their card. Once access is granted, the reader mode will change to unlocked. This feature is useful for days like “snow days” when employees can’t make it to work on time.

Note:

If the reader is in “Facility code only” mode, the first card unlock feature does not work.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Reader Mode Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Reader Mode Properties window without adding the action.


Reader Mode Properties Window Procedures

Add a Reader Mode Action

1. Open the Reader Mode Properties window using the Action Group Library,

Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. Select (place a checkmark beside) an entry in the Reader/Controller listing

460 —

revision 1


window.

3. From the Reader Mode drop-down list, select a reader mode for the selected reader/controller.

4. When configuring a reader mode action for a reader on a Stanley controller that is a primary reader to an alternate biometric reader, you can select a

Verify Mode. When verify mode is enabled, for alternate reader support, the primary reader will ask for verification from the alternate reader.

5. Select the First Card Unlock check box if you want this reader mode action to enable first card unlock.

6. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 461

A: Actions

Reader Mode Group Properties Window

You can display the Reader Mode Group Properties window using the Action



Note:




462 —

revision 1


Reader Mode Group Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Reader Device

Group listing window

Reader Mode

Comment


Verify Mode

First Card Unlock

OK

Cancel

Help

When configuring a reader mode action, select a mode from this drop-down list. Choices include:

• Card nly O

• Facility Code Only

• Locked

• Card and Pin

• Pin r ard C

• Unlocked

• Default Reader Mode - Used to return a reader to its default online access mode.

When configuring a reader mode group action for a group of readers on a Stanley controller that are primary readers to alternate biometric readers, you can select a verify mode. When verify mode is enabled, for alternate reader support, the primary reader will ask for verification from the alternate reader.

When configuring a reader mode group action for readers that are not primary readers alternate biometric readers, this field is disabled.

Select this check box if you want the reader mode group action to be that first card unlock mode is enabled.

Doors configured with first card unlock will not unlock until valid personnel arrives. For example, rather than setting a lobby door to unlock at 9:00 am, you can leave it in a secure mode (i.e., card only, card and pin, etc.) and set the first card unlock to 9:00 am. The first person that comes in the door after 9:00 am will have to present their card. Once access is granted, the reader mode will change to unlocked. This feature is useful for days like “snow days” when employees can’t make it to work on time.

Note:

If the reader is in “Facility code only” mode, the first card unlock feature does not work.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Reader Mode Group Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Reader Mode Group Properties window without adding the action.


Reader Mode Group Properties Window Procedures

Add a Reader Mode Group Action

1. Open the Reader Mode Group Properties window using the Action Group


revision 1

— 463

A: Actions


2. Select (place a checkmark beside) and entry in the Reader Device Group listing window.

3. From the Reader Mode drop-down list, select a reader mode for the selected reader group.

4. When configuring a reader mode group action for readers on a Stanley controller that are primary readers to alternate biometric readers, you can select a Verify Mode. When verify mode is enabled, for alternate reader support, the primary reader will ask for verification from the alternate reader.

5. Select the First Card Unlock check box if you want this reader mode group action to enable first card unlock.

6. Click [OK].

Reset Use Limit Properties Window

You can display the Reset Use Limit Properties window using the Action Group


464 —

revision 1

Note:





Reset Use Limit Form Properties Window Table

Form Element

Description

Comment

When one controller is selected in the listing window, displays the text “Reset Use Limit:” followed by the controller name. For example, “Reset Use Limit: Front Door Bldg 1.”

When more than one controller is selected in the listing window, this field is activated. Type in a descriptive name to identify the selected group of controllers.

Displays a list of available controllers.


OK

Cancel

Help

Click this button to add the reset use limit action for the selected controller(s) and exit out of the Reset Use Limit Properties window.

Note:

Each time a use-limited badge is used at a reader, the badge’s use limit is decremented for the associated controller. A cardholder’s use limit is specified on the Badge form of the Cardholders folder. Whenever the cardholder swipes their badge at a reader where use limits are enforced, the cardholder’s use limit is reduced by one (1). When the use count reaches zero (0), the cardholder is unable to access use limit-enforced card readers on that controller.

Click this button to exit the Reset Use Limit Properties window without adding the action.


Reset Use Limit Properties Window Procedures

Add a Reset Use Limit Action

1. Open the Reset Use Limit Properties window using the Action Group


2. Select (place a checkmark beside) one or more controller from the listing window.

3. If you selected one controller from the listing window, skip this step. If you selected more than one controller from the listing window, type a descriptive name to identify the selected group of controllers in the Description field.

4. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 465

A: Actions

Run PTZ Tour Properties Window

The Run PTZ Tour action type allows the user to start or end a continuous background PTZ tour. To use this action, a PTZ Tour Server must be configured in System Administration and a PTZ tour must be created in Alarm Monitoring.

Background PTZ tours can be interrupted by a user with a higher priority or by the user that started the tour.

You can open the Run PTZ Tour Action window using Scheduler or Global I/O.


Form Element

Listing window

Start this tour

PTZ Tour Server

End the current tour

Comment

Displays all of the cameras assigned to an LNVR recorder.

To display only PTZ cameras, add the following line to the ACS.INI file in the

[DigitalVideo]

section:

TestForPTZOnStartUp=1

To begin a tour, select the radio button and choose a tour from the drop-down list.

Select the PTZ tour server that should run this tour.

Select this radio button to stop a tour that is currently running on the selected camera.

466 —

revision 1


Run PTZ Tour Properties Window Procedures

Add a Run PTZ Tour Action

1. Open the Run PTZ Tour Action window using the Scheduler or Global I/O.


2. Select (place a checkmark beside) the camera from the listing window.

3. To start a tour: a. Select the Start this tour radio button and select the tour from the dropdown list.

b. Select the server to run the tour from the PTZ Tour Server drop-down list.

Note:

Separate actions must be added to start and to end a PTZ tour. To end a tour, select the End the current tour radio button.

4. Click [OK].

revision 1

— 467

A: Actions

Schedule Report

The Schedule Report action type allows the user to either print a report or send a report in an email.

You can open the Schedule Report action window using Scheduler or Global I/O.




Email report

Displays a list of available reports.

Select this radio button if you want the scheduled report to be sent in an email.

E-mail notification requires the GOS module to be configured and running. For more information, refer to the Global Output Devices Folder chapter in the System


Enter the email address where the scheduled report is to be sent.

Email address

Send Report to printer

Use default printer

Select this radio button if you want the scheduled report to print.

Select this radio button if you want the scheduled report to print from the workstation’s default printer.

Select printer below Select this radio button and choose a printer from the drop-down list if you want the scheduled report to print to a printer other than the workstation’s default printer.

Note:

The choices in the drop-down list are printers that are available for the computer running the linkage server and not for the workstation that the action is being configured on.

468 —

revision 1


Form Element

If fails use default printer

Number or pages to generate

Comment

If you selected the Select printer below radio button, select this check box if you want to print from the default printer if the selected printer does not exist.

Note:

Due to a limitation of Crystal Reports this setting is not enforced if the printer exists but is not accessible under the linkage server account. When this occurs the report will automatically be printed from the default printer regardless of this setting.

For more information, refer to page 470.

Request Print Action Flowchart

on

When configuring a scheduled report action, you can enter the number of pages that you want the report to have. This can be helpful when only a small section of a large report is needed.

Schedule Report Properties Window Procedures

Add a Schedule Report Action

1. Open the Schedule Report Properties window using the Action Group



2. Select the report from the listing window.

3. Select whether the report is to be printed or sent in an email.

• If the report is being sent in an email, select the Email report radio button and add an email address to the Email Address field.

Important:

E-mail notification requires the GOS module to be configured and running.

For more information, refer to the Global Output Devices Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide.

• If the report is being printed, select the Send report to printer radio button and select the printer to be used.

4. Select how many pages will be sent in an email or printed by entering a number in the Number of pages to generate field.

5. Click [OK]. s

revision 1

— 469

A: Actions

Request Print Action Flowchart

470 —

revision 1

This flowchart shows how a report may get printed from the default printer although the If fails use default printer check box is NOT selected in the Report

Print Properties window.


Select PTZ Preset Properties Window

The Select PTZ Preset action type allows users to select a preset for a PTZ camera to move to when the action is executed. This action is for camera and client side presets with network cameras assigned to an LNVR recorder.

Notes:

The camera must be online when you configure the action.

The camera must be online when the action executes.

You can display the Select PTZ Preset Properties window using the Action



Note:




Form Element

Listing window

Enter preset

Comment

Displays all network cameras assigned to an LNVR recorder.

To display only PTZ cameras, add the following line to the ACS.INI file in the

[DigitalVideo]

section:

TestForPTZOnStartUp=1

Note:

The camera must be online when you configure the action and the camera must be online when the action executes.

Enter the camera side preset number or select a client side preset from the drop-down list.

revision 1

— 471

A: Actions

Select PTZ Preset Properties Window Procedures

Add a Select PTZ Preset Action

1. Open the Select PTZ Preset Properties window using the Action Group



2. Select (place a checkmark beside) the video recorder/camera/channel option from the listing window.

Note:

The camera must be online when you configure the action and the camera must be online when the action executes.

3. Enter a camera side preset value or select a client side preset from the dropdown list.

4. Click [OK].

Select Video Wall Layout Properties Window

The Select Video Wall Layout action type allows users to activate and deactivate pre-configured layouts on the Barco video wall. Before this action is configured, video wall layouts must be defined using external software such as the Barco

Apollo Explorer.

You can display the Select Video Wall Layout Properties window using the


472 —

revision 1



Note:




Select Video Wall Layout Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Description

Video Wall Controller

Host Name

Connect

Desktop

Region

Layout

Comment

A descriptive name for the action. After the Select Video Wall Layout to be Activate section of the dialog is configured, [...] can be used to automatically generate a name based on the controller, desktop, region, and layout names.

Host name or IP address of the Barco Apollo server that controls the video wall.

The drop-down list is populated by controller names that have been configured in other instances of the Select Video Wall Layout action.

Click to retrieve video wall layout information from the video wall controller to populate the drop-down lists in the Select Video Wall Layout to be Activated section.

Identifies which physical video wall is being configured.

If regions are enabled on the video wall, select one from the Region drop-down list.

Note:

Regions are used to logically separate content so that multiple users can work in parallel without affecting each other.

Identifies the layout to be activated by the action. Layouts are configured in the Barco

Apollo Explorer.

revision 1

— 473

A: Actions

Select Video Wall Layout Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

When this layout is activated...

Comment

Specifies the policy for deactivation of a layout that may be already active on the video wall.

• Deactivate All Layouts - Deactivates all layouts that are active on the video wall regardless of region.

• Deactivate Layouts in the Current Region - Deactivates layouts that are active in the region indicated in the Region drop-down list.

• Do Not Deactivate Any Layouts - Adds the new layout without deactivating any currently active layouts.

Select Video Wall Layout Properties Window Procedures

Add a Select Video Wall Layout Action

Before configuring this action, the video wall must be fully configured. For more information, refer to the Digital Video Hardware User Guide

1. Open the Select Video Wall Layout Properties window using the Action



2. Enter the host name or IP address of the Barco Apollo server that controls the video wall in the Video Wall Controller Host Name field or select a controller from the drop-down list.

3. Select the Desktop name from the drop-down list.

4. If your Barco configuration utilizes regions, select the appropriate one from the Region drop-down list.

5. Select the Layout to activate from the drop-down list.

6. Specify the Layout Deactivation Policy by selecting an action for currently active layouts from the When this layout is activated... drop-down list.

• Deactivate All Layouts - Deactivates all layouts that are active on the video wall regardless of region.

• Deactivate Layouts in the Current Region - Deactivates layouts that are active in the region indicated in the Region drop-down list.

• Do Not Deactivate Any Layouts - Adds the new layout without deactivating any currently active layouts.

7. Enter a descriptive name for the action or use [...] to generate a name for the

Description field based on the selected desktop, region, and layout names.

8. Click [OK] to save the action.

474 —

revision 1


Set Forwarding Station Properties Window

The Set Forwarding Station action allows you to change where a monitor station forwards its alarms. Using this action allows a monitor station to be configured to forward its alarms to a different monitoring station.

Note:

The action is only valid for a scheduler invocation.

revision 1

— 475

A: Actions

Set Forwarding Station Properties Window Field Table


Monitor Station listing window

Lists the monitoring stations available. Select the monitoring station that is having its alarms forwarded.

Station to forward to Select the monitor station you would like the alarms forwarded to.

OK Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Set Forwarding Station properties window.

Cancel

Help

Click this button to exit the Set Forwarding Station properties window without adding the action.


Set Forwarding Station Properties Window Procedures

Add a Set Forwarding Station Action

1. Open the Set Forwarding Station Properties window, using Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. Choose the monitor station in the Monitoring Station list window. This will be the monitor station that has its alarms forwarded to another monitoring station.

3. In the Station to forward to drop-down box, choose the monitoring station that the alarms will be forwarded to.

4. Click [OK].

476 —

revision 1


Sign Out Visitor Properties Window

The Sign Out Visitor action allows you to deactivate the badges of cardholders who have signed out of the system. You can further modify this action by choosing which of the cardholder’s badges will be signed out, just the badge that triggered the action or all badges belonging to that cardholder.

You can display the Sign Out Visitor Properties window using Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

Note:

In segmented systems, the Sign Out Visitor Properties action must be applied to all segments.

revision 1

— 477

A: Actions

Sign Out Visitor Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Only the badge that triggered this action

All the active badges held by the visitor

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Select if you want to deactivate only the badge that caused the visitor to sign out.

Select if you want all the badges belonging to the visitor to deactivate once the visitor is signed out.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Sign Out Visitor properties window.

Click this button to exit the Sign Out Visitor properties window without adding the action.


Sign Out Visitor Properties Window Procedures

Add a Sign Out Visitor Action

1. Open the Sign Out Visitor Properties window, using Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. Choose the options that suit your needs.

3. Click [OK].

478 —

revision 1


Silence Area Properties Window

The Silence Area action allows an area (that uses a Bosch intrusion panel) to be silenced during an alarm from that panel.

You can display the Silence Area Properties window using the Action Group


Note:




revision 1

— 479

A: Actions

Silence Area Properties Window Field Table

Form Element

Listing window

OK

Cancel

Help

Comment

Lists currently enabled intrusion areas. Intrusion areas are configured on the Areas form in the

Intrusion Detection Configuration folder.

Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Silence Area Properties window.

Click this button to exit the Silence Area Properties window without adding the action.


Silence Area Properties Window Procedures

Add a Silence Area Action

1. Open the Silence Area Properties window using the Action Group Library,

Scheduler, Guard Tour, Acknowledgment Actions, or Global I/O. For more information, refer to Open an Action Properties Window on page 393.

2. From the listing window, click on an entry to select it. The area you selected will now be silenced during an alarm from that panel.

Important:

The silence area action can only be used with Bosch intrusion panels.

3. Click [OK].

4.

480 —

revision 1


Appendix B: Alarm/Event Descriptions

Alarm

24 Hour Alarm

Event

24 Hour Alarm

Event Type

Trouble

24 Hour Alarm Restore 24 Hour Alarm Restore Trouble

24 Hour Auto Test

24 Hour Non-Burglary

Alarm

24 Hour Auto Test

24 Hour Non-Burglary

Alarm

Trouble

Trouble

24 Hour Report Closed 24 Hour Report Closed Trouble

24 Hour Report Open 24 Hour Report Open Trouble

24 Hour Zone Bypassed Trouble 24 Hour Zone

Bypassed

24 Hour Zone

Unbypassed

30 Minutes Since

Fallback Command

32 Hour Event Log

Marker

Abort

24 Hour Zone

Unbypassed

30 Minutes Since

Fallback Command

32 Hour Event Log

Marker

Abort

Trouble

Trouble

System

System

AC Restore

AC Trouble

Accepted Biometric

Score

AC Restore

AC Trouble

Accepted Biometric

Score

System

System

Biometric

Access Closed

Access Code Used

Access Denied

Access Denied: Area

Empty

Access Denied: Area

Occupied

Access Closed

Access Code Used

Access Denied

Access Denied

Access Denied

Access Denied: Asset

Required

Access Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Description

A 24 hour alarm condition has been detected.

A 24 hour alarm condition has been restored.

A 24 hour non-burglary alarm condition has been detected.

A 24 Hour report on a closed zone

A 24 Hour report on an open zone

A 24 hour zone has been bypassed.

A 24 hour zone has been unbypassed.

30 minutes have passed since fallback command.

An event message was not sent due to User action

AC power trouble has been restored.

An AC power trouble condition has been detected.

This event returns the accepted biometric score. The actual access granted event is sent separately. This event is mainly used for diagnostic purposes.

Access for all users prohibited.

Access code was used.

Access was denied.

An event indicating that access was denied due to the room being empty.

An event indicating that access was denied due to the room being empty.

An event indicating that access was denied since no asset was presented for the access attempt.

revision 1

— 481

B: Alarm/Event Descriptions

Alarm

Access Denied:

Biometric Reader

Offline

Access Denied: Escort

Timeout Expired

Event

Access Denied:

Biometric Reader

Offline

Access Denied: Escort

Timeout Expired

Event Type

Denied

Denied

Access Denied: Door

Secured

Access Denied:

Interlock

Access Denied: No

Biometric Template

Access Denied: No

Occupant Approval

Access Denied:

Passback

Access Denied: Reader

Locked

Access Denied:

Unauthorized Arming

State

Access Denied:

Unauthorized Entry

Level

Access Denied:

Unauthorized Time

Access Door Propped

Access Door Status

Monitor Shunt

Access Door Status

Monitor Trouble

Access Granted

Access Granted

Access Granted - No

Entry Made

Access Granted on

Facility Code

Access Denied: Door

Secured

Access Denied:

Interlock

Access Denied: No

Biometric Template

Access Denied: No

Occupant Approval

Access Denied:

Passback

Access Denied: Reader

Locked

Access Denied:

Unauthorized Arming

State

Access Denied:

Unauthorized Entry

Level

Access Denied:

Unauthorized Time

Access Door Propped

Access Door Status

Monitor Shunt

Access Door Status

Monitor Trouble

Access Granted

Granted Access

Granted No Entry

Granted Facility Code

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

Denied

System

System

System

Granted

Granted

Granted

Granted

Description

Generated when the alternate biometric reader could not be contacted for verification (was offline).

This event indicates that access was denied because a person requiring an escort attempted access but an escort did not present their credentials in the time period.

Access denied because door was secured.

An access request was denied because the doors associated Interlock point is open.

Generated when the cardholder did not have a biometric template loaded in the database, so a verification could not be done.

An event indicating that access was denied due to no occupant approval.

Access was denied because the credential has not exited the area before attempting to re-enter same area.

Generated when access was denied because the reader was locked.

An access request was denied because the user was not authorized in this area when the area was armed.

An access request was denied because the user is not authorized in this area.

An access request was denied because the request is occurring outside the user’s authorized time window(s).

Access was granted.

Access was granted.

Access was granted but no entry was made at the door.

Access was granted based on a valid facility code.

482 —

revision 1


Alarm

Access Granted on

Facility Code, No Entry

Made

Access Granted:

Reader Unlocked

Access Granted Under

Duress


Duress - No Entry

Made

Access Level Change

Access Lockout

Access Open

Access Point Bypass

Access Program Exit

Access Relay/Trigger

Fail

Access Request to Exit

Shunt

Access Schedule

Change

Access Trouble

Event

Granted Facility Code,

No Entry

Access Granted: Reader

Unlocked


Duress


Duress - No Entry Made

Access Level Change

Access Lockout

Access Open

Access Point Bypass

Access Program Exit

Access Relay/Trigger

Fail

Access Request to Exit

Shunt

Access Schedule

Change

Access Trouble

Event Type

Granted

Granted

Duress

Duress

System

System

System

System

System

System

System

System

System

Access Zone Shunt

Acknowledgment

Action Executed

Access Zone Shunt

Acknowledgment

Action Executed

System

Account Status Failure Account Status Failure System

Account Status Restore Account Status Restore System

System

Acknowledgment

Action Failed

Acknowledgment

Action Failed

System

Activate Output

Activity Resumed

Air Flow Loss

Activate Output

Activity Resumed

Air Flow Loss

Air Flow Loss Restore Air Flow Loss Restore

Alarm Alarm

System

System

Trouble

Trouble

System

Description

Access was granted on facility code but no entry was made at the door.

Generated when access was granted because the reader was unlocked.

Indicates that the cardholder was granted access under duress.

Access Granted Under Duress - No Entry

Made

Access denied, known code

Access for authorized users in now allowed

The access schedule has changed.

An access system trouble condition has been detected.

An access zone is put in the shunted state.

Generated when an alarm is acknowledged and actions associated with the alarm are executed.

Generated when there is a failure to execute actions associated with an alarm acknowledgment.

A zone has detected activity after an alert.

An air flow loss condition has been detected.

An air flow loss condition has been restored.

revision 1

— 483


Alarm

Alarm Active

Alarm Canceled

Alarm Condition

Priority Level #

Alarm Mask Group

Armed

Alarm Mask Group

Disarmed

Alarm Mask Group

Force Armed

Alarm Mask Group

Mask Count

Incremented

Alarm Mask Group

Mask Count

Decremented

Alarm Mask Group

Arming Failure, Active

Points

Event

Alarm Active

Alarm Restored

Alarm Condition

Priority Level #

Alarm Monitoring

Action Group Executed

Alarm Monitoring

Action Group Failed

Alarm Relay Disable

Alarm Relay Disable

Restored

Alarm/Restore

Alarm Monitoring

Action Group Executed

Alarm Monitoring

Action Group Failed

Alarm Relay Disable

Alarm Relay Disable

Restored

Alarm/Restore

System

System

System

System

System

Alarm Silenced

Alarm Tamper Loop

Alarm Silenced

Alarm Tamper Loop

System

Trouble

Event Type

System

System

Digitize

Description

Generated when an alarm has become active.

A device has come online or an alarm condition has been restored.

Alarm condition priority level 1 (Highest priority i.e. Fire)

This event is generated when the alarm mask group is armed.

This event is generated when the alarm mask group is disarmed.

This event is generated when the alarm mask group is force armed.

This event is generated when a disarm command is issued and the alarm mask group is already disarmed, causing the alarm mask count to get incremented. The alarm mask group will still remain disarmed.

This event is generated when an arm or force arm command is issued and the alarm mask group has a mask count greater than 1, causing the mask count to be decremented.

The alarm mask group will still remain disarmed.

The following command is used to indicate an arming failure due to active points. This command should be hard to generate because currently the only way to issue the standard arm command is from the command keypad and this should only be available if there are no active points.

Generated when the action group is executed.

Generated when the action group execution fails.

Generated when a device has come online or an alarm condition has been restored.

484 —

revision 1


Alarm

All Points Tested

All Systems Normal

Analog Restore

Analog Restored

Analog Service

Requested

Analog Service

Required

Anti-Passback

Violation

Analog Restore

Analog Restored

Analog Service

Requested

Fire

System

System

Analog Service

Required

Fire

Anti-Passback Violation Area Control

Archive Server Failure Archive Server Failure Video

Archive Server Failure

Archive Location Full

Event

All Points Tested

All Systems Normal

Archive Server Failure

Event Type

System

Fire

Description

All points have been tested.

Generated when the Notifier AM-2020 panel is booted up. This alarm may also be sent when all existing alarm conditions are resolved.

Video

An analog fire sensor needs to be cleaned or calibrated.

Generated when the cardholder was denied access because the entry would have violated the anti-passback rules for the area.

Generic error indicating a failure on the archive server. This error indicates that the archive server could not move any more data from the video recorders to the archive server. The user will have to go to the physical archive server computer and review the windows event logs, remote storage application and logs, B.A.S.I.S. log files in the B.A.S.I.S.\logs directory, and also follow general trouble shooting techniques as outlined in the archive server manual to determine the specific cause of the alarm.

This error indicates that the archive location is full and no further data can be moved from the video recorders to the archive server. If this issue is not resolved, it is possible events may be purged before they are archived.

ARDIS Module

Communication Loss

ARDIS Module

Communication Loss

Trouble

ARDIS Module

Communication

Restored

Area Closed

ARDIS Module

Communication

Restored

Area Closed

Trouble

Area Control

Area Control Area Limit Exceeded Area Limit Exceeded

Armed Perimeter Delay Armed Perimeter Delay System

Generated when access was denied because the area being entered is closed.

Generated when access was denied because the area limit would have been exceeded.

revision 1

— 485


Alarm

Armed Perimeter

Instant

Armed Stay

Asset Denied - Asset

Disable Command Sent

Event

Armed Perimeter

Instant

Armed Stay

Asset Denied - Asset

Disable Command Sent

Event Type

System

System

Asset

Asset Denied - Invalid

Access


Access

Asset


Asset


Asset

Asset


Cardholder

Asset Denied - No

Asset Privileges


Cardholder

Asset Denied - No

Asset Privileges

Asset

Asset

Asset Granted - Asset

Owner


Privileges Only

Audible Alarm


Owner


Privileges Only

Audible Alarm

Asset

Asset

Trouble

Audible Alarm Restore Audible Alarm Restore Trouble

Audibles Silenced

Audibles Unsilenced

Audibles Silenced

Audibles Unsilenced

Fire

Fire

Auto Arming Time

Changed

Auto-Arm Failed

Automatic Closing

Automatic Opening

Automatic Phone Test

Automatic Test

Auxiliary Power Fault

Auxiliary Power

Supply AC Loss

Auxiliary Power

Supply AC Restored

Auto Arming Time

Changed

Auto-Arm Failed

Automatic Closing

Automatic Opening

Automatic Phone Test

Automatic Test

Auxiliary Power Fault

Auxiliary Power Supply

AC Loss


AC Restored

System

Trouble

Trouble

Open/Close

Open/Close

System

System

Trouble

Trouble

Description

Generated when the asset was denied and the asset disable command was sent to disable the asset.

Generated when the asset was denied because the cardholder had invalid access levels.

Generated when the asset was denied because of an invalid asset (the asset was not found in the controller).

Generated when the asset was denied because of an invalid cardholder.

Generated when the asset was denied because the cardholder had no asset privileges.

Generated when the asset was granted because the cardholder was the asset owner.

Generated when the asset was granted because the cardholder had asset privileges.

An audible alarm condition has been detected.

An audible alarm condition has been restored.

Generated when all the alarm bells have been turned off on the controller.

Generated when all the alarm bells have been turned back on for the controller.

An automatic arm has failed.

The system was armed automatically.

The system has disarmed automatically.

Automatic communication test report

486 —

revision 1


Alarm

Auxiliary Power

Supply Communication

Loss

Auxiliary Power


Restored

Auxiliary Power


Restored

Event


Communication Loss


Communication

Restored


Communication

Restored

Event Type

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Description

Auxiliary Power

Supply Fault Restored


Fault Restored

Trouble

Auxiliary Power

Supply Output Low


Output Low

Trouble

Auxiliary Power

Supply Output Low

Restored

Background Map

Found

Background Map Not

Found


Output Low Restored

Trouble

Background Map Found Video

Background Map Not

Found

Video

Background Scene

Changed

Background Scene

Change Restored

Bad 9112 Packet

Battery Test Fail

Battery Test Fail

Restore

Bell # Disable

Bell # Disable Restore

Bell Fault

Bell Restore

Background Scene

Changed

Background Scene

Change Restored

Bad 9112 Packet

Battery Test Fail

Battery Test Fail

Restore

Bell # Disable

Bell # Disable Restore

Bell Fault

Bell Restore

Video

Generated when background stickers are detected.

Generated when the engine cannot detect the background stickers. This may be caused when there is poor contrast or the stickers are improperly shaped/separated.

Indicates that part of the background has changed. This can be from something added to the scene or something removed from the scene.

The alarm is restored.

Video

System

System

System

A battery test fail condition has been detected.

A battery test fail condition has been restored.

Relay/Sounder Bell # has been disabled.

Relay/Sounder Bell # has been restored.

Relay/Sounder A trouble condition has been detected on a local bell, siren, or annunciator.

Relay/Sounder A trouble condition has been restored on a local bell, siren, or annunciator.

revision 1

— 487


Alarm

Biometric Mismatch

Biometric Verify Mode

Disabled


Enabled

Blind Camera (AI)


Disabled


Enabled

Blind Camera (AI)

Blind Camera (AI)

Restored

Block Acknowledge

Brightness Change

Brightness Change

Restored

Burglary Alarm

Event

Biometric Mismatch

Blind Camera (AI)

Restored

Block Acknowledge

Brightness Change

Brightness Change

Restored

Burglary Alarm

Event Type Description

Denied Generated when the cardholder has a biometric template and the alternate reader was utilized to capture a template to match, but the captured template did not match the stored template.

System Generated disabled. when biometric verify mode is

System Generated enabled.

Video when biometric verify mode is

Indicates that level of camera blindness

(covered by some sort of obstacle) exceeded configured threshold.

Video The alarm is restored.

Fire

Video

Video

Burglary

Generated when a block acknowledge command is sent. This command acknowledges any existing unacknowledged alarms in the system all at once.

Generated when a change in overall brightness level of the scene is detected.

Generated when changes in brightness level are no longer exceeding the user defined threshold.

A burglary alarm condition has been detected.

Burglary Alarm Cross

Point

Burglary Alarm Cross

Point

Burglary

Burglary Alarm Restore Burglary Alarm Restore Burglary

Burglary Bypass

Burglary Cancel

Burglary Bypass

Burglary Cancel

Burglary

Burglary

A burglary alarm condition has been restored.

A burglary zone has been bypassed.

A burglary zone has been cancelled by an authorized user.

Burglary Close

Burglary Inactive

Burglary Open

Burglary Restore

Burglary Close

Burglary Inactive

Burglary Open

Burglary Restore

Open/Close

Burglary

Open/Close

Burglary

Burglary Supervisory

Burglary Test

Burglary Supervisory

Burglary Test

Burglary

Burglary

A burglary alarm/trouble condition has been eliminated.

An unsafe intrusion detection system condition has been detected.

A burglary zone has been activated during testing.

488 —

revision 1


Alarm

Burglary Trouble

Burglary Trouble

Restore

Burglary Unbypass

Burglary Verified

Busy Seconds

Event

Burglary Trouble

Burglary Trouble

Restore

Burglary Unbypass

Burglary Verified

Busy Seconds

Event Type

Burglary

Burglary

Burglary

Burglary

System

Bypass - Closed

Bypass Restore

C900 Battery Low

C900 Battery Restore

C900 Input Open

C900 Input Restored

C900 Input Shorted

C900 Intercepted

Disabled

C900 Intercepted

Enabled

Bypass - Closed

Bypass Restore

C900 Battery Low

C900 Battery Restore

C900 Input Open

C900 Input Restored

C900 Input Shorted

C900 Intercepted

Disabled

C900 Intercepted

Enabled

C900

C900 Output Activated C900 Output Activated C900

C900 Output

Deactivated

C900 Output

Deactivated

C900

C900 Reboot C900 Reboot C900

C900 C900 Switched to

Fallback

C900 Switched to

Intercept

C900 Switched to

Fallback

C900 Switched to

Intercept

Cabinet Tamper Active Cabinet Tamper

C900

System

Open/Close

System

C900

C900

C900

C900

C900

C900

Cabinet Tamper

Restored

Callback Request

Callback Request

Cancelled Cabinet

Tamper

Callback Request

Call Conferenced

System

System

Intercom

Description

A burglary trouble condition has been detected.

A burglary trouble condition has been restored.

Burglary zone bypass has been removed.

A burglary alarm has occurred and been verified within programmed conditions.

The percent of time the receiver’s line card is online.

Generated when a cabinet tamper condition has been detected.

Generated when a cabinet tamper condition has been restored.

Call Disconnected

Call Ended

Call Disconnected

Call Ended

Intercom

Intercom

Generated when an intercom call has been disconnected.

Generated when a call has ended.

revision 1

— 489


Alarm

Call Established

Event

Call Established

Event Type

Intercom

Call Failed

Call to a busy subscriber

Call to an open subscriber

Call to a private subscriber

Call Transferred

Call Failed

Call to a busy subscriber

Call to an open subscriber

Call to a private subscriber

Call Transferred

Intercom

Intercom

Intercom

Intercom

Intercom

Camera Tamper Active Camera Tamper Active Video

Description

Generated when an intercom call is answered.

Generated when an intercom call fails.

Generated when an intercom call has been placed to a busy subscriber.

Generated when an intercom call has been placed to an open subscriber.

Generated when a call has been placed to a private subscriber.

Generated when a call was transferred.

Indicates that IP Camera configuration was changed bypassing the B.A.S.I.S. software.

(It is possible if the user knows password to access the IP Camera and connect to it directly using IP Camera provided Webinterface.)

The alarm is restored. LNVR changed camera settings back to normal.

Camera Tamper

Restored

Cancel Alarm

Cancel Entire Sale

Cancel Report

Capture Source

Mismatch

Camera Tamper

Restored

Cancel Alarm

Cancel Entire Sale

Cancel Report

Capture Source

Mismatch

Carbon Monoxide

Detected

Card Added

Card Assigned

Carbon Monoxide

Detected

Card Added

Card Assigned

Gas

System

System

Card Deleted Card Deleted System

Cash Amount Tendered Cash Amount Tendered POS

Video

System

POS

System

Video

Cash or Safe Drop

Change Due

Cash or Safe Drop

Change Due

POS

POS

Change of State Change of State System

Charge Account Tender Charge Account Tender POS

Generated when a transaction is used to indicate that an entire sale was cancelled.

Untyped zone cancel.

Indicates that user-specified IP Camera type in B.A.S.I.S. does not match actual IP

Camera type.

Generated when carbon monoxide has been detected by an alarm.

Generated when a card has been added.

An access ID has been added to the controller.

An access ID has been deleted from the controller.

Generated when an event is used to indicate that a cash amount has been tendered

Generated when a transaction indicating a cash or safe drop has occurred.

Generated when a transaction indicating the change due has occurred.

An expansion/peripheral device is reporting a new condition or state change.

Generated when a charge account was used as tender.

490 —

revision 1


Alarm Event

Check Tender

Checksum Fail

Check Tender

Checksum Fail

Cipher Mode Disabled Cipher Mode Disabled

Cipher Mode Enabled Cipher Mode Enabled

Event Type

POS

System

System

System

Clerk Name or Number Clerk Name or Number POS

Close Area

Close by User

Close Exception

Close Out of Window

Closing

Closing Delinquent

Closing Extend

Closing Out of Window by User

Close Area

Close by User

Close Exception

Close Out of Window

Closing

Closing Delinquent

Closing Extend

Closing Out of Window by User

Closing Report

Closing Switch

Closing Report

Closing Switch

Closing Time Changed Closing Time Changed

Combustion Alarm Combustion Alarm

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Open/Close

Combustion Alarm

Restore

Command (#) Set From

Reader

Command Pin +10 Set

From Reader

Command Pin +20 Set

From Reader

Command Sent

Combustion Alarm

Restore

Command (#) Set From

Reader

Command Pin +10 Set

From Reader

Command Pin +20 Set

From Reader

Command Sent

Open/Close

System

System

System

System

Communication Access

Denied

Communication Access

Denied

System

Description

Generated when a check was used as tender.

A checksum failure has been detected.

Generated when Cipher mode is disabled for a reader.

Generated when cipher mode is enabled for a reader. When this occurs card data can be entered via the keypad.

A transaction that reports the clerk’s name or number.

The system has been partially armed

The area has been armed by a user.

The closing time has been extended.

The system is armed and normal

A combustion alarm condition has been detected.

A combustion alarm condition has been restored.

Generated when the reader keypad command “(#)” was executed.

Indicates the reader command “Pin +10” was executed.

Indicates the reader command “Pin +20” was executed.

A command has been sent to an expansion/ peripheral device.

Indicates that a wrong password has been entered while logging on to a communication device.

revision 1

— 491


Alarm

Communication

Initialization Failed

Event

Communication

Initialization Failed

Communication

Trouble Restore

Communications Fail

Communications Lost

Communication

Trouble Restore

Communications Fail

Communications Lost

System

System

System

Communications Lost -

Primary Path

Communications Lost -

Secondary Path

Communications Path

Switched - Primary to

Secondary

Communications Path

Switched Secondary to

Primary

Communications

Restore

Communications

Restored

Communications

Restored - Primary Path

Communications

Restored - Secondary

Path

Communications

Trouble

Communications With

Host Lost

Primary

Communication Path

Lost

Secondary

Communication Path

Lost

Communications Path

Switched - Primary to

Secondary

Communications Path

Switched Secondary to

Primary

Communications

Restore

Communications

Restored

Primary

Communication Path

Restored

Secondary

Communication Path

Restored

Communications

Trouble

Communications With

Host Lost

System

System

System

System

System

System

System

System

System

System

Communications With

Host Restored

Communications With

Host Restored

System

Complimentary Tender Complimentary Tender POS

Event Type

System

Description

Generated when the Communication Server fails to initialize communications. For example if you are using RS-232 and have hyperterminal running and using COM1 and then you start up the Communication Server and it needs to use COM1 to communicate to a panel, it will fail to open up the serial port and this event will be logged.

A communication trouble has been restored.

A communication has failed.

Generated when communications to the device have been lost.

Generated when the primary path lost communication with the host.

Generated when the secondary path loses communication with the host.

Generated when the communication path has been switched from the primary path to the secondary path.

Generated when the communication path has switched from the secondary path to the primary path.

Generated when communications have been restored.

Generated when communications to the device have been restored.

Generated when the primary path restored communication with the host.

Generated when the secondary path restored communication with the host.

A communications trouble has been detected.

An event was generated by the hardware when communications with the host was lost.

An event was generated by the hardware when communications with the host was restored.

Generated when the tender was complimentary.

492 —

revision 1


Alarm

Computer Trouble

Conferenced Call

Congestion

Congestion Restored

Event

Computer Trouble

Congestion

Congestion Restored

Controller Connection

Mismatch

Controller Connection

Mismatch

Controller Encryption

Error

CPU Data Error

CPU Utilization

Threshold Exceeded

CPU Utilization

Threshold Restored

Credit Card Tendered

Cross Zone Trouble

Current Time

Controller Encryption

Error

CPU Data Error

CPU Utilization

Threshold Exceeded

CPU Utilization

Threshold Restored

Credit Card Tendered

Cross Zone Trouble

Current Time

Event Type

System

Intercom

Video

Video

System

System

System

System

System

POS

Trouble

POS

Description

Generated if a call is conferenced together with another call.

Generated when the user-specified level and pattern of congestion is detected within a region of interest.

Generated 8 seconds after last detection of a

Congestion event.

Generated when the B.A.S.I.S. attempts to make a connection to a controller by upgrading or degrading the connection while the controller is online.

Generated in several instances, including when:

• A controller is configured for a plain connection when it requires encryption.

• An encrypted controller is online, but its configuration is changed to a plain connection.

• A controller is configured for a plain connection, but then a physical controller swap is made where the new controller requires encryption.

• A controller that supports encryption is currently online with a plan connection, and then the DIR switch 8 is turned on.

A CPU data error was detected.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when current CPU level exceeds the user defined limit.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when the current CPU level drop below the user defined limit.

Generated when a credit card was used as tender.

An event that reports the current time.

revision 1

— 493


Alarm

Database Error Event

Polling Stopped

Event

Database Error Event

Polling Stopped

Database Error in Panel

Download

Database Error in Panel

Download

System

Data Lost

Date Changed

Day Trouble

Day Trouble Restore

Day/Night Alarm

Data Lost

Date Changed

Day Trouble

Day Trouble Restore

Day/Night Alarm

Day/Night Alarm

Restore

Deactivate Output

Dealer ID

Debit, ATM, Check

Card Tender

Deferred Close

Deferred Open/Close

Denied, Badge Not in

Panel

Denied Low Battery

Day/Night Alarm

Restore

Deactivate Output

Dealer ID

Debit, ATM, Check

Card Tender

Deferred Close

Deferred Open/Close

Denied, Badge Not in

Panel

Denied Low Battery

Denied, No Command

Authority

Denied, No Command

Authority

Denied

System

System

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

System

System

POS

Open/Close

Open/Close

Denied

Denied

Denied - No Host

Approval

Denied, PIN Only

Request

Denied - No Host

Approval

Denied, PIN Only

Request

Event Type

System

Description

Generated by the communication server when there is a problem writing events to the database. This event is not written to the database but is sent to Alarm Monitoring clients. Polling of the events from the various hardware devices is stopped until the events can be written to the database.

Generated by the communication server when the database cannot be opened at the start of a database download to a controller.

The dialer data has been lost and there is a transmission error.

The date was changed.

A day trouble condition has been detected.

A day trouble condition has been restored.

A day/night alarm condition has been detected.

A day/night alarm condition has been restored.

Denied

Denied

Transaction that indicated that a debit,

ATM, or check card was used as tender.

Generated when a badge is denied at a reader because it is not in the system.

Generated when access is denied because the battery on the device is low.

Generated when a reader command function was denied because the user did not have the command authority to execute the function.

Generated when access was denied because the host did not grant approval. This can happen because the host response did not come back in a timely fashion or the controller is offline with the host.

Generated when access was denied for a pin only request (either an invalid pin code or pin support is not enabled for the panel).

494 —

revision 1


Alarm

Denied, Reader

Excluded

Denied - Unauthorized

Assets

Denied Under Duress

Denied Unmask, Active

Zones in Group

Denied - Unauthorized

Assets

Access Denied Under

Duress

Denied Unmask -

Active Zones in Group

Denied

Duress

Denied

Deny Count Exceeded Deny Count Exceeded Denied

Deposit Amount Paid

Pending Purchase

Deposit Return

Detector High

Sensitivity

Detector High

Sensitivity Restore

Detector Low

Sensitivity

Event

Denied, Reader

Excluded

Deposit Amount Paid

Pending Purchase

Deposit Return

Detector High

Sensitivity

Detector High

Sensitivity Restore

Detector Low

Sensitivity

POS

POS

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Event Type

Denied

Description

Generated when access was denied because the reader exclusion list was violated. This happens when using precision access exclusion and the cardholder has access to the reader via an access level, but the precision access exclusion list has removed access.

Generated when access was denied because of unauthorized assets.

Generated when the cardholder was denied access under duress.

Generated when the unmask command failed because there are still active zones in the group.

Generated when a specified number of invalid attempts are made in a row at a reader.

Event indicating that a deposit amount paid pending purchase has occurred.

Transaction for a deposit return.

A detector high sensitivity condition has been detected.

A detector high sensitivity condition has been restored.

A detector low sensitivity condition has been detected.

Detector Low

Sensitivity Restore

Detector Low

Sensitivity Restore

Trouble

Detector Test

Detector Test Fail

Detector Test OK

Detector Test

Detector Test Fail

Detector Test OK

Fire

Fire

Fire

Device Turned Off Device Turned Off Trouble

Device Turned On Device Turned On Trouble

Device Type Mismatch Device Type Mismatch System

Diagnostic

Diagnostic Error

Diagnostic

Diagnostic Error

System

System

A detector low sensitivity condition has been restored.

Generated when the fire detection test is initiated.

Generated when the fire detection test fails.

Generated when the fire detection test is successfully completed.

A device turned off.

A device turned on.

Generated when the device is of a different type than what it has been configured for.

A diagnostic report was requested.

A device is reporting a diagnostic error.

revision 1

— 495


Alarm Event Event Type

Dial Out Method

Dialer Disabled

Dial Out Method

Dialer Disabled

System

Trouble

Dialer Disabled Restore Dialer Disabled Restore Trouble

Dialer Shutdown

Dialing Error

Dialup Last Connection

Time Expired

Dialer Shutdown

Dialing Error

Dialup Last Connection

Time Expired

Trouble

Trouble

System

Dialup Stored

Command Limit

Exceeded

Dialup Stored

Command Limit

Exceeded

System

Description

The dialer has become disabled.

The dialer has been restored from being disabled.

The dialer has shutdown.

An error has been detected when dialing.

Generated by the communication server for dialup panels that have exceeded the set number of hours since their last connection.

When this event is generated, the communication server will attempt to connect to the panel. If the dialup panel repeatedly receives this event, the panel should be investigated to see why it is not calling back.

Generated by the communication server for dialup panels that have exceeded their stored command limit. When this event is generated, the communication server will attempt to connect to the panel. If the dialup panel repeatedly receives this event, the panel should be investigated to see why it is not calling back.

Digital dialer failed to report its daily test.

Digital Dialer Daily

Test Fail

Digital Dialer Daily

Test Fail

System

Disable Intercept Mode Disable Intercept Mode System

Directional Motion Directional Motion Video

Directional Motion

Restored

Disarm From Alarm

Discount Entered as

Absolute Amount

Discount Entered as

Percentage

Disk Read Utilization

Threshold Exceeded

Directional Motion

Restored

Disarm From Alarm

Discount Entered as

Absolute Amount

Discount Entered as

Percentage


Threshold Exceeded

Video

System

POS

POS

System


Threshold Restored


Threshold Restored

System

Disk Write Utilization

Threshold Exceeded


Threshold Exceeded

System

Generated when an object moving in a prespecified direction is detected.

Generated 8 seconds after last detection of a

Directional Motion event.

An account in alarm was reset/disarmed.

Generated when a discount was entered as an absolute amount.

Generated when a discount was entered as a percentage.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when current hard drive read speed exceeds the user defined limit.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when the current hard drive read speed drops below the user defined limit.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when current hard drive write speed exceeds the user defined limit.

496 —

revision 1


Alarm


Threshold Restored

Event


Threshold Restored

Event Type

System

Door Close

Door Contact Tamper

Active

Door Contact Tamper

Restored

Door Cycled

Door Close

Door Contact Tamper

Door Contact Tamper

Cancelled

Door Cycled

System

System

System

System

Door Forced

Door Forced Open

Door Forced Open

Masked

Door Forced Open

Restored

Door Forced Open

Unmasked

Door Forced Trouble

Door Held Open

Door Forced

Door Forced Open

Door Forced Open

Masked

Door Forced Open

Cancelled

Door Forced Open

Unmasked

Door Forced Trouble

Door Held Open

Trouble

System

System

System

System

Trouble

Door Held Open

Masked

Door Held Open

Restored

Door Held Open

Unmasked

Door Left Open

Door Held Open

Masked

Door Held Open

Cancelled

Door Held Open

Unmasked

Door Left Open

Door Left Open Alarm Door Left Open Alarm Trouble

Door Left Open

Restore

Door Left Open

Trouble

Door Left Open Restore

Door Left Open Trouble

System

System

System

System

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

Description

Generated by an LNVR recorder when the current hard drive write speed drops below the user defined limit.

Generated when a door closes.

Generated when the door contact tamper has gone active.

Generated when the door contact tamper has been restored.

Generated when momentary access is granted to a door. This is a temporary door state in which the door initiates the door sequence as if a valid card was read.

Door cycled cannot be scheduled.

The door was forced open without an access request.

Generated when a “Door Forced Open” condition has been detected.

Generated when the “Door Forced Open” event has become masked for the device.

Generated when a “Door Forced Open” condition has been restored.

Generated when the “Door Forced Open” event has become unmasked for the device.

An access point has been forced open in an unarmed area.

Generated when a “Door Held Open” condition has been detected.

Generated when the “Door Held Open” event has become masked for the device.

Generated when a “Door Held Open” condition was restored.

Generated when the “Door Held Open” event has become unmasked for the device.

An access point was open when the door cycle time expired.

An open access point was open when the open time expired in an armed area.

An access point in a door left open state has restored.

An open access point was open when the open time expired in an unarmed area.

revision 1

— 497


Alarm

Door Locked

Door Open

Door Request

Door Restore

Door Secured

Event

Door Locked

Door Open

Door Request

Door Restore

Door Secured

Door Shunt Command

Executed From Reader

Door Shunt Command

Results - Cancelled

Door Station

Door Unlocked

Door Shunt Command

Executed From Reader

Door Shunt Command

Results - Cancelled

Door Station

Door Unlocked

Event Type

Trouble

System

System

Trouble

System

System

System

Trouble

System

Description

Generated when a door returns to its normal door state (locked). When a door is in the lock door state, you can initiate the door sequence using schedules, command center functions, door requests, or valid card requests.

Door locked is similar to a reader being in card and pin mode.

An event indicating that the door has opened.

This event is generated from Bosch intrusion panels when a door is manually activated to open without the presentation of an ID.

An access alarm/trouble condition has been eliminated.

Generated when no access is allowed to a door. When a door is in a secure state, no access is allowed through the door until it is returned to the locked state.

Door secured is similar to a reader being in locked mode.

Generated when the door shunt command was executed from the reader.

Generated when the door is closed while the door shunt command is executing.

Identified door for next report.

Generated when there is free access to a door. When a door is unlocked, the door is shunted and the strike does not prevent the door from opening. In this state, you do not need to activate a door request or present a valid card to gain access.

Door unlocked is similar to a reader being in unlocked mode.

Drift Compensation

Error

Driver Error in Panel

Download

Duct Alarm

Duct Alarm Restore

Duress Access Grant

Drift Compensation

Error

Driver Error in Panel

Download

Duct Alarm

Duct Alarm Restore

Duress Access Grant

Trouble

System

Trouble

Trouble

Duress

Generated by the communication server when an error occurs during a database download to a controller.

A duct alarm condition has been detected.

A duct alarm condition has been restored.

498 —

revision 1


Alarm

Duress Egress Grant

Elevator Terminal

Mode Access to

Authorized Floors

Elevator Terminal

Mode Default Floor

Elevator Terminal

Mode Default Floor or

User Entry of

Destination Floor

Elevator Terminal

Mode User Entry of

Destination Floor

Employee Sign Off

Employee Sign On

Extended Held

Command Denied

Extended Held

Command Set From

Reader

Extended Held Open

Mode Disabled

Extended Held Open

Mode Enabled

Facial Detection

Event

Duress Egress Grant

Elevator Terminal

Mode Access to

Authorized Floors

Elevator Terminal

Mode Default Floor

Elevator Terminal

Mode Default Floor or

User Entry of

Destination Floor

Elevator Terminal

Mode User Entry of

Destination Floor

Employee Sign Off

Employee Sign On

Extended Held

Command Denied

Extended Held

Command Set From

Reader

Extended Held Open

Mode Disabled

Extended Held Open

Mode Enabled

Facial Detection

Event Type

Duress

System

System

System

System

POS

POS

System

System

System

System

Video

Facial Detection

Restored

Facility Occupancy Too

Low


Low Restored


High


High Restored

Failed to Report

Expected Event

Facial Detection

Restored


Low


Low Restored


High


High Restored

Failed to Report

Expected Event

Video

Video

Video

Video

Video

System

Description

Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire

Generated when the elevator terminal mode has changed to “Access to Authorized

Floors.”

Generated when the elevator terminal mode has changed to “Default Floor Only.”

Generated when the elevator terminal mode has changed to “Default Floor or User Entry of Destination Floor.”

Generated when the elevator terminal mode has changed to “User Entry of Destination

Floor.”

Generated when an employee signs off.

Generated when an employee signs on.

Generated when an extended held command is denied.

Generated when an extended held command is entered at the reader.

Generated when extended held open mode is disabled.

Generated when extended held open mode is enabled.

Generated when one or several faces are detected.

Generated 8 seconds after last detection of a face.

Generated when the occupancy falls below the user-specified limit.

Generated when the occupancy returns to a value above the lower limit.

Generated when the occupancy rises above the user-specified limit.

Generated when the occupancy returns to a value below the upper limit.

Generated when a device that is supposed to report an event within a certain period of time fails to report an event during this time period.

Generated when a fire device is in alarm.

revision 1

— 499


Alarm

Fire Alarm

Acknowledge

Fire Alarm

Acknowledged Clear

Fire Alarm Block

Acknowledge

Fire Alarm In

Fire Alarm Out

Fire Button Set

Fire Missing

Fire Walk Test Ended

Event

Fire Alarm

Acknowledge

Fire Alarm

Acknowledged Clear

Fire Alarm Block

Acknowledge

Fire Alarm In

Fire Alarm Out

Fire Button Set

Fire Missing

Fire Walk Test Ended

Fire

Fire

Fire

Fire

Fire

Event Type

Fire

Fire

Fire

Description

Generated when a fire alarm has been acknowledged.

Generated when a fire alarm has been acknowledged and cleared.

Generated when all fire alarms have been acknowledged at the fire panel.

Generated when a new fire alarm has been detected for the device.

Generated when a device with a previous fire alarm has returned to its normal state.

The reported fire button has been set.

A fire walk test has ended.

Fire Walk Test Started

Fire Zone Walk Tested

Firmware Download

Started

Firmware Download

Completed

Firmware Download

Failed

First Card Unlock

Mode Disabled

First Card Unlock

Mode Enabled

Foil Break Alarm

Fire Walk Test Started

Fire Zone Walk Tested

Firmware Download

Started

Firmware Download

Completed

Firmware Download

Failed

First Card Unlock Mode

Disabled

First Card Unlock Mode

Enabled

Foil Break Alarm

Fire

Fire

System

System

System

System

System

Trouble

Foil Break Restore

Foodstamps Tender

Gasoline Prepayment

Gasoline Prepayment

Refund

Generic Event

Foil Break Restore

Foodstamps Tender

Gasoline Prepayment

Gasoline Prepayment

Refund

Generic Event

Trouble

POS

POS

POS

Generic

A fire walk test has started.

A fire zone has been tested.

Generated when the firmware download has started.

Generated when the firmware download has completed.

Generated when the firmware download has failed.

Generated when first card unlock mode is disabled for a door.

Generated when first card unlock mode is enabled for a door.

Generated when a break in a foil circuit occurs. This is most commonly used to trigger an alarm when glass being protected with the foil circuit is broken.

Generated when a foil break alarm condition has been restored.

Indicates that food stamps were used as tender.

Transaction for a gasoline prepayment

Transaction for a gasoline prepayment

A generic event exists with more specific information in the event text.

500 —

revision 1


Alarm

Global Linkage Action

Executed


Failed

Granted Access

Granted APB Violation,

Entry Made

Event


Executed


Failed

Access Granted

Access Granted Anti-

Passback Used

Granted APB Violation,

No Entry Made

Granted Facility Code

Granted Facility Code,

No Entry

Granted No Entry

Granted Under Duress

Granted Under Duress,

No Entry


Duress - No Entry Made

Grounded Loop Active Grounded Loop Alarm

Active

Grounded Loop

Restored

Guard Tour Action

Executed

Cancelled Grounded

Loop

Guard Tour Action

Executed

Guard Tour Action

Failed

History Report End

History Report Start

Hold

Access Granted Anti-

Passback Not Used

Access Granted On

Facility Code

Access Granted On

Facility Code No Entry

Made

Access Granted No

Entry Made


Duress

Guard Tour Action

Failed

History Report End

History Report Start

Hold

Event Type

System

System

Granted

Area Control

Area Control

Granted

Granted

Granted

Emergency

Emergency

System

System

System

System

System

System

Intercom

Holdup Alarm Restore

Host Executed

Function List

Host Open Door - Door

Used

Holdup Alarm Restore

Host Executed Function

List


Not Used

Emergency

System

System

Description

Generated when a global I/O linkage has executed.

Generated when a global I/O linkage has failed.

Generated when access was granted.

Generated when an anti-passback violation occurred but access was granted and entry was made. This can happen when using soft anti-passback.

Generated when an anti-passback violation occurred and access was granted but no entry was made. This can happen when using soft anti-passback.

Generated when access was granted based on a valid facility code.

Generated when access was granted on facility code but no entry was made at the door.

Generated when access was granted but no entry was made at the door.

Generated when the cardholder was granted access under duress.

Generated when the cardholder was granted access under duress but no entry was made.

Generated when a grounded loop fault condition has been detected.

Generated when the grounded loop fault condition was restored.

Generated when a guard tour action has executed.

Generated when a guard tour action has failed.

Generated when a phone call is placed on hold.

Holdup alarm was restored.

Generated when a function list has been executed from the host.

When the host issued an open door command and the door was opened.

revision 1

— 501


Alarm


Not Used

In-Camera-Memory

Download Completed

Event


Not Used

In-Camera-Memory

Download Completed

Event Type

System

System

In-Camera-Memory

Download Failed

In-Camera-Memory

Download Restored

In-Camera-Memory

Download Started

Inactive Badge

In-Camera-Memory

Download Failed

In-Camera-Memory

Download Restored

In-Camera-Memory

Download Started

Inactive Badge

System

System

System

Denied

Incoming Call

Information Message

Initiated

Input Masked

Input Unmasked

Intercom Function

Incoming Call

Information Message

Initiated

Input Masked

Input Unmasked

Intercom Function

Intercom

POS

Intercom

System

System

Intercom

Insufficient Frame Rate Insufficient Frame Rate Video

Insufficient Frame Rate

Restored

Insufficient Frame Rate

Restored

Intrusion Command

Accepted

Intrusion Command

Denied

Invalid Access Level

Invalid Badge

Invalid Camera

Intrusion Command

Accepted

Intrusion Command

Denied

Invalid Access Level

Invalid Badge

Invalid Camera

Video

Generic

Denied

Denied

Denied

Video

Description

When the host issued an open door command and the door was not opened.

Generated when the process of retrieving the files from the camera memory is completed.

Generated when the process of retrieving the files from the camera memory is failed.

Generated when the process of retrieving the files from the camera memory is restored.

Generated when the process of retrieving the files from the camera memory is started.

Generated when access was denied because the badge was inactive.

Generated when there is an incoming call.

Used to report information messages

Generated when a phone call is initiated.

Generated when an input has become masked.

Generated when an input has become unmasked.

Generated when an intercom function has been executed.

Generated when the IntelligentVideo engine does not receive a sufficient frame rate for the events configured on the video channel.

Generated when the frame rate reaches a value sufficient for the events configured on the video channel.

An intrusion command was successfully executed.

An attempt to execute an intrusion command was denied, either the command is not allowed at the reader, the user is not authorized for this command, or invalid command arguments were supplied.

Generated when access was denied because of an invalid access level.

Generated when access was denied because the badge ID was unknown to the controller.

Generated when the camera is tampered with (covered, moved, or out-of-focus).

502 —

revision 1


Alarm

Invalid Camera

Restored

Invalid Card Format

Invalid Device Serial

Number

Invalid Facility Code

Invalid Issue Code

Invalid OEM Code

Invalid PIN

Item Correct of

Previously entered Item

Item Sold

IVS Channel

Processing Failed

IVS Channel

Processing Restarted

IVS Connection Lost

IVS Connection

Restored

Event

Invalid Camera

Restored

Invalid Card Format

Invalid Device Serial

Number

Invalid Facility Code

Invalid Issue Code

Invalid OEM Code

Invalid PIN Number

IVS Connection Lost

IVS Connection

Restored

System

Denied

Denied

Denied

Item Correct of

Previously entered Item

Item Sold

IVS Channel Processing

Failed

POS

POS

Video

IVS Channel Processing

Restarted

Video

Video

Video

IVS Engine Connection

Lost


Lost

Video


Restored


Restored

Event Type

Video

Denied

System

Video

Description

Generated 8 seconds after the camera becomes valid again or in the case of camera covered or moved, when the background is relearned.

Generated when the badge contained a card format that was not recognized by the reader.

Generated when the device does not have a valid serial number.

Generated when access was denied because the badge had an invalid facility code.

Generated when access was denied because the issue code read from the badge did not match the current issue code stored in the database for the badge.

Indicates that the hardware did not contain the expected OEM (Original Equipment

Manufacturer) code.

Generated when access was denied because an invalid PIN was entered.

Generated to indicate that an item was corrected.

Indicates an item was sold.

Generated by the IntelligentVideo Server when video processing is terminated due to an error or lost connection.

Generated when the IntelligentVideo Server re-establishes a connection to a channel that previously reported failure.

Generated when the camera is configured to analyze video on a remote IntelligentVideo

Server and connection to the

IntelligentVideo Server is lost.

Generated when the connection to the

IntelligentVideo Server was lost and has been restored.

Generated when the IntelligentVideo Server looses connection to the LpsSearchSvc service and video processing of all channels fails.

Generated when the IntelligentVideo Server reconnects to the LpsSearchSvc service after the connection has been lost.

revision 1

— 503


Alarm

Key Override

Keypad Fire

Lamp Test Activated

Lamp Test Completed Lamp Test Completed

License Will Soon

Expire - X Days Left

License Will Soon

Expire - X Days Left

Line Error Active

Line Error Restored

Local I/O Executed

Function List

Loitering

Loitering Restored

Lottery Pay Out

Lottery Sale

Event

Key Override

Keypad Fire

Lamp Test Activated

Line Error Active

Cancelled Line Error

Local I/O Executed

Function List

Loitering

Loitering Restored

Lottery Pay Out

Lottery Sale

System

System

System

Video

Video

POS

POS

Event Type

System

Fire

Fire

Fire

System

Description

Generated when the key override is used in a Mortise lockset. Not supported in

Cylindrical lockset.

A fire alarm has been generated from a keypad.

Generated when the lamp test is activated.

When a lamp test is activated the AM-2020 will send out a command sequence to display a set of solid blocks on the hardware’s LCD.

Generated when the lamp test successfully completes.

Generated when the system license is reaching its expiration date. This alarm is dependent on linkage server being configured and running on a host workstation. It is advised that this alarm be configured to be e-mailed to the system administrator.

For more information, refer to Send an E-mail

on page 174.

Note:

In order for the alarm to be reported to monitoring stations there must be at least one panel configured and marked online.

The panel does not need to exist or actually be online in Alarm

Monitoring, it simply needs to exist in the System Status view.

Note:

This event must be available as an input event to use the Global I/O output action. Make sure it is available to be sent out via

DataConduIT.

Generated when a line error fault condition has been detected.

Generated when the line error fault condition was restored.

Generated when a local I/O function list has been activated.

Generated when a loiterer is detected.

Generated 8 seconds after the last detection of a Loitering event.

Generated when a lottery pay out has occurred.

Generated when an event for a lottery sale has occurred.

504 —

revision 1


Alarm

Low Voltage

Event

Low Voltage

Low Voltage Restored Low Voltage Restored

Manufacturer Coupon

Manufacturer Coupon

Redemption

Max Assets Reached

Manufacturer Coupon

Manufacturer Coupon

Redemption

Max Assets Reached

Event Type

System

System

POS

POS

System

Max Biometric

Templates Reached

Max Cardholders

Reached

Merchandise Returned

Miscellaneous Tender

Module Active

Module Clear

Motion Detected (AI)

Max Biometric

Templates Reached

Max Cardholders

Reached

Merchandise Returned

Miscellaneous Tender

Module Active

Module Clear


System

System

POS

POS

Fire

Fire

Video

Description

Generated when a low voltage condition has been detected at the device.

Generated when a device resumes its proper voltage.

Indicates a manufacturer coupons.

Transaction generated for a manufacturer coupon redemption.

Generated during a download when the number of assets exceeds the maximum value configured for the controller. Only the maximum number of assets will be downloaded (all others will be ignored).

Generated during a download when the number of biometric templates exceeds the maximum value configured for the controller. Only the maximum number of templates will be downloaded (all others will be ignored).

Generated during a download when the number of cardholders exceeds the maximum value configured for the controller. Only the maximum number of cardholders will be downloaded (all others will be ignored).

Generated when merchandise is returned.

Generated when miscellaneous tender is used.

Generated when a monitor or control module connected to the system becomes active. The device label assigned to this device and the zone label assigned to the first zone programmed for this device will be included with the event.

Generated when a monitor or control module connected to the system is no longer active. The device label assigned to this device and the zone label assigned to the first zone programmed for this device will be included with the event.

Generated when motion has been detected on a given input channel (camera). Motion is considered any change in the environment within the field of view of the camera.

revision 1

— 505


Alarm


Restored

Event


Restored

Event Type

Video

Muster Mode Reset

Muster Mode Start

Negative Tax

Negative Total

Network Utilization

Threshold Exceeded

Network Utilization

Threshold Restored

Muster Mode Reset

Muster Mode Start

Negative Tax

Negative Total

Network Utilization

Threshold Exceeded

Mustering

Mustering

POS

POS

System

No Biometric Template

Data

No Biometric Template

Data

Biometric

Non-Fire Active

Non-Fire Active

Cleared

Not Configured

No Sale

Object Crosses a

Region

Object Crosses a

Region Restored

Object Detection

Object Detection

Restored

Object Left Behind

Object Left Behind

Restored

Object Lurking

Network Utilization

Threshold Restored

Non-Fire Active

Non-Fire Active

Cleared

Not Configured

No Sale

Object Crosses a

Region

Object Crosses a

Region Restored

Object Detection

Object Detection

Restored

Object Left Behind

Object Left Behind

Restored

Object Lurking

System

System

System

System

POS

Video

Video

Video

Video

Video

Video

Video

Description

Generated when motion has been restored

(is no longer detected) on a given input channel (camera). Motion is considered any change in the environment within the field of view of the camera.

Generated when muster mode is reset.

Generated when muster mode is started.

Generated when negative tax is used.

Generated when there is a negative total.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when current Network activity levels exceeds the user defined limit.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when the current Network activity level dropped below the user defined limit.

Generated when no biometric template data was available from the biometric reader at the end of a verification sequence.

An event indicating a non fire related alarm condition is active.

An event indicating a non fire related alarm condition is no longer active.

Generated when a device has not been configured or defined by the host.

Transaction generated for a no sale.

Generated when an object is detected in the process of crossing a user-specified region.

Generated 8 seconds after the last detection of an Object Crosses a Region event.

Generated when an object complying with user-specifications is detected.

Generated 8 seconds after the last detection of an Object Detection event.

Generated when a foreground object is left for more than a pre-specified duration.

Generated when the left object was taken or the background (after a certain time interval) is relearned.

Generated when a moving object stops or slows down for at least 7 seconds.

506 —

revision 1


Alarm Event Event Type

Object Lurking

Restored

Object Lurking

Restored

Video

Object Moves Too Fast Object Moves Too Fast Video

Object Moves Too Fast

Restored

Object Starts to Move

Object Moves Too Fast

Restored


Video

Video


Restored

Object Removed


Restored

Object Removed

Video

Video

Object Removed

Restored

Object Stops

Object Stops Restored

Open Door Command

Issued - Door Used

Open Door Command

Issued - Door Used

Open Door Command

Issued - Door Not Used

Open Line Active

Open Line Restored

Override

Preprogrammed Price

Panel Download

Completed

Panel Download

Started

Panel Event Capacity

Exceeded - Events

Overwritten

Panel Free Memory

Low

Object Removed

Restored

Object Stops

Object Stops Restored

Open Door Command

Issued - Door Not Used

Open Line Active

Cancelled Open Line

Override

Preprogrammed Price

Full Panel Download

Completed

Full Panel Download

Started

Panel Event Capacity

Exceeded - Events

Overwritten

Panel Free Memory

Low

Video

Video

Video

System

System

System

System

POS

System

System

System

System

Description

Generated 8 seconds after the last detection of an Object Lurking event.

Generated when a moving object is detected in a scene with a speed that exceeds the user-specified rate.

Generated 8 seconds after the last detection of an Object Moves Too Fast event.

Generated when a monitored object begins moving.

Generated 8 seconds after last detection of an Object Starts to Move event.

Generated when a background object is removed.

Generated when the object is returned to its original location or the background (after a certain time interval) is relearned.

Generated when a foreground object stops.

Generated 8 seconds after the last detection of an Object Stops event.

Indicates that a command was issued to open the door and the door was used. This can be for a locally generated open door command or one from the host.

Indicates that a command was issued to open up the door and the door was not used.

This can be for a locally generated open door command or one from the host.

Generated when an open line fault condition has been detected.

Generated when the open line fault condition was restored.

Generated when the preprogrammed price is overridden.

Generated when a database download to the controller has completed.

Generated when a database download to the controller has started.

Generated when the event log in the panel fills up and starts overwriting old events.

Generated when the free memory in the panel (controller) is below what is determined to be a safe value.

revision 1

— 507


Alarm

Panel ID Mismatch

Panel Options

Mismatch

Event

Panel ID Mismatch

Panel Options

Mismatch

Panel Power Up

Complete

Panic Abort

Panic Alarm

Panic Alarm Restore

Panel Power Up

Complete

Panic Abort

Panic Alarm

Panic Alarm Restore

Pay Out

Payment of Refund to

Customer

Payment Toward

Charge Account

Balance

People Counting

Pay Out

Payment of Refund to

Customer

Payment Toward

Charge Account

Balance

People Counting Video

POS

POS

POS

System

Trouble

Trouble

Trouble

People Entry Rate Too

High


High

Video


High Restored


High Restored

Video


Low


Low

Video


Low Restored


Low Restored

Video

People Exit Rate Too

High


High

Video

Event Type

System

System

Description

Generated when the panel (controller) has a different ID than what is in the database.

This can happen if a new panel or replacement panel is placed out in the field.

A download to the panel should correct the problem.

Generated when the options inside of the panel differ from what the panel is currently configured for in the database. This can happen if the panel options change and a download is not issued to the panel. To correct this situation, a download should be issued to the panel.

Generated when the panel power up is complete.

Generated when a panic alarm has been manually aborted/canceled.

Generated when emergency assistance has been manually requested.

Generated when the panic alarm has been restored.

Generated when a payout takes place.

Generated when a payment or refund is given to a customer.

Generated when a payment toward an account balance.

Generated when the count was updated

(usually within a short delay after an individual passes).

Generated when the number of entering people rises above the limit during the specified time interval.

Generated when the number of entering people returns to a value below the limit during the specified time interval.

Generated when the number of entering people falls below the limit during the specified time interval.

Generated when the number of entering people returns to a value above the limit during the specified time interval.

Generated when the number of exiting people rises above the limit during the specified time interval.

508 —

revision 1


Alarm


High Restored


Low


Low Restored

Pick Up

Point Enabled

Point Disabled

Poor Video Visibility

Event


High Restored


Low


Low Restored

Pick Up

Point Enabled

Point Disabled



Restored

Power Failure Active


Restored

Power Failure

Power Failure Restored Cancelled Power

Failure

Pre-Alarm Pre-Alarm

Pre-Alarm Clear

Price Lookup

Pre-Alarm Clear

Price Lookup

System

POS

Quantity or Weight

Reader Input Tamper

Active

Reader Input Tamper

Restored

Reader Low Battery

Reader Low Battery

Restored

Reader Mode Card and

Pin

Reader Mode Card

Only

Reader Mode Facility

Code

Quantity or Weight

Reader Input Tamper

Reader Input Tamper

Cancelled

Reader Low Battery

Reader Low Battery

Restored

Reader Mode Card and

Pin

Reader Mode Card

Only

Reader Mode Facility

Code

POS

System

System

System

System

System

System

System

Video

System

System

System

Event Type

Video

Video

Video

Description

Generated when the number of exiting people returns to a value below the limit during the specified time interval.

Generated when the number of exiting people falls below the limit during the specified time interval.

Generated when the number of exiting people returns to a value above the limit during the specified time interval.

Transaction indicating a pick up has occurred.

POS

System

System

Video Generated when indefinite edges are present in the video image likely caused by environmental factors such as fog or glare.

Generated when the video quality returns to an acceptable level.

Generated when a power failure condition has been detected.

Generated when the power failure condition was restored.

An event indicating a pre-alarm condition is active.

An event indicating a pre-alarm condition is no longer active.

Generated when a price lookup has taken place.

An event indicating a quantity or weight.

Generated when the reader input tamper has gone active.

Generated when the reader input tamper was restored.

Generated when a reader has a low battery.

Generated when a reader low battery condition has been restored.

Generated when the reader mode has changed to “Pin and Card” for the device.

Generated when the reader mode has changed to “Card Only.”

Generated when the reader mode has changed to “Facility Code Only.”

revision 1

— 509


Alarm

Reader Mode First

Card Unlock

Reader Mode Locked

Event

Reader Mode First Card

Unlock

Reader Mode Locked

Event Type

System

System

Reader Mode Pin or

Card

Reader Mode Pin or

Card

System

Reader Mode Unlocked Reader Mode Unlocked System

Reader Motor Stalled


Restored

Reader Reset



Restored

Reader Reset

System

System

System

Register X Report

Register Z Report

Rejected Biometric

Score

Relay Contact

Activated

Relay Contact

Deactivated

Removed Object

Removed Object

Restored

Register X Report

Register Z Report

Rejected Biometric

Score

Relay Contact

Activated

Relay Contact

Deactivated

Removed Object

Removed Object

Restored

POS

POS

Biometric

System

System

Video

Video

Description

Generated when the reader mode has changed to “First Card Unlock.”

Generated when the reader mode has changed to “Locked.”

Generated when the reader mode has changed to “Pin or Card” for the device.

Generated when the reader mode has changed to “Unlocked.”

Generated when the motor stalls on a reader.

Generated when a motor stalled condition has been restored.

Generated when the firmware resets the reader. This can happen if the reader is brand new or in the case of a failed/ incomplete download. Internal conditions, such as a possible corrupt memory, can also cause the firmware to reset. In these cases, the firmware will rewrite its entire storage with default values, overwriting the downloaded values. When this happens, the user must reprogram the lockset.

Indicates a X report was generated. X reports are financial, end of day, clerk, etc. reports.

Indicates a Z report was generated. Z reports are the same as X reports, but resets totals to zero.

This event returns the rejected biometric score (the actual denied event is sent separately).

Generated when a relay contact was activated.

Generated when a relay contact was deactivated.

Generated when an object which was part of the background is detected as missing.

Generated when the object is returned to its original location or the background (after a certain time interval) is relearned.

510 —

revision 1


Alarm

Request to Exit - Door

Used

Event


Used

Event Type

System


Not Used

Retrieved

Ringing

Sales Subtotal

Schedule Change

Schedule Executed

Retrieved

Ringing

Sales Subtotal

Schedule Change

Schedule Executed

Intercom

Intercom

POS

System

System

Scheduler Action

Executed

Scheduler Action

Failed

Security Alarm

Acknowledge

Security Alarm Block

Acknowledge

Security Alarm In

Scheduler Action

Executed

System

Scheduler Action Failed System

Security Alarm

Acknowledge

Security Alarm Block

Acknowledge

Security Alarm In

Fire

Fire

Fire

Security Alarm Out Security Alarm Out Fire

Shorted Line Active

Shorted Line Restored

Signal Silence


Not Used

Shorted Line Alarm

Active

Canceled Shorted Line

Signal Silence

System

System

System

Fire

Description

Generated when the request to exit is granted and the door is used.

Note:

If the Assumed Door Used checkbox is selected on the

Readers form, then the door is assumed to be used. This might interfere with this event.

Generated when the request to exit is granted and the door is not used.

Note:

If the Assumed Door Used checkbox is selected on the

Readers form, then the door is assumed to be used. This might interfere with this event.

Generated when a phone call is retrieved/ answered.

Generated when an intercom station/phone is ringing.

A transaction that reports the sale subtotal

Generated when a schedule, added in the

Scheduler, is changed.

Generated when a schedule, added in the

Scheduler, is executed.

Generated when a scheduler action has executed.

Generated when a scheduler action has failed.

Generated when a security alarm has been acknowledged.

Generated when all security alarms have been acknowledged at the fire panel.

Generated when a new security alarm has been detected for the device.

Generated when a device with a previous security alarm has returned to its normal state.

Generated when a shorted line fault condition has been detected.

Generated when a device with a shorted line fault condition has returned to its normal state.

Generated when the alarm signal on the hardware has been silenced.

revision 1

— 511


Alarm

Smart Card

Authentication Failed

Smart VMD

Smart VMD Restored

Smoke Detection

Smoke Detection

Restored

Status In

Status - Missing Fire

Supervision

Status Out

Storage Failure

Store Coupon

Supervisory

Acknowledge

Supervisory Block

Acknowledge

Supervisory In

Supervisory Out

Event

Smart Card

Authentication Failed

Smart VMD

Smart VMD Restored

Smoke Detection

Smoke Detection

Restored

Status In

Status - Missing Fire

Supervision

Status Out

Storage Failure

Store Coupon

Supervisory

Acknowledge

Supervisory Block

Acknowledge

Supervisory In

Supervisory Out

Event Type

System

Video

Video

Video

Video

Fire

Fire

Fire

Video

POS

Fire

Fire

Fire

Fire

System Reset System Reset Fire

Tax Amount

Taxable Subtotal

Timeout Exceeded - No

Second Card

Tax Amount

Taxable Subtotal

Timeout Exceeded - No

Second Card

POS

POS

Area Control

Time Out-Of-Sync Time Out-Of-Sync Video

Time Out-Of-Sync

Restored

Time Out-Of-Sync

Restored

Video

Description

Generated when a smart card authentication failed.

Generated when a change is detected.

Generated 8 seconds after the last detection of a Smart VMD event.

Generated when smoke has been detected for the specified amount of time.

Generated 8 seconds after the last detection of a Smoke Detection event.

Generated when a status reporting device is active.

Fire supervision is missing.

Generated when a status reporting device has returned to the inactive state.

Indicates that something is wrong related to recording/retrieving video to/from hard drives. Includes LNVR database failure.

Indicates a store coupon.

Generated when a supervisory condition has been acknowledged.

Generated when all supervisory conditions have been acknowledged at the fire panel.

Generated when a new supervisory condition has been detected for the device.

Generated when a device with a previous supervisory condition has returned to its normal state.

Generated when the fire panel has been reset.

Event that indicates the tax amount.

Transaction that reports the taxable subtotal

Generated when no second card was presented within the time limit for the area/ reader using two-man control.

Generated when the time stamp feature is enabled and the time on the camera has a difference of 20 seconds or more from the video recorder time.

Generated when the time difference between the camera and video recorder returns to less than 20 seconds.

512 —

revision 1


Alarm

Total Amount Due

Transaction Number

Transfer, Diagnostics

Transfer, History

Transfer, PDA To Lock

Transferred Call

Transmitter Alarm

Transmitter Alarm

Restored

Transmitter Inactivity

Event

Total Amount Due

Transaction Number

Transfer, Diagnostics

Transfer, History

Transfer, PDA To Lock

Transmitter Alarm

Transmitter Alarm

Restored

Transmitter Inactivity

Event Type

POS

POS

System

System

System

Intercom

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter Low

Battery

Transmitter Low

Battery Restored

Transmitter Pre-Tilt

Transmitter Tilt

Disabled

Transmitter Tilt

Enabled

Transmitter Low

Battery

Transmitter Low

Battery Restored


Transmitter Tilt

Disabled

Transmitter Tilt

Enabled

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter


Restored

Transmitter Pull Cord

Alarm


Restored

Transmitter Tamper

Transmitter Tamper

Restored

Transmitter Temporary

Tilt Disable

Transmitter Tilt


Restored


Alarm


Restored

Transmitter Tamper

Transmitter Tamper

Restored

Transmitter Temporary

Tilt Disable

Transmitter Tilt

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Description

Transaction indicating the total amount due.

Event Generated that indicates the transaction number of the sales transaction.

Generated when a user is connected to the device for diagnostic purposes.

Generated when a history data was transferred from the device to the parent device.

Generated when the device (lockset) is programmed/reprogrammed through a download from a PDA.

Generated if an intercom call is transferred.

Generated when the button or input on a transmitter has been activated.

Generated when the transmitter alarm has been restored.

Transmitter has been inactive longer than the supervision interval

Transmitter low battery alarm

Generated when a transmitter low battery has been restored.

Generated when the transmitter is in the pretilt state.

Generated when the transmitter has returned to normal from the pre-tilt state.

Generated when the pull cord on a transmitter has been pulled and is in alarm.

Generated when the transmitter pull cord alarm has been restored.

Transmitter tamper alarm.

Generated when a transmitter tamper has been restored.

Generated when the transmitter temporary tilt has been disabled.

Generated when a tilt condition on the transmitter has been detected.

Generated when the transmitter tilt function has been disabled.

Generated when the transmitter tilt function has been enabled.

revision 1

— 513


Alarm

Transmitter Tilt

Restored

Transmitter

Acknowledge

Transmitter No

Response

Transmitter Touch

Alarm

Transmitter Removal

Alarm

Trouble Acknowledge

Trouble Bell #

Trouble Out

Unanswered Call

Unexpected Access

Unexpected Access

Attempt

Unknown Elevator

Terminal

Event

Transmitter Tilt

Restored

Transmitter

Acknowledge

Transmitter No

Response

Transmitter Touch

Alarm

Transmitter Removal

Alarm

Trouble Acknowledge

Trouble Acknowledge

Clear

Trouble Acknowledge

Clear

Trouble Bell 1 or 2

Trouble Bell # Restore Trouble Bell 1 or 2

Trouble Block

Acknowledge

Trouble In

Restore

Trouble Block

Acknowledge

Trouble In

Trouble Out

Unanswered Call

Unexpected Access

Unexpected Access

Attempt

Unknown Elevator

Terminal

Event Type Description

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Transmitter

Generated when the tilt condition on the transmitter has been restored.

This event is reported when an alarm generated by a transmitter has been acknowledged.

This event is reported when an alarm generated by a transmitter has not been acknowledged.

Alarm generated by a transmitter when the item it is protecting is touched.

Alarm generated by a transmitter when an item it is protecting is removed.

Fire

Fire

Relay/Sounder Generated when Trouble bell 1 or 2 is in alarm.

Relay/Sounder Generated when Trouble bell 1 or 2 is restored.

Fire Generated when all trouble conditions have been acknowledged at the fire panel.

Fire

Generated when a trouble condition that has been cleared from the system has been acknowledged by a user.

Fire

Generated when a new trouble condition has been detected for the device.

Generated when a device with a previous trouble condition has returned to its normal state.

Intercom

Generated when the trouble condition has been acknowledged.

System

System

System

Generated if a ringing intercom call goes unanswered.

Generated when a user successfully exits using an unexpected exit reader, after gaining access to a specific entry reader, and the “must proceed to exit readers” option is enabled.

Generated when a user attempts to exit using an unexpected exit reader, after gaining access to a specific entry reader, and the “must proceed to exit readers” option is enabled.

Generated when an elevator terminal is detected that has not been configured in the system.

514 —

revision 1


Alarm

Unknown User

Command

Untyped Abort

Untyped Alarm

Update: Now able to

Achieve Current

Required Storage

Setting

Use Limit Exceeded

User Failed to Reach

Destination

User Generated Video

Event

Value Added

Video Event Threshold

Reached

Value Added

Video Event Threshold

Reached

Video Failover Failed

Event

Unknown User

Command

Untyped Abort

Untyped Alarm

Update: Now able to

Achieve Current

Required Storage

Setting

Use Limit Exceeded

User Failed to Reach

Destination

User Generated Video

Event

Video Failover Failed

Event Type

System

Trouble

Trouble

Untyped Alarm Restore Untyped Alarm Restore Trouble

Untyped Bypass Untyped Bypass Trouble

System

Denied

System

Video

POS

Video

Video

Description

Generated when an unknown user command is entered through a reader. For example, if a cardholder enters the command *1234#

(where that command means nothing) an unknown user command alarm is sent to

Alarm Monitoring. The numbers entered as the command are used as the event text for the alarm.

Generated when an alarm for a device of an unknown type has been aborted/canceled.

Generated when an alarm for a device of unknown type occurs.

Generated when the device of an unknown type is restored.

Generated when a device of an unknown type has been bypassed.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when the recording rate drops to allow the video storage to be full in the same or more number of days than defined by the user.

Access was denied because the use limit for the badge has been exceeded.

Generated when a user fails to exit at a specific exit reader, after gaining access to a specific entry reader, before the timeout value expires.

Video events are typically created automatically by the system based on an event from an external device. This allows the user to generate an event that is not tied to any device. It can be created from any camera with any user defined time limit from within the video player window in

Alarm Monitoring. This event can then be included in reports, or have a trace performed like any other event in the system.

Event that indicates value added.

Generated when the user-defined event threshold has been reached and exceeded.

(The percent of disk space used by video events has been reached, typically signaling the archive server to start archiving or purging.)

Generated when the camera is configured for failover and failover cannot be activated on this camera.

revision 1

— 515


Alarm

Video Failover

Restored

Video Failover Started

Video Overflow

Restored

Video Failover Started

Video Overflow

Restored

Video

Video

Video Overflow Started Video Overflow Started Video

Video Server Disk Full

Video Server is Not

Recording

Video Source Signal

Lost

Video Source Signal

Restored

Event Event Type

Video Failover Restored Video

Video Server Disk Full

Video Server is Not

Recording

Video Source Signal

Lost

Video Source Signal

Restored

Video

Video

Video

Video

Description

Generated when the camera is configured for failover and secondary recorder is currently recording video from the camera and secondary recorder determined that the primary recorder came back online and started recording video from the camera.

Secondary recorder will stop recording video from the camera. Alarm Monitoring users should log off of the application and back on when the primary recorder comes back online.

Generated when the camera is configured for failover and secondary recorder determined that the primary recorder is not recording video from the camera, so secondary recorder starts recording from this camera. Alarm Monitoring users should log off of the application and back on when failover occurs.

Generated when the recorder is no longer having troubles handling incoming video.

Generated when the recorder determined that it cannot handle incoming video.

Usually it happens when hard drive or CPU utilization is close to 100%, so recorder cannot keep up with amount of video.

Generated when the user-defined event threshold has been exceeded by 5% or more. (The percent of disk space used by video events has been exceeded by at least

5%, typically signaling the archive server to start archiving or purging.) If a user-defined event threshold has not been defined, this alarm/event will be generated when the video server disk space is 75% full of video events.

Generated when it has been detected that the video recorder is no longer recording. A check is done periodically (default is every

10 minutes) to check to make sure that video is still being recorded. This event is generated when the check fails.

Generated when the video signal from a channel is lost from the video server. This alarm may be accompanied by a

Communications Lost alarm.

Generated when the video signal from a channel is restored to the video server. This alarm maybe accompanied by a

Communications Restored alarm.

516 —

revision 1


Alarm

Video Storage

Unavailable

Void or Error

Correction

Walk Test ##

Walk Test Uninstalled

Walk Test

Unprogrammed

Event

Video Storage

Unavailable

Void or Error

Correction

Walk Test ##

Walk Test Uninstalled

Walk Test

Unprogrammed

Walk Test Untest Walk Test Untest Fire

Warning: Unable to

Achieve Current

Required Storage

Setting

Warning: Unable to

Meet Required Storage

Setting! Deleting

Oldest Video

Wireless Smoke

Detector

Warning: Unable to

Achieve Current

Required Storage

Setting

Warning: Unable to

Meet Required Storage

Setting! Deleting Oldest

Video

Wireless Smoke

Detector

System

System

Fire

Event Type

Video

POS

Fire

Fire

Fire

Description

Generated when the recorder cannot record video to a drive.

Transaction that indicates a void or error correction

Generated when walk test ## is initiated. A walk test is used to test devices in the system and report devices addressed incorrectly. The device and the first zone programmed for this device are reported with each message.

Generated when the reported device was part of a walk test and has been physically disconnected from the system.

Generated when the reported device was part of a walk test and has been removed from the system (it is not longer configured in the system).

Generated when the reported device is no longer being tested (part of a walk test).

Generated by an LNVR recorder when video storage will be full in less number of days than defined by the user.

Generated by an LNVR recorder when there is no space available to record to, so the oldest file will be deleted in order to continue recording.

A wireless smoke detector has generated an alarm.

revision 1

— 517


518 —

revision 1


Appendix C: Reports

Note:

Reports are installed when Database Setup is run. All reports are installed on the database server under the ReportTemplates subdirectory in the B.A.S.I.S. installation path. By default, this location is C:\Program

Files\B.A.S.I.S.\ReportTemplates.

Refer to the release notes for the versions of Seagate Crystal Reports that are supported. The release notes are located on the root of the B.A.S.I.S. installation disc.

Report name

Access Denials and

Grants, by Reader

Access Denials,

Grants and Other

Badge Events

Access Denied

Events

Access Denied

Events, by Reader

Access Granted

Events

Access Granted

Events, by Reader

Access Groups

Access Groups With

Levels

Access Level

Assignments to

Cardholders

Access Level

Assignments to

Cardholders By

Segment

Access Levels

Access Panels

Active Visits by

Cardholder Name

Active Visits by

Visitor Name

Alarm

Acknowledgments

Description

Access Denied and Granted Events, grouped by Reader

All badge-related events, including time, reader, badge and cardholder name.

All Access Denied events, including time, reader, badge and cardholder name.

Access Denied Events, grouped by reader.

All Access Granted events, including time, reader, badge and cardholder name.

Access Granted events, grouped by Reader

Lists all Access Groups and the Access Levels contained in each group.

Access Group definitions including access level details.

Listing of each Access Level, with each cardholder that has that access level assigned to them. Also summarizes the total number of badges that need to be downloaded.

Listing of each Access Level by Segment, with each cardholder that has that access level assigned to them. Also summarizes the total number of badges that need to be downloaded to each segment. This report is valid only for systems that use the Segmentation feature.

Access Level definitions.

Access Panel definitions.

Listing of each active visit, grouped by cardholder name.

Listing of each active visit, grouped by visitor name.

All alarm acknowledgments, including the alarm information and acknowledgment notes.

revision 1

— 519

C: Reports

Report name Description

Alarm

Acknowledgments, by Definition

Alarm

Acknowledgments, by Operator

All alarm acknowledgments, grouped by alarm definition.

All alarm acknowledgments, grouped by system operator.

Alarm

Acknowledgments, by Panel

All alarm acknowledgments, grouped by panel.

Alarm Configuration Alarm configuration summary.

Alarm Input Events

Alarm Panel Inputs

Alarm Panel Local

Linkage

All Alarm Input events by date.

Definition of all Alarm Panel Inputs, grouped by Access Panel and Alarm Panel.

Lists alarm input/output local links on alarm panels.

Alarm Panel Outputs Definitions of Alarm Panel Outputs, grouped by Access Panel and Alarm Panel.

Alarm Panels Definition of all Alarm Panels, grouped by Access Panel.

All Events Over

Time

A listing of all event types over time.

All Events Over

Time With Unique

Alarm ID

Anti-Passback

Events

Area Anti-Passback

Configuration

Area Entrance

History

Asset Classes

A listing of all event types over time with their unique alarm IDs included. This report displays the selected event types that occurred over a specific time and the unique alarm ID associated with each event type.

All anti-passback events over time.

Lists all anti-passback areas, including the reader entrances and exits.

History of all cardholders entering anti-passback areas, sorted by area and date.

Asset Events

Asset Groups

Asset Types

Assets by Scan ID

Assets by Type

Assigned Assets by

Cardholder

Assigned Assets by

Scan ID

Assigned Assets by

Type, Scan ID

Listing of each asset class.

Listing of each asset event.

Listing of each asset group.

Listing of each asset type.

Listing of each asset, grouped by Scan ID.

Listing of each asset, grouped by type.

Listing of each asset, grouped by cardholder.

Listing of each assigned asset, grouped by Scan ID.

Listing of each assigned asset, grouped by type and Scan ID.

520 —

revision 1


Report name

Audio Notifications and Instructions

Badge Type

Configuration badges by Deactivate

Date

Badges Without

Access Levels

Card Formats

Cardholder Access to

Readers

Cardholder Exit/

Entry

Cardholder Guest

Access to Readers

Cardholder Photo

Gallery

Cardholder Time and

Attendance

Cardholders by

Badge Type

Cardholders by Last

Name

Description

Lists all audio notifications and instructions in the database.

Lists all badge types that have been configured in the system.

Listing of all badges by deactivate date. Can be used to determine which badges are about to expire.

Lists those badges that don’t have access level assignments.

Definitions of all Magnetic and Wiegand card formats in the system. This combined report replaces the Magnetic Card Formats and Wiegand Card Formats reports that were available with previous software releases.

Listing of each Reader and which cardholders have access to that reader. Includes the associated Access Level and Timezone.

Displays user-defined Exit/Entry on a per-cardholder basis. In order for this report to work, readers must be designated as a ‘Time and Attendance’ Entrance or Exit reader on the

Readers/Controls page. This report is not an Area APB report.

Listing of each Reader, and which cardholders have access to that reader. Includes the associated Access Level and Timezone.

All cardholder photos, sorted by name.

Pairs each in-time with an out-time for cardholders gaining entry to time and attendance readers.

All cardholders sorted by badge type, no access levels shown.

Note:

ONLY personnel with badges assigned will be included in this report!

All cardholders sorted by last name, with badges but no access levels.

Note:

ONLY personnel with badges assigned will be included in this report!

List of the cardholders located in each anti-passback area, sorted by area and date Cardholders Located in Each APB Area, by Date

Cardholders Located in Each APB Area, by Name

Cardholders with

Access, by Badge

Type

List of the cardholders located in each anti-passback area, sorted by area and cardholder name

List of any access and precision access levels the cardholders have, sorted by badge type.

Note:

ONLY personnel with active badges AND access levels will be included in this report!

revision 1

— 521

C: Reports


Cardholders with

Access, by Last

Name

List of any access and precision access levels the cardholders have, sorted by last name.

ONLY personnel with active badges AND access levels will be included in this report!

CCTV Instructions

Continuous Video

Current Visits

Destination

Assurance

Configuration

Elevator Access

Denied and Granted

Events

Emergency Events

Enterprise Servers

Event Codes

Event Count By

Panel

Fire Device Input/

Outputs

Global APB/

MobileVerify

Occupancy, By Date

Global APB/

MobileVerify

Occupancy, By

Name

Note:

The Cardholders with Access, by Badge Type and Cardholders with Access,

by Last Name reports replace the following reports from previous B.A.S.I.S. versions:

• Cardholders With Access and Precision by Last Name

• Cardholders With Access Levels, by Badge Type

• Cardholders With Access Levels, by Last Name

• Cardholders With Precision Access, by Last Name

Summary of all CCTV instructions in the database.

Lists all of the times that there has been continuous video archived.

Lists all currently signed in visits.

Lists all entrance readers, their settings and the associated exit readers.

Destination

Assurance Exempt

Cardholders

Lists all cardholders who has a badge that is exempt from destination assurance.

Device Status Events Status events for all devices.

Lists all dialup events by panel.

Dialup Events by

Panel

Dialup Last Connect

Time

Lists the dialup last connect times.

All Access Denied and Granted events, including time, reader, badge, cardholder name and the floor to which access was attempted. All access denials and grants will be shown.

All emergency events over time.

Listing of Enterprise servers defined on this system. This report is valid only for systems that use the Enterprise Management feature.

Event code templates and event code mapping configuration.

Listing of each event counts, grouped by panel.

Lists all fire input/outputs grouped by panel and fire device.

Shows the last known area accessed by each cardholder, sorted by date and time.

Shows the last known area accessed by each cardholder, sorted by name.

522 —

revision 1



Global I/O Linkages Lists all of the global I/O linkages, including the input events and output actions.

Guard Tour

Configuration

Lists all of the configured guard tours including checkpoints, actions and messages.

Guard Tour History Lists all of the events, associated with checkpoints, that happened for each guard tour.

Hardware Panels

Holidays

Intercom Functions

Intercom Stations

Listing of all hardware panels.

List of all system holiday definitions.

Listing of all intercom functions.

Listing of all intercom stations.

Lists all intrusion areas grouped by panel.

Intrusion Detection

Areas

Intrusion Detection

Devices

Intrusion Panel User

Groups

Last Location of

Cardholders

Lists all of the intrusion detection devices grouped by panel.

Lists all panel users grouped by panel user groups.

Shows the last reader accessed by each cardholder, sorted by cardholder name.

Maps

MobileVerify User

Transaction Log

MobileVerify User

Transaction Log, By

Operation

MobileVerify User

Transaction Log, By

User ID

Monitor Stations

List of available maps in the database.

Chronological log of all transactions performed.

Chronological log of all transactions performed, grouped by operation.

Chronological log of all transactions performed, grouped by User ID.

Monitor Zones

Overdue Visits

Overstayed Visits

Personal Safety

Transmitter

Assignments

Personal Safety

Transmitters

Personnel in the

Database

Personnel Without an

Active Badge

Shows all alarm monitoring stations defined in the system, including which monitor zones and access panels they are monitoring.

Monitoring Zone definitions.

Lists all scheduled visits that have not signed in.

Lists all visitors logged into the facility, but whose badge or visit has expired.

Listing of all personal safety transmitter assignments.

Listing of all personal safety transmitters.

List of all personnel in the database, with basic information only.

All personnel in the database which do not have an active badge assigned to them.

revision 1

— 523

C: Reports


Personnel,

Organization Details

Personnel, Personal

Details

Point of Sale

Registers

Precision Access

Groups

List of all personnel in the database, with organization details. This report is designed for the standard cardholder layout. It may not work with user-customized cardholder layouts.

List of all personnel in the database, with personal details. This report is designed for the standard cardholder layout. It may not work with user-customized cardholder layouts.

Lists all point of sale registers by point of sale device.

Precision Access Group definitions.

Reader Assignments to Cardholders

Lists all cardholders that have access to a particular reader.

Reader Status Events All reader status events, grouped by reader.

Reader Timezone

Schedules

Reader timezone scheduling for reader modes.

Readers Reader definitions, grouped by Access Panel.

Lists all receiver account areas, grouped by receiver account.

Receiver Account

Areas

Receiver Account

Groups

Lists all receiver account groups and the receiver accounts contained in each group.

Lists all receiver account zones, grouped by receiver account.

Receiver Account

Zones

Receiver Accounts

Receiver Accounts that Failed to Report

Receiver and

Receiver Account

Events

Lists all receiver accounts.

Lists all of the receiver accounts that failed to report during their duration.

All the events that occurred on a receiver or receiver account.

Segment Badge

Download Summary

Segments

SNMP Agents

SNMP Management

Information Base

Configuration

For each segment, lists the count of badges that must be downloaded to the access panels in that segment. This report is valid only for systems that use the Segmentation feature.

Listing of segments defined on the system and their options. This report is valid only for systems that use the Segmentation feature.

Lists all SNMP agents sorted by segment and name.

Lists all MIB data grouped by enterprise.

Text Instructions

Timezones

All text instructions.

Timezone definitions.

User Permissions All system users and their permissions.

User Transaction Log Chronological log of all transactions performed on the system by users.

User Transaction

Log, By User ID

Chronological log of all transactions performed, grouped by User ID.

524 —

revision 1

Report name

Video Camera

Device Links

Video Cameras

Video Events

Video Servers

Visit History

Visitors

Windows Event Log

Errors

Description

Listing of all video camera device links.

Listing of all video cameras.

Listing of all video events.

Listing of all video servers.

Listing of each visit.

Listing of all visitors.

All errors logged by the system to the Windows event log.


revision 1

— 525

C: Reports

526 —

revision 1


Appendix D: LNVR Network Setup

The LNVR Network Setup tool allows you to enable multicast, fix computers with several network interfaces, and restrict ports usage as well as make them firewall friendly. Install the LNVR Network Setup tool by running LnrNI.exe from the directory: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Lenel. Alternatively, the tool is also provided on the Supplemental Materials disc under Current Digital

Video.

Deliver Live Video to Alarm Monitoring Using IP

Multicast Protocol

Using an IP Multicast protocol to send video is ideal because it saves bandwidth when more than one machine is watching the same video. IP Multicast video is sent once instead of multiple times as with a Unicast protocol.

Live video retrieval from LNVR recorders by default is configured to use UDP/

IP, Multicast, and TCP/IP protocols on any available port. Clients can specify which of these protocol they want to use for each request. The options are to use:

• UDP/IP

• Multicast

If all protocols are selected to be used then your computer will try and use IP

Multicast first but if it fails it will then use UDP/IP. If UDP/IP fails then TCP/IP will be used.

Note:

While you can select to not use UDP/IP and Multicast, TCP/IP is always used as a last resort if the previous methods fail.

Note:

Recorded video is always retrieved using DCOM protocol. DCOM is also used to access LNVR recorder for configuration. It is assumed that DCOM is configured properly and therefore this document does not cover retrieval of recorded video.

To configure your system to use IP Multicast you must:

•

Configure Recorder for IP Multicast

•

Configure Client for IP Multicast

•

Configure Router for IP Multicast

•

Configure Firewall for IP Multicast

revision 1

— 527

D: LNVR Network Setup

LNVR Network Setup Window

The LNVR Network Setup tool has three tabs that are viewable if you have the specific network setups. If you only see one or two of the following tabs do not worry. They are not applicable for your system.

Client Network Settings Form

The Client Network Settings form can be used by all machines and allows you to specify how the client computer receives video data. You can also enable and disable multicast and UDP/IP use.

Note:

The Client Network Settings form only affects client applications. It will not change anything on the server.

Field

Select Network

Interface

Connection

Protocol Settings

Use Multicast

Use UDP/IP

Limit port range

Description

Lists the network interface you wish to setup for LNVR Live Video if you computer has more then one network card.

Area where you select what protocol settings you want to use. These include using Multicast and UDP/IP. You can also choose what ports to use with UDP/IP.

Select for client machines if you wish to use Multicast. Multicast allows more than one computer to view the same video. While this frees up bandwidth some routers and firewalls don’t allow this sort of multicast packets to pass through them.

Select for client machines if you wish to use UDP/IP. UDP/IP allows more than one computer to view the same video. Unlike multicast, though, the video will be sent multiple times which will increase the network load.

Choose which ports should be used for UDP/IP.

528 —

revision 1


Field

Use TCP/IP

Description

This is always selected as it is the last method of delivery and there is nothing else to fallback on if all else fails. TCP/IP is preferred over UDP/IP because it is able to deliver much more data. Because of bandwidth and speed issues this should only be used if there are problems with the other methods.

Recorder Network Settings Form

The Recorder Network Settings form can only be used by LNVR machines and allows you to specify the ports used when client computers connect to them using

TCP/IP.

Important:

Multiple recorders should not use the same multicast ports. Doing so causes video frames from the recorders to conflict with each other and become interlaced. Each channel on a recorder should be given its own port.

Field

Recorder TCP/IP

Port

Any Available

Specific

Description

The port used for the LNVR recorder.

Select if you want the LNVR recorder to use any available port on the system.

Select if you want the LNVR recorder to use a specific port if firewalls prevent you from using any port.

The port used for the LNVR first recorder.

First Recorder

Multicast Port

Any Available

Specific

Select if you want the LNVR first recorder to use any available port on the system.

Select if you want the LNVR first recorder to use a specific port if firewalls prevent you from using any port.

revision 1

— 529


IVS Network Settings Form

The IVS Network Settings form can only be used by IVS machines and allows you to specify the ports used when client computers connect to them using TCP/

IP.

Field

IntelligentVideo

Server TCP/IP

Port

Any Available

Specific

Description

The port used for the IVS servers.

Select to use any available port when using TCP/IP with IVS machines.

Select to use a specific port when using TCP/IP with IVS machines if firewalls prevent you from using any port.

LNVR Network Setup Configurations

Configure Recorder for IP Multicast

1. Navigate to the directory: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Lenel.

2. Double-click on LnrNI.exe to run the LNVR Network Setup tool.

3. Alternatively, run the LNVR Network Setup tool from the Supplemental

Materials disc.

4. If it has more than one network interface select the one you would like to use to send multicasts.

5. Click [Apply].

530 —

revision 1


Configure Client for IP Multicast

1. Run the LNVR Network Setup tool from C:\Program Files\Common

Files\Lenel\LnrNI.exe or from the Supplemental Materials disc on each

B.A.S.I.S. computer that is going to use Alarm Monitoring to see live video.

2. Select the Use Multicast check box.

3. Click [Apply].

Configure Router for IP Multicast

Most network routers and network devices between LNVR and its clients block

IP Multicast traffic. Refer to the device manual of your specific equipment to see how to enable Multicast on it.

Configure Firewall for IP Multicast

A Firewall between LNVR and its clients can and usually does block both UDP/

IP and IP Multicast traffic. This traffic is one directional communication, so if there are firewalls between LNVR and its clients they must have UDP/IP and IP

Multicast traffic enabled from LNVR to its clients.

It is enough to open ports in one direction only (from LNVR to clients). If a firewall cannot be configured to enable UDP/IP traffic on all ports then a range of ports can be opened instead.

Note:

A client will be able to see no more live video streams from the recorder than number of open ports.

revision 1

— 531


532 —

revision 1


Appendix E: Exporting Video

The B.A.S.I.S. installation includes a conversion utility that converts exported video from the LDVR or LNVR native format to an “.asf” format. The “.asf” file format is playable on any machine that has Microsoft’s Windows Media Player and does not require any additional software to play video. The video converter is located at: C:\Program files\Common Files\Lenel\LVConvert.exe.

You can run the conversion utility either from a command line or by launching the utility. To use the standalone video conversion utility to export video, refer to

Convert and Export Video on page 538.

The video converter is also available from within the VideoViewer and Alarm

Monitoring applications. When used standalone, the source file can be changed in the Lenel Video Converter window; when used in Alarm Monitoring and

VideoViewer it cannot. To use the video converter in VideoViewer or Alarm

Monitoring to export video, refer to

Export Video to a File on page 537.

revision 1

— 533

E: Exporting Video

Video Converter Window

Form Element

Source file

Browse

Output file

Browse

Generate Overlay

Image

Customize

Status area

Convert

Close

Help

Comment

Identifies the export file to be converted to the Windows Media format.

Note:

The Source file and Output file fields cannot be modified in Alarm Monitoring or

VideoViewer; they can only be modified when using the standalone version of the video converter.

Search for the export file to be converted to the Windows Media format.

Name of the new file to be created.

Note:

The Source file and Output file fields cannot be modified in Alarm Monitoring or

VideoViewer; they can only be modified when using the standalone version of the video converter.

Search for the location the new file should be created in.

If enabled, additional information such as time and date will be overlaid on the video image. If this check box is selected, the default is to show the date and time in the top-left corner.

Enables the user to customize the format and the content of overlay information.

Updates as the video is exported to show how much video has been exported and how much video still needs to be exported.

Converts the file from its native format to an “.asf” format.

Closes the window without converting the file from its native format to an “.asf” format

.

Displays online help.

534 —

revision 1


Video Export Dialog

Form Element

Output Type

Digital Signature

Custom Signature

File Name

Comments

Generate Overlay

Image

Customize

Export

Cancel

Close

Help

Comment

Specifies the format for the exported video:

• Native Format - video format determined by the video recorder

• Windows Media Format - overlay may be applied to the video

Specifies whether the watermarking uses the default or custom key/signature.

For more information, refer to Authenticate a Video File with Watermarking

on page 539.

Specifies a custom digital key/signature.

Note:

The Custom Signature is case sensitive.

Search for the location the new file should be created in.

Text entered in this field will be displayed during the digital signature verification process.

If enabled, additional information such as time and date will be overlaid on the video image. If this check box is selected, the default is to show the date and time in the top-left corner.

Enables the user to customize the format and the content of overlay information.

Saves the recorded video to a file using the configured options.

Aborts the export after the process has begun.

Exits the dialog without exporting the video.


revision 1

— 535


Customize Overlay Information Dialog

Form Element

Date Location

Time Location

Text Location

Row fields

Text

Change

Transparency

OK

Cancel

Load Settings

Save Settings

Comment

Identifies which corner(s) the date will be printed. Possible values are top-left, top-right, bottom-left, bottom-right, and none. If none is selected, the field will not be shown. The default is to show the date and time in the top-left corner and no text.

Identifies which corner(s) the time will be printed. Possible values are top-left, top-right, bottom-left, bottom-right, and none. If none is selected, the field will not be shown. The default is to show the date and time in the top-left corner and no text.

Identifies which corner(s) the additional text will be printed. Possible values are top-left, topright, bottom-left, bottom-right, and none. If none is selected, the field will not be shown. The default is to show the date and time in the top-left corner and no text.

If more than one piece of information is printed in the same corner, this field allows you to specify if one item should appear above the other one. If the items are on the same row, they will be printed one after the other.

Enter any additional text that you want to appear in the video. For example, the text could identify the location where the video came from.

Allows the user to specify a different font, style, and color of the printed information.

Specifies the transparency level of the printed text where 0 means the text is invisible and 100 means the text is opaque.

Accepts the changes and closes the dialog.

Closes the dialog without applying any changes.

Loads a previously saved overlay configuration.

Saves an overlay configuration.

536 —

revision 1


Form Element

Help

Comment


Video Conversion Procedures

The following procedures are used to convert, export and play video clips.

Note:

The conversion utility converts “.lnr” or “.info/.spfs” files into “.asf” format.

Export Video to a File

This procedure describes using the video converter in VideoViewer or Alarm

Monitoring. When using the standalone video conversion utility, refer to Convert and Export Video on page 538.

Recorded video and audio can be saved/exported to a file. By default the video clip is saved as “.asf” which can be played on any Microsoft Windows Media

Player. In addition, video clips can be saved in Lenel proprietary formats. For

LDVR hardware, proprietary formats include “.info” and “.spfs” files and for

LNVR hardware the proprietary format is “.lnr” files.

Note:

If you have video files in proprietary formats, you can use the conversion utility available at: C:\Program Files\Common

Files\Lenel\LVConvert.exe.

1. While viewing recorded video in the Video Player, select Set Start/End

Date from the Options menu.

2. The Date/Time window opens. Fill in the appropriate dates and times and click [OK].

3. From the Options menu select Export Video. The Video Export Dialog is

displayed.

4. Select the Output Type from the drop-down list. The specific file type is

determined in step 5

.

5. Click the [...] button to browse for a location to save the exported video file.

The Save As window opens.

a. Select the file location.

b. Enter the file name.

c. Select the desired file format (*.asf), (*.info), (*.spfs), or (*.lnr).

revision 1

— 537


Note:

The file formats available in the drop down list reflect the output type chosen in Step

4 .

d. Click [Save].

6. The Windows Media Format allows the use of an overlay image.

a. Select the Generate Overlay Image check box to overlay the time and date on the video image.

b.

To customize the content of overlay information, click [Customize]. The

Customize Information Overlay Dialog opens. For more information, refer to Customize Overlay Information Dialog on page 536.

7. Click [Export].

Convert and Export Video

This procedure describes using the standalone video conversion utility. When

using the video converter in VideoViewer or Alarm Monitoring, refer to Export

Video to a File on page 537.

The conversion utility is installed with B.A.S.I.S. and can be executed from a command line as well as by launching the utility.

538 —

revision 1


Using the Conversion Utility

1. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Common Files\Lenel.

2. Run the LVConvert.exe program in this directory.

3. The Video Converter window opens. Enter the source file name.

4. Enter the output file name.

5. Optional - Select and customize any overlay information.

6. Click [Convert].

7. Click [Close] when the conversion is complete.

Using a Command Line

1. Click Start, then select Run. The Run dialog opens.

2. Enter “LVConvert.exe -i InputFile.lnr -o

OutputFile.asf [-c ConfigFile.xml] [-s]

” where:

• i specifies the input file

• o specifies the output file

• c (optional) specifies the overlay configuration file. If not specified, overlay information will not be generated.

• s (optional) silent run. If specified the application will not pop up any error/status dialog boxes. This is useful if you are running the application as part of a script.

3. Click [OK].

Play Exported Video Clip Using Windows Media Player

1. Launch the Windows Media Player. On most Windows machines, you can do this by clicking Start, then Programs > Accessories > Entertainment >

Windows Media Player.

2. On the File menu, select Open.

3. Type in the location of the video clip, or click on [Browse] to navigate to it.

4. Click [OK] (or [Open] if you browsed to the file). The video clip will be played in the Media Player window.

Authenticate a Video File with Watermarking

Embedding a watermark in the video file is equivalent to signing a digital identification on the content of the video. If the video is manipulated, the watermark is destroyed. The authenticator can verify whether a received video has been tampered with by attempting to match the signature.

The Watermarking feature allows the individual exporting the video to set a custom digital signature which can later be verified by the recipient of the video file.

revision 1

— 539


Note:

Set a Watermark

1. From the Video Export Dialog

in Alarm Monitoring or VideoViewer, select

“Native Format” from the Output Type drop-down.

2. Select the type of signature, “Custom” or “Default”, from the Digital

Signature drop-down list.

3. If you selected “Custom”, in the Custom Signature text box, enter a key for authentication (case sensitive). The recipient of the file will need to know this key to determine the validity of the video file.

The Default signature type does not require a key for authentication.

Notes:

4. Select other options as desired and click [Export] to finish. For more information, refer to Export Video to a File on page 537.

Authenticate the Watermark

Authentication of the watermark occurs with the stand-alone Lenel Video Player

(LVPlayer.exe).

1. Navigate to the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Lenel directory and run

LVPlayer.exe.

2. From the File menu, select Open File.

3. From the Control menu, select Verify Signature. The Signature Details dialog is displayed.

4. If a custom signature was entered during export, type the key entered in the

Enter Signature text box.

The custom signature is case sensitive.

If the Default signature type was used during export the Enter Signature text box will be grayed out.

5. Click [Verify Signature]. A message will be displayed indicating whether the authentication was successful.

540 —

revision 1


Index

A

Access levels

assign to a badge........................................ 232

assign to cardholder group......................... 236

Access Levels form (Cardholders folder)......... 231

procedures.................................................. 232

Accounts ............................................................. 33

Acknowledge an alarm ..................................... 169

Action Group Properties window ..................... 397

field table ................................................... 398 procedures.................................................. 398

Action History/Guard Tour Event Purging

Properties window ..................................... 399 field table ................................................... 399

procedures.................................................. 400

Actions .............................................................. 393

procedures.................................................. 397

Activate single or double left-click mode......... 158

Activation dates assign ..................................... 235

Active visits ...................................................... 271

Add

action group ............................................... 398

action history/guard tour event purging action .................................................. 400

archive/purge database action.................... 402

arm/disarm area action............................... 406

asset............................................................ 308

asset type/subtype ...................................... 311

automatic guard tour action ....................... 408

cardholder record....................................... 212

columns........................................................ 70

deactivate badge action.............................. 414

device output action................................... 416

device output group action......................... 418

execute function list action ........................ 427

global APB system/segment reset action... 430

ISC database download action................... 432

ISC firmware download action.................. 434

mask/unmask alarm input action ............... 440

mask/unmask alarm input for group action 442

mask/unmask alarm mask group action..... 444

mask/unmask door action .......................... 446

mask/unmask door forced open action ...... 448

mask/unmask door forced open for reader group action........................................ 450

mask/unmask door held open action.......... 452

mask/unmask door held open for reader group action .................................................. 454

muster mode initiation action .................... 438

pulse open door action............................... 456

pulse open door group action..................... 458

reader mode action..................................... 460

reader mode group action .......................... 463

readers........................................................ 146

report.......................................................... 327

reset use limit action .................................. 465

set forwarding station action...................... 476

sign out visitor action ................................ 478

silence area action...................................... 480

visit record ................................................. 273

visitor record.............................................. 216

Add Recipient window ..................................... 290 field table ................................................... 290

Alarm

icons........................................................... 161

overview ...................................................... 56

pending alarms........................................... 162

Alarm Acknowledgment Reports form

field table ................................................... 352

overview .................................................... 351

Alarm Acknowledgment window..................... 168

Alarm descriptions............................................ 481

Alarm mask groups............................................. 62

Alarm Monitoring Operator Procedures............. 61

Alarm Monitoring overview ............................... 31

Alarm Monitoring window ............................... 182

Alarm Panel Reports form ................................ 333

field table ................................................... 334

overview .................................................... 333

procedures.................................................. 336

Alarms - Muster mode ...................................... 182

Anti-Passback Reports form ............................. 337

field table ................................................... 338

overview .................................................... 337

procedures.................................................. 340

Archive/Purge Database Properties window .... 401


Arm ................................................................... 404

Arm/Disarm Area Properties window .............. 403

field table ................................................... 404

Arrange columns................................................. 70

Asset classes

add ............................................................. 315

Asset Classes form

field table ................................................... 313

modify mode.............................................. 312

procedures.................................................. 314

view mode.................................................. 312

revision 1

— 541

Index

Asset groups

add.............................................................. 315

Asset menu.......................................................... 55

Assets

assign to cardholder ................................... 245

Assets form

Cardholders folder ..................................... 244

procedures.................................................. 245

Assets form (Assets folder)............................... 306 field table ................................................... 306

procedures.................................................. 308

Assign

cardholder to an asset................................. 317

classes to an asset....................................... 314

Assign Intrusion Authority to the Cardholder .. 234

Assignments form ............................................. 316 field table ................................................... 316

procedures.................................................. 317

Authenticating video files................................. 539

setting a watermark.................................... 540

Automatic Guard Tour

respond to................................................... 377

schedule ..................................................... 376

Automatic Guard Tour Properties window....... 407


B

Badge form ....................................................... 221

procedures.................................................. 226

Badge Print Preview window

field table ................................................... 257

Badges

add or replace record ................................. 226

assign access levels.................................... 232

assign precision access group .................... 239

encode........................................................ 230

move all ..................................................... 186 move one.................................................... 186

Barcodes

CAC ........................................................... 198 configuring to read CAC barcodes ............ 198 scanning with a wedge scanner.................. 198

Biometrics

search records ............................................ 241

Biometrics form


procedures.................................................. 241

Buffering Video .................................................. 96

C

CAC barcodes ................................................... 198

Camera lookup.................................................... 97

Cameras (surveillance-only)............................. 101

Capture an image .............................................. 102

Cardholder form................................................ 206

procedures.................................................. 212

Cardholder menu................................................. 53

Cardholder menu - bulk sub-menu ..................... 55

Cardholders

assign access levels to cardholder group ... 236

destroy all data........................................... 214

modify segment assignments..................... 219

retrieve recent search results...................... 195

run reports.................................................. 253

search for cardholders................................ 194

Cardholders folder ............................................ 189

Access Levels form ................................... 231

procedures.................................................. 192

Change Network Video Password Properties window ...................................................... 410 field table ................................................... 410

procedures.................................................. 411

Checkpoint status and events diagram.............. 378

Checkpoint time................................................ 371

Checkpoints ...................................................... 371

Client Side Caching ............................................ 96

Comparison operators.............................. 193, 269

Configure

wedge scanner............................................ 202

Configure menu .................................................. 47

Control menu ...................................................... 47

Control menu - “current device” sub-menu........ 48

Conventions used in this documentation ............ 31

Convert and export video.................................. 538

Create a video event.......................................... 102

Customize Overlay Information Dialog ........... 536

D

Date/Time Reports form ................................... 341

field table ................................................... 342

overview .................................................... 341

procedures.................................................. 345

Deactivate Badge Properties window............... 413 field table ................................................... 413

procedures.................................................. 414

Deactivation dates assign.................................. 235

Delete

alarm .......................................................... 171

alarm in standard Video Verification window ............................................... 147

alarms (all)................................................. 172

asset ........................................................... 309

badge record .............................................. 230


report.......................................................... 328

542 —

revision 1


scheduled action using the scheduler right-click menu ................................................... 389

selected group of cardholder records......... 214

visit record ................................................. 278

visitor record.............................................. 217

Deny or grant access ......................................... 150

Destroy all cardholder data ............................... 214

Details form ...................................................... 287 field table .................................................. 287 overview .................................................... 287

Device group icons ............................................. 76

Device Groups window ...................................... 74

Device icons........................................................ 77

Device Output Group Properties window......... 417


Device Output Properties window.................... 415 field table ................................................... 415

procedures.................................................. 416

Dialup panels - view last connection time .......... 82

Directory account link ...................................... 246

Directory Accounts form .................................. 246 procedures.................................................. 246

Disable strong password enforcement ................ 32

Display

monitoring map.......................................... 172

multiple hardware views.............................. 71

scheduler right-click menu ........................ 387

Display options - for users .................................. 67

Document organization....................................... 31

Double and single left-click mode .................... 157

Download

database........................................................ 82 firmware....................................................... 82

Download reader information to a PDA ........... 255

E

Edit menu............................................................ 44

E-mail form....................................................... 288

Add Recipient window field table ............ 290

field table ................................................... 288 overview .................................................... 288

Enable strong password enforcement ................. 32

Encode

badges ........................................................ 230

Error messages.................................................... 33

Event Configuration/Search

dialog ......................................................... 104

Event Configuration/Search Dialog

procedures.................................................. 109

Event descriptions............................................. 481

Event Reports form........................................... 346

field table ................................................... 347

overview .................................................... 346

procedures.................................................. 350

Events diagram ................................................. 378

Execute a command in single or double left-click mode .......................................................... 159

Execute Function List Properties window........ 426


Exit the application ............................................. 42

Export video to a file ........................................ 537

Exporting video

digital signatures........................................ 539

F

Fast/group acknowledge feature ....................... 170

File menu ............................................................ 44

Filter report view .............................................. 329

Find cardholder/visitor associated with a visit . 273

Finished visits ................................................... 271

First card unlock ...................................... 460, 463

G

Generate Event Properties Window.................. 428

Global APB System/Segment Reset Properties window ...................................................... 429


Grant / Deny pop-up window ........................... 149

field table ................................................... 150

Procedures ................................................. 150

Grant or deny access......................................... 150

Guard Tour

assign security clearance levels ................. 252

launch a tour .............................................. 375

respond....................................................... 377

schedule automatic .................................... 376

Guard Tours

form (Cardholders folder).......................... 251

procedures.................................................. 252

H

Hardware

tree view ...................................................... 72

update status of ............................................ 80

Hardware view options ....................................... 72

Help menu........................................................... 53

How this document is organized......................... 31

I

Icons

alarm .......................................................... 161

hardware device icons ................................. 77

revision 1

— 543

Index

hardware status icons................................... 78

Images capture .................................................. 102

Import

cardholder data........................................... 207

fingerprints from PIV card......................... 204

Initiate Muster mode......................................... 183

Instant arm ........................................................ 404

IntelligentVideo form

field table ................................................... 114

Interior .............................................................. 404

Intrusion Detection Device Statuses ................... 62

ISC Database Download Properties window.... 431


ISC Firmware Download Properties window... 433


K

Keyboard Wedge Settings window................... 197

L

Late event.......................................................... 371

Launch ................................................................ 99

Guard Tour................................................. 375

Launch video from camera ................................. 99

Left-click mode................................................. 157

Link

cardholder to a directory account .............. 246

Linked maps...................................................... 173

List options ......................................................... 60

Load a video file ............................................... 100

Locate a device ................................................... 82

Logging in

using automatic single sign-on .................... 37

using manual single sign-on ........................ 39

without using single sign-on........................ 34

Logging out of the application............................ 42

Logical Access form

ActivIdentity sub-tab ................................. 248

VeriSoft sub-tab......................................... 249

Lookup a cardholder assigned to an asset......... 318

M

Maps

display........................................................ 172

linked ......................................................... 173

Mask/Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties window ...................................................... 441


Mask/Unmask Alarm Input Properties window 439


Mask/Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties window ...................................................... 443


Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group

Properties window ..................................... 449


Mask/Unmask Door Forced Open Properties window ...................................................... 447


Mask/Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group

Properties window ..................................... 453


Mask/Unmask Door Held Open Properties window

451


Mask/Unmask Door Properties window........... 445


Master arm ........................................................ 404

Menus.................................................................. 43

asset menu ................................................... 55

cardholder menu

bulk sub-menu ..................................... 55

cardholder menu ......................................... 53

configure menu ........................................... 47 control menu ................................................ 47

current device sub-menu ...................... 48

edit menu ..................................................... 44 file menu ..................................................... 44

help ............................................................. 53

options menu................................................ 50

trace menu.................................................... 46

view menu.................................................... 44

window ........................................................ 53

Modify

access levels assignments .......................... 238

asset ........................................................... 309

asset classes assignment ............................ 314

asset group ................................................. 245

badge record .............................................. 227

badges for selected cardholder group ........ 228


cardholder’s permission to have visitors ... 243

group of cardholder’s segments................. 219

report.......................................................... 328

scheduled action using the scheduler right-click menu ................................................... 390

visit record ................................................. 278

544 —

revision 1


visitor record.............................................. 217

Monitor (trace)

individual devices ........................................ 87

Monitor Devices ................................................. 73

Monitor video

in matrix view............................................ 118

with multiple cameras (successively) ........ 101

with one specific camera ........................... 100

Move

all badges ................................................... 186 one badge................................................... 186

Multiple hardware views - display...................... 71

Muster mode

alarm .......................................................... 182

initiate ........................................................ 183

reports ............................................... 184, 185

reset............................................................ 183

Muster mode report........................................... 184

O

Occupancy report.............................................. 184

Offline form ...................................................... 254 overview .................................................... 254

procedures.................................................. 255

Options - right-click.......................................... 151

Options menu...................................................... 50

Overdue event ................................................... 371

Overwrite Facial Image Dialog......................... 205

P

Pan, tilt, and zoom

configure.................................................... 121

control adjustment ..................................... 125

control locking........................................... 128

how to use.................................................. 122

presets ........................................................ 128

tours ........................................................... 132

Password

enable/disable strong password enforcement .......................................... 32 overview ...................................................... 32 standards ...................................................... 32

weak database warning................................ 33

Pending alarms.................................................. 162

Perform a device test........................................... 81

Perimeter........................................................... 404

Perimeter arm.................................................... 404

Permissions

modify cardholder and visitors .................. 243

PIV card

verify fingerprints ...................................... 204

Play exported video .......................................... 539

Precision Access form


procedures.................................................. 239

Precision access groups-assign ......................... 239

Precision access mode ........................................ 60

Pre-configured acknowledgment notes - using. 169

Preview a badge................................................ 259

Preview and print a report................................. 329

Print

badge.......................................................... 259

badge for a visitor...................................... 279

report................................................. 329, 363

Print Badge(s) window ..................................... 268 field table ................................................... 268

Print Report Options window ........................... 362

field table ................................................... 363

PTZ ................................................................... 121

Pulse Open Door Group Properties window..... 457


Pulse Open Door Properties window................ 455


R

Reader Mode Group Properties window .......... 462


Reader Mode Properties window...................... 459


Reader Reports form......................................... 329

field table ................................................... 330

overview .................................................... 329

procedures.................................................. 332

Readers folder

Offline form............................................... 254

Rearrange alarms .............................................. 163

Receiver Account Zone Reports form .............. 356

field table ................................................... 357

overview .................................................... 356

procedures.................................................. 359

Record

add cardholder ........................................... 212

add or replace badge .................................. 226

add visitor .................................................. 216

Refresh actions.................................................. 389

Region of Interest

set............................................................... 111

Remote Monitor................................................ 135

add cameras ............................................... 136

change TCP/IP port ................................... 139

LNVR security........................................... 135

local monitor window................................ 137

revision 1

— 545

Index

right-click options...................................... 136

Remote Monitor application ............................. 138

profiles ....................................................... 139

Remove

access levels from cardholder group.......... 237

columns........................................................ 70

precision access groups from a badge ....... 240

Report Configuration form ............................... 324 field table ................................................... 324

procedures.................................................. 327

Report Print Preview window........................... 366

field table ................................................... 367

procedures.................................................. 368

Report Print Properties window........................ 464

Report right-click options ................................. 185

Report View Filter window .............................. 325

Reports ............................................ 184, 321, 519

run a cardholder report............................... 253

run a date/time report................................. 345

run a reader report...................................... 332

run a receiver account zone report............. 359

run a visit report from the Visits folder ..... 291

run an alarm acknowledgment report ........ 354

run an alarm panel report........................... 336

run an anti-passback report........................ 340

run an asset report...................................... 321

run an event report..................................... 350

run visit report from Visits folder.............. 291

Reports form ..................................................... 291

Assets folder .............................................. 319


Request Print Action Flowchart........................ 464

Reset Muster mode ........................................... 183

Reset Use Limit Properties window ................. 464


Respond to an automatic Guard Tour............... 377

Retrieve the most recent search results............. 310

Retrieve the most recent visit search results..... 273

Right-click muster mode options...................... 182

Right-click options............................................ 151

Run.................................................................... 321

S

Scan barcodes with wedge scanner................... 198

Schedule

action.......................................................... 381

automatic Guard Tour action..................... 376

one-time password change......................... 412 recurring password change ........................ 412

visits........................................................... 271

Schedule Report................................................ 468

Scheduler folder................................................ 379

Scheduler form (Scheduler folder) ................... 380 field table ................................................... 380

procedures.................................................. 381

right-click menu......................................... 387

Search

biometric records ....................................... 241

cardholder records ..................................... 194

comparison operators................................. 193

for a device .................................................. 82

for all visits by a selected visitor ............... 270

for all visits for a specific date or time ...... 271

for all visits to a selected cardholder ......... 270

for an asset record...................................... 310

for devices.................................................... 82

for scheduled, active, or finished visits ..... 271

report for specific information................... 370

video .......................................................... 113

Search results


Security clearance levels

assign ......................................................... 252

Segmentation

modify cardholder segment assignments... 219

Segments form


procedures.................................................. 219

Select

column configuration................................... 70

events to monitor ......................................... 69

Select a device

in single or double left-click mode............ 158

Select Date(s) window...................................... 282

Select Host Wizard - Search form

field table ................................................... 294

overview .................................................... 293

Select Host Wizard - Select form

field table ................................................... 295 overview .................................................... 295

Select Host Wizard-Search form ...................... 293

Select Host Wizard-Select form ....................... 295

Select Import Source window........................... 303 field table .................................................. 303

Select Time Range window .............................. 284

Select Visitor Wizard - Add form..................... 300 field table ................................................... 300 overview .................................................... 300

Select Visitor Wizard - Search form................. 297 field table ................................................... 297 overview .................................................... 297

Select Visitor Wizard - Select form.................. 302 field table ................................................... 302 overview .................................................... 302

546 —

revision 1


Select Visitor Wizard - Select or Add form...... 298

field table ................................................... 299

Send

overview .................................................... 299

e-mail ......................................................... 174

page............................................................ 176

Set Forwarding Station Properties window


Sign in a previously scheduled visit ................. 279

Sign In Visit(s) window.................................... 266 field table ................................................... 266

Sign out a visit .................................................. 280

Sign Out Visitor Properties window................. 477


Single and double left-click mode .................... 157

Sort alarms ........................................................ 163

Standard video verification

display cardholder photo and live video.... 146 remove readers........................................... 146

Start an action ................................................... 388

Status bar - Alarm Monitoring window.............. 56

Status Search form ............................................ 285 field table .................................................. 285 overview .................................................... 285

Stop an action.................................................... 388

Surveillance-only cameras................................ 101

Switch between camera and monitor views...... 121

Switch camera views in Video Player .............. 101

Switch log on ...................................................... 41

System Hardware Options window .................... 67

System Status window ............................... 73, 18 2

T

Test a device ....................................................... 81

Toolbars .............................................................. 43

Trace Configuration window .............................. 85

Trace Configuration Window Overview ............ 85

Trace menu ......................................................... 46

Tree view ............................................................ 72

Two-way audio ................................................... 97

U

Unassign an asset.............................................. 318

Unlink

directory account ....................................... 247

Update hardware status....................................... 80

User-defined display options .............................. 67

V

Verify fingerprint.............................................. 204

Verify Fingerprint(s) Dialog............................. 203

Video

create event ................................................ 102

export ......................................................... 537

monitor....................................................... 101

search ......................................................... 113 view search results..................................... 113

Video Channel Configuration

configure parameters ................................. 115 open dialog ................................................ 115

Video Channel Configuration dialog................ 114

Video Export..................................................... 534

Video monitor features ....................................... 96

Video monitoring features

browser-based VideoViewer ....................... 96

Camera lookup............................................. 97

client side caching ....................................... 96

Two-way audio............................................ 97

Video monitoring procedures ............................. 99

Video Monitoring window.................................. 89

Video Player ....................................................... 90

switch camera views.................................. 101

Video Search window....................................... 104

Video Verification

digital video ............................................... 144

standard CCTV.......................................... 145

Video Verification window .............................. 143 display........................................................ 143

VideoViewer (Browser-based) ........................... 96

View

action history ............................................. 388

current status of an action.......................... 389

last connection time for dialup panels ......... 82

linked maps................................................ 173

video files .................................................. 100

video tour..................................................... 90

View menu.......................................................... 44

View options change cardholders folder view.. 195

Visit form.......................................................... 281

field table .................................................. 282

overview .................................................... 281

Select Date(s) window field table ............. 282

Select Time Range window field table ..... 284

Visit reports....................................................... 291

Visit right-click menu ....................................... 264

Visit search capabilities .................................... 269

Visit search results............................................ 273

Visitor

add record .................................................. 216

find cardholder/visitor associated with a visit .................................................. 273

print badge for a visitor ............................. 279

search for all visits by a selected visitor .... 270

Visitor form....................................................... 214

procedures.................................................. 216

revision 1

— 547

Index

Visits

active.......................................................... 271

add a visit record........................................ 273

delete a visit record.................................... 278

find cardholder/visitor associated with a visit .................................................. 273

finished ...................................................... 271

modify a visit record.................................. 278


retrieve recent visit search results.............. 273

right-click menu......................................... 264

run a visit report from the Visits folder ..... 291

search all visits by selected visitor............. 270

search all visits for specific date or time ... 271

search all visits to selected cardholder....... 270

search capabilities...................................... 269

search for active visits ............................... 271 search for finished visits ............................ 271 search for scheduled visits......................... 271

sign in a previously scheduled visit........... 279

sign out a visit............................................ 280

Visits folder

field table ................................................... 265

Print Badge(s) window field table ............. 268 procedures.................................................. 268

Sign In Visit(s) window field table............ 266

Visits form


procedures.................................................. 243

W

Watermarking ................................................... 539

authentication............................................. 540

Weak database password warning ...................... 33

Wedge scanner

add a badge ................................................ 197

configure.................................................... 202

scanning barcodes...................................... 198

search for a badge ...................................... 197

Wedge Settings window ................................... 197

Window menu..................................................... 53

Wizards

select host wizard (Search form) ............... 293

select host wizard (Select form) ................ 295

select visitor wizard (Add form)................ 300

select visitor wizard (Select or Add form). 298

548 —

revision 1


revision 1

— 549

6161 East 75th Street

Indianapolis, IN 46250

Phone: (317) 849-2250

B.A.S.I.S.

®

ET690 Alarm Monitoring User Guide, product version 6.1

Item number E805, revision 1.019, July 2008

Content of this document copyright © 1992-2008 by Lenel Systems International, Inc. BadgeDesigner™,

FormsDesigner™, and MapDesigner™, are trademarks used by Stanley Security Solutions with permission from

Lenel Systems International, Inc. Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 2003, and Windows XP are trademarks and

Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Integral and FlashPoint are trademarks of Integral

Technologies, Inc. Crystal Reports for Windows is a trademark of Crystal Computer Services, Inc. Other product names mentioned in this User Guide may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of the authors.

The software described in this document is licensed to Stanley Security Solutions by Lenel Systems International,

Inc. Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS © 1991-2008, LEAD Technologies, Inc. ALL

RIGHTS RESERVED. The software includes ImageStream® Graphic Filters. Copyright © 1991-2008 Inso

Corporation. All rights reserved. ImageStream Graphic Filters and ImageStream are registered trademarks of Inso

Corporation.